Ansys Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural
Analysis Guide
ANSYS Release 9.0
002114
November 2004
ANSYS, Inc. is a
UL registered
ISO 9001: 2000
Company.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Release 9.0
ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
ansysinfo@ansys.com
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Copyright and Trademark Information

Copyright 2004 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, DesignSpace, CFX, DesignModeler, DesignXplorer, ANSYS Workbench environment, AI*Environment, CADOE and any and all ANSYS, Inc. product
names referenced on any media, manual or the like, are registered trademarks or trademarks of subsidiaries of ANSYS, Inc. located in the United States or
other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark licensed by ANSYS, Inc. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are property of their respective owners.
ANSYS, Inc. is a UL registered ISO 9001: 2000 Company.
ANSYS Inc. products may contain U.S. Patent No. 6,055,541.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000 and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Inventor and Mechanical Desktop are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation.
Pro/ENGINEER is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation.
Unigraphics, Solid Edge and Parasolid are registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation (EDS).
ACIS and ACIS Geometric Modeler are registered trademarks of Spatial Technology, Inc.
FLEXlm License Manager is a trademark of Macrovision Corporation.
This ANSYS, Inc. software product and program documentation is ANSYS Confidential Information and are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS
software license agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies,
and other provisions. The Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license agreement.
See the ANSYS, Inc. online documentation or the ANSYS, Inc. documentation CD for the complete Legal Notice.
If this is a copy of a document published by and reproduced with the permission of ANSYS, Inc., it might not reflect the organization or physical appearance
of the original. ANSYS, Inc. is not liable for any errors or omissions introduced by the copying process. Such errors are the responsibility of the party
providing the copy.
Table of Contents
1. Overview of Structural Analyses ......................................................................................................... 11
1.1. Definition of Structural Analysis .................................................................................................... 11
1.2. Types of Structural Analysis ........................................................................................................... 11
1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses ............................................................................................ 12
1.4. Material Model Interface ............................................................................................................... 12
1.5. Types of Solution Methods ............................................................................................................ 12
2. Structural Static Analysis .................................................................................................................... 21
2.1. Definition of Static Analysis ........................................................................................................... 21
2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses ............................................................................................... 21
2.3. Performing a Static Analysis .......................................................................................................... 21
2.3.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 21
2.3.1.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 21
2.3.2. Set Solution Controls ............................................................................................................ 22
2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box ...................................................................... 22
2.3.2.2. Using the Basic Tab ..................................................................................................... 22
2.3.2.3. The Transient Tab ........................................................................................................ 23
2.3.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab ......................................................................................... 24
2.3.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab .............................................................................................. 24
2.3.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab ......................................................................................... 25
2.3.3. Set Additional Solution Options ........................................................................................... 25
2.3.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects ................................................................................................ 25
2.3.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option ............................................................................................. 26
2.3.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation ......................................................................................... 26
2.3.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation ............................................................................................. 26
2.3.3.5. Reference Temperature ............................................................................................... 27
2.3.3.6. Mode Number ............................................................................................................. 27
2.3.3.7. Creep Criteria .............................................................................................................. 27
2.3.3.8. Printed Output ............................................................................................................ 27
2.3.3.9. Extrapolation of Results ............................................................................................... 27
2.3.4. Apply the Loads ................................................................................................................... 27
2.3.4.1. Load Types .................................................................................................................. 27
2.3.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) ................................................... 27
2.3.4.1.2. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ) .................................................... 27
2.3.4.1.3. Pressures (PRES) .................................................................................................. 28
2.3.4.1.4. Temperatures (TEMP) .......................................................................................... 28
2.3.4.1.5. Fluences (FLUE) .................................................................................................. 28
2.3.4.1.6. Gravity, Spinning, Etc. ......................................................................................... 28
2.3.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model ............................................................................................ 28
2.3.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters ........................................... 28
2.3.4.3. Calculating Inertia Relief .............................................................................................. 29
2.3.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output ............................................................................................ 29
2.3.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations .......................................................................... 29
2.3.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations ........................................... 210
2.3.5. Solve the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 210
2.3.6. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 210
2.3.6.1. Postprocessors .......................................................................................................... 211
2.3.6.2. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 211
2.3.6.3. Reviewing Results Data .............................................................................................. 211
2.3.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations ............................................................................. 211
2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) ........................................................................................ 213
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.

2.4.1. Problem Description .......................................................................................................... 213
2.4.2. Problem Specifications ....................................................................................................... 213
2.4.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 214
2.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .................................................................................................. 214
2.4.3.2. Set the System of Units .............................................................................................. 214
2.4.3.3. Define Parameters ..................................................................................................... 214
2.4.3.4. Define the Element Types .......................................................................................... 215
2.4.3.5. Define Material Properties ......................................................................................... 215
2.4.3.6. Create Hexagonal Area as Cross-Section ..................................................................... 215
2.4.3.7. Create Keypoints Along a Path ................................................................................... 216
2.4.3.8. Create Lines Along a Path .......................................................................................... 216
2.4.3.9. Create Line from Shank to Handle .............................................................................. 217
2.4.3.10. Cut Hex Section ....................................................................................................... 217
2.4.3.11. Set Meshing Density ................................................................................................ 217
2.4.3.12. Set Element Type for Area Mesh ............................................................................... 217
2.4.3.13. Generate Area Mesh ................................................................................................ 218
2.4.3.14. Drag the 2-D Mesh to Produce 3-D Elements ............................................................ 218
2.4.3.15. Select BOTAREA Component and Delete 2-D Elements ............................................. 218
2.4.3.16. Apply Displacement Boundary Condition at End of Wrench ...................................... 219
2.4.3.17. Display Boundary Conditions ................................................................................... 219
2.4.3.18. Apply Pressure on Handle ........................................................................................ 219
2.4.3.19. Write the First Load Step .......................................................................................... 221
2.4.3.20. Define Downward Pressure ...................................................................................... 221
2.4.3.21. Write Second Load Step ........................................................................................... 222
2.4.3.22. Solve from Load Step Files ....................................................................................... 222
2.4.3.23. Read First Load Step and Review Results .................................................................. 222
2.4.3.24. Read the Next Load Step and Review Results ............................................................ 223
2.4.3.25. Zoom in on Cross-Section ........................................................................................ 223
2.4.3.26. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................... 223
2.5. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ................................................................ 224
2.6. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................... 226
3. Modal Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 31
3.1. Definition of Modal Analysis .......................................................................................................... 31
3.2. Uses for Modal Analysis ................................................................................................................. 31
3.3. Overview of Steps in a Modal Analysis ........................................................................................... 31
3.4. Build the Model ............................................................................................................................ 31
3.5. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution ............................................................................................ 32
3.5.1. Enter the Solution Processor ................................................................................................. 32
3.5.2. Define Analysis Type and Options ......................................................................................... 32
3.5.2.1. Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE] .................................................................................... 32
3.5.2.2. Option: Analysis Type: Modal [ANTYPE] ........................................................................ 33
3.5.2.3. Option: Mode-Extraction Method [MODOPT] ............................................................... 33
3.5.2.4. Option: Number of Modes to Extract [MODOPT] ........................................................... 34
3.5.2.5. Option: Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND] .......................................................... 34
3.5.2.6. Option: Mass Matrix Formulation [LUMPM] .................................................................. 34
3.5.2.7. Option: Prestress Effects Calculation [PSTRES] .............................................................. 34
3.5.2.8. Additional Modal Analysis Options .............................................................................. 34
3.5.3. Define Master Degrees of Freedom ....................................................................................... 35
3.5.4. Apply Loads ......................................................................................................................... 35
3.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using Commands ............................................................................... 35
3.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI ..................................................................................... 36
3.5.4.3. Listing Loads ............................................................................................................... 36
vi

3.5.5. Specify Load Step Options .................................................................................................... 36
3.5.6. Participation Factor Table Output ......................................................................................... 37
3.5.7. Solve ................................................................................................................................... 37
3.5.7.1. Output ........................................................................................................................ 37
3.5.7.1.1. Output From Subspace Mode-Extraction Method ................................................ 37
3.5.8. Exit the Solution Processor ................................................................................................... 38
3.6. Expand the Modes ........................................................................................................................ 38
3.6.1. Points to Remember ............................................................................................................ 38
3.6.2. Expanding the Modes .......................................................................................................... 38
3.7. Review the Results ...................................................................................................................... 310
3.7.1. Points to Remember ........................................................................................................... 310
3.7.2. Reviewing Results Data ...................................................................................................... 310
3.7.3. Option: Listing All Frequencies ........................................................................................... 310
3.7.4. Option: Display Deformed Shape ........................................................................................ 311
3.7.5. Option: List Master DOF ...................................................................................................... 311
3.7.6. Option: Line Element Results .............................................................................................. 311
3.7.7. Option: Contour Displays ................................................................................................... 311
3.7.8. Option: Tabular Listings ...................................................................................................... 312
3.7.9. Other Capabilities .............................................................................................................. 312
3.8. A Sample Modal Analysis (GUI Method) ....................................................................................... 312
3.8.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 313
3.9. A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................................... 313
3.10. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................. 314
3.11. Prestressed Modal Analysis ....................................................................................................... 315
3.12. Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution ......................................................... 315
3.13. Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods ....................................................................................... 316
3.13.1. Block Lanczos Method ...................................................................................................... 317
3.13.2. Subspace Method ............................................................................................................ 318
3.13.3. PowerDynamics Method .................................................................................................. 318
3.13.4. Reduced Method .............................................................................................................. 318
3.13.5. Unsymmetric Method ....................................................................................................... 318
3.13.6. Damped Method .............................................................................................................. 318
3.13.6.1. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvalue ................................... 319
3.13.6.2. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvector .................................. 319
3.13.7. QR Damped Method ........................................................................................................ 319
3.14. Matrix Reduction ...................................................................................................................... 319
3.14.1. Theoretical Basis of Matrix Reduction ................................................................................ 320
3.14.1.1. Guidelines for Selecting Master DOF ........................................................................ 320
3.14.1.2. A Note About Program-Selected Masters .................................................................. 322
4. Harmonic Response Analysis .............................................................................................................. 41
4.1. Definition of Harmonic Response Analysis ..................................................................................... 41
4.2. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis ............................................................................................ 41
4.3. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis ........................................................................ 42
4.4. The Three Solution Methods ......................................................................................................... 42
4.4.1. The Full Method ................................................................................................................... 42
4.4.2. The Reduced Method ........................................................................................................... 42
4.4.3. The Mode Superposition Method ......................................................................................... 43
4.4.4. Restrictions Common to All Three Methods .......................................................................... 43
4.5. How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis ........................................................................................ 43
4.5.1. Full Harmonic Response Analysis .......................................................................................... 43
vii

4.5.2. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 44
4.5.3. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution ................................................................................... 44
4.5.3.1. Enter the ANSYS Solution Processor ............................................................................. 44
4.5.3.2. Define the Analysis Type and Options .......................................................................... 44
4.5.3.3. Apply Loads on the Model ........................................................................................... 45
4.5.3.3.1. Applying Loads Using Commands ....................................................................... 48
4.5.3.3.2. Applying Loads and Listing Loads Using the GUI ................................................. 48
4.5.3.4. Specify Load Step Options ........................................................................................... 49
4.5.3.4.1. General Options .................................................................................................. 49
4.5.3.4.2. Dynamics Options ............................................................................................. 410
4.5.3.4.3. Output Controls ................................................................................................ 410
4.5.3.5. Save a Backup Copy of the Database to a Named File ................................................. 410
4.5.3.6. Start Solution Calculations ......................................................................................... 410
4.5.3.7. Repeat for Additional Load Steps ............................................................................... 411
4.5.3.8. Leave SOLUTION ....................................................................................................... 411
4.5.4.1. Postprocessors .......................................................................................................... 411
4.5.4.3. Using POST26 ............................................................................................................ 411
4.5.4.4. Using POST1 .............................................................................................................. 412
4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) ..................................................................... 413
4.6.3. Problem Diagram ............................................................................................................... 414
4.6.3.2. Define the Element Types .......................................................................................... 414
4.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants .......................................................................................... 415
4.6.3.4. Create the Nodes ....................................................................................................... 415
4.6.3.5. Create the Spring Elements ........................................................................................ 415
4.6.3.6. Create the Mass Elements .......................................................................................... 416
4.6.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications .................................. 416
4.6.3.8. Define Loads and Boundary Conditions ...................................................................... 416
4.6.3.9. Solve the Model ........................................................................................................ 417
4.6.3.10. Review the Results ................................................................................................... 417
4.6.3.11. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................... 418
4.7. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................. 418
4.9. Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis ......................................................................................... 419
4.9.1. Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution ................................................................... 420
4.9.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution ........................................................................ 421
4.9.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass) ................................................................................. 421
4.9.3.2. Expanding the Modes ................................................................................................ 421
4.9.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution ...................................................................... 423
4.9.5. Sample Input ..................................................................................................................... 423
4.10. Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis ..................................................................... 424
4.10.1. Obtain the Modal Solution ................................................................................................ 425
4.10.2. Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution .......................................................... 425
4.10.3. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution ......................................................................... 427
4.10.4. Review the Results ........................................................................................................... 427
4.10.5. Sample Input ................................................................................................................... 427
viii

4.11. Other Analysis Details ............................................................................................................... 428
4.11.1. Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis .......................................................................... 428
4.11.1.1. Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis ........................................................... 428
4.11.1.2. Prestressed Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis ................................................... 428
4.11.1.3. Prestressed Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis ................................. 429
5. Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................................................ 51
5.1. Definition of Transient Dynamic Analysis ....................................................................................... 51
5.2. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................... 51
5.3. Three Solution Methods ................................................................................................................ 52
5.3.1. Full Method ......................................................................................................................... 52
5.3.2. Mode Superposition Method ................................................................................................ 52
5.3.3. Reduced Method ................................................................................................................. 53
5.4. Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................ 53
5.4.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 54
5.4.2. Establish Initial Conditions ................................................................................................... 54
5.4.3. Set Solution Controls ............................................................................................................ 56
5.4.3.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box ...................................................................... 56
5.4.3.2. Using the Basic Tab ..................................................................................................... 57
5.4.3.3. Using the Transient Tab ............................................................................................... 57
5.4.3.4. Using the Remaining Solution Controls Tabs ................................................................ 58
5.4.4. Set Additional Solution Options ........................................................................................... 58
5.4.4.1. Prestress Effects ........................................................................................................... 59
5.4.4.2. Damping Option ......................................................................................................... 59
5.4.4.3. Mass Matrix Formulation ............................................................................................. 59
5.4.5. Apply the Loads ................................................................................................................... 59
5.4.6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step ....................................................... 510
5.4.7. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step ................................................................................... 510
5.4.8. Save a Backup Copy of the Database .................................................................................. 510
5.4.9. Start the Transient Solution ................................................................................................ 510
5.4.10. Exit the Solution Processor ............................................................................................... 511
5.4.11.1. Postprocessors ........................................................................................................ 511
5.4.11.2. Points to Remember ................................................................................................ 511
5.4.11.3. Using POST26 .......................................................................................................... 511
5.4.11.4. Other Capabilities .................................................................................................... 512
5.4.11.5. Using POST1 ............................................................................................................ 512
5.4.12. Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis ........................................................... 512
5.5. Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis .................................................... 513
5.5.1. Build the Model .................................................................................................................. 513
5.5.2. Obtain the Modal Solution ................................................................................................. 513
5.5.3. Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution ............................................................. 514
5.5.3.2. Obtaining the Solution .............................................................................................. 514
5.5.4. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution ........................................................................... 518
5.5.6. Sample Input for a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................... 518
5.6. Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis ...................................................................... 519
5.6.1. Obtain the Reduced Solution .............................................................................................. 519
5.6.1.1. Define the Analysis Type and Options ........................................................................ 520
5.6.1.2. Define Master Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................ 520
5.6.1.3. Define Gap Conditions ............................................................................................... 520
ix

5.6.1.3.1. Gap Conditions ................................................................................................. 520
5.6.1.4. Apply Initial Conditions to the Model ......................................................................... 521
5.6.1.4.1. Dynamics Options ............................................................................................. 522
5.6.1.4.2. General Options ................................................................................................ 522
5.6.1.4.3. Output Control Options .................................................................................... 523
5.6.1.5. Write the First Load Step to a Load Step File ............................................................... 523
5.6.1.6. Specify Loads and Load Step Options ......................................................................... 523
5.6.1.7. Obtaining the Solution .............................................................................................. 523
5.6.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution ........................................................................ 523
5.6.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass) ................................................................................. 524
5.6.3.2. Expanding the Solution ............................................................................................. 524
5.6.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution ...................................................................... 525
5.7. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method) ......................................................... 526
5.7.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 527
5.7.3.1. Specify the Title ......................................................................................................... 527
5.7.3.2. Define Element Types ................................................................................................ 527
5.7.3.3. Define Real Constants ................................................................................................ 527
5.7.3.5. Define Nodes ............................................................................................................ 528
5.7.3.6. Define Elements ........................................................................................................ 528
5.7.3.7. Define Analysis Type and Analysis Options ................................................................. 529
5.7.3.8. Define Master Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................ 529
5.7.3.9. Set Load Step Options ............................................................................................... 529
5.7.3.10. Apply Loads for the First Load Step .......................................................................... 529
5.7.3.11. Specify Output ........................................................................................................ 529
5.7.3.12. Solve the First Load Step .......................................................................................... 530
5.7.3.13. Apply Loads for the Next Load Step .......................................................................... 530
5.7.4. Solve the Next Load Step .................................................................................................... 530
5.7.4.1. Set the Next Time Step and Solve ............................................................................... 530
5.7.4.2. Run the Expansion Pass and Solve .............................................................................. 530
5.7.4.3. Review the Results in POST26 .................................................................................... 531
5.7.4.4. Review the Results in POST1 ...................................................................................... 531
5.7.4.5. Exit ANSYS ................................................................................................................. 531
5.8. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ................................. 531
5.9. Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis .................................................................. 532
5.9.1. Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis ........................................................................ 532
5.9.2. Prestressed Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis .............................................. 533
5.9.3. Prestressed Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................ 533
5.10. Other Analysis Details ............................................................................................................... 533
5.10.1. Guidelines for Integration Time Step ................................................................................. 533
5.10.2. Automatic Time Stepping ................................................................................................. 535
5.10.3. Damping .......................................................................................................................... 536
6. Spectrum Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 61
6.1. Definition of Spectrum Analysis .................................................................................................... 61
6.2. What is a Spectrum? ..................................................................................................................... 61
6.2.1. Response Spectrum ............................................................................................................. 61
6.2.1.1. Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) ....................................................................... 61
6.2.1.2. Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) ....................................................................... 61

6.2.2. Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) ............................................................................ 62
6.2.3. Power Spectral Density ........................................................................................................ 62
6.2.4. Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses ................................................................................. 62
6.3. Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis ............................................................ 62
6.3.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 63
6.3.2. Obtain the Modal Solution ................................................................................................... 63
6.3.3. Obtain the Spectrum Solution .............................................................................................. 63
6.3.4. Expand the Modes ............................................................................................................... 66
6.3.5. Combine the Modes ............................................................................................................. 66
6.3.6. Review the Results ............................................................................................................... 68
6.4. Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method) ..................................................................................... 610
6.4.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 611
6.4.4. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 611
6.4.4.2. Define the Element Type ............................................................................................ 611
6.4.4.3. Define the Real Constants .......................................................................................... 611
6.4.4.5. Define Keypoints and Line ......................................................................................... 612
6.4.4.6. Set Global Element Density and Mesh Line ................................................................. 612
6.4.4.7. Set Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................... 613
6.4.4.8. Specify Analysis Type and Options ............................................................................. 613
6.4.4.9. Solve the Modal Analysis ........................................................................................... 613
6.4.4.10. Set Up the Spectrum Analysis .................................................................................. 613
6.4.4.11. Define Spectrum Value vs. Frequency Table ............................................................. 614
6.4.4.12. Solve Spectrum Analysis .......................................................................................... 614
6.4.4.13. Set up the Expansion Pass ........................................................................................ 614
6.4.4.14. Expand the Modes ................................................................................................... 614
6.4.4.15. Start Expansion Pass Calculation .............................................................................. 615
6.4.4.16. Set Up Mode Combination for Spectrum Analysis ..................................................... 615
6.4.4.17. Select Mode Combination Method ........................................................................... 615
6.4.4.18. Combine the Modes ................................................................................................ 615
6.4.4.19. Postprocessing: Print Out Nodal, Element, and Reaction Solutions ............................ 615
6.4.4.20. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................... 616
6.5. Sample Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................................. 616
6.7. How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis ............................................................................. 618
6.7.1. Expand the Modes ............................................................................................................. 618
6.7.2. Obtain the Spectrum Solution ............................................................................................ 618
6.7.3. Combine the Modes ........................................................................................................... 621
6.7.4.1. Reviewing the Results in POST1 ................................................................................. 622
6.7.4.1.1. Read the Desired Set of Results into the Database .............................................. 622
6.7.4.1.2. Display the Results ............................................................................................ 623
6.7.4.2. Calculating Response PSDs in POST26 ........................................................................ 623
6.7.4.3. Calculating Covariance in POST26 .............................................................................. 623
6.7.5. Sample Input ..................................................................................................................... 624
6.8. How to Do DDAM Spectrum Analysis .......................................................................................... 625
6.9. How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis ........................................................ 625
7. Buckling Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 71
xi

7.1. Definition of Buckling Analysis ...................................................................................................... 71
7.2. Types of Buckling Analyses ........................................................................................................... 71
7.2.1. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis .................................................................................................. 71
7.2.2. Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis ................................................................................................ 71
7.3. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis ......................................................................................... 72
7.4. Procedure for Nonlinear Buckling Analysis ..................................................................................... 72
7.4.1. Applying Load Increments ................................................................................................... 72
7.4.2. Automatic Time Stepping ..................................................................................................... 72
7.4.3. Important ............................................................................................................................ 72
7.4.4. Points to Remember ............................................................................................................ 73
7.5. Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis ................................................................................... 73
7.5.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 73
7.5.2. Obtain the Static Solution .................................................................................................... 74
7.5.3. Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution .............................................................................. 75
7.5.4. Expand the Solution ............................................................................................................. 76
7.5.4.2. Expanding the Solution ............................................................................................... 76
7.5.5. Review the Results ............................................................................................................... 77
7.6. Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) ........................................................................................ 78
7.6.1. Problem Description ............................................................................................................ 78
7.6.2. Problem Specifications ......................................................................................................... 78
7.6.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................... 79
7.6.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .................................................................................................... 79
7.6.3.2. Define the Element Type ............................................................................................. 79
7.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants and Material Properties ...................................................... 710
7.6.3.4. Define Nodes and Elements ....................................................................................... 710
7.6.3.5. Define the Boundary Conditions ................................................................................ 711
7.6.3.6. Solve the Static Analysis ............................................................................................. 711
7.6.3.7. Solve the Buckling Analysis ........................................................................................ 711
7.6.3.8. Review the Results ..................................................................................................... 712
7.6.3.9. Exit ANSYS ................................................................................................................. 712
7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................................... 712
8. Nonlinear Structural Analysis ............................................................................................................. 81
8.1. What is Structural Nonlinearity? .................................................................................................... 81
8.1.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior ............................................................................................... 81
8.1.1.1. Changing Status (Including Contact) ............................................................................ 82
8.1.1.2. Geometric Nonlinearities ............................................................................................. 82
8.1.1.3. Material Nonlinearities ................................................................................................. 82
8.1.2. Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses ......................................................................... 82
8.1.2.1. Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency ............................... 85
8.1.2.2. Substeps ..................................................................................................................... 85
8.1.2.3. Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis ............................................................... 86
8.1.2.4. Nonlinear Transient Analyses ....................................................................................... 86
8.2. Using Geometric Nonlinearities ..................................................................................................... 86
8.2.1. Stress-Strain ......................................................................................................................... 87
8.2.1.1. Large Deflections with Small Strain .............................................................................. 87
8.2.2. Stress Stiffening ................................................................................................................... 87
8.2.3. Spin Softening ..................................................................................................................... 88
8.3. Modeling Material Nonlinearities .................................................................................................. 88
8.3.1. Nonlinear Materials .............................................................................................................. 88
xii

8.3.1.1. Plasticity ..................................................................................................................... 89
8.3.1.1.1. Plastic Material Options ..................................................................................... 810
8.3.1.2. Multilinear Elasticity ................................................................................................... 816
8.3.1.3. User Defined Material ................................................................................................ 816
8.3.1.4. Hyperelasticity .......................................................................................................... 817
8.3.1.4.1. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER) .................................................. 818
8.3.1.4.2. Ogden Hyperelastic Option ............................................................................... 818
8.3.1.4.3. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option .................................................................... 819
8.3.1.4.4. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option ............................................................... 819
8.3.1.4.5. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option ..................................................................... 819
8.3.1.4.6. Gent Hyperelastic Option .................................................................................. 820
8.3.1.4.7. Yeoh Hyperelastic Option ................................................................................. 820
8.3.1.4.8. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option ................................................................... 820
8.3.1.4.9. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option ................................................ 820
8.3.1.4.10. User-Defined Hyperelastic Option ................................................................... 821
8.3.1.4.11. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY) ............................................ 821
8.3.1.5. Creep ........................................................................................................................ 829
8.3.1.5.1. Implicit Creep Procedure ................................................................................... 830
8.3.1.5.2. Explicit Creep Procedure ................................................................................... 831
8.3.1.6. Shape Memory Alloy .................................................................................................. 831
8.3.1.7. Viscoplasticity ........................................................................................................... 833
8.3.1.8. Viscoelasticity ............................................................................................................ 833
8.3.1.9. Swelling .................................................................................................................... 834
8.3.2. Material Model Combinations ............................................................................................. 835
8.3.2.1. BISO and CHAB Example ............................................................................................ 835
8.3.2.2. MISO and CHAB Example ........................................................................................... 835
8.3.2.3. NLISO and CHAB Example .......................................................................................... 835
8.3.2.4. BISO and RATE Example ............................................................................................. 836
8.3.2.5. MISO and RATE Example ............................................................................................ 836
8.3.2.6. NLISO and RATE Example ........................................................................................... 837
8.3.2.7. BISO and CREEP Example ........................................................................................... 837
8.3.2.8. MISO and CREEP Example .......................................................................................... 837
8.3.2.9. NLISO and CREEP Example ......................................................................................... 838
8.3.2.10. BKIN and CREEP Example ......................................................................................... 838
8.3.2.11. HILL and BISO Example ............................................................................................ 838
8.3.2.12. HILL and MISO Example ........................................................................................... 839
8.3.2.13. HILL and NLISO Example .......................................................................................... 839
8.3.2.14. HILL and BKIN Example ............................................................................................ 839
8.3.2.15. HILL and MKIN Example ........................................................................................... 840
8.3.2.16. HILL and KINH Example ............................................................................................ 840
8.3.2.17. HILL and CHAB Example .......................................................................................... 841
8.3.2.18. HILL and BISO and CHAB Example ............................................................................ 841
8.3.2.19. HILL and MISO and CHAB Example ........................................................................... 841
8.3.2.20. HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example .......................................................................... 842
8.3.2.21. HILL and RATE and BISO Example ............................................................................. 843
8.3.2.22. HILL and RATE and MISO Example ............................................................................ 844
8.3.2.23. HILL and RATE and NLISO Example ........................................................................... 844
8.3.2.24. HILL and CREEP Example .......................................................................................... 845
8.3.2.25. HILL and CREEP and BISO Example ........................................................................... 846
8.3.2.26. HILL and CREEP and MISO Example .......................................................................... 847
8.3.2.27. HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example ......................................................................... 847
8.3.2.28. HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example ........................................................................... 847
xiii

8.3.2.29. Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity (Implicit) Example ................................................ 848
8.4. Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS ....................................................................................... 848
8.5. Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis ........................................................................................ 849
8.5.1. Build the Model .................................................................................................................. 849
8.5.2. Set Solution Controls .......................................................................................................... 849
8.5.2.1. Using the Basic Tab: Special Considerations ............................................................... 850
8.5.2.2. Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box ............. 850
8.5.2.2.1. Equation Solver ................................................................................................ 850
8.5.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box .......... 851
8.5.2.3.1. Automatic Time Stepping ................................................................................. 851
8.5.2.3.2. Convergence Criteria ........................................................................................ 851
8.5.2.3.3. Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations ...................................................... 853
8.5.2.3.4. Predictor-Corrector Option ............................................................................... 853
8.5.2.3.5. Line Search Option ........................................................................................... 853
8.5.2.3.6. Cutback Criteria ................................................................................................ 853
8.5.3. Set Additional Solution Options .......................................................................................... 853
8.5.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box ........ 854
8.5.3.1.1. Stress Stiffness .................................................................................................. 854
8.5.3.1.2. Newton-Raphson Option .................................................................................. 854
8.5.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box ..... 855
8.5.3.2.1. Creep Criteria .................................................................................................... 855
8.5.3.2.2. Time Step Open Control .................................................................................... 855
8.5.3.2.3. Solution Monitoring .......................................................................................... 856
8.5.3.2.4. Birth and Death ................................................................................................ 856
8.5.3.2.5. Output Control ................................................................................................. 856
8.5.4. Apply the Loads ................................................................................................................. 857
8.5.5. Solve the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 857
8.5.6.2. Reviewing Results in POST1 ....................................................................................... 857
8.5.6.3. Reviewing Results in POST26 ..................................................................................... 859
8.5.7. Terminating a Running Job; Restarting ............................................................................... 860
8.6. Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis ................................................................................... 860
8.6.1. Build the Model .................................................................................................................. 860
8.6.2. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution .................................................................................. 860
8.7. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis .......................................................................... 862
8.8. Restarts ...................................................................................................................................... 863
8.9. Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements ............................................................................... 863
8.9.1. Element Birth and Death .................................................................................................... 863
8.10. Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis ................................................................................. 864
8.10.1. Starting Out with Nonlinear Analysis ................................................................................. 864
8.10.1.1. Be Aware of How the Program and Your Structure Behave ........................................ 864
8.10.1.2. Keep It Simple ......................................................................................................... 864
8.10.1.3. Use an Adequate Mesh Density ................................................................................ 864
8.10.1.4. Apply the Load Gradually ......................................................................................... 865
8.10.2. Overcoming Convergence Problems ................................................................................. 865
8.10.2.1. Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics ............................................................................ 865
8.10.2.2. Tracking Convergence Graphically ........................................................................... 867
8.10.2.3. Using Automatic Time Stepping ............................................................................... 867
8.10.2.4. Using Line Search .................................................................................................... 868
8.10.2.5. Using the Arc-Length Method .................................................................................. 868
xiv

8.10.2.6. Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your Model's Response ........................................... 870
8.10.2.7. Turn Off Extra Element Shapes ................................................................................. 870
8.10.2.8. Using Birth and Death Wisely ................................................................................... 870
8.10.2.9. Read Your Output .................................................................................................... 870
8.10.2.10. Graph the Load and Response History .................................................................... 872
8.11. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) ................................................................................... 872
8.11.1. Problem Description ........................................................................................................ 872
8.11.2. Problem Specifications ..................................................................................................... 873
8.11.3. Problem Sketch ................................................................................................................ 873
8.11.3.1. Set the Analysis Title and Jobname .......................................................................... 873
8.11.3.2. Define the Element Types ........................................................................................ 874
8.11.3.3. Define Material Properties ........................................................................................ 874
8.11.3.4. Specify the Kinematic Hardening material model (KINH) ........................................... 874
8.11.3.5. Label Graph Axes and Plot Data Tables ..................................................................... 874
8.11.3.6. Create Rectangle ..................................................................................................... 875
8.11.3.7. Set Element Size ...................................................................................................... 875
8.11.3.8. Mesh the Rectangle ................................................................................................. 875
8.11.3.9. Assign Analysis and Load Step Options .................................................................... 875
8.11.3.10. Monitor the Displacement ..................................................................................... 876
8.11.3.11. Apply Constraints .................................................................................................. 876
8.11.3.12. Solve the First Load Step ........................................................................................ 877
8.11.3.13. Solve the Next Six Load Steps ................................................................................. 877
8.11.3.14. Review the Monitor File ......................................................................................... 878
8.11.3.15. Use the General Postprocessor to Plot Results. ........................................................ 878
8.11.3.16. Define Variables for Time-History Postprocessing ................................................... 878
8.11.3.17. Plot Time-History Results ....................................................................................... 879
8.11.3.18. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................. 879
8.12. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ........................................................... 879
9. Material Curve Fitting ......................................................................................................................... 91
9.1. Applicable Material Behavior Types ............................................................................................... 91
9.2. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting ................................................................................................ 91
9.2.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic Material Behavior ................................. 91
9.2.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data .......................................................................................... 92
9.2.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS ........................................................................................... 93
9.2.1.2.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 93
9.2.1.2.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 93
9.2.1.3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................... 93
9.2.1.3.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 94
9.2.1.3.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 94
9.2.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients .............................................................................................. 94
9.2.1.4.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 95
9.2.1.4.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 95
9.2.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve .......................................................................... 96
9.2.1.5.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 96
9.2.1.5.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 96
9.2.1.6. Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 96
9.2.1.6.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 96
9.2.1.6.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 97
9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify ..................................................................................................... 97
9.2.1.7. Write Data to TB Command ......................................................................................... 97
9.2.1.7.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 97
xv

9.2.1.7.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 98
9.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting ......................................................................................................... 98
9.3.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep Material Behavior ........................................... 98
9.3.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data .......................................................................................... 98
9.3.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS ......................................................................................... 910
9.3.1.2.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 910
9.3.1.2.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 910
9.3.1.3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 910
9.3.1.3.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 910
9.3.1.3.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 911
9.3.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 911
9.3.1.4.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 912
9.3.1.4.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 912
9.3.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 912
9.3.1.5.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 913
9.3.1.5.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 913
9.3.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 913
9.3.1.6.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 913
9.3.1.6.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 914
9.3.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit ..................................................................... 914
9.3.1.7. Write Data to TB Command ....................................................................................... 914
9.3.1.7.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 914
9.3.1.7.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 914
9.3.2. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models ................................................................................... 914
9.4. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting ............................................................................................... 915
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model ................. 916
9.4.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data ........................................................................................ 916
9.4.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS ......................................................................................... 917
9.4.1.2.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 917
9.4.1.2.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 918
9.4.1.3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 918
9.4.1.3.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 918
9.4.1.3.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 918
9.4.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 919
9.4.1.4.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 919
9.4.1.4.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 920
9.4.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 920
9.4.1.5.1. Temperature Dependent Solves Using the Shift Function .................................. 921
9.4.1.5.2. Temperature Dependent Solves Without the Shift Function ............................... 921
9.4.1.5.3. Batch ................................................................................................................ 922
9.4.1.5.4. GUI ................................................................................................................... 923
9.4.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 923
9.4.1.6.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 923
9.4.1.6.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 923
9.4.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit ..................................................................... 923
9.4.1.7. Write Data to TB Command ....................................................................................... 923
9.4.1.7.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 923
9.4.1.7.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 924
10. Gasket Joints Simulation ................................................................................................................. 101
10.1. Overview of Gasket Joints ......................................................................................................... 101
10.2. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis ............................................................................................ 101
10.3. Finite Element Formulation ....................................................................................................... 102
xvi

10.3.1. Element Topologies ......................................................................................................... 102
10.3.2. Thickness Direction .......................................................................................................... 102
10.4. ANSYS Family of Interface Elements .......................................................................................... 103
10.4.1. Element Selection ............................................................................................................ 103
10.4.2. Applications ..................................................................................................................... 103
10.5. Material Definition .................................................................................................................... 104
10.5.1. Material Characteristics .................................................................................................... 104
10.5.2. Input Format .................................................................................................................... 105
10.5.2.1. Define General Parameters ...................................................................................... 106
10.5.2.2. Define Compression Load Closure Curve .................................................................. 106
10.5.2.3. Define Linear Unloading Data .................................................................................. 106
10.5.2.4. Define Nonlinear Unloading Data ............................................................................. 107
10.5.3. Temperature Dependencies ............................................................................................. 108
10.5.4. Plotting Gasket Data ....................................................................................................... 1011
10.6. Meshing Interface Elements .................................................................................................... 1012
10.7. Solution Procedure and Result Output ..................................................................................... 1016
10.7.1. Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing ............................................................................ 1017
10.8. Reviewing the Results ............................................................................................................. 1019
10.8.1. Points to Remember ....................................................................................................... 1019
10.8.2. Reviewing Results in POST1 ............................................................................................ 1019
10.8.3. Reviewing Results in POST26 .......................................................................................... 1020
10.9. Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method) .............................. 1020
11. Fracture Mechanics .......................................................................................................................... 111
11.1. Definition of Fracture Mechanics ............................................................................................... 111
11.2. Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems ....................................................................................... 111
11.2.1. Modeling the Crack Region ............................................................................................... 111
11.2.1.1. 2-D Fracture Models ................................................................................................ 113
11.2.1.2. 3-D Fracture Models ................................................................................................ 114
11.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters ....................................................................................... 115
11.2.2.1. Stress Intensity Factors ............................................................................................ 115
11.2.2.2. J-Integral ................................................................................................................. 116
11.2.2.3. Energy Release Rate ................................................................................................. 118
12. Composites ...................................................................................................................................... 121
12.1. Definition of Composites ........................................................................................................... 121
12.2. Modeling Composites ............................................................................................................... 121
12.2.1. Choosing the Proper Element Type ................................................................................... 121
12.2.2. Defining the Layered Configuration .................................................................................. 122
12.2.2.1. Specifying Individual Layer Properties ...................................................................... 123
12.2.2.2. Defining the Constitutive Matrices ........................................................................... 124
12.2.2.3. Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures ............................................................... 124
12.2.2.4. Node Offset ............................................................................................................. 125
12.2.3. Specifying Failure Criteria ................................................................................................. 125
12.2.4. Additional Modeling and Postprocessing Guidelines ......................................................... 126
13. Fatigue ............................................................................................................................................. 131
13.1. Definition of Fatigue ................................................................................................................. 131
13.1.1. What the ANSYS Program Does ........................................................................................ 131
13.1.2. Basic Terminology ............................................................................................................ 131
13.2. Doing a Fatigue Evaluation ....................................................................................................... 132
13.2.1. Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database .......................................................................... 132
13.2.2. Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations ............................................ 132
13.2.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors ........................................... 134
13.2.3.1. Storing Stresses ....................................................................................................... 134
xvii

13.2.3.1.1. Manually Stored Stresses ................................................................................. 134
13.2.3.1.2. Nodal Stresses from Jobname.RST ................................................................... 135
13.2.3.1.3. Stresses at a Cross-Section ............................................................................... 135
13.2.3.2. Listing, Plotting, or Deleting Stored Stresses ............................................................. 136
13.2.3.3. Assigning Event Repetitions and Scale Factors ......................................................... 136
13.2.3.4. Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors ..................................................... 137
13.2.4. Activate the Fatigue Calculations ...................................................................................... 139
13.2.6. Other Approaches to Range Counting .............................................................................. 139
13.2.7. Sample Input ................................................................................................................... 139
14. p-Method Structural Static Analysis ................................................................................................ 141
14.1. Definition of p-Method Analysis ................................................................................................ 141
14.2. Benefits of Using the p-Method ................................................................................................. 141
14.3. Using the p-Method .................................................................................................................. 141
14.3.1. Select the p-Method Procedure ........................................................................................ 141
14.3.2. Build the Model ................................................................................................................ 142
14.3.2.1. Define the Element Types ........................................................................................ 142
14.3.2.1.1. Specifying a p-Level Range .............................................................................. 142
14.3.2.2. Specify Material Properties and/or Real Constants .................................................... 143
14.3.2.2.1. Material Properties .......................................................................................... 143
14.3.2.2.2. Real Constants ................................................................................................ 143
14.3.2.3. Define the Model Geometry ..................................................................................... 144
14.3.2.4. Mesh the Model into Solid or Shell Elements ............................................................ 144
14.3.2.4.1. Using Program Defaults .................................................................................. 144
14.3.2.4.2. Specifying Mesh Controls ................................................................................ 144
14.3.2.4.3. Guidelines for Creating a Good Mesh ............................................................... 145
14.3.3. Additional Information for Building Your Model ................................................................ 145
14.3.3.1. Viewing your element model ................................................................................... 145
14.3.3.2. Coupling ................................................................................................................. 146
14.3.3.2.1. Coupling of Corner Nodes ............................................................................... 146
14.3.3.2.2. Midside Node Coupling ................................................................................... 147
14.3.4. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution ................................................................................ 147
14.3.5. Helpful Hints for Common Problems ............................................................................... 1412
14.3.6. Review the Results .......................................................................................................... 1412
14.3.6.1. The p-Element Subgrid .......................................................................................... 1413
14.3.7. Querying Subgrid Results ............................................................................................... 1413
14.3.8. Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results ............................................................. 1414
14.3.8.1. Specialized p-Method Displays and Listings ............................................................ 1414
14.4. Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method) ................................................................................. 1414
14.4.1. Problem Description ....................................................................................................... 1415
14.4.2. Problem Specifications ................................................................................................... 1415
14.4.3. Problem Diagram ........................................................................................................... 1415
14.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .............................................................................................. 1415
14.4.3.2. Select p-Method .................................................................................................... 1415
14.4.3.3. Define the Element Type and Options .................................................................... 1415
14.4.3.4. Define the Real Constants ...................................................................................... 1416
14.4.3.5. Define Material Properties ...................................................................................... 1416
14.4.3.6. Create Plate with Hole ............................................................................................ 1416
14.4.3.7. Mesh the Areas ...................................................................................................... 1416
14.4.3.8. Define Symmetry Boundary Conditions .................................................................. 1417
14.4.3.9. Define Pressure Load along Right Edge. .................................................................. 1417
14.4.3.10. Define Convergence Criteria ................................................................................ 1417
xviii

14.4.3.11. Solve the Problem ................................................................................................ 1417
14.4.3.12. Review the Results and Exit ANSYS ....................................................................... 1418
14.5. Sample p-Method Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ......................................................... 1418
15. Beam Analysis and Cross Sections .................................................................................................. 151
15.1. An Overview of Beams .............................................................................................................. 151
15.2. What Are Cross Sections? .......................................................................................................... 151
15.3. How to Create Cross Sections .................................................................................................... 152
15.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number ................................................... 153
15.3.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer ...................... 153
15.3.2.1. Determining the Number of Cells to Define .............................................................. 153
15.3.3. Meshing a Line Model with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 Elements .............................. 154
15.4. Creating Cross Sections ............................................................................................................. 155
15.4.1. Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections .................................................... 155
15.4.2. Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh ................................................ 156
15.4.3. Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials .................. 157
15.4.4. Defining Composite Cross Sections ................................................................................... 158
15.4.5. Defining a Tapered Beam ................................................................................................. 158
15.5. Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections .................................................................................... 159
15.5.1. Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section .................................................................... 1510
15.5.1.1. Strain Dependencies .............................................................................................. 1511
15.5.2. Considerations for Employing Nonlinear General Beam Sections ..................................... 1511
15.6. Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries ..................................................................... 1512
15.7. Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) ......................................................... 1512
15.7.1. Problem Description ....................................................................................................... 1513
15.7.2. Problem Specifications ................................................................................................... 1513
15.7.3. Problem Sketch .............................................................................................................. 1514
15.7.4. Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear Collapse ................................................................... 1514
15.7.5. Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry ........................................................... 1515
15.7.6. Define Element Type and Cross Section Information ....................................................... 1515
15.7.7. Define the Material Properties and Orientation Node ...................................................... 1515
15.7.8. Mesh the Line and Verify Beam Orientation ..................................................................... 1516
15.7.9. Define the Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................... 1516
15.7.10. Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis ......................................................................... 1517
15.7.11. Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis ........................................................................... 1518
15.7.12. Plot and Review the Results .......................................................................................... 1518
15.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method .................................................... 1519
15.9. Where to Find Other Examples ................................................................................................ 1520
16. Shell Analysis and Cross Sections .................................................................................................... 161
16.1. An Overview of Shells ................................................................................................................ 161
16.2. What Are Cross Sections? .......................................................................................................... 161
16.3. How to Create Cross Sections .................................................................................................... 161
16.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number ................................................... 162
16.3.2. Defining Layer Data .......................................................................................................... 162
16.3.3. Overriding Program Calculated Section Properties ............................................................ 163
16.3.4. Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells) ...................................................... 163
16.3.5. Setting the Section Attribute Pointer ................................................................................ 163
16.3.6. Associating an Area with a Section .................................................................................... 163
16.3.7. Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections ............................................................................. 163
16.3.8. Managing Cross Section Libraries ..................................................................................... 165
16.4. Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections ............................................................................... 165
16.4.1. Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section .............................................................................. 166
16.4.2. Considerations for Employing Preintegrated Shell Sections ............................................... 166
xix

Index ................................................................................................................................................. Index1
List of Figures
2.1. Diagram of Allen Wrench .................................................................................................................. 214
3.1. Diagram of a Model Airplane Wing .................................................................................................... 313
3.2. Choose Master DOF .......................................................................................................................... 320
3.3. Choosing Master DOFs ...................................................................................................................... 321
3.4. Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model ............................................................................. 321
4.1. Harmonic Response Systems ............................................................................................................... 41
4.2. Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle ................................. 46
4.3. An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna ....................................................................................................... 47
4.4. Two-Mass-Spring-System .................................................................................................................. 414
5.1. Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves ................................................................................................. 54
5.2. Examples of Gap Conditions .............................................................................................................. 521
5.3. Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a Concentrated Mass .................................................................... 527
5.4. Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation ......................................................................... 534
5.5. Transient Input vs. Transient Response .............................................................................................. 535
5.6. Rayleigh Damping ............................................................................................................................ 538
6.1. Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra ................................................................................... 62
6.2. Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports ......................................................... 611
7.1. Buckling Curves .................................................................................................................................. 71
7.2. Adjusting Variable Loads to Find an Eigenvalue of 1.0 .......................................................................... 74
7.3. Bar with Hinged Ends .......................................................................................................................... 79
8.1. Common Examples of Nonlinear Structural Behavior ........................................................................... 81
8.2. A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric Nonlinearity ........................................................................... 82
8.3. Newton-Raphson Approach ................................................................................................................ 83
8.4. Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method .............................................................. 84
8.5. Load Steps, Substeps, and Time .......................................................................................................... 84
8.6. Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior ...................................................................................... 85
8.7. Load Directions Before and After Deflection ........................................................................................ 86
8.8. Stress-Stiffened Beams ........................................................................................................................ 88
8.9. Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve .......................................................................................................... 89
8.10. Kinematic Hardening ...................................................................................................................... 810
8.11. Bauschinger Effect .......................................................................................................................... 811
8.12. NLISO Stress-Strain Curve ................................................................................................................ 814
8.13. Cast Iron Plasticity ........................................................................................................................... 816
8.14. Hyperelastic Structure ..................................................................................................................... 817
8.15. Typical Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curves ......................................................................................... 823
8.16. Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays ............................................................................... 825
8.17. Typical Evaluated Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curve ........................................................................... 827
8.18. Stress Relaxation and Creep ............................................................................................................ 829
8.19. Time Hardening Creep Analysis ....................................................................................................... 830
8.20. Shape Memory Alloy Phases ............................................................................................................ 832
8.21. Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation .................................................................................... 833
8.22. Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model) ............................................................................................. 834
8.23. Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error ................................................. 858
8.24. Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) Feature ............................. 867
8.25. Typical Nonlinear Output Listing ..................................................................................................... 871
8.26. Cyclic Point Load History ................................................................................................................. 873
10.1. Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element ...................................................................... 102
xx

10.2. Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket Material ............................................................................ 105
10.3. Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves ............................................................................... 107
10.4. Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves ......................................................................... 108
10.5. Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures .................................................. 1011
10.6. Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry ......................................................................................... 1014
10.7. Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element .......................................................................................... 1014
10.8. Interface Layer Mesh ..................................................................................................................... 1015
10.9. Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh ..................................................................................................... 1015
10.10. Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements ............................................................ 1016
11.1. Crack Tip and Crack Front ................................................................................................................ 112
11.2. Examples of Singular Elements ........................................................................................................ 113
11.3. A Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model ........................................................................................... 114
11.4. Taking Advantage of Symmetry ...................................................................................................... 114
11.5. Crack Coordinate Systems ............................................................................................................... 115
11.6. Typical Path Definitions ................................................................................................................... 116
11.7. J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a Crack-Tip ............................................................................. 117
11.8. Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation ..................................................................................... 117
12.1. Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer .......................................................................................... 123
12.2. Sandwich Construction ................................................................................................................... 124
12.3. Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane ............................................................................................. 125
12.4. Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface ................................................................................... 125
12.5. Example of an Element Display ........................................................................................................ 127
12.6. Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence .................................................................. 128
13.1. Cylinder Wall with Stress Concentration Factors (SCFs) .................................................................... 134
13.2. Three Loadings in One Event ........................................................................................................... 135
13.3. Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT .................................................... 136
14.1. Fan Model Showing p-Element vs. h-Element Meshes ...................................................................... 145
14.2. Coupled Nodes on One Element ...................................................................................................... 146
14.3. Nodes Coupled Between Adjacent Elements ................................................................................... 146
14.4. Both Corner Nodes are Coupled ...................................................................................................... 147
14.5. All Coupled Nodes are Midside Nodes ............................................................................................. 147
14.6. Constraints on Rotated Nodes ......................................................................................................... 149
14.7. p-Element Subgrids for Quadrilateral Elements .............................................................................. 1413
14.8. Steel Plate With a Hole .................................................................................................................. 1415
15.1. Plot of a Z Cross Section .................................................................................................................. 152
15.2. Types of Solid Section Cell Mesh ...................................................................................................... 154
15.3. BeamTool with Subtypes Drop Down List Displayed ........................................................................ 156
15.4. Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam ........................................................................... 1513
15.5. Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated ............................................................................ 1514
16.1. Plot of a Shell Section ...................................................................................................................... 162
16.2. Shell Tool With Layup Page Displayed ............................................................................................. 164
16.3. Shell Tool With Section Controls Page Displayed .............................................................................. 164
16.4. Shell Tool With Summary Page Displayed ........................................................................................ 165
List of Tables
1.1. Structural Element Types .................................................................................................................... 12
2.1. Basic Tab Options ............................................................................................................................... 23
2.2. Sol'n Options Tab Options ................................................................................................................... 24
2.3. Nonlinear Tab Options ........................................................................................................................ 24
2.4. Advanced NL Tab Options ................................................................................................................... 25
xxi

2.5. Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis ................................................................................................... 28
3.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................. 32
3.2. Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis .................................................................................................. 35
3.3. Load Commands for a Modal Analysis ................................................................................................. 35
3.4. Load Step Options .............................................................................................................................. 36
3.5. Expansion Pass Options ...................................................................................................................... 39
3.6. Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices ............................................................................................. 317
4.2. Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis .............................................................................. 47
4.3. Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis ............................................................................ 48
4.5. Expansion Pass Options .................................................................................................................... 422
5.1. Transient Tab Options ......................................................................................................................... 58
5.2. Options for the First Load Step-Mode Superposition Analysis ............................................................. 515
5.3. Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis .............................................................................. 522
5.4. Expansion Pass Options .................................................................................................................... 524
5.5. Damping for Different Analysis Types ................................................................................................ 536
5.6. Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients .................................................... 539
6.3. Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis ......................................................................................... 621
6.4. Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis .............................................................................. 622
8.1. Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Constants ................................................................................................. 823
8.2. Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays ................................................................................. 824
9.1. Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko .................................................................. 92
9.2. Experimental Details for Case 3 Models ............................................................................................... 92
9.3. Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types ............................................................................................... 94
9.4. Creep Data Types and Abbreviations ................................................................................................... 99
9.5. Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute ................................................................................................. 99
9.6. Creep Models and Abbreviations ....................................................................................................... 911
9.7. Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations ........................................................................................ 916
15.1. ANSYS Cross Section Commands ..................................................................................................... 152
15.2. ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data ........................................ 1510
16.1. ANSYS Cross Section Commands ..................................................................................................... 161
16.2. ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data .................................................. 166
xxii
Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses

1.1. Definition of Structural Analysis
Structural analysis is probably the most common application of the finite element method. The term structural
(or structure) implies not only civil engineering structures such as bridges and buildings, but also naval, aeronautical, and mechanical structures such as ship hulls, aircraft bodies, and machine housings, as well as mechanical
components such as pistons, machine parts, and tools.
1.2. Types of Structural Analysis

The seven types of structural analyses available in the ANSYS family of products are explained below. The primary
unknowns (nodal degrees of freedom) calculated in a structural analysis are displacements. Other quantities,
such as strains, stresses, and reaction forces, are then derived from the nodal displacements.
Structural analyses are available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS
Professional programs only.
You can perform the following types of structural analyses. Each of these analysis types are discussed in detail
in this manual.
Static Analysis--Used to determine displacements, stresses, etc. under static loading conditions. Both linear and
nonlinear static analyses. Nonlinearities can include plasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, large strain, hyperelasticity, contact surfaces, and creep.
Modal Analysis--Used to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure. Different mode extraction methods are available.
Harmonic Analysis--Used to determine the response of a structure to harmonically time-varying loads.
Transient Dynamic Analysis--Used to determine the response of a structure to arbitrarily time-varying loads. All
nonlinearities mentioned under Static Analysis above are allowed.
Spectrum Analysis--An extension of the modal analysis, used to calculate stresses and strains due to a response
spectrum or a PSD input (random vibrations).
Buckling Analysis--Used to calculate the buckling loads and determine the buckling mode shape. Both linear
(eigenvalue) buckling and nonlinear buckling analyses are possible.
Explicit Dynamic Analysis--This type of structural analysis is only available in the ANSYS LS-DYNA program. ANSYS
LS-DYNA provides an interface to the LS-DYNA explicit finite element program. Explicit dynamic analysis is used
to calculate fast solutions for large deformation dynamics and complex contact problems. Explicit dynamic
analysis is described in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
In addition to the above analysis types, several special-purpose features are available:
Fracture mechanics
Composites
Fatigue
p-Method
Beam Analyses
Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses
1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses

Most ANSYS element types are structural elements, ranging from simple spars and beams to more complex
layered shells and large strain solids. Most types of structural analyses can use any of these elements.
Note Explicit dynamics analysis can use only the explicit dynamic elements (LINK160, BEAM161,
PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167, and SOLID168).
Table 1.1 Structural Element Types

Category
Element Name(s)
Spars
LINK1, LINK8, LINK10, LINK180
Beams
BEAM3, BEAM4, BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, BEAM54, BEAM188, BEAM189
Pipes
PIPE16, PIPE17, PIPE18, PIPE20, PIPE59, PIPE60
2-D Solids
PLANE2, PLANE25, PLANE42, HYPER56, HYPER74, PLANE82, PLANE83, HYPER84, VISCO88,

VISCO106, VISCO108, PLANE145, PLANE146, PLANE182, PLANE183
3-D Solids
SOLID45, SOLID46, HYPER58, SOLID64, SOLID65, HYPER86, VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95,

VISCO107, SOLID147, SOLID148, HYPER158, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID191
Shells
SHELL28, SHELL41, SHELL43, SHELL51, SHELL61, SHELL63, SHELL91, SHELL93, SHELL99,

SHELL150, SHELL181
Solid-Shell
SOLSH190
Interface
INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195
Contact
CONTAC12, CONTAC52, TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173,

CONTA174, CONTA175
Coupled-Field
SOLID5, PLANE13, FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID38, SOLID62, FLUID79, FLUID80, FLUID81,

SOLID98, FLUID129, INFIN110, INFIN111, FLUID116, FLUID130
Specialty
COMBIN7, LINK11, COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, COMBIN37, COMBIN39, COMBIN40,

MATRIX50, SURF153, SURF154
Explicit Dynamics
LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167,

SOLID168
1.4. Material Model Interface

For analyses described in this guide, if you are using the GUI, you must specify the material you will be simulating
using an intuitive material model interface. This interface uses a hierarchical tree structure of material categories,
which is intended to assist you in choosing the appropriate model for your analysis. See Section 1.2.4.4: Material
Model Interface in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details on the material model interface.
1.5. Types of Solution Methods

Two solution methods are available for solving structural problems in the ANSYS family of products: the hmethod and the p-method. The h-method can be used for any type of analysis, but the p-method can be used
only for linear structural static analyses. Depending on the problem to be solved, the h-method usually requires
a finer mesh than the p-method. The p-method provides an excellent way to solve a problem to a desired level
of accuracy while using a coarse mesh. In general, the discussions in this manual focus on the procedures required
for the h-method of solution. Chapter 14, p-Method Structural Static Analysis discusses procedures specific to
the p-method.
12
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis

2.1. Definition of Static Analysis
A static analysis calculates the effects of steady loading conditions on a structure, while ignoring inertia and
damping effects, such as those caused by time-varying loads. A static analysis can, however, include steady inertia
loads (such as gravity and rotational velocity), and time-varying loads that can be approximated as static equivalent loads (such as the static equivalent wind and seismic loads commonly defined in many building codes).
Static analysis is used to determine the displacements, stresses, strains, and forces in structures or components
caused by loads that do not induce significant inertia and damping effects. Steady loading and response conditions
are assumed; that is, the loads and the structure's response are assumed to vary slowly with respect to time. The
kinds of loading that can be applied in a static analysis include:
Externally applied forces and pressures
Steady-state inertial forces (such as gravity or rotational velocity)
Imposed (nonzero) displacements
Temperatures (for thermal strain)
Fluences (for nuclear swelling)
More information about the loads that you can apply in a static analysis appears in Section 2.3.4: Apply the Loads.
2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses

A static analysis can be either linear or nonlinear. All types of nonlinearities are allowed - large deformations,
plasticity, creep, stress stiffening, contact (gap) elements, hyperelastic elements, and so on. This chapter focuses
on linear static analyses, with brief references to nonlinearities. Details of how to handle nonlinearities are described
in Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis.
2.3. Performing a Static Analysis

The procedure for a static analysis consists of these tasks:
1.
Section 2.3.1: Build the Model
2.
Section 2.3.2: Set Solution Controls
3.
Section 2.3.3: Set Additional Solution Options
4.
Section 2.3.4: Apply the Loads
5.
Section 2.3.5: Solve the Analysis
6.
Section 2.3.6: Review the Results
2.3.1. Build the Model

See Section 1.2: Building a Model in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. For further details, see the ANSYS Modeling
and Meshing Guide.
2.3.1.1. Points to Remember

Keep the following points in mind when doing a static analysis:
You can use both linear and nonlinear structural elements.
Material properties can be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent.
You must define stiffness in some form (for example, Young's modulus (EX), hyperelastic coefficients,
and so on).
For inertia loads (such as gravity), you must define the data required for mass calculations, such as
density (DENS).
For thermal loads (temperatures), you must define the coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX).
Note the following information about mesh density:
Regions where stresses or strains vary rapidly (usually areas of interest) require a relatively finer mesh than
regions where stresses or strains are nearly constant (within an element).
While considering the influence of nonlinearities, remember that the mesh should be able to capture the
effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and
therefore a fine element mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
2.3.2. Set Solution Controls

Setting solution controls involves defining the analysis type and common analysis options for an analysis, as well
as specifying load step options for it. When you are doing a structural static analysis, you can take advantage of
a streamlined solution interface (called the Solution Controls dialog box) for setting these options. The Solution
Controls dialog box provides default settings that will work well for many structural static analyses, which means
that you may need to set only a few, if any, of the options. Because the streamlined solution interface is the recommended tool for setting solution controls in a structural static analysis, it is the method that is presented in
this chapter.
If you prefer not to use the Solution Controls dialog box (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Controls),
you can set solution controls for your analysis using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the
standard corresponding menu paths (Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> option). For a general
overview of the Solution Controls dialog box, see Section 3.5: Using Special Solution Controls for Certain Types
of Structural Analyses in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

To access the Solution Controls dialog box, choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n
Controls. The following sections provide brief descriptions of the options that appear on each tab of the dialog
box. For details about how to set these options, select the tab that you are interested in (from within the ANSYS program),
and then click the Help button. Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis also contains details about the nonlinear
options introduced in this chapter.
2.3.2.2. Using the Basic Tab

The Basic tab is active when you access the dialog box.
The controls that appear on the Basic tab provide the minimum amount of data that ANSYS needs for the analysis. Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not need to progress through the remaining
tabs unless you want to adjust the default settings for the more advanced controls. As soon as you click OK on
any tab of the dialog box, the settings are applied to the ANSYS database and the dialog box closes.
22
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis

You can use the Basic tab to set the options listed in Table 2.1: Basic Tab Options. For specific information
about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Basic tab,
and click the Help button.
Table 2.1 Basic Tab Options

Option
For more information on this option, see:
Section 1.2.6.1: Defining the Analysis Type and Analysis Options

in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide
Section 3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis

Guide
Control time settings, including: time at end

of load step [TIME], automatic time stepping [AUTOTS], and number of substeps
to be taken in a load step [NSUBST or
DELTIM]
Section 2.4: The Role of Time in Tracking in the ANSYS Basic

Analysis Guide
Section 2.7.1: General Options in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Specify solution data to write to database

[OUTRES]
Section 2.7.4: Output Controls in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Specify analysis type [ANTYPE, NLGEOM]
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include:
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Static if you are performing a new
analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large deflection, large rotation, and
large strain. Choose Large Displacement Static if you expect large deflections (as in the case of a long,
slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem). Choose Restart Current
Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, or you have previously completed a static analysis, and you want to specify additional loads.
When setting TIME, remember that this load step option specifies time at the end of the load step. The
default value is 1.0 for the first load step. For subsequent load steps, the default is 1.0 plus the time specified
for the previous load step. Although time has no physical meaning in a static analysis (except in the case
of creep, viscoplasticity, or other rate-dependent material behavior), it is used as a convenient way of referring to load steps and substeps (see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
When setting OUTRES, keep this caution in mind:

Caution: By default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file (Jobname.RST). If this
number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES specification), the program will terminate with an
error. Use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19, Memory Management
and Configuration in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
2.3.2.3. The Transient Tab

The Transient tab contains transient analysis controls; it is available only if you choose a transient analysis and
remains grayed out when you choose a static analysis. For these reasons, it is not described here.
23
2.3.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab

You can use the Sol'n Options tab to set the options listed in Table 2.2: Sol'n Options Tab Options. For specific
information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select
the Sol'n Options tab, and click the Help button.
Table 2.2 Sol'n Options Tab Options

Option
For more information about this option, see the following section(s)
in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide:
Specify equation solver [EQSLV]
Section 3.2: Selecting a Solver through Section 3.3.9: The Automatic Iterative (Fast) Solver Option
Specify parameters for multiframe restart

[RESCONTROL]
Section 3.10.2: Multiframe Restart
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include:
When setting EQSLV, specify one of these solvers:
Program chosen solver (ANSYS selects a solver for you, based on the physics of the problem)
Sparse direct solver (default for linear and nonlinear, static and full transient analyses)
Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient (PCG) solver (recommended for large models/high wavefronts,
bulky structures)
Algebraic Multigrid (AMG) solver (applicable in the same situations as the PCG solver, but provides
parallel processing; for faster turnaround times when used in a multiprocessor environment)
Distributed Domain Solver (DDS) provides parallel processing on multiple systems across a network
Iterative solver (auto-select; for linear static/full transient structural or steady-state thermal analyses
only; recommended)
Frontal direct solver
Note The AMG and DDS solvers are part of Parallel Performance for ANSYS, which is a separately-licensed
product. See Chapter 14, Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the
ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for more information about these solvers.
2.3.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab

You can use the Nonlinear tab to set the options listed in Table 2.3: Nonlinear Tab Options. For specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Nonlinear tab, and click the Help button.
Table 2.3 Nonlinear Tab Options

Option
in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide:
24
Section 8.5.2.3.5: Line Search Option
Activate line search [LNSRCH]
Section 8.10.2.4: Using Line Search

Option
Activate a predictor on the DOF solution

[PRED]
Section 8.5.2.3.4: Predictor-Corrector Option
Specify the maximum number of iterations allowed per substep [NEQIT]
Section 8.5.2.3.3: Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations
Specify whether you want to include

creep calculation [RATE]
Section 8.3.1.5: Creep
Section 8.5.3.2.1: Creep Criteria
Set convergence criteria [CNVTOL]
Section 8.5.2.3.2: Convergence Criteria
Control bisections [CUTCONTROL]
Section 8.5.2.3.6: Cutback Criteria
2.3.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab

You can use the Advanced NL tab to set the options listed in Table 2.4: Advanced NL Tab Options. For specific
information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select
the Advanced NL tab, and click the Help button.
Table 2.4 Advanced NL Tab Options

Option
Specify analysis termination criteria

[NCNV]
Section 8.5.2.3.3: Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations
Control activation and termination of the

arc-length method [ARCLEN, ARCTRM]
Section 8.10.2.5: Using the Arc-Length Method
Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
2.3.3. Set Additional Solution Options

This section discusses additional options that you can set for the solution. These options do not appear on the
Solution Controls dialog box because they are used very infrequently, and their default settings rarely need to
be changed. ANSYS menu paths are provided in this section to help you access these options for those cases in
which you choose to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults.
Many of the options that appear in this section are nonlinear options, and are described further in Chapter 8,
Nonlinear Structural Analysis.
2.3.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects

Some elements, including those in the 18x family of elements, include stress stiffening effects regardless of the
SSTIF command setting. To determine whether an element includes stress stiffening, refer to the appropriate
element description in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
By default, stress stiffening effects are ON when NLGEOM is ON. Specific situations in which you can turn OFF
stress stiffening effects include:
Stress stiffening is relevant only in nonlinear analyses. If you are performing a linear analysis [NLGEOM,OFF],
you can turn stress stiffening OFF.
25
Prior to the analysis, you know that the structure is not likely to fail because of buckling (bifurcation, snap
through).
Including stress stiffness terms, in general, accelerates nonlinear convergence characteristics. Keeping in mind
the points listed above, you may choose to turn stress stiffening OFF for specific problems in which convergence
difficulties are seen; for example, local failures.
Command(s): SSTIF
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
2.3.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option

Use this analysis option only in a nonlinear analysis. This option specifies how often the tangent matrix is updated
during solution. You can specify one of these values:
Program-chosen (default)
Full
Modified
Initial stiffness
Full with unsymmetric matrix

Command(s): NROPT
2.3.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation

Use this analysis option to perform a prestressed analysis on the same model, such as a prestressed modal analysis. The default is OFF.
Note The stress stiffening effects and the prestress effect calculation both control the generation of
the stress stiffness matrix, and therefore should not be used together in an analysis. If both are specified,
the last option specified will override the previous setting.
Command(s): PSTRES
2.3.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation

Use this analysis option if you plan to apply inertial loads on the structure (such as gravity and spinning loads).
You can specify one of these values:
Default (depends on element type)
Lumped mass approximation

Note For a static analysis, the mass matrix formulation you use does not significantly affect the solution
accuracy (assuming that the mesh is fine enough). However, if you want to do a prestressed dynamic
analysis on the same model, the choice of mass matrix formulation may be important; see the appropriate
dynamic analysis section for recommendations.
Command(s): LUMPM
26
2.3.3.5. Reference Temperature

This load step option is used for thermal strain calculations. Reference temperature can be made material-dependent with the MP,REFT command.
Command(s): TREF
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Reference Temp
2.3.3.6. Mode Number

This load step option is used for axisymmetric harmonic elements.
Command(s): MODE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> For Harmonic Ele
2.3.3.7. Creep Criteria

This nonlinear load step option specifies the creep criterion for automatic time stepping.
Command(s): CRPLIM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Creep Criterion
2.3.3.8. Printed Output

Use this load step option to include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT).
Command(s): OUTPR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
Caution: Proper use of multiple OUTPR commands can sometimes be a little tricky. See Section 2.7.4:
Output Controls in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on how to use this command.
2.3.3.9. Extrapolation of Results

Use this load step option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of
extrapolating them (default when no material nonlinearities are present).
Command(s): ERESX
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
2.3.4. Apply the Loads

After you set the desired solution options, you are ready to apply loads to the model.
2.3.4.1. Load Types

All of the following load types are applicable in a static analysis.
2.3.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)

These are DOF constraints usually specified at model boundaries to define rigid support points. They can also
indicate symmetry boundary conditions and points of known motion. The directions implied by the labels are
in the nodal coordinate system.
2.3.4.1.2. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ)
These are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied by the labels are
in the nodal coordinate system.
27
2.3.4.1.3. Pressures (PRES)

These are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior. Positive values of pressure act towards the
element face (resulting in a compressive effect).
2.3.4.1.4. Temperatures (TEMP)

These are applied to study the effects of thermal expansion or contraction (that is, thermal stresses). The coefficient
of thermal expansion must be defined if thermal strains are to be calculated. You can read in temperatures from
a thermal analysis [LDREAD], or you can specify temperatures directly, using the BF family of commands.
2.3.4.1.5. Fluences (FLUE)

These are applied to study the effects of swelling (material enlargement due to neutron bombardment or other
causes) or creep. They are used only if you input a swelling or creep equation.
2.3.4.1.6. Gravity, Spinning, Etc.

These are inertia loads that affect the entire structure. Density (or mass in some form) must be defined if inertia
effects are to be included.
2.3.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model

Except for inertia loads, which are independent of the model, you can define loads either on the solid model
(keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). You can also apply boundary
conditions via TABLE type array parameters (see Section 2.3.4.2.1: Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array
Parameters) or as function boundary conditions (see Section 2.6.15: Applying Loads Using Function Boundary
Conditions).
Table 2.5: Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis summarizes the loads applicable to a static analysis. In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
Table 2.5 Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis

Load Type
Category
For details on commands and menu paths for defining these loads, see...
Displacement (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY,

ROTZ)
Constraints
Section 2.6.3: DOF Constraints in the ANSYS Basic Analysis

Guide
Force, Moment (FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ)
Forces
Section 2.6.6: Forces (Concentrated Loads) in the ANSYS

Basic Analysis Guide
Pressure (PRES)
Surface
Loads
Section 2.6.7: Surface Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis

Guide
Temperature (TEMP), Fluence (FLUE)
Body Loads Section 2.6.8: Body Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide
Gravity, Spinning, and so on
Inertia Loads Section 2.6.9: Inertia Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide
2.3.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters

You can also apply loads using TABLE type array parameters. For details on using tabular boundary conditions,
see Section 2.6.14: Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
In a structural analysis, valid primary variables are TIME, TEMP, and location (X, Y, Z).
28

When defining the table, TIME must be in ascending order in the table index (as in any table array).
You can define a table array parameter via command or interactively. For more information on defining table
array parameters, see the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.
2.3.4.3. Calculating Inertia Relief

You can use a static analysis to perform inertia relief calculations, which calculate the accelerations that will
counterbalance the applied loads. You can think of inertia relief as an equivalent free-body analysis. Issue this
command before SOLVE as part of the inertia load commands.
Your model should meet the following requirements:
The model should not contain axisymmetric elements, substructures, or nonlinearities. Models with a
mixture of 2-D and 3-D element types are not recommended.
The effects of offsets and tapering are ignored for beam elements (BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, and
BEAM54) as well as for layered elements (SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID46, and SOLID191). The effects of unsymmetrical layups for layered elements are also ignored. (Breaking up each tapered element into several
elements will give a more accurate solution.)
Data required for mass calculations (such as density) must be specified.
Specify only the minimum number of displacement constraints - those required to prevent rigid-body
motion. Three constraints (or fewer, depending on the element type) are necessary for 2-D models and
six (or fewer) are necessary for 3-D models. Additional constraints, such as those required to impose
symmetry conditions, are permitted, but check for zero reaction forces at all the constraints to make sure
that the model is not overconstrained for inertia relief.
The loads for which inertia relief calculations are desired should be applied.
Command(s): IRLF,1
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Inertia Relief
2.3.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output

Use the IRLIST command to print the output from inertia relief calculations. This output consists of the translational and rotational accelerations required to balance the applied loads and can be used by other programs to
perform kinematics studies. The summary listing of mass and moments of inertia (produced during solution) is
accurate, not approximate. The reaction forces at the constraints will be zero because the calculated inertia forces
balance the applied forces.
Inertia relief output is stored in the database rather than in the results file (Jobname.RST). When you issue IRLIST,
ANSYS pulls the information from the database, which contains the inertia relief output from the most recent
solution [SOLVE or PSOLVE].
Command(s): IRLIST
GUI: No GUI equivalent.
2.3.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations

You can also do a partial inertia relief calculation. Use the partial solution method [PSOLVE], as shown in the
command input below:
/PREP7
...
...
MP,DENS,...
...
...
! Generate model, define density
29

FINISH
/SOLU
D,...
F,...
SF,...
OUTPR,ALL,ALL
IRLF,1
PSOLVE,ELFORM
PSOLVE,ELPREP
IRLIST
FINISH
! Specify only minimum no. of constraints

! Other loads
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activates printout of all items

Can also be set to -1 for precise mass and
load summary only, no inertia relief
Calculates element matrices
Modifies element matrices and calculates
inertia relief terms
Lists the mass summary and total load summary tables
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the OUTPR, IRLF, IRLIST, and PSOLVE commands.
2.3.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations

If you need to do inertia relief calculations frequently, you can write a macro containing the above commands.
Macros are described in the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.
2.3.5. Solve the Analysis

You are now ready to solve the analysis.
1.
Save a backup copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve your model by reentering the
ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Command(s): SAVE
GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as
2.
Start solution calculations.

Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
3.
If you want the analysis to include additional loading conditions (that is, multiple load steps), you will
need to repeat the process of applying loads, specifying load step options, saving, and solving for each
load step. (Other methods for handling multiple load steps are described in Chapter 2, Loading in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.)
4.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.
2.3.6. Review the Results

Results from a static analysis are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They consist of the following
data:
Primary data:
Nodal displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)
Derived data:
Nodal and element strains
210
Nodal and element stresses

Element forces
Nodal reaction forces
and so on
2.3.6.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using POST1, the general postprocessor, and POST26, the time-history processor.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific substeps (time-points). Some typical
POST1 operations are explained below.
POST26 is used in nonlinear static analyses to track specific result items over the applied load history. See
Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis for the use of POST26 in a nonlinear static analysis. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide.
To review results in POST1 or POST26, the database must contain the same model for which the solution
was calculated.
The results file (Jobname.RST) must be available.
2.3.6.3. Reviewing Results Data

1.
Read in the database from the database file.

Command(s): RESUME
GUI: Utility Menu> File> Resume from
2.
Read in the desired set of results. Identify the data set by load step and substep numbers or by time. (If
you specify a time value for which no results are available, the ANSYS program will perform linear interpolation on all the data to calculate the results at that time.)
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Load Step
3.
Perform the necessary POST1 operations. Typical static analysis POST1 operations are explained below.
2.3.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations

Option: Display Deformed Shape
Use the PLDISP command to display a deformed shape (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape). The KUND field on PLDISP gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the
display.
Option: List Reaction Forces and Moments
The PRRSOL command lists reaction forces and moments at the constrained nodes (Main Menu> General
Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu).
To display reaction forces, issue /PBC,RFOR,,1 and then request a node or element display [NPLOT or EPLOT].
(Use RMOM instead of RFOR for reaction moments.)
Option: List Nodal Forces and Moments
211

Use the PRESOL,F (or M) command to list nodal forces and moments (Main Menu> General Postproc> List
Results> Element Solution).
You can list the sum of all nodal forces and moments for a selected set of nodes. Select a set of nodes and use
this feature to find out the total force acting on those nodes:
Command(s): FSUM
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Total Force Sum
You can also check the total force and total moment at each selected node. For a body in equilibrium, the total
load is zero at all nodes except where an applied load or reaction load exists:
Command(s): NFORCE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Sum @ Each Node
The FORCE command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) dictates which component of the
forces is being reviewed:
Total (default)
Static component
Damping component
Inertia component
For a body in equilibrium, the total load (using all FORCE components) is zero at all nodes except where an applied
load or reaction load exists.
Option: Line Element Results
For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use ETABLE to gain access to derived data (stresses, strains,
and so on) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table). Results data are identified by a
combination of a label and a sequence number or component name on the ETABLE command. See the ETABLE
discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Option: Error Estimation
For linear static analyses using solid or shell elements, use the PRERR command to list the estimated solution
error due to mesh discretization (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Percent Error). This command
calculates and lists the percent error in structural energy norm (SEPC), which represents the error relative to a
particular mesh discretization.
Option: Structural Energy Error Estimation
Use PLESOL,SERR to contour the element-by-element structural energy error (SERR) (Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu). Regions of high SERR on the contour display are good
candidates for mesh refinement. (You can activate automatic mesh refinement by means of the ADAPT command
- see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.) See Section 5.3.6: Estimating Solution Error
in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more details about error estimation.
Option: Contour Displays
Use PLNSOL and PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY,
EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot>
Nodal Solu or Element Solu).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the display.
212
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

Use PLETAB and PLLS to contour element table data and line element data (Main Menu> General Postproc>
Element Table> Plot Element Table and Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line
Elem Res).
Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command.
This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell
thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in
Chapter 7, Selecting and Components in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same
material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL. Alternatively, use PowerGraphics with
the AVRES command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) to not average results across
different materials and/or different shell thicknesses.
Option: Vector Displays
Use PLVECT to view vector displays (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined)
and PRVECT to view vector listings (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Vector Data).
Vector displays (not to be confused with vector mode) are an effective way of viewing vector quantities, such as
displacement (DISP), rotation (ROT), and principal stresses (S1, S2, S3).
Option: Tabular Listings
Use these commands to produce tabular listings:
Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results), PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data),
and so on
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option
Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them (Main Menu> General Postproc>
List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes or Sort Elems).
Other Postprocessing Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case combinations, and so on - are
available in POST1. See Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample analysis, you will run a static analysis of an Allen wrench.
2.4.1. Problem Description

An Allen wrench (10 mm across the flats) is torqued by means of a 100 N force at its end. Later, a 20 N downward
force is applied at the same end, at the same time retaining the original 100 N torquing force. The objective is
to determine the stress intensity in the wrench under these two loading conditions.
2.4.2. Problem Specifications

The following dimensions are used for this problem:
Width across flats = 10 mm
Configuration = hexagonal
Length of shank = 7.5 cm
213

Length of handle = 20 cm
Bend radius = 1 cm
Modulus of elasticity = 2.07 x 1011 Pa
Applied torquing force = 100 N
Applied downward force = 20 N
2.4.3. Problem Sketch

Figure 2.1 Diagram of Allen Wrench

2.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title.
2.
Type the text "Static Analysis of an Allen Wrench" and click on OK.
2.4.3.2. Set the System of Units

1.
Click once in the Input Window to make it active for text entry.
2.
Type the command /UNITS,SI and press ENTER. Notice that the command is stored in the history buffer,
which can be accessed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the input window.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Angular Units. The Angular Units for Parametric
Functions dialog box appears.
4.
In the drop down menu for Units for angular parametric functions, select "Degrees DEG."
5.
Click on OK.
2.4.3.3. Define Parameters

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2.
Type the following parameters and their values in the Selection field. Click on Accept after you define
each parameter. For example, first type exx = 2.07e11 in the Selection field and then click on Accept.
Continue entering the remaining parameters and values in the same way.
Parameter
EXX
214
Value
2.07E11
Description
Young's modulus is 2.07E11 Pa

Parameter
Value
Description
W_HEX
.01
Width of hex across flats = .01 m
W_FLAT
W_HEX* TAN(30)
Width of flat = .0058 m
L_SHANK
.075
Length of shank (short end) .075 m
L_HANDLE
.2
Length of handle (long end) .2 m
BENDRAD
.01
Bend radius .01 m
L_ELEM
.0075
Element length .0075 m
NO_D_HEX
Number of divisions along hex flat = 2
TOL
25E-6
Tolerance for selecting node = 25E-6 m
Note You can type the labels in upper- or lowercase; ANSYS always displays the labels in uppercase.
3.
Click on Close.
4.
Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.4. Define the Element Types

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete.
2.
Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
3.
In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Structural Solid."
4.
In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Brick 8node 45."
5.
Click on Apply to define it as element type 1.
6.
Scroll up the list on the right to "Quad 4node 42." Click once to select it.
7.
Click on OK to define Quad 4node42 as element type 2. The Library of Element Types dialog box closes.
8.
Click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
2.4.3.5. Define Material Properties

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
Type the text EXX in the EX field (for Young's modulus), and .3 for PRXY.
Click on OK. This sets Young's modulus to the parameter specified above. Material Model Number 1
appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
2.4.3.6. Create Hexagonal Area as Cross-Section

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Polygon> By Side Length.
The Polygon by Side Length dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 6 for number of sides.
3.
Enter W_FLAT for length of each side.

215

4.
Click on OK. A hexagon appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
2.4.3.7. Create Keypoints Along a Path

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS. The
Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 7 for keypoint number. Type a 0 in each of the X, Y, Z location fields.
3.
Click on Apply.
4.
Enter 8 for keypoint number.
5.
Enter 0,0,-L_SHANK for the X, Y, Z location, and click on Apply.
6.
7.
Enter 0,L_HANDLE,-L_SHANK for the X, Y, Z location, and click on OK.
2.4.3.8. Create Lines Along a Path

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options. The Window Options
dialog box appears.
2.
In the Location of triad drop down menu, select "At top left."
3.
Click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate. The Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box appears.
5.
Click on "Iso" to generate an isometric view and click on Close.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle of Rotation
dialog box appears.
7.
Enter 90 for angle in degrees.
8.
In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes X."
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears.
11. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to turn keypoint numbering on.
12. Click the Line numbers radio button to turn line numbering on.
13. Click on OK.
14. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line.
The Create Straight Line picking menu appears.
15. Click once on keypoints 4 and 1 to create a line between keypoints 1 and 4. (If you have trouble reading
the keypoint numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog
box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom in.)
16. Click once on keypoints 7 and 8 to create a line between keypoints 7 and 8.
17. Click once on keypoints 8 and 9 to create a line between keypoints 8 and 9.
18. Click on OK.
216
2.4.3.9. Create Line from Shank to Handle

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Line Fillet. The Line Fillet
picking menu appears.
2.
Click once on lines 8 and 9.
3.
Click on OK in the picking menu. The Line Fillet dialog box appears.
4.
Enter BENDRAD for Fillet radius and click on OK.
5.
2.4.3.10. Cut Hex Section

In this step, you cut the hex section into two quadrilaterals. This step is required to satisfy mapped meshing.
1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to Off.
3.
Click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Areas.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Divide> With Options> Area by Line. The Divide Area by Line picking menu appears.
6.
Click once on the shaded area, and click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines.
8.
Click once on line 7. (If you have trouble reading the line numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use
the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom
in.)
9.
Click on OK. The Divide Area by Line with Options dialog box appears. In the Subtracted lines will be
drop down menu, select Kept. Click OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Create Component. The Create Component
dialog box appears.
11. Enter BOTAREA for component name.
12. In the Component is made of drop down menu, select "Areas."
13. Click on OK.
2.4.3.11. Set Meshing Density

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Lines> Picked Lines. The
Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears.
2.
Enter 1,2,6 in the picker, then press ENTER.
3.
Click on OK in the picking menu. The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box appears.
4.
Enter NO_D_HEX for number of element divisions and click on OK.
2.4.3.12. Set Element Type for Area Mesh

In this step, set the element type to PLANE42, all quadrilaterals for the area mesh.
217

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes. The
Element Attributes dialog box appears.
2.
In the Element type number drop down menu, select 2 PLANE42 and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesher Opts. The Mesher Options dialog
box appears.
4.
In the Mesher Type field, click on the Mapped radio button and then click on OK. The Set Element Shape
dialog box appears.
5.
Click on OK to accept the default of Quad for 2-D shape key.
6.
2.4.3.13. Generate Area Mesh

In this step, generate the area mesh you will later drag.
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas> Mapped> 3 or 4 sided. The
Mesh Areas picking box appears.
2.
Click on Pick All.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.4.3.14. Drag the 2-D Mesh to Produce 3-D Elements

1.
2.
In the Element type number drop down menu, select 1 SOLID45 and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Global> Size. The Global
Element Sizes dialog box appears.
4.
Enter L_ELEM for element edge length and click on OK.
5.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering.
6.
Click the Line numbers radio button to on if it is not already selected.
7.
Click on OK.
8.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Extrude> Areas> Along Lines.
The Sweep Areas along Lines picking box appears.
10. Click on Pick All. A second picking box appears.

11. Click once on lines 8, 10, and 9 (in that order).
12. Click on OK. The 3-D model appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
13. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
14. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.15. Select BOTAREA Component and Delete 2-D Elements

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select Comp/Assembly. The Select
Component or Assembly dialog appears.
2.
Click on OK to accept the default of select BOTAREA component.
218

3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas. The Clear Areas picking menu
appears.
4.
Click on Pick All.
5.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.4.3.16. Apply Displacement Boundary Condition at End of Wrench

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select Comp/Assembly. The Select
Component or Assembly dialog appears.
2.
Click on OK to accept the default of select BOTAREA component.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears.
4.
In the top drop down menu, select "Lines."
5.
In the second drop down menu, select "Exterior."
6.
Click on Apply.
7.
In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes."
8.
In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to."
9.
Click on the "Lines, all" radio button to select it.
10. Click on OK.

11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
12. Click on Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
13. In the scroll list for DOFs to be constrained, click on "ALL DOF."
14. Click on OK.
15. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.
16. In the top drop down menu, select "Lines."
17. Click on the "Sele All" button, then click on Cancel.
2.4.3.17. Display Boundary Conditions

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols. The Symbols dialog box appears.
2.
Click on the "All Applied BCs" radio button for Boundary condition symbol.
3.
In the Surface Load Symbols drop down menu, select "Pressures."
4.
In the Show pres and convect as drop down menu, select "Arrows."
5.
Click on OK.
2.4.3.18. Apply Pressure on Handle

In this step, apply pressure on the handle to represent 100 N finger force.
1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog appears.
2.
In the top drop down menu, select "Areas."
219

3.
In the second drop down menu, select "By Location."
4.
Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it.
5.
Enter BENDRAD,L_HANDLE for Min, Max, and click on Apply.
6.
Click on "X coordinates" to select it.
7.
Click on Reselect.
8.
Enter W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT for Min, Max, and click on Apply.
9.
In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes."
10. In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to."

11. Click on the "Areas, all" radio button to select it.
12. Click on the "From Full" radio button to select it.
13. Click on Apply.
14. In the second drop down menu, select "By Location."
15. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it.
16. Click on the "Reselect" radio button.
17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max.
18. Click on OK.
19. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data. The Get Scalar Data dialog box appears.
20. In the scroll box on the left, scroll to "Model Data" and select it.
21. In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "For selected set" and select it.
22. Click on OK. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box appears.
23. Enter "minyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined.
24. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it.
25. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Min Y coordinate" to select it.
26. Click on Apply.
27. Click on OK again to select the default settings. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box appears.
28. Enter "maxyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined.
29. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it.
30. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Max Y coordinate" to select it.
31. Click on OK.
32. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
33. Type the text PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on Accept.
34. Click on Close.
35. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes.
The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears.
36. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears.
37. Enter PTORQ for Load PRES value and click on OK.
38. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
220

39. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes.
2.4.3.19. Write the First Load Step

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File. The Write Load Step File
dialog appears.
2.
Enter 1 for load step file number n.
3.
Click on OK.
2.4.3.20. Define Downward Pressure

In this step, you define the downward pressure on top of the handle, representing 20N (4.5 lb) of force.
1.
appears.
2.
Type the text PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on Accept.
3.
Click on Close.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog appears.
5.
In the top drop down menu, select "Areas."
6.
In the second drop down menu, select "By Location."
7.
Click on the "Z coordinates" radio button to select it.
8.
Click on the "From Full" radio button to select it.
9.
Enter -(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2)) for Min, Max.
10. Click on Apply.

11. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes."
12. In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to."
13. Click on the Areas, all radio button to select it, and click on Apply.
14. In the second drop down menu, select "By Location."
15. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it.
16. Click on the "Reselect" radio button.
17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max.
18. Click on OK.
20. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears.
21. Enter PDOWN for Load PRES value and click on OK.
23. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes.
221
2.4.3.21. Write Second Load Step

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File. The Write Load Step File
dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 2 for Load step file number n, and click on OK.
3.
2.4.3.22. Solve from Load Step Files

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files. The Solve Load Step Files dialog box
appears.
2.
Enter 1 for Starting LS file number.
3.
Enter 2 for Ending LS file number, and click on OK.
4.
Click on the Close button after the Solution is done! window appears.
2.4.3.23. Read First Load Step and Review Results

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List Reaction
Solution dialog box appears.
3.
Click on OK to accept the default of All Items.
4.
Review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
5.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols. The Symbols dialog box appears.
6.
Click on the "None" radio button for Boundary condition symbol, and click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Edge Options. The Edge Options dialog box appears.
8.
In the Element outlines for non-contour/contour plots drop down menu, select "Edge Only/All."
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
11. Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button and click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears.
13. Type "pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle of Rotation
dialog box appears.
15. Enter 120 for Angle in degrees.
16. In the Relative/absolute drop down menu, select "Relative angle."
17. In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes Y."
18. Click on OK.
19. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The
Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
20. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, click on "Intensity SINT."
21. Click on OK.
222

22. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears.
23. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
2.4.3.24. Read the Next Load Step and Review Results

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Next Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List Reaction
3.
Click on OK to accept the default of All Items.
4.
5.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Restore Plot Ctrls.
6.
Type "pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed
8.
Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button if it is not already selected and click on OK.
9.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Restore Plot Ctrls.
10. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.

11. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The
12. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "Intensity SINT" and
select it.
13. Click on OK.
2.4.3.25. Zoom in on Cross-Section

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Offset WP by Increments. The Offset WP tool box appears.
2.
Enter 0,0,-0.067 for X, Y, Z Offsets and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Hidden Line Options. The Hidden-Line Options
dialog box appears.
4.
In the drop down menu for Type of Plot, select "Capped hidden."
5.
In the drop down menu for Cutting plane is, select "Working plane."
6.
Click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan-Zoom-Rotate. The Pan-Zoom-Rotate tool box appears.
8.
Click on "WP."
9.
Drag the Rate slider bar to 10.
10. On the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box, click on the large round dot several times to zoom in on the cross
section.
2.4.3.26. Exit ANSYS

1.
Choose QUIT from the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.
Choose Quit - No Save!

223

3.
Click on OK.
2.5. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example static analysis of an Allen wrench using the ANSYS commands shown below instead
of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/FILNAME,pm02!
Jobname to use for all subsequent files
/TITLE,Static analysis of an Allen wrench
/UNITS,SI
! Reminder that the SI system of units is used
/SHOW
! Specify graphics driver for interactive run; for batch
! run plots are written to pm02.grph
! Define parameters for future use
EXX=2.07E11
! Young's modulus (2.07E11 Pa = 30E6 psi)
W_HEX=.01
! Width of hex across flats (.01m=.39in)
*AFUN,DEG
! Units for angular parametric functions
W_FLAT=W_HEX*TAN(30)
! Width of flat
L_SHANK=.075
! Length of shank (short end) (.075m=3.0in)
L_HANDLE=.2
! Length of handle (long end) (.2m=7.9 in)
BENDRAD=.01
! Bend radius of Allen wrench (.01m=.39 in)
L_ELEM=.0075
! Element length (.0075 m = .30 in)
NO_D_HEX=2
! Number of divisions on hex flat
TOL=25E-6
! Tolerance for selecting nodes (25e-6 m = .001 in)
/PREP7
ET,1,SOLID45
! Eight-node brick element
ET,2,PLANE42
! Four-node quadrilateral (for area mesh)
MP,EX,1,EXX
! Young's modulus for material 1
MP,PRXY,1,0.3
! Poisson's ratio for material 1
RPOLY,6,W_FLAT
! Hexagonal area
K,7
! Keypoint at (0,0,0)
K,8,,,-L_SHANK
! Keypoint at shank-handle intersection
K,9,,L_HANDLE,-L_SHANK
! Keypoint at end of handle
L,4,1
! Line through middle of hex shape
L,7,8
! Line along middle of shank
L,8,9
! Line along handle
LFILLT,8,9,BENDRAD
! Line along bend radius between shank and handle
/VIEW,,1,1,1
! Isometric view in window 1
/ANGLE,,90,XM
! Rotates model 90 degrees about X
/PNUM,LINE,1
! Line numbers turned on
LPLOT
/PNUM,LINE,0
! Line numbers off
L,1,4
! Hex section is cut into two quadrilaterals
ASBL,1,7,,,KEEP ! to satisfy mapped meshing requirements for bricks
CM,BOTAREA,AREA ! Component name BOTAREA for the two areas
! Generate area mesh for later drag
LESIZE,1,,,NO_D_HEX
! Number of divisions along line 1
LESIZE,2,,,NO_D_HEX
LESIZE,6,,,NO_D_HEX
TYPE,2
! PLANE42 elements to be meshed first
MSHAPE,0,2D
! Mapped quad mesh
MSHKEY,1
SAVE
! Save database before meshing
AMESH,ALL
/TITLE,Meshed hex wrench end to be used in vdrag
EPLOT
! Now drag the 2-D mesh to produce 3-D elements
TYPE,1
!
ESIZE,L_ELEM
!
VDRAG,2,3,,,,,8,10,9
!
/TYPE,,HIDP
!
/TITLE,Meshed hex wrench
EPLOT
CMSEL,,BOTAREA
!
224
Type pointer set to SOLID45

Element size
Drag operation to create 3-D mesh
Precise hidden line display
Select BOTAREA component and
Section 2.5: A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

ACLEAR,ALL
ASEL,ALL
FINISH
delete the 2-D elements
! Apply loads and obtain the solution

/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
! Static analysis (default)
/TITLE,Allen wrench -- Load step 1
! First fix all nodes around bottom of shank
CMSEL,,BOTAREA
! Bottom areas of shank
LSEL,,EXT
! Exterior lines of those areas
NSLL,,1
! Nodes on those lines
D,ALL,ALL
! Displacement constraints
LSEL,ALL
/PBC,U,,1
! Displacement symbols turned on
/TITLE,Boundary conditions on end of wrench
NPLOT
!Now apply pressure on handle to represent 100-N (22.5-lb) finger force
ASEL,,LOC,Y,BENDRAD,L_HANDLE
! Areas on handle
ASEL,R,LOC,X,W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT
! Two areas on one side of handle...
NSLA,,1
! ...and all corresponding nodes
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL
! Reselects nodes at
! back end of handle (3 element lengths)
*GET,MINYVAL,NODE,,MNLOC,Y
! Get minimum Y value of selected nodes
*GET,MAXYVAL,NODE,,MXLOC,Y
! Get maximum Y value of selected nodes
PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL))
! Pressure equivalent to 100 N
SF,ALL,PRES,PTORQ
! PTORQ pressure on all selected nodes
ALLSEL
! Restores full set of all entities
/PSF,PRES,,2
! Pressure symbols turned on
/TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench for load step 1
NPLOT
LSWRITE
! Writes first load step
/TITLE, Allen wrench -- load step 2
! Downward pressure on top of handle, representing 20-N (4.5 -lb) force
PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL))
ASEL,,LOC,Z,-(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2))
! Area on top flat of handle...
NSLA,,1
! ...and all corresponding nodes
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL
! Reselects nodes at
! back end of handle (3 element lengths)
SF,ALL,PRES,PDOWN
! PDOWN pressure at all selected nodes
ALLSEL
/TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench for load step 2
NPLOT
LSWRITE
! Writes second load step
SAVE
! Save database before solution
LSSOLVE,1,2
! Initiates solution for load step files 1 and 2
FINISH
!Review the results
/POST1
SET,1
! Reads load step 1 results
PRRSOL
! Reaction solution listing
/PBC,DEFA
! No BC symbols
/PSF,DEFA
! No surface load symbols
/EDGE,,1
! Edges only, no interior element outlines
/TITLE,Deformed allen wrench caused by torque
PLDISP,2
! Deformed shape overlaid with undeformed edge plot
/GSAVE,pldisp,gsav
! Saves graphics specifications on pldisp.gsav
/PLOPTS,INFO,ON
! Turns on entire legend column
/PLOPTS,LEG1,OFF
! Turns off legend header
/ANGLE,,120,YM,1
! Additional rotation about model Y (to see high stress areas)
/TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque
PLNSOL,S,INT
! Stress intensity contours
225

/GSAVE,plnsol,gsav
! Saves graphics specifications to plnsol.gsav
SET,2
! Reads load step 2 results
PRRSOL
! Reaction solution listing
/GRESUME,pldisp,gsav
! Resumes graphics specifications from pldisp.gsav
/TITLE,Deformed allen wrench caused by torque and force
PLDISP,2
/GRESUME,plnsol,gsav
! Resumes graphics specifications from plnsol.gsav
/TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque and force
PLNSOL,S,INT
WPOF,,,-0.067
! Offset the working plane for cross-section view
/TYPE,1,5
! Capped hidden display
/CPLANE,1
! Cutting plane defined to use the WP
/VIEW, 1 ,WP
! View will be normal to the WP
/DIST,1,.01
! Zoom in on the cross section
/TITLE,Cross section of the allen wrench under torque and force loading
PLNSOL,S,INT
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL
2.6. Where to Find Other Examples

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual and the ANSYS Tutorials, describe additional structural static analyses.
The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS
family of products. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the ANSYS Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts.
However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element experience should be able to fill in the
missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with accompanying comments.
The ANSYS Verification Manual includes the following structural static analysis test cases:
VM1 - Statically Indeterminate Reaction Force Analysis
VM2 - Beam Stresses and Deflections
VM4 - Deflection of a Hinged Support
VM11 - Residual Stress Problem
VM12 - Combined Bending and Torsion
VM13 - Cylindrical Shell Under Pressure
VM16 - Bending of a Solid Beam
VM18 - Out-of-plane Bending of a Curved Bar
VM20 - Cylindrical Membrane Under Pressure
VM25 - Stresses in a Long Cylinder
VM29 - Friction on a Support Block
VM31 - Cable Supporting Hanging Loads
VM36 - Limit Moment Analysis
VM39 - Bending of a Circular Plate with a Center Hole
VM41 - Small Deflection of a Rigid Beam
VM44 - Bending of an Axisymmetric Thin Pipe Under Gravity Loading
VM53 - Vibration of a String Under Tension
VM59 - Lateral Vibration of an Axially Loaded Bar
VM63 - Static Hertz Contact Problem
VM78 - Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam
VM82 - Simply Supported Laminated Plate Under Pressure
VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends
VM135 - Bending of a Beam on an Elastic Foundation
VM141 - Diametric Compression of a Disk
VM148 - Bending of a Parabolic Beam
VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-Mass System
226
Section 2.6: Where to Find Other Examples

VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear Deformation
VM201 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
VM206 - Stranded Coil with Voltage Excitation
VM211 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
VM216 - Lateral Buckling of a Right-Angle Frame
227
228
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis

3.1. Definition of Modal Analysis
You use modal analysis to determine the vibration characteristics (natural frequencies and mode shapes) of a
structure or a machine component while it is being designed. It also can be a starting point for another, more
detailed, dynamic analysis, such as a transient dynamic analysis, a harmonic response analysis, or a spectrum
analysis.
3.2. Uses for Modal Analysis

You use modal analysis to determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure. The natural frequencies and mode shapes are important parameters in the design of a structure for dynamic loading conditions.
They are also required if you want to do a spectrum analysis or a mode superposition harmonic or transient
analysis.
You can do modal analysis on a prestressed structure, such as a spinning turbine blade. Another useful feature
is modal cyclic symmetry, which allows you to review the mode shapes of a cyclically symmetric structure by
modeling just a sector of it.
Modal analysis in the ANSYS family of products is a linear analysis. Any nonlinearities, such as plasticity and
contact (gap) elements, are ignored even if they are defined. You can choose from several mode-extraction
methods: Block Lanczos (default), subspace, PowerDynamics, reduced, unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped.
The damped and QR damped methods allow you to include damping in the structure. The QR Damped method
also allows for unsymmetrical damping and stiffness matrices. Details about mode-extraction methods are
covered later in this section.
3.3. Overview of Steps in a Modal Analysis

The procedure for a modal analysis consists of four main steps:
1.
Build the model.
2.
Apply loads and obtain the solution.
3.
Expand the modes.
4.
Review the results.
3.4. Build the Model

and Meshing Guide.
When building your model, remember these points:
Only linear behavior is valid in a modal analysis. If you specify nonlinear elements, they are treated as linear.
For example, if you include contact elements, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial status
and never change.
Material properties can be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. You
must define both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some
form) for a modal analysis. Nonlinear properties are ignored. If applying element damping, you must

define the required real constants for the specific element type (COMBIN7, COMBIN14, COMBIN37, and
so on).
3.5. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

In this step you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load step options, and begin the finite
element solution for the natural frequencies.
3.5.1. Enter the Solution Processor

1.
Enter the ANSYS solution processor.

Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
3.5.2. Define Analysis Type and Options

After you have entered the solution processor, you define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS offers
the options listed in Table 3.1: Analysis Types and Options for a modal analysis. Each of the options is explained
in detail below.
Table 3.1 Analysis Types and Options

Option
Command
GUI Path
New Analysis
ANTYPE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis
Analysis Type: Modal (see Note below)
ANTYPE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis>

Modal
mode-extraction Method
MODOPT
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Number of Modes to Extract
MODOPT
No. of Modes to Expand (see Note below) MXPAND
Mass Matrix Formulation
LUMPM
Prestress Effects Calculation
PSTRES
Note When you specify a modal analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for modal analyses appears. The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions you took
prior to this step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options that
are valid and/or recommended for modal analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you
want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use
may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option. For details, see
Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Note In the single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance
factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the spectrum
analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal analysis options
(MODOPT).
3.5.2.1. Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE]

Choose New Analysis.
32
Section 3.5: Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

Note Restarts are not valid in a modal analysis. If you need to apply different sets of boundary conditions,
do a new analysis each time (or use the "partial solution" procedure described in Chapter 3, Solution
in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
3.5.2.2. Option: Analysis Type: Modal [ANTYPE]

Use this option to specify a modal analysis.
3.5.2.3. Option: Mode-Extraction Method [MODOPT]

Choose one of the extraction methods listed below. (For more detailed information, see Section 3.13: Comparing
Mode-Extraction Methods.)
Block Lanczos method (default)

The Block Lanczos method is used for large symmetric eigenvalue problems. You can use this method for
the same types of problems for which you use the subspace method, but you achieve a faster convergence
rate. The Block Lanczos method uses the sparse matrix solver, overriding any solver specified via the
EQSLV command.
Subspace method
The subspace method is used for large symmetric eigenvalue problems. Several solution controls are
available to control the subspace iteration process.
When doing a modal analysis with a large number of constraint equations, use the subspace method with
the frontal solver instead of the JCG solver, or use the Block Lanczos mode-extraction method.
PowerDynamics method
The PowerDynamics method is used for very large models (100,000+ DOFs), and is especially useful to
obtain a solution for the first several modes to learn how the model will behave. You can then choose the
most appropriate extraction method (subspace or Block Lanczos) for running the final solution. This
method automatically uses the lumped mass approximation (LUMPM,ON)
To use the PowerDynamics method when running in batch or command mode, you first issue MODOPT,SUBSPACE, followed by EQSLV,PCG.
Reduced (Householder) method

The reduced method is faster than the subspace method because it uses reduced (condensed) system
matrices to calculate the solution. However, it is less accurate because the reduced mass matrix is approximate. (See Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods.)
Unsymmetric method
The unsymmetric method is used for problems with unsymmetric matrices, such as fluid-structure interaction problems.
Damped method
The damped method is used for problems where damping cannot be ignored, such as bearing problems.
QR Damped method
The QR damped method is faster and achieves better calculation efficiency than the damped method. It
uses the reduced modal damped matrix to calculate complex damped frequencies in modal coordinates.
33

For most applications, you will use the Block Lanczos, subspace, reduced, or PowerDynamics method. The unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped methods are meant for special applications.
When you specify a mode-extraction method, ANSYS automatically chooses the appropriate equation solver.
Note The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS Professional
program.
3.5.2.4. Option: Number of Modes to Extract [MODOPT]

This option is required for all mode-extraction methods except the reduced method.
For the unsymmetric and damped methods, requesting a larger number of modes than necessary reduces the
possibility of missed modes, but results in more solution time.
3.5.2.5. Option: Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND]

This option is required for the reduced, unsymmetric, and damped methods only. However, if you want element
results, you need to turn on the "Calculate elem results" option, regardless of the mode-extraction method. In
the single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the
modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the
MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode
expansion (MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT). If you want the mode shapes
normalized to unity for the Block Lanczos or subspace methods, you will need to expand the modes as well.
3.5.2.6. Option: Mass Matrix Formulation [LUMPM]

Use this option to specify the default formulation (which is element-dependent) or lumped mass approximation.
We recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for some problems involving "skinny"
structures such as slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass approximation often yields better results.
Also, the lumped mass approximation can result in a shorter run time and lower memory requirements.
3.5.2.7. Option: Prestress Effects Calculation [PSTRES]

Use this option to calculate the modes of a prestressed structure. By default, no prestress effects are included;
that is, the structure is assumed to be stress-free. To include prestress effects, element files from a previous
static (or transient) analysis must be available; see Section 3.11: Prestressed Modal Analysis. If prestress effects
are turned on, the lumped mass setting [LUMPM] in this and subsequent solutions must be the same as it was
in the prestress static analysis.
Note You can use only axisymmetric loads for prestressing harmonic elements such as PLANE25 and
SHELL61.
3.5.2.8. Additional Modal Analysis Options

After you complete the fields on the Modal Analysis Options dialog box, click OK. A dialog box specific to the
selected extraction method appears. You see some combination of the following fields: FREQB, FREQE, PRMODE,
Nrmkey, RIGID, SUBOPT. Refer to the MODOPT and RIGID command descriptions for the meaning of these
fields.
34
3.5.3. Define Master Degrees of Freedom

In a modal analysis, you also need to define master degrees of freedom. These are required only for the reduced
mode-extraction method.
Master degrees of freedom (MDOF) are significant degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior
of the structure. You should choose at least twice as many MDOF as the number of modes of interest. We recommend that you define as many MDOF as you can based on your knowledge of the dynamic characteristics of the
structure [M,MGEN], and also let the program choose a few additional masters based on stiffness-to-mass ratios
[TOTAL]. You can list the defined MDOF [MLIST], and delete extraneous MDOF [MDELE]. For more details about
master degrees of freedom, see Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction.
Command(s): M
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define
3.5.4. Apply Loads

After defining master degrees of freedom, apply loads on the model. The only "loads" valid in a typical modal
analysis are zero-value displacement constraints. (If you input a nonzero displacement constraint, the program
assigns a zero-value constraint to that DOF instead.) Other loads can be specified, but are ignored (see Note
below). For directions in which no constraints are specified, the program calculates rigid-body (zero-frequency)
as well as higher (nonzero frequency) free body modes. Table 3.2: Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis shows
the commands to apply displacement constraints. Notice that you can apply them either on the solid model
(keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of
solid-model loads versus finite-element loads, see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Note Other loads - forces, pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so on - can be specified in a
modal analysis, but they are ignored for the mode-extraction. However, the program will calculate a load
vector and write it to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) so that it can be used in a subsequent modesuperposition harmonic or transient analysis.
Table 3.2 Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis

Load Type
Category
Cmd Family
GUI Path
Displacement (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, Constraints D

ROTY, ROTZ)
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>

Structural> Displacement
In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
3.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using Commands

Table 3.3: Load Commands for a Modal Analysis lists all the commands you can use to apply loads in a modal
analysis.
Table 3.3 Load Commands for a Modal Analysis

Load Type
Displacement
Solid Model
or FE
Entity
Apply
Delete
List
Operate
Apply Settings
Solid Model
Keypoints
DK
DKDELE
DKLIST
DTRAN
Solid Model
Lines
DL
DLDELE
DLLIST
DTRAN
Solid Model
Areas
DA
DADELE
DALIST
DTRAN
Finite Elem
Nodes
DDELE
DLIST
DSCALE
DSYM, DCUM
35
3.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI

All loading operations (except List; see Section 3.5.4.3: Listing Loads) are accessed through a series of cascading
menus. From the Solution menu, you select the operation (apply, delete, and so on), then the load type (displacement, force, and so on), and then the object to which you are applying the load (keypoint, line, node, and so on).
For example, to apply a displacement load to a line, follow this GUI path:
GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On lines
3.5.4.3. Listing Loads

To list existing loads, follow this GUI path:
GUI:
Utility Menu> List>Loads> load type
3.5.5. Specify Load Step Options

The only load step options available for a modal analysis are damping options.
Table 3.4 Load Step Options

Option
Command
Damping (Dynamics) Options

Alpha (mass) Damping
ALPHAD
Beta (stiffness) Damping
BETAD
Material-Dependent Damping Ratio
MP,DAMP
Element Damping (applied via element real constant) R

Constant Material Damping Coefficient
MP,DMPR
Damping is valid only for the damped and QR damped mode-extraction methods. Damping is ignored for the
other mode-extraction methods; see the Note below.
If you include damping and specify the damped mode-extraction method, the calculated eigenvalues and eigenvectors are complex. If you include damping and specify the QR damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues
are complex. However, the real eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis. See Section 3.13:
Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods for details. Also see the section Section 5.10.3: Damping in Chapter 5,
Transient Dynamic Analysis for more information on damping.
Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a downstream
mode superposition harmonic analysis. The QR damped eigen analysis itself, however, does not include the effect
of the constant material damping coefficient. The corresponding modal damping matrix is formulated during
modal harmonic analysis.
Note Damping can be specified in a non-damped modal analysis if a single-point response spectrum
analysis is to follow the modal analysis. Although the damping does not affect the eigenvalue solution,
it is used to calculate an effective damping ratio for each mode, which is then used to calculate the response to the spectrum. Spectrum analyses are discussed in Chapter 6, Spectrum Analysis.
36
3.5.6. Participation Factor Table Output

The participation factor table lists participation factors, mode coefficients, and mass distribution percentages
for each mode extracted. The participation factors and mode coefficients are calculated based on an assumed
unit displacement spectrum in each of the global Cartesian directions and rotation about each of these axes.
The reduced mass distribution is also listed. Rotational participation factors will be calculated when a real eigensolver mode-extraction method (such as Block Lanczos, subspace, or QRDAMP) is used.
Note You can retrieve a participation factor or mode coefficient by issuing a *GET command. The
factor or coefficient is valid for the excitation (assumed unit displacement spectrum) directed along the
last of the applicable coordinates (rotation about the Z axis for a 3-D analysis). To retrieve a participation
factor or mode coefficient for another direction, perform a spectrum analysis with the excitation set
(SED) to the desired direction, then issue another *GET command.
3.5.7. Solve
Before you solve, you should save (SAVE) a back-up copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve
your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Now start the solution calculations.
Command(s): SOLVE
3.5.7.1. Output
The output from the solution consists mainly of the natural frequencies, which are printed as part of the printed
output (Jobname.OUT) and also written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). The printed output may include
reduced mode shapes and the participation factor table, depending on your analysis options and output controls.
No mode shapes are written to the database or to the results file, so you cannot postprocess the results yet. To
do this, you need to expand the modes (explained next).
3.5.7.1.1. Output From Subspace Mode-Extraction Method

If you use the subspace mode-extraction method, you might see the following warning in the solution printout:
"STURM number = n should be m," where n and m are integer numbers. This indicates that a mode has been
missed, or that the mthand nth mode gave the same frequencies and only m modes were requested.
There are two methods that you can use to investigate the missed mode: use more iteration vectors, or change
the shift point used in the eigenvalue extraction. Both methods are briefly described below. (See the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference for more information.)
To use more iteration vectors, you can issue the SUBOPT,,NPAD command. If you prefer to use the GUI to adjust
the number of iteration vectors, follow these steps:
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Modal Analysis
dialog box appears.
2.
Choose Subspace as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to extract; then
click OK. The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
3.
Change the value of the NPAD field and click OK.
To change the shift point that was used in the eigenvalue extraction, you can issue the MODOPT,,,FREQB command. If you prefer to use the GUI to change the shift point, follow these steps:
37

1.
dialog box appears.
2.
Choose Subspace as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to extract; then
click OK. The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
3.
Change the value of the FREQB field and click OK.
If you use the damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues and eigenvectors are complex. The imaginary
part of the eigenvalue represents the natural frequency, and the real part is a measure of the stability of the
system. If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues are complex. However, the real eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis.
3.5.8. Exit the Solution Processor

You must now exit the solution processor.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Main Menu> Finish
3.6. Expand the Modes

In its strictest sense, the term "expansion" means expanding the reduced solution to the full DOF set. The "reduced
solution" is usually in terms of master DOF. In a modal analysis, however, we use the term "expansion" to mean
writing mode shapes to the results file. That is, "expanding the modes" applies not just to reduced mode shapes
from the reduced mode-extraction method, but to full mode shapes from the other mode-extraction methods
as well. Thus, if you want to review mode shapes in the postprocessor, you must expand them (that is, write them
to the results file). Expanded modes are also required for subsequent spectrum analyses. In the single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion
can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command.
If you want to perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND)
on the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT). No expansion is necessary for subsequent mode
superposition analyses.
3.6.1. Points to Remember
The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE), Jobname.EMAT, Jobname.ESAV, and Jobname.TRI (if reduced
method) must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the modal solution was calculated.
3.6.2. Expanding the Modes

1.
Reenter the ANSYS solution processor.

Command(s): /SOLU
Note You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU)
before performing the expansion pass.
2.
38
Activate the expansion pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
Section 3.6: Expand the Modes
Table 3.5 Expansion Pass Options

Option
Expansion Pass On/Off
Command
EXPASS
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass
No. of Modes to Expand MXPAND
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes
Freq. Range for Expansion MXPAND
MXPAND
Stress Calc. On/Off
Each of these options is explained in detail below.

Expansion Pass On/Off [EXPASS]
Choose ON.
Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND, NMODE]
Specify the number. Remember that only expanded modes can be reviewed in the postprocessor.
Default is no modes expanded.
Frequency Range for Expansion [MXPAND,, FREQB, FREQE]
This is another way to control the number of modes expanded. If you specify a frequency range, only
modes within that range are expanded.
Stress Calculations On/Off [MXPAND,,,, Elcalc]
Choose ON only if you plan to do a subsequent spectrum analysis and are interested in stresses or
forces to do the spectrum. "Stresses" from a modal analysis do not represent actual stresses in the
structure, but give you an idea of the relative stress distributions for each mode. Default is no stresses
calculated.
3.
Specify load step options. The only options valid in a modal expansion pass are output controls:
Printed output
Use this option to include any results data (expanded mode shapes, stresses, and forces) on the
printed output file (Jobname.OUT).
Command(s): OUTPR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
Database and results file output

Use this option to control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). The FREQ field on OUTRES can
be only ALL or NONE; that is, the data are written for all modes or no modes. For example, you cannot
write information for every other mode.
Command(s): OUTRES
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File
4.
Start expansion pass calculations.

The output consists of expanded mode shapes and, if requested, relative stress distributions for each
mode.
Command(s): SOLVE
39

5.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional modes to be expanded (in different frequency ranges, for example).
Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file.
Caution: Spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one load step. In the single
point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM),
the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance
factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the
spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal
analysis options (MODOPT).
6.
Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the postprocessor.

Command(s): FINISH
Note The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step. However, if you include the
MXPAND command in the modal solution step, the program not only extracts the eigenvalues and eigenvectors, but also expands the specified mode shapes.
3.7. Review the Results

Results from a modal analysis (that is, the modal expansion pass) are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. Results consist of:
Natural frequencies
Expanded mode shapes
Relative stress and force distributions (if requested).
You can review these results in POST1 [/POST1], the general postprocessor. Some typical postprocessing operations for a modal analysis are described below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see
Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
If you want to review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution
was calculated.
3.7.2. Reviewing Results Data

1.
Read in results data from the appropriate substep. Each mode is stored on the results file as a separate
substep. If you expand six modes, for instance, your results file will have one load step consisting of six
substeps.
Command(s): SET,SBSTEP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> substep
2.
Perform any desired POST1 operations. Typical modal analysis POST1 operations are explained below:
3.7.3. Option: Listing All Frequencies

You may want to list the frequencies of all modes expanded. A sample output from this command is shown below.
310
Section 3.7: Review the Results

*****
SET
1
2
3
4
INDEX OF DATA SETS ON RESULTS FILE *****

TIME/FREQ
LOAD STEP
SUBSTEP CUMULATIVE
22.973
1
1
1
40.476
1
2
2
78.082
1
3
3
188.34
1
4
4
Command(s): SET,LIST
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results
3.7.4. Option: Display Deformed Shape

Command(s): PLDISP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape
Use the KUND field on PLDISP to overlay the nondeformed shape on the display.
3.7.5. Option: List Master DOF

Command(s): MLIST,ALL
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> List All
Note To display the master DOFs graphically, plot the nodes (Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes or command
NLIST).
3.7.6. Option: Line Element Results

Command(s): ETABLE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table
For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use the ETABLE command to access derived data (stresses,
strains, and so on). Results data are identified by a combination of a label and a sequence number or component
name on the ETABLE command. See the ETABLE discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide for details.
3.7.7. Option: Contour Displays

Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu
Use these options to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...),
and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the nondeformed shape on the display.
You can also contour element table data and line element data:
Command(s): PLETAB, PLLS
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res
Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command.
This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell
thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in
Chapter 7, Selecting and Components in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same
material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL.
311
3.7.8. Option: Tabular Listings

Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data),
and so on NSORT, ESORT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Elems
Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them.
3.7.9. Other Capabilities

Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case combinations, and so on - are
available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, EXPASS, MXPAND,
SET, and PLDISP commands.
3.8. A Sample Modal Analysis (GUI Method)

In this example, you perform a modal analysis on the wing of a model plane to demonstrate the wing's modal
degrees of freedom.

This is a modal analysis of a wing of a model plane. The wing is of uniform configuration along its length, and its
cross-sectional area is defined to be a straight line and a spline, as shown. It is held fixed to the body on one end
and hangs freely at the other. The objective of the problem is to demonstrate the wing's modal degrees of freedom.

The dimensions of the wing are shown in the problem sketch. The wing is made of low density polyethylene
with the following values:
Young's modulus = 38x103 psi
Poisson's ratio = .3
Density = 8.3e-5 lb-sec2/in4
312
Section 3.9: A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

Figure 3.1 Diagram of a Model Airplane Wing
The detailed step-by-step procedure for this example, Modal Analysis of a Model Airplane Wing, is included in
the Modal Tutorial.
3.9. A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example modal analysis of a model airplane wing using the ANSYS commands shown below
instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an exclamation point (!) are comments.
You may receive warning messages when you run this problem. The version of the problem that appears in the
Modal Tutorial contains an explanation of the warnings.
/FILNAM,MODAL
/TITLE,Modal Analysis of a Model Airplane Wing
/PREP7
ET,1,PLANE42
! Define PLANE42 as element type
ET,2,SOLID45
! Define SOLID45 as element type
MP,EX,1,38000
MP,DENS,1,8.3E-5
MP,NUXY,1,.3
K,1
! Define keypoint 1 at 0,0,0
K,2,2
! Define keypoint 2 at 2,0,0
K,3,2.3,.2
! Define keypoint 3 at 2.3,.2,0
K,4,1.9,.45
! Define keypoint 4 at 1.9,.45,0
K,5,1,.25
! Define keypoint 5 at 1,.25,0
LSTR,1,2
! Create a straight line between
LSTR,5,1
! Create a straight line between
BSPLIN,2,3,4,5,,,-1,,,-1,-.25
! Create a B-spline
AL,1,3,2
ESIZE,.25
AMESH,1
ESIZE,,10
TYPE,2
VEXT,ALL,,,,,10
/VIEW,,1,1,1
/ANG,1
/REP
EPLOT
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
MODOPT,SUBSP,5
1
2
keypoints 1 and 2
keypoints 5 and 1
! Choose modal analysis type

! Choose the subspace mode-extraction method,
313
ESEL,U,TYPE,,1
NSEL,S,LOC,Z,0
D,ALL,ALL
NSEL,ALL
MXPAND,5
SOLVE
FINISH
! extracting 5 modes
! Unselect element type 1
/POST1
SET,LIST,2
SET,FIRST
PLDISP,0
ANMODE,10,.5E-1
SET,NEXT
PLDISP,0
ANMODE,10,.5E-1
SET,NEXT
PLDISP,0
ANMODE,10,.5E-1
SET,NEXT
PLDISP,0
ANMODE,10,.5E-1
SET,NEXT
PLDISP,0
ANMODE,10,.5E-1
FINISH
/EXIT

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional modal analyses.
The ANSYS Verification Manual includes variety of modal analysis test cases:
VM45 - Natural Frequency of a Spring-mass System
VM47 - Torsional Frequency of a Suspended Disk
VM48 - Natural Frequency of a Motor-generator
VM50 - Fundamental Frequency of a Simply Supported Beam
VM52 - Automobile Suspension System Vibrations
VM53 - Vibration of a String Under Tension
VM54 - Vibration of a Rotating Cantilever Blade
VM55 - Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane
VM57 - Torsional Frequencies of a Drill Pipe
VM59 - Lateral Vibration of an Axially-loaded Bar
VM60 - Natural Frequency of a Cross-ply Laminated Spherical Shell
VM61 - Longitudinal Vibration of a Free-free Rod
VM62 - Vibration of a Wedge
VM66 - Vibration of a Flat Plate
VM67 - Radial Vibrations of a Circular Ring from an Axisymmetric Model
VM68 - PSD Response of a Two DOF Spring-mass System
VM69 - Seismic Response
VM70 - Seismic Response of a Beam Structure
VM76 - Harmonic Response of a Guitar String
314
Section 3.12: Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution

VM89 - Natural Frequencies of a Two-mass-spring System
VM151 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Circular Plate
VM152 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane (Harmonic Els)
VM153 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane (Modal)
VM154 - Vibration of a Fluid Coupling
VM175 - Natural Frequency of a Piezoelectric Transducer
VM181 - Natural Frequency of a Flat Circular Plate with a Clamped Edge
VM182 - Transient Response of a Spring-mass System
VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-mass System
VM202 - Transverse Vibrations of a Shear Beam
VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-supported Thick Square Plate
VM212 - Modal Analysis of a Rectangular Cavity
3.11. Prestressed Modal Analysis

Use a prestressed modal analysis to calculate the frequencies and mode shapes of a prestressed structure, such
as a spinning turbine blade. The procedure to do a prestressed modal analysis is essentially the same as a regular
modal analysis, except that you first need to prestress the structure by doing a static analysis:
1.
Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on [PSTRES,ON]. The same
lumped mass setting [LUMPM] used here must also be used in the later prestress modal analysis.
Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis describes the procedure to obtain a static solution.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the modal solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue
PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT (if ANSYS creates it) and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis
must be available. If the model is spinning, include spin-softening effects (via the OMEGA command's
KSPIN option) if necessary.
3.
Expand the modes and review them in the postprocessor.
Step 1 above can also be a transient analysis. In such a case, save the EMAT and ESAV files at the desired time
point.
If the deformed shape from the static solution differs significantly from its nondeformed shape, you can perform
a prestressed modal analysis of a large-deflection solution instead.
3.12. Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution

You can also perform a prestressed modal analysis following a large deflection (NLGEOM,ON) static analysis in
order to calculate the frequencies and mode shapes of a highly deformed structure. Use the prestressed modal
analysis procedure, but use the PSOLVE command (rather than the SOLVE command) to obtain the modal
solution, as shown in the sample input listing below.
Along with the PSOLVE command, you must issue the UPCOORD command to update the coordinates necessary
for obtaining the correct stresses.
This procedure uses the element matrices and element load vectors (for example, from pressures, temperature
or acceleration loads) from a previous static analysis. These loads will be passed through to a subsequent mode
superposition analysis if specified (LVSCALE command).
Prestress must be applied (PSTRES,ON) during the static portion of the analysis. However, in cases where stressstiffening helps convergence:
315
Stress-stiffening (SSTIF,ON) must be applied instead. (This requirement applies to elements outside of
the 18x family of elements only.)
The EMATWRITE,YES command is also necessary to write the element matrices to File.EMAT.
Issuing either a PSTRES,OFF or SSTIF,OFF command prevents all previously specified prestressing from being
applied.
If the model is spinning, include spin-softening effects (via the OMEGA command's KSPIN option) in the modal
solution if necessary.
! Initial, large deflection static analysis
!
/PREP7
...
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
! Static analysis
NLGEOM,ON
! Large deflection analysis
PSTRES,ON
! Flag to calculate the prestress matrix
...
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Prestressed modal analysis
!
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
! Modal analysis
UPCOORD,1.0,ON
! Display mode shapes relative to deformed geometry
!
in the postprocessor.
PSTRES,ON
! Prestress effects ON
MODOPT,...
! Select eigensolver
MXPAND,...
! Specify the number of modes to expand, if desired.
PSOLVE,EIGxxxx
! Calculate the eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
! Use EIGLANB or EIGFULL to match MODOPT command.
FINISH
/SOLU
!Additional solution step for expansion.
EXPASS,ON
PSOLVE,EIGEXP
! Expand the eigenvector solution. (Required if you
!
want to review mode shapes in the postprocessor.)
FINISH
Note You may also use one of the other eigensolvers (PSOLVE,EIGSYM, PSOLVE,EIGUNSY, PSOLVE,EIGDAMP or PSOLVE,EIGREDUC). In such a case, a PSOLVE,TRIANG command must precede the
PSOLVE,EIGxxx command.
3.13. Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods

The basic equation solved in a typical undamped modal analysis is the classical eigenvalue problem:
[K ]{ i} = 2 [M]{ i}
i
where:
[K] = stiffness matrix
{i} = mode shape vector (eigenvector) of mode i
2
i = natural circular frequency of mode i ( i is the eigenvalue)
[M] = mass matrix
Many numerical methods are available to solve the above equation. ANSYS offers these methods:
316
Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods
Block Lanczos method (default)
Subspace method
PowerDynamics method
Reduced (Householder) method
Unsymmetric method
Damped method (The damped method solves a different equation; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for more information.)
QR damped method (The QR damped method solves a different equation; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information.)
Note The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS Professional
program.
The first four methods (Block Lanczos, subspace, PowerDynamics, and reduced) are the most commonly used.
Table 3.6: Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices compares these four mode-extraction methods. Following
the table is a brief description of each mode-extraction method.
Table 3.6 Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices

Eigensolver
Application
Memory
Required
Disk Required
Block Lanczos
Default. To find many modes (about 40+) of large models. Recommended when the model consists of poorly shaped solid and shell elements. This solver performs well when the model consists of shells or
a combination of shells and solids. Works faster but requires about
50% more memory than subspace.
Medium
Low
Subspace
To find few modes (up to about 40) of large models. Recommended

when the model consists of well-shaped solid and shell elements.
Works well if memory availability is limited.
Low
High
Power Dynamics To find few modes (up to about 20) of large models. Recommended
for fast computation of eigenvalues of over 100K DOF models. On
coarse mesh models, the frequencies are approximate. Missed modes
are possible when repeated frequencies are present.
High
Low
Reduced
Low
Low
To find all modes of small to medium models (less than 10K DOF). Can
be used to find few modes (up to about 40) of large models with
proper selection of master DOF, but accuracy of frequencies depends
on the master DOF selected.
3.13.1. Block Lanczos Method

The Block Lanczos eigenvalue solver is the default. It uses the Lanczos algorithm where the Lanczos recursion is
performed with a block of vectors. This method is as accurate as the subspace method, but faster. The Block
Lanczos method uses the sparse matrix solver, overriding any solver specified via the EQSLV command.
The Block Lanczos method is especially powerful when searching for eigenfrequencies in a given part of the eigenvalue spectrum of a given system. The convergence rate of the eigenfrequencies will be about the same
when extracting modes in the midrange and higher end of the spectrum as when extracting the lowest modes.
Therefore, when you use a shift frequency (FREQB) to extract n modes beyond the starting value of FREQB, the
algorithm extracts the n modes beyond FREQB at about the same speed as it extracts the lowest n modes.
317
3.13.2. Subspace Method

The subspace method uses the subspace iteration technique, which internally uses the generalized Jacobi iteration
algorithm. It is highly accurate because it uses the full [K] and [M] matrices. For the same reason, however, the
subspace method is slower than the reduced method. This method is typically used in cases where high accuracy
is required or where selecting master DOF is not practical.
When doing a modal analysis with a large number of constraint equations, use the subspace method with the
frontal solver instead of the JCG solver, or use the Block Lanczos mode-extraction method. Using the JCG solver
when your analysis has many constraint equations could result in an internal element stiffness assembly that
requires large amounts of memory.
3.13.3. PowerDynamics Method

The PowerDynamics method internally uses the subspace iterations, but uses the PCG iterative solver. This
method may be significantly faster than either the subspace or the Block Lanczos methods, but may not converge
if the model contains poorly-shaped elements, or if the matrix is ill-conditioned. This method is especially useful
in very large models (100,000+ DOFs) to obtain a solution for the first few modes. Do not use this method if you
will be running a subsequent spectrum analysis.
The PowerDynamics method does not perform a Sturm sequence check (that is, it does not check for missing
modes), which might affect problems with multiple repeated frequencies. This method always uses lumped
mass approximation.
Note If you use PowerDynamics to solve a model that includes rigid body modes, be sure to issue the
RIGID command or choose one of its GUI equivalents (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Options or
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Analysis Options).
3.13.4. Reduced Method

The reduced method uses the HBI algorithm (Householder-Bisection-Inverse iteration) to calculate the eigenvalues
and eigenvectors. It is relatively fast because it works with a small subset of degrees of freedom called master
DOF. Using master DOF leads to an exact [K] matrix but an approximate [M] matrix (usually with some loss in
mass). The accuracy of the results, therefore, depends on how well [M] is approximated, which in turn depends
on the number and location of masters. Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction presents guidelines to select master DOFs.
3.13.5. Unsymmetric Method

The unsymmetric method, which also uses the full [K] and [M] matrices, is meant for problems where the stiffness
and mass matrices are unsymmetric (for example, acoustic fluid-structure interaction problems). It uses the
Lanczos algorithm which calculates complex eigenvalues and eigenvectors if the system is non-conservative
(for example, a shaft mounted on bearings). The real part of the eigenvalue represents the natural frequency
and the imaginary part is a measure of the stability of the system - a negative value means the system is stable,
whereas a positive value means the system is unstable. Sturm sequence checking is not available for this method.
Therefore, missed modes are a possibility at the higher end of the frequencies extracted.
3.13.6. Damped Method

The damped method is meant for problems where damping cannot be ignored, such as rotor dynamics applications. It uses full matrices ([K], [M], and the damping matrix [C]). It uses the Lanczos algorithm and calculates
complex eigenvalues and eigenvectors (as described below). Sturm sequence checking is not available for this
method. Therefore, missed modes are a possibility at the higher end of the frequencies extracted.
318
Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction
3.13.6.1. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvalue

The imaginary part of the eigenvalue, , represents the steady-state circular frequency of the system. The real
part of the eigenvalue, , represents the stability of the system. If is less than zero, then the displacement
amplitude will decay exponentially, in accordance with EXP(). If is greater than zero, then the amplitude will
increase exponentially. (Or, in other words, negative gives an exponentially decreasing, or stable, response;
and positive gives an exponentially increasing, or unstable, response.) If there is no damping, the real component
of the eigenvalue will be zero.
Note The eigenvalue results reported by ANSYS are actually divided by 2* . This gives the frequency
in Hz (cycles/second). In other words:
Imaginary part of eigenvalue, as reported = /(2* )
Real part of eigenvalue, as reported = /(2* )
3.13.6.2. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvector

In a damped system, the response at different nodes can be out of phase. At any given node, the amplitude will
be the vector sum of the real and imaginary components of the eigenvector.
3.13.7. QR Damped Method

The QR damped method combines the advantages of the Block Lanczos method with the complex Hessenberg
method. The key concept is to approximately represent the first few complex damped eigenvalues by modal
transformation using a small number of eigenvectors of the undamped system. After the undamped mode
shapes are evaluated by using the real eigensolution (Block Lanczos method), the equations of motion are
transformed to these modal coordinates.
Using the QR algorithm, a smaller eigenvalue problem is then solved in the modal subspace. This approach gives
good results for lightly damped systems and can also be applicable to any arbitrary damping type (proportional
or non-proportional symmetric damping or nonsymmetrical gyroscopic damping matrix). This approach also
supports nonsymmetrical stiffness if present in the model.
The QR Damp eigensolver is applicable for models with an unsymmetrical global stiffness matrix where only a
few elements contribute nonsymmetrical element stiffness matrices. Example: Brake friction problem wherein
the local part of a model with friction contacts is producing nonsymmetrical stiffness matrix in contact elements.
Because the accuracy of this method is dependent on the number of modes used in the calculations, a sufficient
number of fundamental modes are recommended, especially for highly damped systems to provide good results.
This method is not recommended for critically damped or overdamped systems. This method outputs both the
real and imaginary eigenvalues (frequencies), but outputs only the real eigenvectors (mode shapes). When requested however, complex mode shapes of damped systems are computed.
3.14. Matrix Reduction

Matrix reduction is a way to reduce the size of the matrices of a model and perform a quicker and cheaper analysis. It is mainly used in dynamic analyses such as modal, harmonic, and transient analyses. Matrix reduction is
also used in substructure analyses to generate a superelement.
Matrix reduction allows you to build a detailed model, as you would for a static stress analysis, and use only a
"dynamic" portion of it for a dynamic analysis. You choose the "dynamic" portion by identifying key degrees of
freedom, called master degrees of freedom, that characterize the dynamic behavior of the model. The ANSYS
program then calculates reduced matrices and the reduced DOF solution in terms of the master DOF. You can
319

then expand the solution to the full DOF set by performing an expansion pass. The main advantage of this procedure is the savings in CPU time to obtain the reduced solution, especially for dynamic analyses of large problems.
3.14.1. Theoretical Basis of Matrix Reduction

The ANSYS program uses the Guyan Reduction procedure to calculate the reduced matrices. The key assumption
in this procedure is that for the lower frequencies, inertia forces on the slave DOF (those DOF being reduced out)
are negligible compared to elastic forces transmitted by the master DOF. Therefore, the total mass of the structure
is apportioned among only the master DOF. The net result is that the reduced stiffness matrix is exact, whereas
the reduced mass and damping matrices are approximate. For details about how the reduced matrices are calculated, refer to the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
3.14.1.1. Guidelines for Selecting Master DOF

Choosing master DOF is an important step in a reduced analysis. The accuracy of the reduced mass matrix (and
hence the accuracy of the solution) depends on the number and location of masters. For a given problem, you
can choose many different sets of master DOF and will probably obtain acceptable results in all cases.
You can choose masters using M and MGEN commands, or you can have the program choose masters during
solution using the TOTAL command. We recommend that you do both: choose a few masters yourself, and also
have the ANSYS program choose masters. This way, the program can pick up any modes that you may have
missed. The following list summarizes the guidelines for selecting master DOF:
The total number of master DOF should be at least twice the number of modes of interest.
Choose master DOF in directions in which you expect the structure or component to vibrate. For a flat
plate, for example, you should choose at least a few masters in the out-of-plane direction (see Figure 3.2: Choose Master DOF (a)). In cases where motion in one direction induces a significant motion in
another direction, choose master DOF in both directions (see Figure 3.2: Choose Master DOF (b)).
Figure 3.2 Choose Master DOF
(a) Possible out-of-plane masters for a flat plate(b) Motion in X induces motion in Y
320
Choose masters at locations having relatively large mass or rotary inertia and relatively low stiffness (see
Figure 3.3: Choosing Master DOFs). Examples of such locations are overhangs and "loosely" connected
structures. Conversely, do not choose masters at locations with relatively small mass, or at locations with
high stiffness (such as DOF close to constraints).
Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction
Figure 3.3 Choosing Master DOFs
Choose masters at locations with (a) large rotary inertia, (b) large mass
If your primary interest is in bending modes, you can neglect rotational and "stretching" DOF.
If the degree of freedom to be chosen belongs to a coupled set, choose only the first (primary) DOF of
the coupled set.
Choose master DOF at locations where forces or nonzero displacements are to be applied.
For axisymmetric shell models (SHELL51 or SHELL61), choose as masters the global UX degree of freedom
at all nodes on those sections of the model that are parallel to or nearly parallel to the center line, so oscillatory motions between master DOF can be avoided (see Figure 3.4: Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model). This recommendation can be relaxed if the motion is primarily parallel to the
centerline. For axisymmetric harmonic elements with MODE = 2 or greater, choose as masters both UX
and UZ degrees of freedom.
Figure 3.4 Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model
The best way to check the validity of the master DOF set is to rerun the analysis with twice (or half) the number
of masters and to compare the results. Another way is to review the reduced mass distribution printed during a
modal solution. The reduced mass should be, at least in the dominant direction of motion, within 10-15 percent
of the total mass of the structure.
321
3.14.1.2. A Note About Program-Selected Masters

If you let the ANSYS program select masters [TOTAL], the distribution of masters selected will depend on the
order in which elements are processed during the solution. For example, different master DOF sets may be selected depending on whether the elements are processed from left to right or from right to left. However, this
difference usually yields insignificant differences in the results.
For meshes with uniform element sizes and properties (for example, a flat plate), the distribution of masters will,
in general, not be uniform. In such cases, you should specify some master DOF of your own [M, MGEN]. The same
recommendation applies to structures with an irregular mass distribution, where the program-selected master
DOF may be concentrated in the higher-mass regions.
322
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis

4.1. Definition of Harmonic Response Analysis
Any sustained cyclic load will produce a sustained cyclic response (a harmonic response) in a structural system.
Harmonic response analysis gives you the ability to predict the sustained dynamic behavior of your structures,
thus enabling you to verify whether or not your designs will successfully overcome resonance, fatigue, and
other harmful effects of forced vibrations.
4.2. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis

Harmonic response analysis is a technique used to determine the steady-state response of a linear structure to
loads that vary sinusoidally (harmonically) with time. The idea is to calculate the structure's response at several
frequencies and obtain a graph of some response quantity (usually displacements) versus frequency. "Peak" responses are then identified on the graph and stresses reviewed at those peak frequencies.
This analysis technique calculates only the steady-state, forced vibrations of a structure. The transient vibrations,
which occur at the beginning of the excitation, are not accounted for in a harmonic response analysis (see Figure 4.1: Harmonic Response Systems).
Figure 4.1 Harmonic Response Systems
6 2 U
!0 79 5T#S4
!0 33P! 3!RQ
2 B 2 2
ad` 6 IP 4EHG' CFEC

20 D
2 B2
!0 339A!
!! &19!08$
0 @
Y`

7
abc
6 2 U @ 0
!0 79 51!X#S4
!0 33W9H2 D @9 V
2 B 2 "
6 4 20 $ %
7 531)'(&$
#"!

6
3T4
'
8$
6
(94
Typical harmonic response system. Fo and are known. uo and are unknown (a). Transient and
steady-state dynamic response of a structural system (b).
Harmonic response analysis is a linear analysis. Some nonlinearities, such as plasticity will be ignored, even if
they are defined. You can, however, have unsymmetric system matrices such as those encountered in a fluidstructure interaction problem (see Chapter 15, Acoustics in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide). Harmonic
analysis can also be performed on a prestressed structure, such as a violin string (assuming the harmonic stresses
are much smaller than the pretension stress). See Section 4.11.1.1: Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis
for more information on prestressed harmonic analyses.
4.3. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis

You use the same set of commands to build a model and perform a harmonic response analysis that you use to
do any other type of finite element analysis. Likewise, you choose similar options from the graphical user interface
(GUI) to build and solve models no matter what type of analysis you are doing.
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) and Section 4.7: Sample Harmonic Response
Analysis (Command or Batch Method) show a sample harmonic response analysis done via the GUI and via
commands, respectively.
For detailed, alphabetized descriptions of the ANSYS commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
4.4. The Three Solution Methods

Three harmonic response analysis methods are available: full, reduced, and mode superposition. (A fourth, relatively
expensive method is to do a transient dynamic analysis with the harmonic loads specified as time-history loading
functions; see Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis for details.) The ANSYS Professional program allows only
the mode superposition method. Before we study the details of how to implement each of these methods, let's
explore the advantages and disadvantages of each method.
4.4.1. The Full Method

The full method is the easiest of the three methods. It uses the full system matrices to calculate the harmonic response (no matrix reduction). The matrices may be symmetric or unsymmetric. The advantages of the full
method are:
It is easy to use, because you don't have to worry about choosing master degrees of freedom or mode
shapes.
It uses full matrices, so no mass matrix approximation is involved.
It allows unsymmetric matrices, which are typical of such applications as acoustics and bearing problems.
It calculates all displacements and stresses in a single pass.
It accepts all types of loads: nodal forces, imposed (nonzero) displacements, and element loads (pressures
and temperatures).
It allows effective use of solid-model loads.
A disadvantage is that this method usually is more expensive than either of the other methods when you use
the frontal solver. However, when you use the JCG solver or the ICCG solver, the full method can be very efficient.
4.4.2. The Reduced Method

The reduced method enables you to condense the problem size by using master degrees of freedom and reduced
matrices. After the displacements at the master DOF have been calculated, the solution can be expanded to the
original full DOF set. (See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction, for a more detailed discussion of the reduction procedure.)
The advantages of this method are:
It is faster and less expensive compared to the full method when you are using the frontal solver.
Prestressing effects can be included.
The disadvantages of the reduced method are:
42
Section 4.5: How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis
The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the
expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However, the expansion
pass might be optional for some applications.)
Element loads (pressures, temperatures, etc.) cannot be applied.
All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model
loads.)
4.4.3. The Mode Superposition Method

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (eigenvectors) from a modal analysis to calculate
the structure's response. Its advantages are:
It is faster and less expensive than either the reduced or the full method for many problems.
Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be applied in the harmonic response analysis
via the LVSCALE command, unless the modal analysis was done using PowerDynamics.
It allows solutions to be clustered about the structure's natural frequencies. This results in a smoother,
more accurate tracing of the response curve.
Prestressing effects can be included.
It accepts modal damping (damping ratio as a function of frequency).
Disadvantages of the mode superposition method are:
Imposed (nonzero) displacements cannot be applied.
When you are using PowerDynamics for the modal analysis, initial conditions cannot have previouslyapplied loads.
4.4.4. Restrictions Common to All Three Methods

All three methods are subject to certain common restrictions:
All loads must be sinusoidally time-varying.
All loads must have the same frequency.
No nonlinearities are permitted.
Transient effects are not calculated.
You can overcome any of these restrictions by performing a transient dynamic analysis, with harmonic loads
expressed as time-history loading functions. Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis describes the procedure
for a transient dynamic analysis.
4.5. How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis

We will first describe how to do a harmonic response analysis using the full method, and then list the steps that
are different for the reduced and mode superposition methods.
4.5.1. Full Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure for a full harmonic response analysis consists of three main steps:
1.
Build the model.

43

2.
3.
Review the results.

and Meshing Guide.
Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form) must
be defined. Material properties may be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear material properties, if any, are ignored.
Only linear behavior is valid in a harmonic response analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, will be treated
as linear elements. If you include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on
their initial status and are never changed.
For a full harmonic response analysis, you can define frequency-dependent elastic material properties by
using TB,ELASTIC and TBFIELD; use TB,SDAMP and TBFIELD to define your structural damping coefficients.
4.5.3. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

In this step, you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load step options, and initiate the finite
element solution. Details of how to do these tasks are explained below.
Note Peak harmonic response occurs at forcing frequencies that match the natural frequencies of
your structure. Before obtaining the harmonic solution, you should first determine the natural frequencies
of your structure by obtaining a modal solution (as explained in Chapter 3, Modal Analysis).
4.5.3.1. Enter the ANSYS Solution Processor

Command(s): /SOLU
4.5.3.2. Define the Analysis Type and Options

ANSYS offers these options for a harmonic response analysis:

Option
Command
GUI Path
New Analysis
ANTYPE
Analysis Type: Harmonic Response ANTYPE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Harmonic
Solution Method
HROPT
Solution Listing Format
HROUT
Mass Matrix Formulation
LUMPM
Equation Solver
EQSLV
44
Option: New Analysis (ANTYPE)

Choose New Analysis. Restarts are not valid in a harmonic response analysis; if you need to apply additional
harmonic loads, do a new analysis each time.
Option: Analysis Type: Harmonic Response (ANTYPE)

Choose Harmonic Response as the analysis type.
Option: Solution Method (HROPT)

Choose one of the following solution methods:
Full method
Reduced method
Mode superposition method
Option: Solution Listing Format (HROUT)

This option determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output (Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and phase
angles.
Option: Mass Matrix Formulation (LUMPM)

Use this option to specify the default formulation (which is element dependent) or lumped mass approximation. We recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for some problems involving "skinny" structures such as slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass approximation
often yields better results. Also, the lumped mass approximation can result in a shorter run time and lower
memory requirements.
After you complete the fields on the Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box, click on OK to reach a second
Harmonic Analysis dialog box, where you choose an equation solver.
Option: Equation Solver (EQSLV)

You can choose the frontal solver (default), the sparse direct solver (SPARSE), the Jacobi Conjugate
Gradient (JCG) solver, or the Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient (ICCG) solver. The frontal direct
solver or sparse direct solver is recommended for most structural models. When using a direct solver to
solve a relatively large problem, choose the sparse solver over the frontal solver.
4.5.3.3. Apply Loads on the Model

A harmonic analysis, by definition, assumes that any applied load varies harmonically (sinusoidally) with time.
To completely specify a harmonic load, three pieces of information are usually required: the amplitude, the phase
angle, and the forcing frequency range (see Figure 4.2: Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and
Amplitude/Phase Angle).
45
Figure 4.2 Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase

Angle
3 S
7 $A43 2! 0@9(
6
7 2&$#"1hI$ge
7Hf
78$453 2! 1)(
6 0
2 7
" RQ
P

a

`Y XWbXc &UT
V # 3
' &$# "

% !

P
P
# IHdC
!
P HIGDECB
F
The amplitude is the maximum value of the load, which you specify using the commands shown in Table 4.2:
Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis.
The phase angle is a measure of the time by which the load lags (or leads) a frame of reference. On the complex
plane (see Figure 4.2: Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle), it is the
angle measured from the real axis. The phase angle is required only if you have multiple loads that are out of
phase with each other. For example, the unbalanced rotating antenna shown in Figure 4.3: An Unbalanced
Rotating Antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support points. The phase angle cannot
be specified directly; instead, you specify the real and imaginary components of the out-of-phase loads using
the VALUE and VALUE2 fields of the appropriate displacement and force commands. Pressures and other surface
and body loads can only be specified with a phase angle of 0 (no imaginary component) with the following exceptions: nonzero imaginary components of pressures can be applied using the SURF153 and SURF154 elements
in a full harmonic response analysis, or using a mode superposition harmonic response analysis if the mode-extraction method is Block Lanczos (see the SF and SFE commands). Figure 4.2: Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle shows how to calculate the real and imaginary components.
The forcing frequency range is the frequency range of the harmonic load (in cycles/time). It is specified later as a
load step option with the HARFRQ command.
46
Figure 4.3 An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna

7
86 5 4 3

@69 8!4
4 6
6
%
D
C!@@6 !@!
A A B
5 A
@!9 !9 @9 3 @H9G!4 #
$ 9 6 C I
I
F C
&
2
%
$ "
#1)
0 (

9
@6!9 !9 @9 3 @H9G!4 C#
C I
I
F
E
&
'
%
$ "
#!

0

6!4 T X
W
V
8U 5 !4 @! IG9 5S!PR@P
$
C T C
Q
F
Q 6 4
An unbalanced rotating antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support
points.
Note A harmonic analysis cannot calculate the response to multiple forcing functions acting simultaneously with different frequencies (for example, two machines with different rotating speeds running at
the same time). However, POST1 can superimpose multiple load cases to obtain the total response.
Table 4.2: Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis summarizes the loads applicable to a to a harmonic response analysis. Except for inertia loads, you can define loads either on the solid model (keypoints, lines,
and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of solid-model loads
versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Table 4.2 Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis

Load Type
Category
Cmd Family
GUI Path
Displacement (UX, UY,

UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)
Constraints

Structural> Displacement
Force, Moment (FX, FY,

FZ, MX, MY, MZ)
Forces

Structural> Force/Moment
Pressure (PRES)
Surface Loads
SF

Structural> Pressure
BF

Structural> Temperature
Temperature (TEMP), Flu- Body Loads

ence (FLUE)
47

Load Type
Category
Gravity, Spinning, etc.
Cmd Family
Inertia Loads
GUI Path
Structural> Other
In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
4.5.3.3.1. Applying Loads Using Commands

Table 4.3: Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis lists all the commands you can use to apply loads
in a harmonic response analysis.
Table 4.3 Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis

Load Type
Displacement
Solid Model
or FE
Entity
Apply
Delete
List
Operate
Apply Settings
DTRAN
DL
DLDELE
DLLIST
DTRAN
DA
DADELE
DALIST
DTRAN
DDELE
DLIST
DSCALE
Solid Model Keypoints
FK
FKDELE
FKLIST
FTRAN
Finite Elem
FDELE
FLIST
FSCALE
FCUM
Solid Model Lines
SFL
SFLDELE
SFLLIST
SFTRAN
SFGRAD
Solid Model Areas
SFA
SFADELE
SFALIST
SFTRAN
SFGRAD
Finite Elem
Nodes
SF
SFDELE
SFLIST
SFSCALE
SFGRAD,
SFCUM
Finite Elem
Elements
SFE
SFEDELE
SFELIST
SFSCALE
SFGRAD, SFBEAM, SFFUN,

SFCUM
BFK
BFKDELE
BFKLIST
BFTRAN
Solid Model Lines
BFL
BFLDELE
BFLLIST
BFTRAN
Solid Model Areas
BFA
BFADELE
BFALIST
BFTRAN
Solid Model Volumes
BFV
BFVDELE
BFVLIST
BFTRAN
Finite Elem
Nodes
BF
BFDELE
BFLIST
BFSCALE
BFCUM ,
BFUNIF ,
TBUNIF
Finite Elem
Inertia
DKLIST
Finite Elem
Temperature,
Fluence
DKDELE
Solid Model Areas
Pressure
DK
Solid Model Lines
Force
Elements
BFE
BFEDELE
BFELIST
BFSCALE
BFCUM
Nodes
Nodes
ACEL,
OMEGA,
DOMEGA,
CGLOC,
CGOMGA,
DCGOMG
DSYM, DCUM
-
4.5.3.3.2. Applying Loads and Listing Loads Using the GUI

These steps for a harmonic analysis are the same as those for most other analyses. See Section 3.5.4.2: Applying
Loads Using the GUI and Section 3.5.4.3: Listing Loads for more information.
48
4.5.3.4. Specify Load Step Options

The following options are available for a harmonic response analysis:

Option
Command
GUI Path
General Options
Number of Harmonic Solutions NSUBST
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps
Stepped or Ramped Loads
KBC
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step or Freq and Substeps
Forcing Frequency Range
HARFRQ
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps
Damping
ALPHAD, BETAD, DM- Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/FrePRAT
quenc> Damping
Dynamics Options
MP,DAMP, MP,DMPR
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other>

Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural>
Damping
OUTPR
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output

Ctrls> Solu Printout
Output Control Options

Printed Output
Database and Results File Output OUTRES

Ctrls> DB/ Results File
Extrapolation of Results

Ctrls> Integration Pt
ERESX
4.5.3.4.1. General Options

General options include the following:
Number of Harmonic Solutions (NSUBST)

You can request any number of harmonic solutions to be calculated. The solutions (or substeps) will be
evenly spaced within the specified frequency range (HARFRQ). For example, if you specify 10 solutions
in the range 30 to 40 Hz, the program will calculate the response at 31, 32, 33, ..., 39, and 40 Hz. No response
is calculated at the lower end of the frequency range.
Stepped or Ramped Loads (KBC)

The loads may be stepped or ramped. By default, they are ramped, that is, the load amplitude is gradually
increased with each substep. By stepping the loads (KBC,1), the same load amplitude will be maintained
for all substeps in the frequency range.
Note Surface and body loads do not ramp from their previous load step values, except for those
applied to PLANE2, SOLID45, SOLID92, and SOLID95 element types. The remaining element types
always ramp from zero or from the value specified via BFUNIF.
49
4.5.3.4.2. Dynamics Options

Dynamics options include the following:
Forcing Frequency Range (HARFRQ)

The forcing frequency range must be defined (in cycles/time) for a harmonic analysis. Within this range,
you then specify the number of solutions to be calculated.
Damping
Damping in some form should be specified; otherwise, the response will be infinity at the resonant frequencies. ALPHAD and BETAD result in a frequency-dependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies
a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies. Damping can also be specified for individual materials using MP,DAMP and MP,DMPR. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
Note If no damping is specified in a direct harmonic analysis (full or reduced), the program uses
zero damping by default.
Alpha (Mass) Damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (Stiffness) Damping (BETAD)
Constant Damping Ratio (DMPRAT)
Material Dependent Damping Multiplier (MP,DAMP)
Constant Material Damping Coefficient (MP,DMPR)
4.5.3.4.3. Output Controls

Output control options include the following:
Printed Output (OUTPR)

Use this option to include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT).
Database and Results File Output (OUTRES)

This option controls the data on the results file (Jobname.RST).
Extrapolation of Results (ERESX)

Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
4.5.3.5. Save a Backup Copy of the Database to a Named File

You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Command(s): SAVE
4.5.3.6. Start Solution Calculations

Command(s): SOLVE
410
4.5.3.7. Repeat for Additional Load Steps

Repeat the process for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If you plan
to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from one load step to the
next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows you to store the load steps on files and then solve
them at once using a macro, is described in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
4.5.3.8. Leave SOLUTION

Command(s): FINISH

The results data for a harmonic analysis are the same as the data for a basic structural analysis with the following
additions: If you defined damping in the structure, the response will be out-of-phase with the loads. All results
are then complex in nature and are stored in terms of real and imaginary parts. Complex results will also be
produced if out-of-phase loads were applied. See Section 2.3.6: Review the Results in Chapter 2, Structural
Static Analysis.
You can review these results using either POST26 or POST1. The normal procedure is to first use POST26 to
identify critical forcing frequencies - frequencies at which the highest displacements (or stresses) occur at points
of interest in the model - and to then use POST1 to postprocess the entire model at these critical forcing frequencies.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific frequencies.
POST26 allows you to review results at specific points in the model over the entire frequency range.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a harmonic response analysis are explained below. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.

The points to remember for a harmonic analysis are the same as those for most structural analyses. See Section 2.3.6.2: Points to Remember in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.
4.5.4.3. Using POST26

POST26 works with tables of result item versus frequency, known as variables. Each variable is assigned a reference
number, with variable number 1 reserved for frequency.
1.
Define the variables using these options:

Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
Note The NSOL command is for primary data (nodal displacements), the ESOL command for
derived data (element solution data, such as stresses), and the RFORCE command for reaction
force data. To specify the total force, static component of the total force, damping component,
or the inertia component, use the FORCE command.
411

2.
Graph the variables (versus frequency or any other variable). Then use PLCPLX to work with just the
amplitude, phase angle, real part, or imaginary part.
Command(s): PLVAR, PLCPLX
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph
3.
Get a listing of the variable. To list just the extreme values, use the EXTREM command. Then use the
PRCPLX command to work with amplitude and phase angle or real and imaginary part.
Command(s): PRVAR, EXTREM, PRCPLX
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables> List Extremes
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> List
Many other functions, such as performing math operations among variables (in complex arithmetic), moving
variables into array parameters, moving array parameters into variables, etc., are available in POST26; see Chapter 6,
The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the model, you can identify the critical frequencies for further POST1 postprocessing.

1.
Read in results for the desired harmonic solution. You can use the SET command for this purpose, but
it will read in either the real component or the imaginary component, not both at the same time. The
true magnitude of the results is given by an SRSS (square-root-of-sum-of-squares) combination of the
real and imaginary components (see Figure 4.2: Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and
Amplitude/Phase Angle) and can be done for specific points in the model in POST26.
2.
Display the deformed shape of the structure, contours of stresses, strains, etc., or vector plots of vector
items (PLVECT). To obtain tabular listings of data, use PRNSOL, PRESOL, PRRSOL, etc.

Command(s): PLDISP

GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element
Solu
Use these options to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX,
EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape
on the display.
Option: Vector Plots

Command(s): PLVECT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined
Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains
(EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...).
412

Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data) etc. NSORT, ESORT
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method)

GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution
Many other functions, such as mapping results on to a path, transforming results to different coordinate systems,
load case combinations, etc., are available in POST1; see Chapter 3, Solution in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
for details.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, HARFRQ, DMPRAT,
NSUBST, KBC, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will determine the harmonic response of a two-mass-spring system.

Determine the response amplitude (Xi) and phase angle (i) for each mass (mi) of the system shown below when
excited by a harmonic force (F1sin t) acting on mass m1.

Material properties for this problem are:
m1 = m2 = 0.5 lb-sec2/in
k1 = k2 = kc = 200 lb/in
Loading for this problem is:
F1 = 200 lb
The spring lengths are arbitrarily selected and are used only to define the spring direction. Two master degrees
of freedom are selected at the masses in the spring direction. A frequency range from zero to 7.5 Hz with a
solution at 7.5/30 = 0.25 Hz intervals is chosen to give an adequate response curve. POST26 is used to get an
amplitude versus frequency display.
413
4.6.3. Problem Diagram

Figure 4.4 Two-Mass-Spring-System

1.
2.
Type the text "Harmonic Response of Two-Mass-Spring System" and click on OK.

1.
2.
3.
Scroll down the list on the left to "Combination" and select it.
4.
Click once on "Spring-damper 14" in the list on the right.
5.
Click on Apply.
6.
Scroll up the list on the left to "Structural Mass" and select it.
7.
Click once on "3D mass 21" in the list on the right.
414

8.
Click on OK. The Library of Element Types dialog box closes.
9.
4.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants.
2.
Click on Add. The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
3.
Click once on Type 1 to highlight it.
4.
Click on OK. The Real Constants for COMBIN14 dialog box appears.
5.
Enter 200 for the spring constant (K) and 0.1 for the damping coefficient (CV1). Click on OK.
6.
Repeat steps 2-4 for Type 2, MASS21.
7.
Enter .5 for mass in X direction and click on OK.
8.
Click on Close to close the Real Constants dialog box.
4.6.3.4. Create the Nodes

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.
2.
Enter 1 for node number.
3.
Enter 0, 0, 0 for the X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
4.
Click on Apply.
5.
6.
Enter 1, 0, 0 for the X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
7.
Click on OK.
8.
appears.
9.
Click once on "Node numbers" to turn node numbers on.
10. Click on OK.

11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds. A
12. In the ANSYS Graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 4 (on the left and right sides of the screen). A
small box appears around each node.
13. Click on OK on the picking menu. The Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
14. Click on OK to accept the default of 2 nodes to fill. Nodes 2 and 3 appear in the graphics window.
4.6.3.5. Create the Spring Elements

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2.
In the graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 2.
3.
Click on Apply. A line appears between the selected nodes.
4.
Click once on nodes 2 and 3.
5.
Click on Apply. A line appears between the selected nodes.

415

6.
Click once on nodes 3 and 4.
7.
Click on OK. A line appears between the selected nodes.
4.6.3.6. Create the Mass Elements

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes.
2.
Enter 2 for element type number.
3.
Enter 2 for real constant set number and click on OK.
4.
Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears.
5.
In the graphics window, click once on node 2.
6.
Click on Apply.
7.
Click once on node 3 and click on OK.
4.6.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
2.
Click once on "Harmonic" and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.
4.
Click once on "Full" to select the solution method.
5.
Click once on "Amplitud + phase" to select the DOF printout format and click on OK.
6.
Click OK in the Full Harmonic Analysis dialog box.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout.
8.
Click on "Last substep" to set the print frequency and click on OK.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps.
10. Enter 0 and 7.5 for the harmonic frequency range.

11. Enter 30 for the number of substeps.
12. Click once on "Stepped" to specify stepped boundary conditions.
13. Click on OK.
4.6.3.8. Define Loads and Boundary Conditions

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2.
Click on Pick All. The Apply U, ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
3.
In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it (make sure no other selections are highlighted).
4.
Click on OK.
5.
6.
In the graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 4.
7.
Click on OK. The Apply U, ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
416

8.
In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX" to highlight it and click once on "UY" to
deselect it.
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/ Moment> On
11. In the graphics window, click once on node 2.
12. Click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
13. In the scroll box for direction of force/moment, click once on "FX."
14. Enter 200 for the real part of force/moment and click on OK.
4.6.3.9. Solve the Model

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.
2.
Review the information in the status window and click on Close.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
4.6.3.10. Review the Results

For this sample, you will review the time-history results of nodes 2 and 3.
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box appears.
2.
Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
3.
Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears.
4.
Enter 2 for reference number of variable.
5.
6.
Enter 2UX for the user-specified label.
7.
In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it.
8.
Click on OK.
9.
Click on Add in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box
appears.
10. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears.
11. Enter 3 for reference number of variable.
12. Enter 3 for node number.
13. Enter 3UX for the user-specified label.
14. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it.
15. Click on OK.
16. Click on Close.
17. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs. The Graph Controls dialog box appears.
18. In the scroll box for type of grid, scroll to "X and Y lines" to select it.
417

19. Click on OK.
20. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph Time-History Variables
dialog box appears. Your graph should look like this:
21. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph.

22. Enter 3 for 2nd variable to graph.
23. Click on OK. A graph appears in the graphic window.

You are now finished with this sample problem.
1.
In the ANSYS Toolbar, click on Quit.
2.
Choose the save option you want and click on OK.
4.7. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example harmonic response analysis of a two-mass-spring system by using the following
ANSYS commands instead of the GUI.
/PREP7
/TITLE, Harmonic response of a two-mass-spring system
ET,1,COMBIN14,,,2
ET,2,MASS21,,,4
R,1,200
! Spring constant = 200
R,2,.5
! Mass = 0.5
N,1
418
Section 4.9: Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

N,4,1
FILL
E,1,2
E,2,3
E,3,4
TYPE,2
REAL,2
E,2
E,3
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,HARMIC
HROPT,FULL
HROUT,OFF
OUTPR,BASIC,1
NSUBST,30
HARFRQ,,7.5
KBC,1
D,1,UY,,,4
D,1,UX,,,4,3
F,2,FX,200
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NSOL,2,2,U,X,2UX
NSOL,3,3,U,X,3UX
/GRID,1
/AXLAB,Y,DISP
PLVAR,2,3
FINISH
! Spring element
! Spring element
! Mass element
! Mass element
! Harmonic response analysis

! Full harmonic response
! Print results as amplitudes and phase angles
!
!
!
!
!
30 Intervals within freq. range

Frequency range from 0 to 7.5 HZ
Step boundary condition
Constrain all 44 DOF
Constrain nodes 1 and 4 in UX
! Store UX Displacements
! Turn grid on
! Y-axis label disp
! Display variables 2 and 3

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional harmonic analyses.
The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of harmonic analysis test cases:
VM19 - Random Vibration Analysis of a Deep Simply-Supported Beam
VM76 - Harmonic Response of a Guitar String
VM86 - Harmonic Response of a Dynamic System
VM87 - Equivalent Structural Damping
VM88 - Response of an Eccentric Weight Exciter
VM90 - Harmonic Response of a Two-Mass-Spring System
VM176 - Frequency Response of Electrical Input Admittance for a Piezoelectric Transducer
VM177 - Natural Frequency of a Submerged Ring
VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-Mass System
VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-Supported Thick Square Plate
4.9. Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

The reduced method, as its name implies, uses reduced matrices to calculate the harmonic solution. The procedure
for a reduced harmonic analysis consists of five main steps:
1.
Build the model.

419

2.
Apply the loads and obtain the reduced solution.
3.
Review the results of the reduced solution.
4.
Expand the solution (expansion pass).
5.
Review the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method. Details of the other steps are explained below.
4.9.1. Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution

By reduced solution, we mean the degree of freedom solution calculated at the master DOF. The tasks required
to obtain the reduced solution are as follows:
1.

Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define the analysis type and options. Options for the reduced solution are the same as described for the
full method except for the following differences:
Choose the reduced solution method.
You can include prestress effects (PSTRES). This requires element files from a previous static (or
transient) analysis that also included prestress effects. See Section 4.11.1: Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis for details.
3.
Define master degrees of freedom. Master DOF are essential or dynamic degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure. For a reduced harmonic response dynamic analysis,
master DOF are also required at locations where you want to apply forces or nonzero displacements.
See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction for guidelines to choose master DOF.
4.
Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the
following restrictions:
Only displacements and forces are valid. Element loads such as pressures, temperatures, and accelerations are not allowed.
Forces and nonzero displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
5.
Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the full method except that the OUTRES
and ERESX commands are not available, and the constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is
not applicable for the reduced method. The OUTPR command controls the printout of the nodal solution
at the master DOF (OUTPR,NSOL,ALL (or NONE)).
6.
Save a copy of the database.

Command(s): SAVE
7.

Command(s): SOLVE
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps).
If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from
one load step to the next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows you to store the load
steps on files and then solve them at once using a macro, is described in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
420

9.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
4.9.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution

Results from the reduced harmonic solution are written to the reduced harmonic displacement file, Jobname.RFRQ. They consist of displacements at the master DOF, which vary harmonically at each forcing frequency
for which the solution was calculated. As with the full method, these displacements will be complex in nature if
damping was defined or if out-of-phase loads were applied. You can review the master DOF displacements as
a function of frequency using POST26. (POST1 cannot be used, because the complete solution at all DOF is not
available.)
The procedure to use POST26 is the same as described for the full method, except for the following differences:
Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command to specify that data are to be read from
Jobname.RFRQ. For example, if HARMONIC is the jobname, the FILE command would be: FILE,HARMONIC,RFRQ. (By default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written by a reduced harmonic solution.)
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use only the
NSOL command to define variables.
4.9.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)

The expansion pass starts with the reduced solution and calculates the complete displacement, stress, and force
solution at all degrees of freedom. These calculations are done only at frequencies and phase angles that you
specify. Therefore, before you begin the expansion pass, you should review the results of the reduced solution
(using POST26) and identify the critical frequencies and phase angles.
An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly in displacements at specific
points on the structure, then the reduced solution could satisfy your requirements. However, if you want to determine displacements at non-master DOF, or if you are interested in the stress solution, then you must perform
an expansion pass.
The .RFRQ, .TRI, .EMAT, and .ESAV files from the reduced solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution was calculated.
4.9.3.2. Expanding the Modes

1.
Reenter the ANSYS solution processor.

Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Activate the expansion pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
421

Option
Command
GUI Path
EXPASS
No. of Solutions to Expand
NUMEXP
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass>

Single Expand> Range of Solu's
Freq. Range for Expansion
NUMEXP

Singe Expand> Range of Solu's
Phase Angle for Expansion
HREXP

Stress Calculations On/Off
NUMEXP,
EXPSOL

Nodal Solution Listing Format
HROUT
Option: Expansion Pass On/Off (EXPASS)

Choose ON.
Option: Number of Solutions to Expand (NUMEXP,NUM)

Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over a frequency range
(specified next). For example, NUMEXP,4,1000,2000 specifies four solutions in the frequency range
1000 to 2000 (that is, expanded solutions at 1250, 1500, 1750, and 2000).
Option: Frequency Range for Expansion (NUMEXP, BEGRNG, ENDRNG)

Specify the frequency range. See the example above. If you do not need to expand multiple solutions,
you can use EXPSOL to identify a single solution for expansion (either by its load step and substep
numbers or by its frequency value).
Option: Phase Angle for Expansion (HREXP)

If multiple solutions are to be expanded over a frequency range (NUMEXP), we suggest that you request both the real and imaginary parts to be expanded (HREXP,ALL). This way, you can easily
combine the two parts in POST26 to review the peak values of displacements, stresses, and other
results.
If, on the other hand, a single solution is to be expanded (EXPSOL), you can specify the phase angle
at which peak displacements occurred using HREXP,angle.
Option: Stress Calculations On/Off (NUMEXP or EXPSOL)

You can turn off stress and force calculations if you are not interested in them. Default is to calculate
stresses and forces.
Option: Nodal Solution Listing Format (HROUT)

Determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output (Jobname.OUT).
You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and phase angles.
3.
Specify load step options. The only options valid for a harmonic expansion pass are output controls:
422
Printed Output

Use this option to include any results data on the printed output file (Jobname.OUT).
Command(s): OUTPR
Database and Results File Output

Use this option to control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST).
Command(s): OUTRES
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File
Extrapolation of Results
Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of
extrapolating them (default).
Note The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE.
Command(s): ERESX
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
4.

Command(s): SOLVE
5.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file.
Caution: Subsequent spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one load step.
6.
Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the postprocessor.

Command(s): FINISH
4.9.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution

This step is the same as the corresponding step in a basic structural analysis with the following additions: You
can review the results using POST1. (If you expanded solutions at several frequencies, you can also use POST26
to obtain graphs of stress versus frequency, strain versus frequency, etc.)
The procedure to use POST1 (or POST26) is the same as described for the full method, except for one difference:
if you requested expansion at a specific phase angle (HREXP,angle), there is only one solution available for each
frequency. Use the SET command to read in the results.
See Section 2.3.6: Review the Results in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.
4.9.5. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a reduced harmonic response analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
-----! Generate model
--FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
423

! Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution
/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,HARMIC
! Harmonic analysis
HROPT,REDU
! Reduced method
HROUT,...
! Harmonic analysis output options
M,...
! Master DOF
TOTAL,...
D,...
! Constraints
F,...
! Loads (real and imaginary components)
HARFRQ,...
! Forcing frequency range
DMPRAT,...
! Damping ratio
NSUBST,...
! Number of harmonic solutions
KBC,...
! Ramped or stepped loads
SAVE
SOLVE
! Initiate multiple load step solution
FINISH
! Review the Results of the Reduced Solution
/POST26
FILE,,RFRQ
! Postprocessing file is Jobname.RFRQ
NSOL,...
! Store nodal result as a variable
PLCPLX,...
! Define how to plot complex variables
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
PRCPLX,...
! Define how to list complex variables
PRVAR,...
! List variables
FINISH
! Expand the Solution
/SOLU
EXPASS,ON
EXPSOL,...
HREXP,...
OUTRES,...
SOLVE
FINISH
!
!
!
!
Reenter SOLUTION
Expansion pass
Expand a single solution
Phase angle for expanded solution
! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution

/POST1
SET,...
! Read results for desired frequency
PLDISP,...
! Deformed shape
PRRSOL,...
! List reactions
PLNSOL,...
! Contour plot of nodal results
-----! Other postprocessing as desired
--FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, M, TOTAL, HARFRQ,
DMPRAT, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, PLDISP,
PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
4.10. Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (obtained from a modal analysis) to calculate the
harmonic response. It is the only method allowed in the ANSYS Professional program. The procedure to use the
method consists of five main steps:
1.
Build the model.
2.
Obtain the modal solution.
3.
Obtain the mode superposition harmonic solution.
4.
Expand the mode superposition solution.
5.
Review the results.
Of these, the first step is the same as described for the full method. The remaining steps are described below.
424
Section 4.10: Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis
4.10.1. Obtain the Modal Solution

Chapter 3, Modal Analysis describes how to obtain a modal solution. Following are some additional hints:
The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos (default), subspace, reduced, PowerDynamics, or
QR damped. (The other methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode superposition.)
Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the harmonic response.
If PowerDynamics was used for the modal solution, no nonzero loads or displacements are allowed (that
is, only u = 0 is valid as the initial condition). PowerDynamics does not create a load vector; therefore, the
LVSCALE command is not valid unless the scale factor is set to zero.
For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at which harmonic
loads will be applied.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during preprocessing or
in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores damping specified during the mode superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a constant damping ratio (DMPRAT), define constant material damping coefficients
(MP,DMPR), or define the damping ratio as a function of mode (MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic analysis.
If you need to apply harmonically varying element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so
on), specify them in the modal analysis. ANSYS ignores the loads for the modal solution, but calculates a
load vector and writes it to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). You can then use the load vector for
the harmonic solution. Only forces, accelerations applied via the ACEL command, and the load vector
created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE command to apply both the real and imaginary
(if they exist) components of the load vector from the modal solution.
The modes need not be expanded for the mode superposition solution. (If you want to review mode
shapes, however, you must expand the mode shapes.)
Do not change the model data (for example, nodal rotations) between the modal and harmonic analyses.
4.10.2. Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution

In this step, the program uses mode shapes extracted by the modal solution to calculate the harmonic response.
The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) must be available, and the database must contain the same model for
which the modal solution was obtained. If the modal solution was performed using the subspace or Block Lanczos
method using the default mass formulation (not the lumped mass approximation), the full file (Jobname.FULL)
must also be available. The following tasks are involved:
1.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define the analysis type and analysis options. These are the same as described for the full method, except
for the following differences:
Choose the mode superposition method of solution (HROPT).
Specify the modes you want to use for the solution (HROPT). This determines the accuracy of the
harmonic solution. Generally, the number of modes specified should cover about 50 percent more
than the frequency range of the harmonic loads.
Optionally, cluster the solutions about the structure's natural frequencies (HROUT) for a smoother
and more accurate tracing of the response curve.
425
3.
Optionally, at each frequency, print a summary table that lists the contributions of each mode to the
response (HROUT). Note, OUTPR,NSOL must be specified to print mode contributions at each frequency.
Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the
following restrictions:
4.
Only forces, accelerations, and the load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE
command to apply the load vector from the modal solution. Note that ALL loads from the modal
analysis are scaled, including forces and accelerations. To avoid load duplication, delete any loads
that were applied in the modal analysis.
If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at master
DOF.
Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the reduced method except that you can
also specify modal damping (MDAMP). In addition, if the QR damped method is specified, constant
material damping coefficients (MP,DMPR) can be defined.
The NSUBST command specifies the number of solutions on each side of a natural frequency if the
clustering option (HROUT) is chosen. The default is to calculate four solutions, but you can specify any
number of solutions from 2 through 20. (Any value over this range defaults to 10 and any value below
this range defaults to 4.)
5.
If you used either the Block Lanczos (default) or the subspace option for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB or SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the
displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RFRQ. The expansion pass will
only produce valid results for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements
have been written to the .RFRQ file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking
OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,ALL,component.
Repeat the OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RFRQ
file.
6.
Save a copy of the database.

Command(s): SAVE
7.

Command(s): SOLVE
8.
Repeat steps 3 to 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If
you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from one
load step to the next.
9.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
The mode superposition harmonic solution is written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RFRQ, regardless
of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, reduced, PowerDynamics, or QR damped method was used for the modal
solution. You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
426
Section 4.10: Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis
4.10.3. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution

The procedure for the expansion pass is the same as described for the reduced method. Jobname.TRI from the
modal analysis is needed only if the reduced eigenvalue extraction method was used. The output from the expansion pass includes the structural results file, Jobname.RST, containing expanded results. See Section 4.9.3:
Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass).

Results consist of harmonically varying displacements, stresses, and reaction forces at each forcing frequency
for which the solution was calculated. You can review these results using POST26 or POST1, as explained for the
reduced method.
4.10.5. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a mode superposition harmonic response analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
------FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Generate model
! Obtain the Modal Solution

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,MODAL
! Modal analysis
MODOPT,REDU
! Reduced method
M,...
! Masters
TOTAL,..
D,...
! Constraints
SF,...
! Element loads
SAVE
SOLVE
! Initiate modal solution
FINISH
! Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution
/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,HARMIC
HROPT,MSUP,...
HROUT,...
LVSCALE,...
F,...
HARFRQ,...
DMPRAT,...
MDAMP,...
NSUBST,...
KBC,...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Harmonic analysis
Mode superposition method; number of modes to use
Harmonic analysis output options; cluster option
Scale factor for loads from modal analysis
Nodal loads
Forcing frequency range
Damping ratio
Modal damping ratios
Number of harmonic solutions
Ramped or stepped loads
! Initiate solution
! Review the Results of the Mode Superposition Solution

/POST26
FILE,,RFRQ
! Postprocessing file is Jobname.RFRQ
NSOL,...
PLCPLX,...
! Define how to plot complex variables
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
FINISH
! Expand the Solution (for Stress Results)
/SOLU! Re-enter SOLUTION
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass
427

EXPSOL,...
HREXP,...
SOLVE
FINISH
! Expand a single solution

! Phase angle for expanded solution

/POST1
SET,...
! Read results for desired frequency
PLDISP,...
! Deformed shape
PLNSOL,...
--FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, HROPT, HROUT,
LVSCALE, F, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, MDAMP, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL,
HREXP, SET, and PLNSOL commands.
4.11. Other Analysis Details

4.11.1. Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis
A prestressed harmonic response analysis calculates the dynamic response of a prestressed structure, such as a
violin string. It is assumed that the harmonically varying stresses (which are superimposed on the prestress) are
much smaller than the prestress itself.
4.11.1.1. Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed full harmonic analysis is essentially the same as that for any other full harmonic
analysis except that you first need to prestress the structure by doing a static analysis:
1.
Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON). The procedure
to obtain the static solution is explained in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the full harmonic solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue
PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available.
If thermal body forces were present during the static prestress analysis, these thermal body forces must
not be deleted during the full harmonic analysis or else the thermal prestress will vanish. Hence, any
temperature loads used to define the thermal prestress must also be used in the full harmonic response
analysis as sinusoidally time-varying temperature loads. You should be aware of this limitation and exercise
some judgement about whether or not to include temperature loads in their static prestress analysis.
4.11.1.2. Prestressed Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed reduced harmonic analysis is essentially the same as that for any other reduced
harmonic analysis except that you first need to prestress the structure by doing a static analysis:
1.
to obtain the static solution is explained in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the reduced harmonic solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available.
428
Section 4.11: Other Analysis Details
4.11.1.3. Prestressed Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

To include prestress effects in a mode superposition analysis, you must first perform a prestressed modal analysis.
See Chapter 3, Modal Analysis for details. Once prestressed modal analysis results are available, proceed as for
any other mode superposition analysis.
429
430
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis

5.1. Definition of Transient Dynamic Analysis
Transient dynamic analysis (sometimes called time-history analysis) is a technique used to determine the dynamic
response of a structure under the action of any general time-dependent loads. You can use this type of analysis
to determine the time-varying displacements, strains, stresses, and forces in a structure as it responds to any
combination of static, transient, and harmonic loads. The time scale of the loading is such that the inertia or
damping effects are considered to be important. If the inertia and damping effects are not important, you might
be able to use a static analysis instead (see Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis).
The basic equation of motion solved by a transient dynamic analysis is
(M){ u } + (C){ u } + (K){u} = {F(t)}
where:
(M) = mass matrix
(C) = damping matrix
(K) = stiffness matrix
{ u } = nodal acceleration vector
{ u } = nodal velocity vector
{u} = nodal displacement vector
{F(t)} = load vector
At any given time, t, these equations can be thought of as a set of "static" equilibrium equations that also take
into account inertia forces ((M){ u }) and damping forces ((C){ u }). The ANSYS program uses the Newmark time
integration method or an improved method called HHT to solve these equations at discrete time points. The
time increment between successive time points is called the integration time step.
5.2. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis

A transient dynamic analysis is more involved than a static analysis because it generally requires more computer
resources and more of your resources, in terms of the engineering time involved. You can save a significant
amount of these resources by doing some preliminary work to understand the physics of the problem. For example,
you can:
1.
Analyze a simpler model first. A model of beams, masses, and springs can provide good insight into the
problem at minimal cost. This simpler model may be all you need to determine the dynamic response
of the structure.
2.
If you are including nonlinearities, try to understand how they affect the structure's response by doing
a static analysis first. In some cases, nonlinearities need not be included in the dynamic analysis.
3.
Understand the dynamics of the problem. By doing a modal analysis, which calculates the natural frequencies and mode shapes, you can learn how the structure responds when those modes are excited.
The natural frequencies are also useful for calculating the correct integration time step.
4.
For a nonlinear problem, consider substructuring the linear portions of the model to reduce analysis
costs. Substructuring is described in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
5.3. Three Solution Methods

Three methods are available to do a transient dynamic analysis: full, mode superposition, and reduced. The ANSYS
Professional program allows only the mode superposition method. Before we study the details of how to implement each of these methods, we will examine the advantages and disadvantages of each.
5.3.1. Full Method

The full method uses the full system matrices to calculate the transient response (no matrix reduction). It is the
most general of the three methods because it allows all types of nonlinearities to be included (plasticity, large
deflections, large strain, and so on).
Note If you do not want to include any nonlinearities, you should consider using one of the other
methods because the full method is also the most expensive method of the three.
The advantages of the full method are:
It is easy to use, because you do not have to worry about choosing master degrees of freedom or mode
shapes.
It allows all types of nonlinearities.
It uses full matrices, so no mass matrix approximation is involved.
All displacements and stresses are calculated in a single pass.
It accepts all types of loads: nodal forces, imposed (nonzero) displacements (although not recommended),
and element loads (pressures and temperatures) and allows tabular boundary condition specification via
TABLE type array parameters.
It allows effective use of solid-model loads.
The main disadvantage of the full method is that it is more expensive than either of the other methods.
For procedural information about using the full method, see Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic
Analysis.
5.3.2. Mode Superposition Method

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (eigenvectors) from a modal analysis to calculate
the structure's response. This is the only method available in the ANSYS Professional program. Its advantages
are:
It is faster and less expensive than the reduced or the full method for many problems.
Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be applied in the transient dynamic analysis
via the LVSCALE command, unless the modal analysis was done using PowerDynamics.
It accepts modal damping (damping ratio as a function of mode number).
The disadvantages of the mode superposition method are:
The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed.
The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition).
It does not accept imposed (nonzero) displacements.
52
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

For procedural information about using the mode superposition method, see Section 5.5: Performing a Mode
Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis.
5.3.3. Reduced Method

The reduced method condenses the problem size by using master degrees of freedom and reduced matrices.
After the displacements at the master DOF have been calculated, ANSYS expands the solution to the original
full DOF set. (See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction for a more detailed discussion of the reduction procedure.) The
advantage of the reduced method is:
It is faster and less expensive than the full method.
The disadvantages of the reduced method are:
The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the
expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However, the expansion
pass might not be needed for some applications.)
Element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) cannot be applied. Accelerations, however, are allowed.
All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model
loads.)
The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed.
The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition).
For procedural information about using the reduced method, see Section 5.6: Performing a Reduced Transient
Dynamic Analysis.
5.4. Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

Note - Before reading this section, you are encouraged to become familiar with the concepts presented in
Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.
We will first describe how to do a transient dynamic analysis using the full method. We will then list the steps
that are different for the mode superposition and reduced methods.
The procedure for a full transient dynamic analysis (available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and
ANSYS Structural products) consists of these steps:
1.
2.
Section 5.4.2: Establish Initial Conditions
3.
4.
5.
6.
Section 5.4.6: Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
7.
Section 5.4.7: Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step
8.
Section 5.4.8: Save a Backup Copy of the Database
9.
Section 5.4.9: Start the Transient Solution
10. Section 5.4.10: Exit the Solution Processor

11. Section 5.4.11: Review the Results
53

and Meshing Guide.

Keep the following points in mind when building a model for a full transient dynamic analysis:
You can use both linear and nonlinear elements.
be defined. Material properties may be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent.
Some comments on mesh density:
The mesh should be fine enough to resolve the highest mode shape of interest.
Regions where stresses or strains are of interest require a relatively finer mesh than regions where only
displacements are of interest.
If you want to include nonlinearities, the mesh should be able to capture the effects of the nonlinearities.
For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and therefore a fine element mesh)
in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
If you are interested in wave propagation effects (for example, a bar dropped exactly on its end), the mesh
should be fine enough to resolve the wave. A general guideline is to have at least 20 elements per
wavelength along the direction of the wave.
5.4.2. Establish Initial Conditions

Before you can perform a full transient dynamic analysis on a model, you need to understand how to establish
initial conditions and use load steps.
A transient analysis, by definition, involves loads that are functions of time. To specify such loads, you need to
divide the load-versus-time curve into suitable load steps. Each "corner" on the load-time curve may be one load
step, as shown in Figure 5.1: Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves.
Figure 5.1 Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves
54

The first load step you apply is usually to establish initial conditions. You then specify the loads and load step
options for the second and subsequent transient load steps. For each load step, you need to specify both load
values and time values, along with other load step options such as whether to step or ramp the loads, use
automatic time stepping, and so on. You then write each load step to a file and solve all load steps together. Establishing initial conditions is described below; the remaining tasks are described later in this chapter.
The first step in applying transient loads is to establish initial conditions (that is, the condition at Time = 0). A
transient dynamic analysis requires two sets of initial conditions (because the equations being solved are of
u
u
second order): initial displacement (uo) and initial velocity ( o ). If no special action is taken, both uo and o are
u
assumed to be zero. Initial accelerations ( o ) are always assumed to be zero, but you can specify nonzero initial
accelerations by applying appropriate acceleration loads over a small time interval.
The following paragraphs describe how to apply different combinations of initial conditions.
Zero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - These are the default conditions, that is, if uo = o = 0, you do
not need to specify anything. You may apply the loads corresponding to the first corner of the load-versus-time
curve in the first load step.
Nonzero initial displacement and/or nonzero initial velocity - You can set these initial conditions with the IC command.
Command(s): IC
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define
Caution: Be careful not to define inconsistent initial conditions. For instance, if you define an initial velocity at a single DOF, the initial velocity at every other DOF will be 0.0, potentially leading to conflicting
initial conditions. In most cases, you will want to define initial conditions at every unconstrained DOF in
your model. If these conditions are not the same at every DOF, it is usually much easier to define initial
conditions explicitly, as documented below (rather than by using the IC command).
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the TIMINT and IC commands.
Zero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - The nonzero velocity is established by applying small displacements over a small time interval on the part of the structure where velocity is to be specified. For example
if
uo = 0.25, you can apply a displacement of 0.001 over a time interval of 0.004, as shown below.
...
TIMINT,OFF
D,ALL,UY,.001
TIME,.004
LSWRITE
DDEL,ALL,UY
TIMINT,ON
...
!
!
!
!
!
!
Time integration effects off

Small UY displ. (assuming Y-direction velocity)
Initial velocity = 0.001/0.004 = 0.25
Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
Remove imposed displacements
Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - This is similar to the above case, except that the imposed
displacements are actual values instead of "small" values. For example, if uo = 1.0 and
a displacement of 1.0 over a time interval of 0.4:
...
TIMINT,OFF
D,ALL,UY,1.0
TIME,.4
LSWRITE
DDELE,ALL,UY
!
!
!
!
!
uo = 2.5, you would apply
Time integration effects off

Initial displacement = 1.0
Initial velocity = 1.0/0.4 = 2.5
Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
Remove imposed displacements
55

TIMINT,ON
...
! Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - This requires the use of two substeps (NSUBST,2) with a step
change in imposed displacements (KBC,1). Without the step change (or with just one substep), the imposed
displacements would vary directly with time, leading to a nonzero initial velocity. The example below shows how
u
to apply uo = 1.0 and o = 0.0:
...
TIMINT,OFF
! Time integration effects off for static solution
D,ALL,UY,1.0
! Initial displacement = 1.0
TIME,.001
! Small time interval
NSUBST,2
! Two substeps
KBC,1
! Stepped loads
LSWRITE
! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
! Transient solution
TIMINT,ON
! Time-integration effects on for transient solution
TIME,...
! Realistic time interval
DDELE,ALL,UY
! Remove displacement constraints
KBC,0
! Ramped loads (if appropriate)
! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
...
Nonzero initial acceleration - This can be approximated by specifying the required acceleration (ACEL) over a
small interval of time. For example, the commands to apply an initial acceleration of 9.81 would look like this:
...
ACEL,,9.81
! Initial Y-direction acceleration
TIME,.001
! Small time interval
NSUBST,2
! Two substeps
KBC,1
! Stepped loads
! The structure must be unconstrained in the initial load step, or
! else the initial acceleration specification will have no effect.
DDELE, ...
! Remove displacement constraints (if appropriate)
LSWRITE
! Transient solution
TIME, ...
! Realistic time interval
NSUBST, ...
! Use appropriate time step
KBC,0
! Ramped loads (if appropriate)
D, ...
! Constrain structure as desired
! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
LSWRITE
...
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ACEL, TIME, NSUBST, KBC, LSWRITE, DDELE, and
KBC commands.

This step for a transient dynamic analysis is the same as for a basic structural analysis (see Section 2.3.2: Set
Solution Controls in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis) with the following additions:
If you need to establish initial conditions for the full transient dynamic analysis (as described in Section 5.4.2:
Establish Initial Conditions), you must do so for the first load step of the analysis. You can then cycle through the
Solution Controls dialog box additional times to set individual load step options for the second and subsequent
load steps (as described in Section 5.4.7: Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step).
5.4.3.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

To access the Solution Controls dialog box, choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n
Control. The following sections provide brief descriptions of the options that appear on each tab of the dialog
56

box. For details about how to set these options, select the tab that you are interested in (from within the ANSYS program),
and then click the Help button. Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis also contains details about the nonlinear
options introduced in this chapter.
5.4.3.2. Using the Basic Tab

The Basic tab is active when you access the dialog box.
The controls that appear on the Basic tab provide the minimum amount of data that ANSYS needs for the analysis. Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not need to progress through the remaining
tabs unless you want to adjust the default settings for the more advanced controls. As soon as you click OK on
any tab of the dialog box, the settings are applied to the ANSYS database and the dialog box closes.
You can use the Basic tab to set the options listed in Table 2.1: Basic Tab Options. For specific information
about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Basic tab,
and click the Help button.
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis include:
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Transient if you are performing a
new analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large deflection, large rotation,
and large strain. Choose Large Displacement Transient if you expect large deflections (as in the case of
a long, slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem). Choose Restart Current
Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, or you have previously completed a static
prestress or a full transient dynamic analysis, and you want to extend the time-history.
When setting AUTOTS, remember that this load step option (which is also known as time-step optimization
in a transient analysis) increases or decreases the integration time step based on the response of the
structure. For most problems, we recommend that you turn on automatic time stepping, with upper and
lower limits for the integration time step. These limits, specified using DELTIM or NSUBST, help to limit
the range of variation of the time step; see Section 5.10.2: Automatic Time Stepping for more information.
The default is ON.
NSUBST and DELTIM are load step options that specify the integration time step for a transient analysis.
The integration time step is the time increment used in the time integration of the equations of motion.
You can specify the time increment directly or indirectly (that is, in terms of the number of substeps). The
time step size determines the accuracy of the solution: the smaller its value, the higher the accuracy. You
should consider several factors in order to calculate a "good" integration time step; see Section 5.10.1:
Guidelines for Integration Time Step for details.
When setting OUTRES, keep this caution in mind:

Caution: By default, only the last substep (time-point) is written to the results file (Jobname.RST)
in a full transient dynamic analysis. To write all substeps, set the Frequency so that it writes all of
the substeps. Also, by default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file. If this number
is exceeded (based on your OUTRES specification), the program will terminate with an error. Use
the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19, Memory Management and
Configuration in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
5.4.3.3. Using the Transient Tab

You can use the Transient tab to set the options listed in Table 5.1: Transient Tab Options. For specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the
Transient tab, and click the Help button.
57
Table 5.1 Transient Tab Options

Option
For more information about this option, see:
Specify whether time integration effects are on

or off (TIMINT)
Section 8.6: Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis in

the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide
Specify whether to ramp the load change over

the load step or to step-apply the load change
(KBC)
Section 2.5: Stepped Versus Ramped Loads in the ANSYS

Section 2.7.1.5: Stepping or Ramping Loads in the ANSYS

Specify mass and stiffness damping (ALPHAD,

BETAD)
Section 5.10.3: Damping in the ANSYS Structural Analysis

Guide
Choose the time integration method, Newmark

or HHT (TRNOPT)
Section 17.2: Transient Analysis in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory

Reference
Define integration parameters (TINTP)
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis include:
TIMINT is a dynamic load step option that specifies whether time integration effects are on or off. Time
integration effects must be turned on for inertia and damping effects to be included in the analysis (otherwise a static solution is performed), so the default is to include time integration effects. This option is
useful when beginning a transient analysis from an initial static solution; that is, the first load steps are
solved with the time integration effects off.
ALPHAD (alpha, or mass, damping) and BETAD (beta, or stiffness, damping) are dynamic load step options
for specifying damping options. Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included
in your analysis. See Section 5.4.4.2: Damping Option for other damping options.
TRNOPT (TINTOPT) specifies the time integration method to be used. The default is Newmark method.
TINTP is a dynamic load step option that specifies transient integration parameters. Transient integration
parameters control the nature of the Newmark and HHT time integration techniques.
5.4.3.4. Using the Remaining Solution Controls Tabs

The options on the remaining tabs in the Solution Controls dialog box for a full transient analysis are the same
as the ones you can set for a static structural analysis. See the following sections of Chapter 2, Structural Static
Analysis for a list of these options:
Section 2.3.2.4: Using the Sol'n Options Tab
Section 2.3.2.5: Using the Nonlinear Tab
Section 2.3.2.6: Using the Advanced NL Tab. Exception: You cannot use arc-length options in a full transient
analysis.

The additional solution options that you can set for a full transient analysis are mostly the same as the ones you
can set for a static structural analysis. For a general description of what additional solution options are, along
with descriptions of those options that are the same, see the following sections of Chapter 2, Structural Static
Analysis:
58
Section 2.3.3.1: Stress Stiffening Effects
Section 2.3.3.2: Newton-Raphson Option
Section 2.3.3.7: Creep Criteria
Section 2.3.3.8: Printed Output
Section 2.3.3.9: Extrapolation of Results
Additional solution options for a full transient analysis that differ from those for a static analysis, or have different
descriptions are presented in the following sections.
5.4.4.1. Prestress Effects

You may include prestress effects in your analysis. This requires element files from a previous static (or transient)
analysis; see Section 5.9: Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis for details.
Command(s): PSTRES
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
5.4.4.2. Damping Option

Use this load step option to include damping. Damping in some form is present in most structures and should
be included in your analysis. In addition to setting ALPHAD and BETAD on the Solution Controls dialog box
(as described in Section 5.4.3.3: Using the Transient Tab), you can specify the following additional forms of
damping for a full transient dynamic analysis:
Material-dependent beta damping (MP,DAMP)
Element damping (COMBIN7, and so on)
To use the MP form of damping:

Command(s): MP,DAMP
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models>
Structural> Damping
Note that constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
5.4.4.3. Mass Matrix Formulation

Use this analysis option to specify a lumped mass matrix formulation. We recommend the default formulation
for most applications. However, for some problems involving "skinny" structures, such as slender beams or very
thin shells, the lumped mass approximation might provide better results. Also, the lumped mass approximation
can result in a shorter run time and lower memory requirements.
To use this option:
Command(s): LUMPM

You are now ready to apply loads for the analysis. Table 2.5: Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis summarizes
the loads applicable to a transient dynamic analysis. Except for inertia loads, you can define loads either on the
solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). Section 2.3.4:
59

Apply the Loads describes the types of loads that are applicable. In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed,
operated on, or deleted. For a general discussion of solid-model loads versus finite-element loads, see Chapter 2,
Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
You can also apply time-dependent boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional table (TABLE type array
parameter). See Section 2.3.4.2.1: Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters.
5.4.6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
As described in Section 5.4.2: Establish Initial Conditions, you need to apply loads and save the load configuration
to a load step file for each corner of the load-versus-time curve. You may also want to have an additional load
step that extends past the last time point on the curve to capture the response of the structure after the transient
loading.
Command(s): LSWRITE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
5.4.7. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step

For each load step that you want to define for a full transient dynamic analysis, you need to repeat steps 3-6.
That is, for each load step, reset any desired solution controls and options, apply loads, and write the load configuration to a file.
For each load step, you can reset any of these load step options: TIMINT, TINTP, ALPHAD, BETAD, MP,DAMP,
TIME, KBC, NSUBST, DELTIM, AUTOTS, NEQIT, CNVTOL, PRED, LNSRCH, CRPLIM, NCNV, CUTCONTROL,
OUTPR, OUTRES, ERESX, and RESCONTROL.
An example load step file is shown below:
TIME, ...
Loads ...
KBC, ...
LSWRITE
TIME, ...
Loads ...
KBC, ...
LSWRITE
TIME, ...
Loads ...
KBC, ...
LSWRITE
Etc.
! Time at the end of 1st transient load step

! Load values at above time
! Stepped or ramped loads
! Write load data to load step file
! Time at the end of 2nd transient load step
! Time at the end of 3rd transient load step
5.4.8. Save a Backup Copy of the Database

Save a copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program
and issuing RESUME.
Command(s): SAVE
5.4.9. Start the Transient Solution

Use one of these methods to start the transient solution:
Command(s): LSSOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files
For additional ways to create and solve multiple load steps (the array parameter method and the multiple SOLVE
method), see Section 3.8: Solving Multiple Load Steps in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
510
5.4.10. Exit the Solution Processor

Use one of these methods to exit the solution processor:
Command(s): FINISH

You review results for a full transient analysis in the same way that you review results for most structural analyses.
You can review these results using either POST26, which is the time-history postprocessor, or POST1, which is
the general postprocessor.
POST26 is used to review results at specific points in the model as functions of time.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific time points.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a transient dynamic analysis are explained below. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Section 4.1: What Is Postprocessing? in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide.

The points to remember for a full transient analysis are the same as those for most structural analyses. See Section 2.3.6.2: Points to Remember in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.

POST26 works with tables of result item versus time, known as variables. Each variable is assigned a reference
number, with variable number 1 reserved for time.
1.
Define the variables.

Command(s): NSOL (primary data, that is, nodal displacements) ESOL (derived data, that is,
element solution data, such as stresses) RFORCE (reaction force data) FORCE (total force, or
static, damping, or inertia component of total force) SOLU (time step size, number of equilibrium
iterations, response frequency, and so on)
Note In the mode superposition or reduced methods, only static force is available with the
FORCE command.
2.
Graph or list the variables. By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the
model, you can identify the critical time points for further POST1 postprocessing.
Command(s): PLVAR (graph variables) PRVAR, EXTREM (list variables)
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables
511
5.4.11.4. Other Capabilities

Many other postprocessing functions, such as performing math operations among variables, moving variables
into array parameters, and moving array parameters into variables, are available in POST26. See Chapter 6, The
Time-History Postprocessor (POST26) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.

1.
Read in model data from the database file.

Command(s): RESUME
2.
Read in the desired set of results. Use the SET command to identify the data set by load step and substep
numbers or by time.
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Time/Freq
3.
Perform the necessary POST1 operations. The typical POST1 operations that you perform for a transient
dynamic analysis are the same as those that you perform for a static analysis. See Section 2.3.6.4: Typical
Postprocessing Operations for a list of these operations.
Note If you specify a time for which no results are available, the results that are stored will be
a linear interpolation between the two nearest time points.
5.4.12. Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

A sample input listing for a full transient analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
--FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,TRANS
! Transient analysis
TRNOPT,FULL
! Full method
D,...
! Constraints
F,...
! Loads
SF,...
ALPHAD,...
! Mass damping
BETAD,...
! Stiffness damping
KBC,...
TIME,...
! Time at end of load step
AUTOTS,ON
! Auto time stepping
DELTIM,...
! Time step size
OUTRES,...
! Results file data options
LSWRITE
! Write first load step
-----! Loads, time, etc. for 2nd load step
--LSWRITE
! Write 2nd load step
SAVE
LSSOLVE,1,2
FINISH
!
! Review the Results
/POST26
SOLU,...
! Store solution summary data
512
Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

NSOL,...
ESOL,,,,
RFORCE,...
PLVAR,...
PRVAR,...
FINISH
!
!
!
!
!
/POST1
SET,...
!
PLDISP,...
!
PRRSOL,...
!
PLNSOL,...
!
PRERR
!
-----! Other postprocessing as
--FINISH
Store nodal result as a variable

Store element result as a variable
Store reaction as a variable
Plot variables
List variables
Read desired set of results into database

Deformed shape
Reaction loads
Contour plot of nodal results
Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy)
desired
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIME,
AUTOTS, DELTIM, OUTRES, LSWRITE, LSSOLVE, SOLU, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLVAR, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL,
PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
5.5. Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (obtained from a modal analysis) to calculate the
dynamic response. This method is available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural,
and ANSYS Professional products. The procedure to use the method consists of five main steps:
1.
Build the model.
2.
3.
Obtain the mode superposition transient solution.
4.
Expand the mode superposition solution.
5.
Review the results.

Building the model for a mode superposition transient dynamic analysis is the same as that described for the
full method. See Section 5.4.1: Build the Model for more information.

Chapter 3, Modal Analysis describes how to obtain a modal solution. Following are some additional hints:
The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos (default), reduced, subspace, PowerDynamics, or
QR damped. (The other methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode superposition.)
PowerDynamics does not create a load vector.
Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the dynamic response.
If PowerDynamics was used for the modal solution, no nonzero loads or displacements are allowed (that
is, only u = 0 is valid as the initial condition). PowerDynamics does not create a load vector; therefore, the
LVSCALE command is not valid unless the scale factor is set to zero.
For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at those nodes at
which forces and gap conditions are to be defined.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during preprocessing or
513

in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores damping specified during the mode superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a constant damping ratio (DMPRAT) or define the damping ratio as a function of mode
(MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic analysis. Note that constant material damping coefficient
(MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis.
Specify displacement constraints, if any. These constraints will be ignored if they are specified in the mode
superposition transient solution instead of in the modal solution.
If you need to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so on) in the transient
dynamic analysis, you must specify them in the modal analysis. The loads are ignored for the modal
solution, but a load vector will be calculated and written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). You
can then use this load vector for the transient solution.
The modes need not be expanded for the mode superposition solution. (If you want to review mode
shapes from a reduced modal solution, however, you must expand the mode shapes.)
The model data (for example, nodal rotations) should not be changed between the modal and transient
analyses.
5.5.3. Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution

In this step, the program uses mode shapes extracted by the modal solution to calculate the transient response.
The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the modal solution was obtained.
5.5.3.2. Obtaining the Solution

The procedure to obtain the mode superposition transient solution is described below:
1.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define the analysis type and analysis options. These are the same as the analysis options that are described
for the full method (in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional Solution
Options), except for the following differences:
Restarts are not available (ANTYPE).
Choose the mode superposition method of solution (TRNOPT).
514
You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options for a
mode superposition transient analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS
solution commands (which are listed in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set
Additional Solution Options) and the standard corresponding menu paths.
When you specify a mode superposition transient analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for
that specific type of analysis appears. The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged,
depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu
contains only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for mode superposition
transient analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution
options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged
for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from the Solution menu. For details,
see Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Specify the number of modes you want to use for the solution (TRNOPT). This determines the accuracy
of the transient solution. At a minimum, you should use all modes that you think will contribute to
the dynamic response. If you expect higher frequencies to be excited, for example, the number of
modes specified should include the higher modes. The default is to use all modes calculated in the
modal solution.
If you do not want to use rigid body (0 frequency) modes, use MINMODE on the TRNOPT command
to skip over them.
Nonlinear options (NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT) are not available.
3.
Define gap conditions, if any. They can only be defined between two master degree of freedom (DOF)
nodes or between master DOF nodes and ground. When a non-reduced mode-extraction method is
used, a master DOF implies an unconstrained, active DOF. If you used the QR damped mode-extraction
method, gap conditions are not supported. More details about gap conditions are presented in Section 5.6.1.3.1: Gap Conditions.
Command(s): GP
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define
4.
Apply loads to the model. The following loading restrictions apply in a mode superposition transient
dynamic analysis:
Only forces, accelerations applied via the ACEL command, and a load vector created in the modal
analysis are valid. Imposed nonzero displacements are ignored. Use the LVSCALE command
(Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super) to apply the load
vector from the modal solution.
If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at master
DOF.
Multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient analysis. The first load
step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used for the transient loading, as explained next.
5.
Establish initial conditions. In modal superposition transient analyses, a first solution is done at TIME =
0. This establishes the initial condition and time step size for the entire transient analysis. Generally, the
only load applicable for the first load step is initializing nodal forces. For this pseudo-static analysis, the
mode superposition method may yield poor results at TIME = 0 if nonzero loads are applied.
The following load step options are available for the first load step:
Table 5.2 Options for the First Load Step-Mode Superposition Analysis
Option
Command
GUI Path
Dynamics Options
Transient Integration Para- TINTP
meters
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time

Integration
Load Vector
LVSCALE
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector>

For Mode Super
Damping
ALPHAD, BETAD, Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>

DMPRAT, MP,
Damping
MDAMP
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat
Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping
General Options
515

Option
Command
GUI Path
DELTIM
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> TimeTime Step
OUTPR
Integration Time Step
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu

Printout

Printed Output
Dynamics options include the following:

Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP)
Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time integration technique.
The default is to use the constant average acceleration scheme; see your ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further details.
Load Vector (LVSCALE)

The load vector option allows you to apply a load vector created by the modal solution as one
of the loads. You can use such a load vector to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures,
and so on) on the model.
Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis. You
can specify five forms of damping in a mode superposition transient dynamic analysis:
Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD)
Constant damping ratio (DMPRAT)
Modal damping (MDAMP)
Remember that, as described earlier in Section 5.5.2: Obtain the Modal Solution, any damping
that you specify in the mode superposition transient analysis is ignored if you used the QR
damped mode-extraction method. Constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not
applicable in transient analysis. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
The only valid general option for the first load step is integration time step (DELTIM), which is assumed
to be constant throughout the transient. By default, the integration time step is assumed to be 1/(20f),
where f is the highest frequency chosen for the solution. The DELTIM command is valid only in the
first load step and is ignored in subsequent load steps.
Note If you do issue the TIME command in the first load step, it will be ignored. The first
solution is always a static solution at TIME = 0.
6.
516
The output control option for the first load step is printed output (OUTPR). Use this option to control
printout of the displacement solution at the master DOF.
Write the first load step to a load step file (Jobname.S01) by issuing the LSWRITE command.
Command(s): LSWRITE

7.
Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion, writing each load step to a load
step file (LSWRITE).
General options include the following:
Time Option (TIME)

This option specifies time at the end of the load step.
Load Vector (LVSCALE)

The load vector option allows you to apply a load vector created by the modal solution as one
of the loads.
Stepped or Ramped Loads (KBC)

This option indicates whether to ramp the load change over the load step (KBC) or to step-apply
the load change (KBC,1). The default is ramped.
Output control options include the following:

Use this option to control printed output.

This option controls the data on the reduced displacement file.
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for OUTRES is to write
the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions defined, in which case the default is to write every solution).
8.
If you used either the Block Lanczos (default) or subspace option for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB
or MODOPT,SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the
displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RDSP. The expansion pass will
only produce valid results for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements
have been written to the .RDSP file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking
OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,FREQ,COMP. Repeat
the OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RDSP file.
Only one output frequency is allowed - ANSYS uses the last frequency specified by OUTRES.
9.
Save a backup copy of the database to a named file.

Command(s): SAVE
10. Start the transient solution.

Command(s): LSSOLVE
11. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
517

The mode superposition transient solution is written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RDSP, regardless
of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, reduced, PowerDynamics, or QR damped method was used for the modal
solution. You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
5.5.4. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution

The procedure for the expansion pass is the same as described for the reduced method (see Section 5.6.3: Expand
the Solution (Expansion Pass)). Jobname.TRI is needed only if the reduced method was used for the modal
solution. The output from the expansion pass includes the structural results file, Jobname.RST, containing expanded results.

Results consist of displacements, stresses, and reaction forces at each time-point for which the solution was expanded. You can review these results using POST26 or POST1, as explained for the full method (see Section 5.4.11:
Review the Results).
Note In the mode superposition or reduced methods, only static force is available with the FORCE
command.
5.5.6. Sample Input for a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

A sample input listing for a mode superposition transient analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
--FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,MODAL
! Modal analysis
MODOPT,REDU
! Reduced method
M,...
! Master DOF
TOTAL,...
D,...
! Constraints
SF,...
! Element loads
ACEL,...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
! Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution
/SOLU
! Reenter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,TRANS
! Transient analysis
TRNOPT,MSUP,...
! Mode superposition method
LVSCALE,...
! Scale factor for element loads
F,...
! Nodal Loads
MDAMP,...
! Modal damping ratios
DELTIM,...
! Integration time step sizes
LSWRITE
! Write first load step (Remember: the first load step
--! is solved statically at time=0.)
-----! Loads, etc. for 2nd load step
TIME,...
! Time at end of second load step
KBC,...
OUTRES,...
! Results-file data controls
--LSWRITE
! Write 2nd load step (first transient load step)
SAVE
518
Section 5.6: Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

LSSOLVE
FINISH
! Review results of the mode superposition solution

/POST26
! Enter POST26
FILE,,RDSP
! Results file is Jobname.RDSP
SOLU,...
! Store solution summary data
NSOL,...
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
PRVAR,...
! List variables
FINISH
! Expand the Solution
/SOLU
! Reenter SOLUTION
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass
NUMEXP,...
! No. of solutions to expand; time range
OUTRES,...
! Results-file data controls
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,...
! Read desired set of results into database
PLDISP,...
! Deformed shape
PRRSOL,...
! Reaction loads
PLNSOL,...
PRERR
! Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy)
-----! Other postprocessing as desired
--FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, ACEL, TRNOPT, LVSCALE, MDAMP, DELTIM, TIME, KBC, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, FILE, SOLU, NSOL, PLVAR, PRVAR, EXPASS, NUMEXP,
OUTRES, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
5.6. Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

The reduced method, as its name implies, uses reduced matrices to calculate the dynamic response. It is available
in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and ANSYS Structural products. You should consider using this
method if you do not want to include nonlinearities (other than simple node-to-node contact) in the analysis.
The procedure for a reduced transient dynamic analysis consists of these main steps:
1.
Build the model.
2.
Obtain the reduced solution.
3.
Review the results of the reduced solution.
4.
Expand the solution (expansion pass).
5.
Review the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method, except that no nonlinearities are allowed (other than
simple node-to-node contact, which is specified in the form of a gap condition instead of an element type). Details
of the other steps are explained below.
5.6.1. Obtain the Reduced Solution

By reduced solution, we mean the degree of freedom solution calculated at the master DOF. The tasks required
to obtain the reduced solution are explained in the following sections. For the following tasks, you need to first
enter the SOLUTION processor.
Command(s): /SOLU
519

5.6.1.1. Define the Analysis Type and Options

These are the same as the analysis options that are described for the full method (in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution
Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional Solution Options) except for the following differences:
You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options for a reduced
transient dynamic analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands
(which are listed in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional Solution Options)
and the standard corresponding menu paths.
Restarts are not available (ANTYPE).
Choose the reduced method of solution (TRNOPT).
When you specify a reduced transient analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for that specific type
of analysis appears. The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions
you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options
that are valid and/or recommended for reduced transient analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution
menu and you want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use,
but their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from
the Solution menu. For details, see Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.
Nonlinear options (NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT) are not available.
5.6.1.2. Define Master Degrees of Freedom

Master DOF are essential degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure. For a reduced
transient dynamic analysis, master DOF are also required at locations where you want to define gap conditions,
forces, or nonzero displacements. You can list the defined master DOF or delete master DOF as well. See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction for guidelines to choose master DOF.
Command(s): M, MGEN, TOTAL, MLIST, MDELE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define
Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Copy
Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> Program Selected
Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> List All
Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Delete
5.6.1.3. Define Gap Conditions

Define any gap conditions.
Command(s): GP
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define
You can also list the defined gaps and delete gaps.
Command(s): GPLIST, GPDELE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> List All
Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Delete
5.6.1.3.1. Gap Conditions

Gap conditions can only be defined between two master degree of freedom (DOF) nodes or between master
DOF nodes and ground, as shown in the following figure.
520
Figure 5.2 Examples of Gap Conditions
Gap conditions are similar to gap elements and are specified between surfaces that are expected to contact
(impact) each other during the transient. The ANSYS program accounts for the gap force, which develops when
the gap closes, by using an equivalent nodal load vector.
Some guidelines to define gap conditions are presented below:
Use enough gap conditions to obtain a smooth contact stress distribution between the contacting surfaces.
Define a reasonable gap stiffness. If the stiffness is too low, the contacting surfaces may overlap too much.
If the stiffness is too high, a very small time step will be required during impact. A general recommendation
is to specify a gap stiffness that is one or two orders of magnitude higher than the adjacent element
stiffness. You can estimate the adjacent element stiffness using AE/L, where A is the contributing area
around the gap condition, E is the elastic modulus of the softer material at the interface, and L is the depth
of the first layer of elements at the interface.
The nonlinear gap damping provided through the DAMP field of the GP command runs faster than a full
transient analysis using a gap element COMBIN40. Only TRNOPT = MSUP allows the nonlinear gap
damping action. Damping conditions are ignored for the reduced transient analysis method.
5.6.1.4. Apply Initial Conditions to the Model

The following loading restrictions apply in a reduced transient dynamic analysis:
Only displacements, forces, and translational accelerations (such as gravity) are valid. Acceleration loading
is not allowed if the model contains any master DOF at any nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems.
Forces and nonzero displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
As mentioned for the full method, multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient
analysis. The first load step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used
for the transient loading, as explained next.
Establish initial conditions. The only initial condition that may be explicitly established is the initial dis-
placement (uo); that is, initial velocity and acceleration must be zero ( o = 0, o = 0). Displacements
cannot be deleted in subsequent load steps, therefore they cannot be used to specify an initial velocity.
In a reduced transient analysis, a static solution is always performed as the first solution, using the loads
given, to determine uo.
521
Specify load step options for the first load step. Valid options appear in Table 5.3: Options for the First
Load Step-Reduced Analysis.
Table 5.3 Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis

Option
Command
GUI Path
Dynamics Options
Transient Integration Paramet- TINTP
ers
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>

Time Integration
ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP

Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change
Mat Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping
DELTIM

Time- Time Step
OUTPR
Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls>

Solu Printout
General Options
Integration Time Step
Printed Output
5.6.1.4.1. Dynamics Options

Dynamic options include the following:
Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP)

Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time integration technique. The
default is to use the constant average acceleration scheme; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further
details.
Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis. You can
specify four forms of damping in a reduced transient dynamic analysis:
Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD)
Element damping (COMBIN7, and so on)
See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
5.6.1.4.2. General Options

The only valid general option is Integration Time Step (DELTIM). The integration time step is assumed to be
constant throughout the transient.
Note If you do issue the TIME command for the first load step, it will be ignored. The first solution is
always a static solution at TIME = 0.
522
5.6.1.4.3. Output Control Options

Use the Printed Output (OUTPR) option to output the displacement solution at the master DOF.
5.6.1.5. Write the First Load Step to a Load Step File

Write the first load step to a load step file (Jobname.S01).
Command(s): LSWRITE
5.6.1.6. Specify Loads and Load Step Options

Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion, writing each load step to a load step file
(LSWRITE).
The following load step options are valid for the transient load steps:
General Options
Time (specifies the time at the end of the load step) (TIME)
Stepped (KBC,1) or ramped loads (KBC)
Output Controls
Printed output (OUTPR)
Reduced displacement file (OUTRES)
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for OUTRES is to write the
solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions
defined, in which case the default is to write every solution).
5.6.1.7. Obtaining the Solution

Solving a reduced transient dynamic analysis involves the same steps as those involved in solving a full transient
analysis. See the following sections for a description of those steps:
Section 5.4.8: Save a Backup Copy of the Database
Section 5.4.9: Start the Transient Solution
Section 5.4.10: Exit the Solution Processor
5.6.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution

Results from the reduced transient dynamic solution are written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RDSP.
They consist of time-varying displacements at the master DOF. You can review the master DOF displacements
as a function of time using POST26. (POST1 cannot be used, because the complete solution at all DOF is not
available.)
The procedure to use POST26 is the same as described for the full method, except for the following differences:
Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command (Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings>
File) to specify that data are to be read from Jobname.RDSP. For example, if the jobname is TRANS, the
523

FILE command would be: FILE,TRANS,RDSP. (By default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written
by a reduced transient solution.)
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use only the
NSOL command to define variables.
5.6.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)

The expansion pass starts with the reduced solution and calculates the complete displacement, stress, and force
solution at all degrees of freedom. These calculations are done only at time points that you specify. Before you
begin the expansion pass, therefore, you should review the results of the reduced solution (using POST26) and
identify the critical time points.
Note An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly in displacements at specific points on the structure, then the reduced solution could satisfy your requirements.
However, if you want to determine displacements at non-master DOF, or if you are interested in the
stress or force solution, then you must perform an expansion pass.
The .RDSP, .EMAT, .ESAV, .DB, and .TRI files from the reduced solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution was calculated.
The procedure for the expansion pass is explained below.
5.6.3.2. Expanding the Solution

1.
Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Activate the expansion pass and its options.

Option
Command
GUI Path
EXPASS
No. of Solutions to be Expanded
NUMEXP

Range of Solu's
Single Solution to Expand
EXPSOL

Single Expand> By Time/Freq
Option: Expansion Pass On/Off (EXPASS)

Choose ON.
524
Option: Number of Solutions to be Expanded (NUMEXP)

Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over the specified
time range. The solutions nearest these times will be expanded. Also specify whether to calculate
stresses and forces (default is to calculate both).
Option: Single Solution to Expand (EXPSOL)

Use this option to identify a single solution for expansion if you do not need to expand multiple
solutions in a range. You can specify it either by load step and substep number or by time. Also specify
whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both).
3.
Specify load step options. The only options valid for a transient dynamic expansion pass are output
controls:
Output Controls


Extrapolation of Results (ERESX)

Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead
of extrapolating them (default).
Note The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE. ERESX allows you
to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
4.

Command(s): SOLVE
5.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file.
6.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution window.
5.6.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution

You review results for an expansion pass in the same way that you review results for most structural analyses.
You can review these results using POST1. (If you expanded solutions at several time points, you can also use
POST26 to obtain graphs of stress versus time, strain versus time, and so on.) The procedure to use POST1 (or
POST26) is the same as described for the full method.
525
5.7. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

In this example, you will perform a transient dynamic analysis using the reduced method to determine the
transient response to a constant force with a finite rise in time. In this problem, a steel beam supporting a concentrated mass is subjected to a dynamic load.

A steel beam of length and geometric properties shown in Problem Specifications is supporting a concentrated
mass, m. The beam is subjected to a dynamic load F(t) with a rise time tr and a maximum value F1. If the weight
of the beam is considered to be negligible, determine the time of maximum displacement response tmax and
the response ymax. Also determine the maximum bending stress bend in the beam.
The beam is not used in this solution and its area is arbitrarily input as unity. The final time of 0.1 sec allows the
mass to reach its largest deflection. One master degree of freedom is selected at the mass in the lateral direction.
A static solution is done at the first load step. Symmetry could have been used in this model. The time of maximum
response (0.092 sec) is selected for the expansion pass calculation.

The following material properties are used for this problem:
E = 30 x 103 ksi
m = 0.0259067 kips-sec2/in
The following geometric properties are used for this problem:
l = 800.6 in4
h = 18 in
= 20 ft = 240 in.
F1 = 20 kips
tr = 0.075 sec
526
Section 5.7: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

Figure 5.3 Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a Concentrated Mass
5.7.3.1. Specify the Title

1.
2.
Enter the text "Transient response to a constant force with a finite rise time."
3.
Click on OK.
5.7.3.2. Define Element Types

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The Element Types
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
In the left scroll box, click on "Structural Beam."
4.
In the right scroll box, click on "2D elastic 3," and click on Apply.
5.
In the left scroll box, click on "Structural Mass."
6.
In the right scroll box, click on "3D mass 21," and click on OK.
7.
In the Element Types dialog box, click once on "Type 2," and click on Options.
8.
In the scroll box for Rotary inertia options, scroll to "2D w/o rot iner" and select it.
9.
Click on OK and click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
5.7.3.3. Define Real Constants

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete. The Real Constants
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on Type1 BEAM3 then Click on OK. The Real Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears.
527

4.
Enter 1 for Area, 800.6 for IZZ, and 18 for Height.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
In the Real Constants dialog box, click on Add.
7.
Click on Type 2 MASS21 and click on OK. The Real Constant Set Number 2, for MASS21 dialog box appears.
8.
Enter .0259067 in the 2-D mass field and click on OK.
9.
Click on Close in the Real Constants dialog box.

1.
2.
3.
Enter 30e3 for EX (Young's modulus), enter 0.3 for PRXY, and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears
in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4.
5.7.3.5. Define Nodes

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS. The Create
Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 1 for node number and click on Apply to define node 1 at 0,0,0.
3.
4.
Enter 240,0,0 for X, Y, Z coordinates and click on OK.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds. The
Fill between Nds picking menu appears.
6.
Click once on nodes 1 and 3 in the ANSYS Graphics window, and click on OK in the picking menu. The
Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
7.
Click on OK to accept the default settings.
5.7.3.6. Define Elements

1.
Thru Nodes. The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears.
2.
Click once on nodes 1 and 2, and click on Apply.
3.
Click once on nodes 2 and 3, and click on OK.
4.
5.
In the Element type number drop down menu, select 2 MASS21.
6.
In the Real constant set number drop down menu, select 2 and click OK.
7.
8.
Click once on node 2 and click OK.
528
Section 5.7: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

9.
5.7.3.7. Define Analysis Type and Analysis Options

1.
2.
Click on "Transient" to select it, and click on OK. The Transient Analysis dialog box appears.
3.
Click on "Reduced" and click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Reduced Transient
Analysis dialog box appears.
5.
In the drop down menu for Damping effects, select "Ignore."
6.
Click on OK.
5.7.3.8. Define Master Degrees of Freedom

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define. The Define Master
DOFs picking menu appears.
2.
Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears.
3.
In the drop down menu for 1st degree of freedom, select "UY."
4.
Click on OK.
5.7.3.9. Set Load Step Options

1.
Choose the menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step.
The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2.
Enter .004 for Time step size and click on OK.
5.7.3.10. Apply Loads for the First Load Step

1.
2.
Click on node 1 and click on Apply. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
3.
Click on "UY" to select it and click on Apply. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
4.
Click on node 3, and click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
Click on "UX" to select it. "UY" should remain selected. Click on OK.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On
Nodes. The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.
7.
Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
8.
In the drop down menu for Direction of force/mom, select "FY." Leave the value as blank (zero) for the
initial static solution.
9.
Click on OK, and click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
5.7.3.11. Specify Output

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File. The
Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
529

2.
Click on the "Every substep" radio button and click on OK.
5.7.3.12. Solve the First Load Step

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Close when the Solution is done! window appears.
5.7.3.13. Apply Loads for the Next Load Step

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time-Time Step. The
Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2.
Enter .075 for Time at end of load step and click on OK.
3.
4.
Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
Enter 20 for Force/moment value and click on OK.
5.7.4. Solve the Next Load Step

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Close when the Solution is done! window appears
5.7.4.1. Set the Next Time Step and Solve

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step. The
Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2.
Enter .1 for Time at end of load step and click on OK.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
5.7.4.2. Run the Expansion Pass and Solve

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass. Set the Expansion pass
radio button to On and click on OK.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By
Time/Freq. The Expand Single Solution by Time/Frequency dialog box appears.
3.
Enter 0.092 for Time-point/Frequency and click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu >Solution> Solve> Current LS.
530
Section 5.8: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
5.
6.
7.
5.7.4.3. Review the Results in POST26

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> File. The File Settings dialog box appears.
2.
Click browse and select "file.rdsp" and click on open then OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined Time-History
4.
Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
5.
Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data picking menu appears. Pick
node 2 and click OK.
6.
Accept the default of 2 for the reference number of the variable.
7.
Make sure that 2 is entered for node number.
8.
Enter NSOL for user-specified label.
9.
In the right scroll box, click on "Translation UY" to select it.
10. Click on OK, then click on Close in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
11. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables.
12. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph and click on OK. The graph appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
13. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables.
14. Enter 2 for 1st variable to list and click on OK.
15. Review the information in the status window and click on Close.
5.7.4.4. Review the Results in POST1

1.
2.
3.
Click on "Def + undeformed" and click on OK.
5.7.4.5. Exit ANSYS

1.
2.
Click on the save option you want, and click on OK.
5.8. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch

Method)
You can perform the example transient dynamic analysis of a bracket using the ANSYS commands shown below
instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7
/TITLE, Transient Response to a Constant Force with a Finite Rise Time
ET,1,BEAM3
! 2-D beam
531

ET,2,MASS21,,,4
R,1,1,800.6,18
R,2,.0259067
MP,EX,1,30e3
N,1
N,3,240
FILL
E,1,2! Beam elements
EGEN,2,1,1
TYPE,2
REAL,2
E,2
M,2,UY
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,TRANS
TRNOPT,REDUC,,NODAMP
DELTIM,.004
D,1,UY
D,3,UX,,,,,UY
OUTPR,BASIC,1
OUTRES,ALL,1
F,2,FY,0
SOLVE
TIME,.075
F,2,FY,20
SOLVE
TIME,.1
SOLVE
FINISH
! 2-D mass
! Beam area = 1, I = 800.6, h = 18
! Mass
! Type 2 element with real constant 2

! Master DOF in Y direction at middle of beam
! Transient dynamic analysis

! Reduced transient analysis, ignore damping
! Integration time step size
! Force = 0 at Time = 0
! Time at end of load step
! Force is ramped to 20
! Constant force until time = 0.1
/SOLU
! The following is the expansion pass using BEAM3 and MASS21 elements
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass on
EXPSOL,,,0.092
! Time of maximum response
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NUMVAR,0
FILE,file,rdsp
NSOL,2,2,U,Y,NSOL
PLVAR,2
PRVAR,2
FINISH
/POST1
SET,FIRST
PLDISP,1
FINISH
! Define the variables

! Graph the variables
! List the variables
! Read in results
! Display deformed and undeformed shape
5.9. Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis

A prestressed transient dynamic analysis calculates the dynamic response of a prestressed structure, such as a
heat-treated part with residual thermal stresses. Prestressed-analysis procedures vary, depending on the type
of transient dynamic analysis being performed.
5.9.1. Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

You can include prestressing effects in a full transient dynamic analysis by applying the prestressing loads in a
preliminary static load step. (Do not remove these loads in subsequent load steps.) The procedure consists of
two steps:
1.
532
Build your model, enter SOLUTION, and define a transient analysis type (ANTYPE,TRANS).
Apply all prestressing loads.
Turn time integration effects off (TIMINT,OFF).
Turn stress stiffening effects on (SSTIF,ON).
Set time equal to some small dummy value (TIME).
Write your first load step to Jobname.S01 (LSWRITE).
If prestressing effects develop because of nonlinear behavior (as in the case of residual thermal stresses
in a casting), several load steps might be required to complete the static prestressing phase of your
analysis. In the case of geometric nonlinearities (large deformation effects), you can capture the
prestressing effect by issuing NLGEOM,ON.
2.
For all subsequent load steps, turn time integration effects on (TIMINT,ON), and proceed using the full
transient dynamic analysis procedures described previously. Once all load steps are written to files
(LSWRITE), you can initiate the multiple load step solution (LSSOLVE).
Note The static prestress solution must be done as a separate solution if initial conditions are to be
defined with the IC command.
(Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define)
The IC command is valid only in the first load step.
5.9.2. Prestressed Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

In order to include prestress effects in a mode superposition analysis, you must first do a prestressed modal
analysis. See Chapter 3, Modal Analysis for details. Once prestressed modal analysis results are available, proceed
as for any other mode superposition analysis.
5.9.3. Prestressed Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed reduced transient dynamic analysis requires that you first prestress the
structure in a separate static analysis, as explained below. It is assumed that the transient (time-varying) stresses
(which are superimposed on the prestress) are much smaller than the prestress itself. If they are not, you should
use the full transient dynamic analysis.
1.
to obtain a static solution is explained in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION (/SOLU) and obtain the reduced transient solution, also with prestress effects turned
on (PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.DB, Jobname.EMAT, and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must
be available.
5.10. Other Analysis Details

The following sections provide additional details about defining integration time step, automatic time stepping,
and damping.
5.10.1. Guidelines for Integration Time Step

As mentioned earlier, the accuracy of the transient dynamic solution depends on the integration time step: the
smaller the time step, the higher the accuracy. A time step that is too large will introduce error that affects the
response of the higher modes (and hence the overall response). A time step that is too small will waste computer
resources. To calculate an optimum time step, you should consider the following guidelines:
533

1.
Resolve the response frequency. The time step should be small enough to resolve the motion (response)
of the structure. Since the dynamic response of a structure can be thought of as a combination of modes,
the time step should be able to resolve the highest mode that contributes to the response. For the
Newmark time integration scheme, it has been found that using approximately twenty points per cycle
of the highest frequency of interest results in a reasonably accurate solution. That is, if f is the frequency
(in cycles/time), the integration time step (ITS) is given by
ITS = 1/20f
Smaller ITS values may be required if acceleration results are needed.
The following figure shows the effect of ITS on the period elongation of a single-DOF spring-mass system.
Notice that 20 or more points per cycle result in a period elongation of less than 1 percent.
Figure 5.4 Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation
For the HHT time integration method, the same guidelines for time step should be applied. Note that if
the same time step and time integration parameters are used, the HHT method will be more accurate
compared to the Newmark method.
2.
534
Resolve the applied load-versus-time curve(s). The time step should be small enough to follow the
loading function. The response tends to lag the applied loads, especially for stepped loads, as shown in
Figure 5.5: Transient Input vs. Transient Response. Stepped loads require a small ITS at the time of the
step change so that the step change can be closely followed. ITS values as small as 1/180f may be needed
to follow stepped loads.
Figure 5.5 Transient Input vs. Transient Response
3.
Resolve the contact frequency. In problems involving contact (impact), the time step should be small
enough to capture the momentum transfer between the two contacting surfaces. Otherwise, an apparent
energy loss will occur and the impact will not be perfectly elastic. The integration time step can be determined from the contact frequency (fc) as:
ITS =1/Nfc
fc =(1/ 2) k /m
where k is the gap stiffness, m is the effective mass acting at the gap, and N is the number of points per
cycle. To minimize the energy loss, at least thirty points per cycle of (N = 30) are needed. Larger values
of N may be required if acceleration results are needed. For the reduced and mode superposition
methods, N must be at least 7 to ensure stability.
You can use fewer than thirty points per cycle during impact if the contact period and contact mass are
much less than the overall transient time and system mass, because the effect of any energy loss on the
total response would be small.
4.
Resolve the wave propagation. If you are interested in wave propagation effects, the time step should
be small enough to capture the wave as it travels through the elements. See Section 5.4.1: Build the
Model for a discussion of element size.
5.
Resolve the nonlinearities. For most nonlinear problems, a time step that satisfies the preceding guidelines
is sufficient to resolve the nonlinearities. There are a few exceptions, however: if the structure tends to
stiffen under the loading (for example, large deflection problems that change from bending to membrane
load-carrying behavior), the higher frequency modes that are excited will have to be resolved.
After calculating the time step using the appropriate guidelines, use the minimum value for your analysis. By
using automatic time stepping, you can let the ANSYS program decide when to increase or decrease the time
step during the solution. Automatic time stepping is discussed next.
Caution: Avoid using exceedingly small time steps, especially when establishing initial conditions. Exceedingly small numbers can cause numerical difficulties. Based on a problem time scale of unity, for
example, time steps smaller than 10-10 could cause numerical difficulties.
5.10.2. Automatic Time Stepping

Automatic time stepping, also known as time step optimization, attempts to adjust the integration time step
during solution based on the response frequency and on the effects of nonlinearities. The main benefit of this
feature is that the total number of substeps can be reduced, resulting in computer resource savings. Also, the
535

number of times that you might have to rerun the analysis (adjusting the time step size, nonlinearities, and so
on) is greatly reduced. If nonlinearities are present, automatic time stepping gives the added advantage of incrementing the loads appropriately and retreating to the previous converged solution (bisection) if convergence
is not obtained. You can activate automatic time stepping with the AUTOTS command. (For more information
on automatic time stepping in the context of nonlinearities, see Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis.)
Although it seems like a good idea to activate automatic time stepping for all analyses, there are some cases
where it may not be beneficial (and may even be harmful):
Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies),
where the low-frequency energy content of part of the system may dominate the high-frequency areas
Problems that are constantly excited (for example, seismic loading), where the time step tends to change
continually as different frequencies are excited
Kinematics (rigid-body motion) problems, where the rigid-body contribution to the response frequency
term may dominate
5.10.3. Damping
Damping is present in most systems and should be specified in a dynamic analysis. The following forms of
damping are available in the ANSYS program:
Alpha and Beta Damping (Rayleigh Damping)
Material-Dependent Damping
Constant Material Damping Coefficient
Constant Damping Ratio
Modal Damping
Element Damping
Only the constant damping ratio and modal damping are available in the ANSYS Professional program. You can
specify more than one form of damping in a model. The program will formulate the damping matrix (C) as the
sum of all the specified forms of damping. The constant material damping coefficient is only applicable in full
and modal harmonic analyses.
Table 5.5: Damping for Different Analysis Types shows the types of damping available for different structural
analyses.
Table 5.5 Damping for Different Analysis Types

Alpha, Beta
Damping ALAnalysis Type PHAD, BETAD
Static
Material- Dependent
Constant
Damping Damping Ratio
MP,DAMP
DMPRAT
Modal
Damping
MDAMP
Element
Constant MaDamping(3) terial Damping
COMBIN7, and Coefficient
so on
MP,DMPR
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No(5)
No(5)
No(5)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No(7)
Full
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Reduced
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Modal
Undamped
Damped
Harmonic
536
Alpha, Beta
Damping ALAnalysis Type PHAD, BETAD
Mode Sup
Material- Dependent
Constant
Damping Damping Ratio
MP,DAMP
DMPRAT
Modal
Damping
MDAMP
Element
Constant MaDamping(3) terial Damping
COMBIN7, and Coefficient
so on
MP,DMPR
Yes(6)
Yes(4,6)
Yes
Yes
Yes(6)
Yes(7)
Full
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Reduced
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Mode Sup
Yes(6)
Yes(4,6)
Yes
Yes
Yes(6)
No
SPRS, MPRS(2)
Yes(1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
DDAM(2)
Yes(1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
PSD(2)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Buckling
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Substructure
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Transient
Spectrum
N/A Not applicable

1.
damping only, no damping
2.
Damping is used only for mode combination and not for computation of mode coefficients
3.
Includes superelement damping matrix
4.
If converted to modal damping by expansion of modes
5.
If specified, an effective damping ratio is calculated for subsequent spectrum analyses
6.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP), and you specify any kind of
damping during preprocessing or in the modal analysis, ANSYS ignores damping specified during the
mode superposition analysis
7.
Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a
downstream mode superposition harmonic analysis
Alpha damping and Beta damping are used to define Rayleigh damping constants and . The damping matrix
(C) is calculated by using these constants to multiply the mass matrix (M) and stiffness matrix (K):
(C) = (M) + (K)
The ALPHAD and BETAD commands are used to specify and , respectively, as decimal numbers. The values
of and are not generally known directly, but are calculated from modal damping ratios, i. i is the ratio of
actual damping to critical damping for a particular mode of vibration, i. If i is the natural circular frequency of
mode i, and satisfy the relation
i = /2i + i/2
In many practical structural problems, alpha damping (or mass damping) may be ignored ( = 0). In such cases,
you can evaluate from known values of i and i, as
= 2 i/i
Only one value of can be input in a load step, so choose the most dominant frequency active in that load step
to calculate .
537

To specify both and for a given damping ratio , it is commonly assumed that the sum of the and terms
is nearly constant over a range of frequencies (see Figure 5.6: Rayleigh Damping). Therefore, given and a
frequency range i to j, two simultaneous equations can be solved for and .
Figure 5.6 Rayleigh Damping
Alpha damping can lead to undesirable results if an artificially large mass has been introduced into the model.
One common example is when an artificially large mass is added to the base of a structure to facilitate acceleration
spectrum input. (You can use the large mass to convert an acceleration spectrum to a force spectrum.) The alpha
damping coefficient, which is multiplied by the mass matrix, will produce artificially large damping forces in such
a system, leading to inaccuracies in the spectrum input, as well as in the system response.
Beta damping and material damping can lead to undesirable results in a nonlinear analysis. These damping
coefficients are multiplied by the stiffness matrix, which is constantly changing in a nonlinear analysis. The resulting change in damping can sometimes be opposite to the actual change in damping that can occur in physical structures. For example, whereas physical systems that experience softening due to plastic response will
usually experience a corresponding increase in damping, an ANSYS model that has beta damping will experience
a decrease in damping as plastic softening response develops.
Material-dependent damping allows you to specify beta damping () as a material property (MP,DAMP). Note,
however, that MP,DAMP in a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR) specifies a material-dependent damping ratio ,
not . Also note that for multi-material elements such as SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, and SHELL99, can only
be specified for the element as a whole, not for each material in the element. In these cases, is determined from
the material pointer for the element (set with the MAT command), rather than the material pointed to by any
real constant MAT for the element. MP,DAMP is not assumed to be temperature-dependent, and is always
evaluated at T = 0.0.
The constant material damping coefficient is available only for full and modal harmonic analyses.
The constant damping ratio is the simplest way of specifying damping in the structure. It represents the ratio of
actual damping to critical damping, and is specified as a decimal number with the DMPRAT command. DMPRAT
is available only for spectrum, harmonic response, and mode superposition transient dynamic analyses.
Modal damping gives you the ability to specify different damping ratios for different modes of vibration. It is
specified with the MDAMP command and is available only for the spectrum and mode superposition method
of solution (transient dynamic and harmonic response analyses).
Element damping involves using element types having viscous damping characteristics, such as COMBIN7,
COMBIN14, COMBIN37, COMBIN40, and so on.
538

If you are running a mode superposition analysis and used the QR damping solution method for the modal
solution, alpha (ALPHAD), beta (BETAD), material-dependent, and element damping must be defined in the QR
damping modal solution for the damping to be available in a subsequent mode superposition analysis.
For more information about damping, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
The explicit mathematical expressions that form the damping matrix in different analysis options are shown in
Table 5.6: Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients. These expressions define how
each of the damping options in Table 5.5: Damping for Different Analysis Types is handled in a dynamic analysis.
Table 5.6 Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients

Analysis Type Full Harmonic & Modal Analysis
Transient AnalysLANB(1)
is
Modal Analysis
QRDA(1)
ALPHAD
[M]
No
Mode Superposition Harmonic

Analysis(1)
Mode Superposi- Spectrum Analystion Transient

is(1) (modal
Analysis(1)
damping ratio)
T[M] =
T[M] =
No
T[K ] = 2
i
T[K ] = 2
i
i
2
[M]
BETAD
[K]
No
[K]
m
MP,DAMP j
No
No
Nm
m
j [K j ]
No
No
j =1
Nm
m s
j Ej
j =1
Nm
s
Ej
j =1
See Equation 17109 in

the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference
m
j [K j ]
Nm
T m [K j ]
j
Nm
T m [K j ]
j
No
No
2i
2i
Nm
j =1
DMPRAT
Harmonic
j =1
j =1
2
[K ]
MDAMP
No
No
m
i
No
2mi
i
2mi
i
m
i
No
Element
Damping
No
No
[Ck ]
T [Ck ]
T [Ck ]
No
No
No
Ne
[Ck ]
k =1
Ne
k =1
MP,DMPR
Harmonic
Nm
2 [K j ]
j
j =1
Ne
k =1
No
No
Ne
k =1
No
2 [K j ]
j

j =1
N
T m
539

Note
1.
For modal, mode superposition, and spectrum analyses the boxes are split where applicable
with the top indicating the Lanczos method and the bottom indicating the QR damped method.

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional transient dynamic
analyses.
program. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the ANSYS Verification
Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts.
The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of transient dynamic analysis test cases:
VM9 - Large Lateral Deflection of Unequal Stiffness Springs
VM40 - Large Deflection and Rotation of a Beam Pinned at One End
VM65 - Transient Response of a Ball Impacting a Flexible Surface
VM71 - Transient Response of a Spring, Mass, Damping System
VM72 - Logarithmic Decrement
VM73 - Free Vibration with Coulomb Damping
VM74 - Transient Response to an Impulsive Excitation
VM75 - Transient Response to a Step Excitation
VM77 - Transient Response to a Constant Force with a Finite Rise Time
VM79 - Transient Response of a Bilinear Spring Assembly
VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant Force
VM81 - Transient Response of a Drop Container
VM84 - Displacement Propagation along a Bar with Free Ends
VM85 - Transient Displacements in a Suddenly Stopped Moving Bar
VM91 - Large Rotation of a Swinging Pendulum
VM156 - Natural Frequency of Nonlinear Spring-Mass System
VM158 - Motion of a Bobbing Buoy
VM179 - Dynamic Double Rotation of a Jointed Beam
VM182 - Transient Response of a Spring-Mass System
540
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis

6.1. Definition of Spectrum Analysis
A spectrum analysis is one in which the results of a modal analysis are used with a known spectrum to calculate
displacements and stresses in the model. It is mainly used in place of a time-history analysis to determine the
response of structures to random or time-dependent loading conditions such as earthquakes, wind loads, ocean
wave loads, jet engine thrust, rocket motor vibrations, and so on.
6.2. What is a Spectrum?

The spectrum is a graph of spectral value versus frequency that captures the intensity and frequency content of
time-history loads. Three types of spectra are available for a spectrum analysis:
Response Spectrum
Single-point Response Spectrum (SPRS)
Multi-point Response Spectrum (MPRS)
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)
Power Spectral Density (PSD)
The only method available in the ANSYS Professional program is the single-point response spectrum.
6.2.1. Response Spectrum

A response spectrum represents the response of single-DOF systems to a time-history loading function. It is a
graph of response versus frequency, where the response might be displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force.
Two types of response spectrum analysis are possible: single-point response spectrum and multi-point response
spectrum.
6.2.1.1. Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS)

In a single-point response spectrum (SPRS) analysis, you specify one response spectrum curve (or a family of curves)
at a set of points in the model, such as at all supports, as shown in Figure 6.1: Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra (a).
6.2.1.2. Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS)

In a multi-point response spectrum (MPRS) analysis, you specify different spectrum curves at different sets of points,
as shown in Figure 6.1: Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra (b).
Figure 6.1 Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra
6.2.2. Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)

The Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) is a technique used to evaluate the shock resistance of shipboard
equipment. The technique is essentially a response spectrum analysis in which the spectrum is obtained from a
series of empirical equations and shock design tables provided in the U.S. Naval Research Laboratory Report
NRL-1396.
6.2.3. Power Spectral Density

Power spectral density (PSD) is a statistical measure defined as the limiting mean-square value of a random
variable. It is used in random vibration analyses in which the instantaneous magnitudes of the response can be
specified only by probability distribution functions that show the probability of the magnitude taking a particular
value.
A PSD is a statistical measure of the response of a structure to random dynamic loading conditions. It is a graph
of the PSD value versus frequency, where the PSD may be a displacement PSD, velocity PSD, acceleration PSD,
or force PSD. Mathematically, the area under a PSD-versus-frequency curve is equal to the variance (square of
the standard deviation of the response).
Similar to response spectrum analysis, a random vibration analysis may be single-point or multi-point. In a singlepoint random vibration analysis, you specify one PSD spectrum at a set of points in the model. In a multi-point
random vibration analysis, you specify different PSD spectra at different points in the model.
6.2.4. Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses

Response spectrum and DDAM analyses are deterministic analyses because both the input to the analyses and
output from the analyses are actual maximum values. Random vibration analysis, on the other hand, is probabilistic in nature, because both input and output quantities represent only the probability that they take on certain
values.
6.3. Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis

The procedure for a single-point response spectrum analysis consists of six main steps:
1.
62
Build the model.
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis

2.
3.
Obtain the spectrum solution.
4.
Expand the modes.
5.
Combine the modes.
6.
Review the results.
The modal solution is required because the structure's mode shapes and frequencies must be available to calculate
the spectrum solution. Also, by performing the spectrum solution ahead of mode expansion, you can expand
only the significant modes that contribute to the final solution.

and Meshing Guide.
Only linear behavior is valid in a spectrum analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as linear. If you
include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial status and are
never changed.
be defined. Material properties can be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any, are ignored.

The modal solution - natural frequencies and mode shapes - is needed to calculate the spectrum solution. The
procedure to obtain the modal solution is described in Chapter 3, Modal Analysis, but you should keep in mind
the following additional points:
Use the Block Lanczos (default), subspace, or reduced method to extract the modes. The other methods
- unsymmetric, damped, QR damped, and PowerDynamics - are not valid for subsequent spectrum analysis.
The number of modes extracted should be enough to characterize the structure's response in the frequency
range of interest.
If you are using GUI method, choose NO for mode expansion on the dialog box for the modal analysis
options [MODOPT], so that modes are not expanded at this time, but can be expanded selectively in a
separate solution pass. (See the use of the SIGNIF field on the MXPAND command.) Otherwise, choose
YES to expand all the modes at this phase.
If material-dependent damping is to be included in the spectrum analysis, it must be specified in the

modal analysis.
Be sure to constrain those DOF where you want to apply a base excitation spectrum.
At the end of the solution, leave the SOLUTION processor.
6.3.3. Obtain the Spectrum Solution

The procedure to obtain the spectrum solution is explained below. The mode file and the full file (jobname.MODE,
jobname.FULL) from the modal analysis must be available, and the database must contain the model data.
63

1.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS offers the following analysis options for a spectrum
analysis. Not all modal analysis options and not all eigenvalue extraction techniques work with all spectrum
analysis options.

Option
New Analysis
Command
ANTYPE
Analysis Type: Spectrum ANTYPE
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum
SPOPT
No. of Modes to Use for SPOPT

Solution
Spectrum Type: SPRS
Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE]

Option: Analysis Type: Spectrum [ANTYPE]

Choose analysis type spectrum.
Option: Spectrum Type: Single-point Response Spectrum [SPOPT]

Choose Single-point Response Spectrum (SPRS).
Option: Number of Modes to Use for Solution [SPOPT]

Choose enough modes to cover the frequency range spanned by the spectrum and to characterize
the structure's response. The accuracy of the solution depends on the number of modes used: the
larger the number, the higher the accuracy. Make sure to choose YES on the SPOPT command if you
want to calculate element stresses.
3.
Specify load step options. The following options are available for single-point response spectrum analysis:

Option
Command
GUI Path
Spectrum Options
Type of Response Spec- SVTYP
trum
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point>

Settings
Excitation Direction
SED

Settings
Spectral-value- vs-frequency Curve
FREQ, SV

Freq Table or Spectr Values
Damping (Dynamics Options)

Beta (Stiffness) Damp- BETAD
ing
64
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping

Option
Command
GUI Path
Constant Damping Ra- DMPRAT

tio
Modal Damping
MDAMP
Spectrum Options
These data include the following:
Type of Response Spectrum [SVTYP]

The spectrum type can be displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, or PSD. All except the force
spectrum represent seismic spectra; that is, they are assumed to be specified at the base. The
force spectrum is specified at non-base nodes with the F or FK command, and the direction is
implied by labels FX, FY, FZ. The PSD spectrum [SVTYP,4] is internally converted to a displacement
response spectrum and is limited to flat, narrowband spectra; a more robust random vibration
analysis procedure is described in Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis.
Excitation Direction [SED]
Spectral-Value-Versus-Frequency Curve [FREQ, SV]

SV and FREQ commands are used to define the spectral curve. You can define a family of spectral
curves, each curve for a different damping ratio. Use the STAT command to list current spectrum
curve values. Another command, ROCK, allows you to specify a rocking spectrum.

If you specify more than one form of damping, the ANSYS program calculates an effective damping
ratio at each frequency. The spectral value at this effective damping ratio is then calculated by loglog interpolation of the spectral curves. If no damping is specified, the spectral curve with the lowest
damping is used. For further details about the different forms of damping, see Section 5.10.3:
Damping in Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis.
The following forms of damping are available:
Beta (stiffness) Damping [BETAD]

This option results in a frequency-dependent damping ratio.
Constant Damping Ratio [DMPRAT]

This option specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies.
Modal Damping [MDAMP]

Note Material-dependent damping ratio [MP,DAMP] is also available but only if specified
in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a material-dependent constant damping
ratio (and not material-dependent beta damping, as used in other analyses).
4.

Command(s): SOLVE
65

The output from the solution includes the participation factor table. The participation factor table, which
is part of the printed output, lists the participation factors, mode coefficients (based on lowest damping
ratio), and the mass distribution for each mode. To obtain the maximum response of each mode (modal
response), multiply the mode shape by the mode coefficient. You do this by retrieving the mode coefficient
with the *GET command and using it as a scale factor in the SET command.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for additional response spectra, if any. Note that solutions are not written to the
file.rst at this time.
6.
Leave the SOLUTION processor.

Command(s): FINISH
6.3.4. Expand the Modes

1.
Click on the expansion pass option button on the Expansion Pass dialog box to signify YES for an expansion
pass.
Command(s): MXPAND
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Modal
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Expansion Pass
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Expansion Pass> Expand Modes
2.
You must expand modes regardless of whether you used the Block Lanczos, subspace, or reduced extraction method. Details of how to expand the modes are explained in Chapter 3, Modal Analysis under
"Expand the Modes" as a separate solution pass, but you should keep in mind the following points:
Only significant modes can be selectively expanded. (See the use of the SIGNIF field on the MXPAND
command.) If you are using the GUI method and want to selectively expand modes, choose NO for
mode expansion on the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT] in the modal analysis
phase. You then perform mode expansion as a separate solution pass after performing the spectrum
solution.
Only expanded modes are used for the mode combination operation in the subsequent mode combination pass.
If you are interested in stresses caused by the spectrum, be sure to request stress calculations here.
By default, no stresses are calculated in the expansion pass, which means no stresses are available
for the spectrum analysis.
If you want to expand all the modes, you can include the mode expansion steps in the modal solution
pass by issuing the MXPAND command. If you are using the GUI method and want to expand all the
modes, choose YES for mode expansion on the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT]
in the modal solution step. But if you want to expand only the significant modes, you must perform
mode expansion as a separate solution pass after performing the spectrum solution.
Note that modal analysis solutions are written to the results file (Jobname.RST) only if the mode expansion is
performed.
6.3.5. Combine the Modes

Combine the modes in a separate solution phase. The procedure is as follows:
1.
66
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU

2.
Define analysis type.

Command(s): ANTYPE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis


3.
Choose one of the mode combination methods.

ANSYS offers five different mode combination methods for the single-point response spectrum analysis:
Square Root of Sum of Squares (SRSS)
Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC)
Double Sum (DSUM)
Grouping (GRP)
Naval Research Laboratory Sum (NRLSUM)
The NRLSUM method is typically used in the context of the Dynamic Design and Analysis Method (DDAM)
spectrum analysis.
The following commands are used to invoke different methods of mode combinations:
Command(s): SRSS, CQC, DSUM, GRP, NRLSUM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Opts> Single-pt resp
Main Menu> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Spectrum-Single Point-Mode Combine
These commands allow computation of three different types of responses:
Displacement (label = DISP)
Displacement response refers to displacements, stresses, forces, etc.
Velocity (label = VELO)
Velocity response refers to velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc.
Acceleration (label = ACEL)
Acceleration response refers to accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc.

The DSUM method also allows the input of time duration for earthquake or shock spectrum.
Note You must specify damping if you use the Complete Quadratic Combination method of
mode combination (CQC). In addition, if you use material-dependent damping [MP,DAMP,...],
you must request that element results be calculated in the modal expansion. (Elcalc = YES on
the MXPAND command.)
4.
Start solution.
67

Command(s): SOLVE
The mode combination phase writes a file of POST1 commands (Jobname.MCOM). Read in this file in
POST1 to do the mode combinations, using the results file (Jobname.RST) from the modal expansion
pass.
The file Jobname.MCOM contains POST1 commands that combine the maximum modal responses by
using the specified mode combination method to calculate the overall response of the structure.
The mode combination method determines how the structure's modal responses are to be combined:
If you selected velocity as the response type (label = VELO), velocities and stress velocities are combined
for each mode on the mode combination command.
5.
If you selected displacement as the response type (label = DISP), displacements and stresses are
combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
If you selected acceleration as the response type (label = ACEL), accelerations and stress accelerations
are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.

Command(s): FINISH
Note If you want to compute velocity or acceleration in addition to displacement, repeat the
mode combination step after postprocessing the displacement solution by using the VELO or
ACEL label on the mode combination commands (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, NRLSUM). Remember
that the existing Jobname.MCOM file is overwritten by the additional mode combination step(s).

Results from a single-point response spectrum analysis are written to the mode combination file, Jobname.MCOM,
in the form of POST1 commands. These commands calculate the overall response of the structure by combining
the maximum modal responses in some fashion (specified by one of the mode combination methods). The
overall response consists of the overall displacements (or velocities or accelerations) and, if placed on the results
file during the expansion pass, the overall stresses (or stress velocities or stress accelerations), strains (or strain
velocities or strain accelerations), and reaction forces (or reaction force velocities or reaction force accelerations).
You can use POST1, the general postprocessor, to review the results.
Note If you want a direct combination of the derived stresses (S1, S2, S3, SEQV, SI) from the results file,
issue the SUMTYPE,PRIN command before reading in the Jobname.MCOM file. With the PRIN option,
component stresses are not available.
Note that the command default (SUMTYPE,COMP) is to directly operate only on the unaveraged element component stresses and compute the derived quantities from these. Refer to Section 5.5.3: Creating and Combining
Load Cases in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Also, see the ANSYS Commands Reference for a description of the
SUMTYPE command.
1.
68
Read the commands on Jobname.MCOM.

Command(s): /INPUT
GUI: Utility Menu> File> Read Input From

For example, issue /INPUT with the following arguments:
/INPUT,FILE,MCOM!Assumes the default jobname FILE
2.
Display results.

Command(s): PLDISP

Solu
Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ ...), strains
(EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ ...). If you previously issued the SUMTYPE
command, the results of the PLNSOL or PLESOL command are affected by the particular SUMTYPE
command option (SUMTYPE,COMP or SUMTYPE,PRIN) that you selected.
Use the PLETAB command to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element data.
Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL
command. This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different
materials, different shell thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing
effect, use selecting (described in Chapter 7, Selecting and Components in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, etc. before issuing
PLNSOL.
You can view correct membrane results for shells (SHELL, MID) by using KEYOPT(8) = 2 (for
SHELL93, SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209) or KEYOPT(11) = 2 (SHELL63). These KEYOPTS
write the mid-surface node results directly to the results file, and allow the membrane results
to be directly operated on during squaring operations. The default method of averaging the
TOP and BOT squared values to obtain a MID value can possibly yield incorrect MID values.
Option: Vector Displays

Command(s): PLVECT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined

Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data)
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions, such as mapping results onto a path, transforming results to
different coordinate systems, and load case combinations, are available in POST1. See The General
Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
If you are using batch mode, note the following:
69
The modal solution and spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass, with spectrum loads [SV, SVTYP, SED, FREQ].
The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
6.4. Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you determine the seismic response of a beam structure.

A simply supported beam of length , mass per unit length m, and section properties shown in Problem Specifications, is subjected to a vertical motion of both supports. The motion is defined in terms of a seismic displacement response spectrum. Determine the nodal displacements, reactions forces, and the element solutions.

E = 30 x 106 psi
m = 0.2 lb-sec2/in2
I = (1000/3) in4
A = 273.9726 in2
= 240 in
h = 14 in
610
Section 6.4: Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)

Figure 6.2 Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports
6.4.4. Procedure
1.
2.
Type the text "Seismic Response of a Beam Structure" and click on OK.
6.4.4.2. Define the Element Type

1.
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Scroll down the list on the left to "Structural Beam" and select it.
4.
Click on "2D elastic 3" in the list on the right.
5.
6.

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants. The Real Constants dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on OK. The Real Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears.
611

4.
Enter 273.9726 for cross-sectional area.
5.
Enter (1000/3) for area moment of inertia.
6.
Enter 14 for total beam height and click on OK.
7.

1.
2.
3.
Enter 30e6 for EX (Young's modulus), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material
Models Defined window on the left.
4.
Double-click on Density. A dialog box appears.
5.
Enter 73E-5 for DENS (density), and click on OK.
6.
6.4.4.5. Define Keypoints and Line

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS. The
Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on Apply to accept the default X, Y, Z coordinates of 0,0,0.
4.
5.
Enter 240,0,0 for X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
6.
Click on OK.
7.
appears.
8.
Click on "keypoint numbers" to turn keypoint numbering on.
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. A
11. Click on keypoint 1, and then on keypoint 2. A straight line appears between the two keypoints.
12. Click on OK. The picking menu closes.
6.4.4.6. Set Global Element Density and Mesh Line

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Global> Size. The Global
Element Sizes dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 8 for the number of element divisions and click on OK. The Global Element Sizes dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Lines. A picking menu appears.
4.
Click on Pick All. The picking menu closes.
612
6.4.4.7. Set Boundary Conditions

1.
2.
In the graphics window, click once on the node at the left end of the beam.
3.
Click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
4.
In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Repeat steps 1-3 and select the node at the right end of the beam.
7.
In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX." Both "UX" and "UY" should be highlighted.
8.
Click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box closes.
6.4.4.8. Specify Analysis Type and Options

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. The New Analysis dialog
box appears.
2.
Click on "Modal" to select it and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
dialog box appears.
4.
Click on "Reduced" as the mode extraction method [MODOPT].
5.
Enter 1 for the number of modes to expand.
6.
Click on the Calculate elem. results dialog button [MXPAND] to specify YES.
7.
Click on OK. The Modal Analysis dialog box closes, and the Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
8.
Enter 3 for the No. of modes to print and click on OK. The Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box closes.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define. The picking menu
appears.
10. Choose Pick All. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears.
11. Select UY for the 1st degree of freedom and click on OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box closes.
6.4.4.9. Solve the Modal Analysis

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. The Solve Current Load Step dialog box
appears, along with a status window.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
4.
6.4.4.10. Set Up the Spectrum Analysis

1.
box appears, along with a warning message that states: "Changing the analysis type is only valid within
the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter SOLUTION. This will reset load step
count to 1." Click on CLOSE to close the warning message box.
2.
Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
613

3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Settings. The
Settings for Single-point Response Spectrum dialog box appears.
4.
Select "Seismic displac" in the scroll box as the type of response spectrum.
5.
Enter 0,1,0 for excitation direction into the excitation direction input windows and click on OK.
6.4.4.11. Define Spectrum Value vs. Frequency Table

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Freq Table.
The Frequency Table dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 0.1 for FREQ1, enter 10 for FREQ2, and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Spectr Values.
The Spectrum Values - Damping Ratio dialog box appears.
4.
Click on OK to accept the default of no damping. The Spectrum Values dialog box appears.
5.
Enter 0.44 and 0.44 for FREQ1 and FREQ2, respectively.
6.
Click on OK. The Spectrum Values dialog box closes.
6.4.4.12. Solve Spectrum Analysis

1.
2.
3.
4.
6.4.4.13. Set up the Expansion Pass

1.
2.
Click on "Modal" to select it, and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Expansion Pass. The Expansion Pass dialog
box appears.
4.
Click on the expansion pass dialog button to turn it ON and click on OK. The Expansion Pass dialog box
closes.
6.4.4.14. Expand the Modes

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes. The
Expand Modes dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 10 for the number of modes to expand and enter 0.005 for the significant threshold.
3.
Click on the calculate element results dialog button to specify YES for element results calculation.
4.
Click on OK. The Expand Modes dialog box closes.
614
6.4.4.15. Start Expansion Pass Calculation

1.
2.
3.
4.
6.4.4.16. Set Up Mode Combination for Spectrum Analysis

1.
2.
Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Spectrum Analysis
dialog box appears.
4.
Accept the default spectrum type single-point response. Click on OK. The Spectrum Analysis dialog box
closes.
6.4.4.17. Select Mode Combination Method

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Mode Combine.
The Mode Combination Methods dialog box appears.
2.
Select SRSS as the mode combination method.
3.
Enter 0.15 for the significant threshold.
4.
Select displacement for the type of output. Click OK. The Mode Combination Methods dialog box closes.
6.4.4.18. Combine the Modes

1.
2.
3.
4.
6.4.4.19. Postprocessing: Print Out Nodal, Element, and Reaction Solutions

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Results Summary. The SET Command
listing window appears.
2.
Review the information in the listing window, and click on Close. The SET Command listing window
closes.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Read Input From. The Read File dialog box appears.
4.
From the left side of the Read File dialog box, select the directory containing your results from the scroll
box.
5.
From the right side of the Read File dialog box, select the jobname.mcom file from the scroll box.
615

6.
Click on OK. The Read File dialog box closes.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution. The List Nodal
8.
Click on OK to accept the default settings of "DOF solution" in the scroll box on the left and "All DOFs
DOF" in the scroll box on the right. The List Nodal Solution dialog box closes.
9.
The PRNSOL Command listing window appears. Review the results and click on Close to close the
PRNSOL Command listing window.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution. The List Element
11. Scroll down the list on the left to select "Line Elem results" and select "Structural ELEM" on the scroll box
on the right. Click on OK. The List Element Solution dialog box closes.
12. The PRESOL Command listing window appears. Review the results and click on Close to close the PRESOL
Command listing window.
13. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List Reaction
14. Scroll down the list to "All struc forc F" to select it and click on OK. The List Reaction Solution dialog box
closes.
15. The PRRSOL Command listing window appears. Review the results in the listing window and click on
Close to close the PRRSOL Command listing window.

1.
2.
You are now finished with this sample problem.
6.5. Sample Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example spectrum analysis using the ANSYS commands shown below instead of GUI choices.
Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7
/TITLE Seismic Response of a Beam Structure
ET,1,BEAM3
R,1,273.9726,(1000/3),14
! A = 273.9726, I = (1000/3), H = 14
MP,EX,1,30E6
MP,DENS,1,73E-5
K,1
K,2,240
L,1,2
ESIZE,,8
LMESH,1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,0
D,ALL,UY
NSEL,S,LOC,X,240
D,ALL,UX,,,,,UY
NSEL,ALL
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
616
! Mode-frequency analysis

MODOPT,REDUC,,,,3
MXPAND,1,,,YES
M,ALL,UY
OUTPR,BASIC,1
SOLVE
FINISH
! Householder, print first 3 reduced mode shapes

! Expand first mode shape, calculate element stresses
/SOLU
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SPOPT,SPRS
SED,,1
SVTYPE,3
FREQ,.1,10
SV,,.44,.44
SOLVE
FINISH
!
!
!
!
!
!
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
EXPASS,ON
MXPAND,10,,,YES,0.005
Spectrum analysis
Single point spectrum
Global Y-axis as spectrum direction
Seismic displacement spectrum
Frequency points for SV vs. freq. table
Spectrum values associated with frequency points
! Mode-frequency analysis
! Expand 10 mode shapes, calculate element stresses
! set signif=0.005
SOLVE
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SRSS,0.15,DISP
! Square Root of Sum of Squares Mode combination

! with signif=0.15 and displacement solution requested
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,LIST
/INP,,mcom
PRNSOL,DOF
PRESOL,ELEM
PRRSOL,F
FINISH
! Print nodal solution

! Print element solution in element format
! Print reaction solution

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional spectrum analyses.
The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of spectrum analysis test cases:
VM19 - Random Vibration Analysis of a Deep Simply-Supported Beam
VM68 - PSD Response of a Two DOF Spring-Mass System
VM69 - Seismic Response
VM70 - Seismic Response of a Beam Structure
VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-Supported Thick Square Plate
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, D, EXPASS, MXPAND, SPOPT,
SVTYP, SED, FREQ, SV, SRSS, CQC, DSUM, GRP, NRLSUM, and DMPRAT commands.
617
6.7. How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis

The procedure for a PSD analysis consists of six main steps:
1.
Build the model.
2.
3.
Expand the modes.
4.
Obtain the spectrum solution.
5.
Combine the modes.
6.
Review the results.
Of these, the first two steps are the same as described for a single-point response spectrum analysis. The procedure
for the remaining four steps is explained below. Random vibration analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
In the GUI method, the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT] contains an option for mode expansion [MXPAND]. Choose YES for mode expansion. You then follow the instructions in Section 6.7.1: Expand the
Modes. The procedures for obtaining the modal solution and expanding the nodes are combined into a single
step.
6.7.1. Expand the Modes

You must expand modes regardless of whether you used the subspace, Block Lanczos, or reduced extraction
method. Details about expanding the modes are explained in Section 3.6: Expand the Modes, but keep in mind
the following additional points:
Only expanded modes are used for the mode combination step.
If you are interested in stresses caused by the spectrum, be sure to request stress calculations here. By
default, no stresses are calculated in the expansion pass, which means no stresses are available at the end
of the spectrum solution.
The mode expansion can be performed as a separate step, or can be included in the modal analysis phase.
At the end of the expansion pass, leave SOLUTION with the FINISH command. If you want to exit ANSYS
after running the modal analysis, you must save the database at this point.
As explained in Chapter 3, Modal Analysis, you can combine the modal solution and mode expansion steps by
including the MXPAND command in the modal analysis step (GUI and batch modes).
6.7.2. Obtain the Spectrum Solution

To obtain the PSD spectrum solution, the database must contain the model data as well as the modal solution
data. If you leave ANSYS after running the modal analysis, you must save the database. In addition, the following
files from the modal solution must be available: Jobname.MODE, .ESAV, .EMAT, .FULL (only for subspace and
Block Lanczos methods), .RST.
1.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define the analysis type and analysis options:
618
Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis
3.
For spectrum type [SPOPT], choose Power Spectral Density (PSD).

Specify stress calculations ON [SPOPT] if you are interested in stress results. Stresses caused by the
spectrum are calculated only if they were also requested during the modal expansion pass.
Specify load step options. The following options are available for a random vibration analysis:
Spectrum Data
Type of PSD
Command(s): PSDUNIT
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Settings
The PSD type can be displacement, velocity, force, pressure, or acceleration. Whether it is a base
excitation or a nodal excitation is specified in Steps 4 and 5. If a pressure PSD is to be applied, the
pressures should be applied in the modal analysis itself.
PSD-versus-frequency table
Define a piecewise-linear (in log-log scale) PSD versus frequency table. Since a curve-fitting
polynomial is used for the closed-form integration of the curve, you should graph the input, which
is overlaid with the fitted curve, to ensure a good fit. If the fit is not good, you should add one or
more intermediate points to the table until you obtain a good fit.
Command(s): PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, PSDGRAPH
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> PSD vs Freq
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph PSD Tables
PSDFRQ and PSDVAL are used to define the PSD-versus-frequency table. Step 6 describes how
to apply additional PSD excitations (if any).
You can issue STAT to list PSD tables and issue PSDGRAPH to graph them.

The following forms of damping are available: ALPHAD, BETAD, and MDAMP result in a frequencydependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all
frequencies. If you specify more than one form of damping, ANSYS calculates an effective damping
ratio at each frequency.
Note If no damping is specified in a PSD analysis, a default DMPRAT of 1 percent is used.
Alpha (Mass) Damping

Command(s): ALPHAD
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
Beta (Stiffness) Damping

Command(s): BETAD
Constant Damping Ratio

Command(s): DMPRAT
Frequency-Dependent Damping Ratio

Command(s): MDAMP
619
The remaining steps are specific to a random vibration analysis:

4.
Apply the PSD excitation at the desired nodes.

Use a value of 1.0 to indicate points where the PSD excitation applies. A value of 0.0 (or blank) can be
used to remove a specification. The excitation direction is implied by the UX, UY, UZ labels on the D
command (for base excitation), and by FX, FY, FZ on the F command (for nodal excitation). For nodal
excitation, values other than 1.0 can be used to scale the participation factors. For pressure PSD, bring
in the load vector from the modal analysis (LVSCALE). You can use the scale factor.
Note You can apply base excitations only at nodes that were constrained in the modal analysis.
Command(s): D (or DK, DL, or DA) for base excitation F (or FK) for nodal excitation LVSCALE
for pressure PSD
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Spectrum> Base PSD Excit>
On Nodes
5.
Begin participation factor calculations for the above PSD excitation.

Use the TBLNO field to indicate which PSD table to use, and Excit to specify whether the calculations
are for a base or nodal excitation.
Command(s): PFACT
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calculate PF
6.
If you need to apply multiple PSD excitations on the same model, repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each additional PSD table. Then define, as necessary, the degree of correlation between the excitations, using any
of the following commands:
Command(s): COVAL for cospectral values, QDVAL for quadspectral values, PSDSPL for a
spatial relationship, PSDWAV for a wave propagation relationship, PSDGRAPH to graph the
data overlaid with the fitted curve
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Correlation
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph Tables
When you use the PSDSPL or PSDWAV command, you must use SPATIAL or WAVE, respectively, for
Parcor on the PFACT command. PSDSPL and PSDWAV relationships might be quite CPU intensive for
multi-point base excitations. Nodal excitation and base excitation input must be consistent when using
PSDWAV and PSDSPL (for example, FY cannot be applied to one node and FZ be applied to another).
The PSDSPL and PSDWAV commands are not available for a pressure PSD analysis.
7.
Specify the output controls.

The only valid output control command for this analysis is PSDRES, which specifies the amount and
form of output written to the results file. Up to three sets of solution quantities can be calculated: displacement solution, velocity solution, or acceleration solution. Each of these can be relative to the base
or absolute.
Command(s): PSDRES
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calc Controls
Table 6.3: Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis shows a summary of the possible solution sets. To
limit the amount of data written to the results file, use OUTRES at the mode expansion step. Using
OUTPR,NSOL,ALL provides a summary table of the significant modal covariance terms.
620
Table 6.3 Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis

Solution
Items
Form
Displacement Solution (label DISP on Displacements, stresses, strains, forces Relative, absolute, or neither
PSDRES)
Velocity Solution (label VELO on
PSDRES)
Velocities, stress velocities, force velo- Relative, absolute, or neither

cities, etc.
Acceleration Solution (label ACEL on

PSDRES)
Accelerations, stress accl's, force accl's, Relative, absolute, or neither

etc.
8.

Command(s): SOLVE
9.

Command(s): FINISH
6.7.3. Combine the Modes

The modes can be combined in a separate solution phase. The procedure is as follows:
1.
Enter Solution.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define analysis type.


3.
Only the PSD mode combination method is valid in a random vibration analysis. This method triggers
calculation of the one-sigma displacements, stresses, etc., in the structure. If you do not issue the PSDCOM
command, the program does not calculate the one-sigma response of the structure.
Command(s): PSDCOM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Mode Combin
The SIGNIF and COMODE fields on the PSD mode combination method [PSDCOM] offer options to reduce
the number of modes to be combined (see the description of PSDCOM command). If you want to exercise
these options, it is prudent to print the modal covariance matrices in Section 6.7.2: Obtain the Spectrum
Solution to first investigate the relative contributions of the modes toward the final solution.
4.
Start the solution.

Command(s): SOLVE
5.

Command(s): FINISH
621

Results from a random vibration analysis are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They consist of
the following quantities:
1.
Expanded mode shapes from the modal analysis
2.
Static solution for base excitation [PFACT,,BASE]
3.
The following output, if mode combinations are requested [PSDCOM] and based on the PSDRES setting:
1 displacement solution (displacements, stresses, strains, and forces)
1 velocity solution (velocities, stress velocities, strain velocities, and force velocities)
1 acceleration solution (accelerations, stress accelerations, strain accelerations, and force accelerations)
You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, and then calculate response PSDs in POST26,
the time-history postprocessor.
6.7.4.1. Reviewing the Results in POST1

To review results in POST1, you first need to understand how the results data are organized on the results file.
Table 6.4: Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis shows the organization.
Note Load step 2 is left blank if you specify only nodal PSD excitation. Also, if you suppress the displacement, velocity, or acceleration solution using the PSDRES command, the corresponding load step
is left blank. Also, the superelement displacement file (.DSUB) is not written for load steps 3, 4, or 5 in a
PSD analysis.
Table 6.4 Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis

Load Step
Substep
Expanded modal solution for 1st mode
Expanded modal solution for 2nd mode
Expanded modal solution for 3rd mode
Etc.
2 (Base excit.
only)
Contents
Etc.
Unit static solution for PSD table 1
Unit static solution for PSD table 2
Etc.
Etc.
1 sigma displacement solution
1 sigma velocity solution (if requested)
1 sigma acceleration solution (if requested)
6.7.4.1.1. Read the Desired Set of Results into the Database

For example, to read in the 1 displacement solution, issue the command:
SET,3,1
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set
622
6.7.4.1.2. Display the Results

Use the same options available for the SPRS analysis.
Note Nodal stress averaging performed by the PLNSOL command may not be appropriate in a random
vibration analysis because the "stresses" are not actual stresses but stress statistics.
6.7.4.2. Calculating Response PSDs in POST26

You can calculate and display response PSDs for any results quantity available on the results file (displacements,
velocities, and/or accelerations) if the Jobname.RST and Jobname.PSD files are available.
The procedure to calculate the response PSD is as follows:
1.
Enter POST26, the time-history postprocessor.

Command(s): /POST26
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro
2.
Store the frequency vector. NPTS is the number of frequency points to be added on either side of natural
frequencies in order to "smooth" the frequency vector (defaults to 5). The frequency vector is stored as
variable 1.
Command(s): STORE,PSD,NPTS
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Store Data
3.
Define the variables in which the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces, etc.)
are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, and/or RFORCE
4.
Calculate the response PSD and store it in the desired variable. The PLVAR command can then be used
to plot the response PSD.
Command(s): RPSD
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Resp PSD
6.7.4.3. Calculating Covariance in POST26

You can compute the covariance between two quantities available on the results file (displacements, velocities,
and/or accelerations), if the Jobname.RST and Jobname.PSD files are available.
The procedure to calculate the covariance between two quantities is as follows:
1.
Enter POST26, the time-history postprocessor.

Command(s): /POST26
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro
2.
Define the variables in which the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces, etc.)
are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, and/or RFORCE
3.
Calculate the contributions of each response component (relative or absolute response) and store them
in the desired variable. The PLVAR command can then be used to plot the modal contributions (relative
response) followed by the contributions of pseudo-static and mixed part responses to the total covariance.
Command(s): CVAR
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Covariance
623

4.
Obtain the covariance.

Command(s): *GET,NameVARI,n,EXTREM,CVAR
GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data
6.7.5. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a random vibration (PSD) analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,
/TITLE,
/PREP7
...
...
...
FINISH
!
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
MODOPT,REDU
M, ...
TOTAL, ...
D, ...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
! Expand the Modes
/SOLU
EXPASS,ON
MXPAND, ...
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Obtain the Spectrum Solution
/SOLU! Reenter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SPOPT,PSD, ...
PSDUNIT, ...
PSDFRQ, ...
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Generate model
!
!
!
!
Enter SOLUTION
Modal analysis
Reduced method
Master DOF
! Constraints
! Initiates solution
! Reenter SOLUTION
! Expansion pass
! Number of modes to expand
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Spectrum analysis
Power Spectral Density; No. of modes;
Stress calcs. on/off
Type of spectrum
Frequency pts. (for spectrum values vs.
frequency tables)
Spectrum values
Damping ratio
Base excitation
Calculate participation factors
Output controls
PSDVAL, ...
DMPRAT, ...
D,0
PFACT, ...
PSDRES, ...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Combine modes using PSD method
/SOLU
! Re-enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,SPECTR
! Spectrum analysis
PSDCOM,SIGNIF,COMODE
! PSD mode combinations with significance factor and
!
option for selecting a subset of modes for
!
combination
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Review the Results
/POST1
! Enter POST1
SET, ...
! Read results from appropriate load step, substep
...! Postprocess as desired
...! (PLDISP; PLNSOL; NSORT; PRNSOL; etc.)
...
FINISH
!
! Calculate Response PSD
/POST26
! Enter POST26
624
Section 6.9: How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis

STORE,PSD
NSOL,2,...
RPSD,3,2,,...
PLVAR,3
...
! Calculate Covariance
RESET
NSOL,2
NSOL,3
CVAR,4,2,3,1,1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
*GET,CVAR23U,VARI,4,EXREME,CVAR !
FINISH
Store frequency vector (variable 1)

Define variable 2 (nodal data)
Calculate response PSD (variable 3)
Plot the response PSD
Reset all POST26 specifications to initial defaults.

Define variable 2 (nodal data).
Define variable 3 (nodal data).
Calculate covariance between displacement
at nodes 2 and 3.
Obtain covariance.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, D, EXPASS, MXPAND,
SPOPT, PSDUNIT, PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, DMPRAT, PFACT, PSDCOM, SUMTYPE, and PSDRES commands.
6.8. How to Do DDAM Spectrum Analysis

The procedure for a DDAM spectrum analysis is the same as that for a single-point response spectrum (SPRS)
analysis (including file requirements), with the following exceptions:
Use the British system of units [inches (not feet), pounds, etc.] for all input data - model geometry, material
properties, element real constants, etc.
Choose DDAM instead of SPRS as the spectrum type [SPOPT command].
Use the ADDAM and VDDAM commands instead of SVTYP, SV, and FREQ to specify the spectrum values
and types. Specify the global direction of excitation using the SED command. Based on the coefficients
specified in the ADDAM and VDDAM commands, the program computes the mode coefficients according
to the empirical equations given in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
The most applicable mode combination method is the NRL sum method [NRLSUM]. Mode combinations
are done in the same manner as for a single-point response spectrum. Mode combinations require
damping.
No damping needs to be specified for solution because it is implied by the ADDAM and VDDAM commands. If damping is specified, it is used for mode combinations but ignored for solution.
Note As in the Single-point Response Spectrum analysis, DDAM spectrum analysis requires six steps
to systematically perform the analysis.
If you are using batch mode, note the following:
The modal solution and DDAM spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis
[ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass with DDAM spectrum loads [ADDAM, VDDAM, SED].
The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
DDAM spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
6.9. How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis

The procedure for a multi-point response spectrum analysis is the same as that for random vibration (PSD) analysis (including file requirements), with the following exceptions:
Choose MPRS instead of PSD as the type of spectrum [SPOPT command].
The "PSD-versus-frequency" tables now represent spectral values versus frequency.

625
You cannot specify any degree of correlation between the spectra (i.e., they are assumed to be uncorrelated).
Only relative results (relative to the base excitation) not absolute values, are calculated.
All mode combination methods are available except PSDCOM.
Results from a multi-point response spectrum analysis are written to the mode combination file, Jobname.MCOM, in the form of POST1 commands. The commands calculate the overall response of the
structure by combining the maximum modal responses in some fashion (specified by the mode combination command in SOLUTION). The overall response consists of the overall displacements and, if placed
on the results file during the modal expansion pass, the overall stresses, strains, and reaction forces. If
Label = VELO or ACEL on the mode combination command (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, or NRLSUM) during
SOLUTION, the corresponding velocity or acceleration responses are written to the mode combination
file.
Multi-point response spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
626
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis

7.1. Definition of Buckling Analysis
Buckling analysis is a technique used to determine buckling loads - critical loads at which a structure becomes
unstable - and buckled mode shapes - the characteristic shape associated with a structure's buckled response.
7.2. Types of Buckling Analyses

Two techniques are available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS Professional programs for predicting the buckling load and buckling mode shape of a structure: nonlinear buckling
analysis, and eigenvalue (or linear) buckling analysis. Since these two methods frequently yield quite different
results, let's examine the differences between them before discussing the details of their implementation.
7.2.1. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

Nonlinear buckling analysis is usually the more accurate approach and is therefore recommended for design or
evaluation of actual structures. This technique employs a nonlinear static analysis with gradually increasing loads
to seek the load level at which your structure becomes unstable, as depicted in Figure 7.1: Buckling Curves (a).
Using the nonlinear technique, your model can include features such as initial imperfections, plastic behavior,
gaps, and large-deflection response. In addition, using deflection-controlled loading, you can even track the
post-buckled performance of your structure (which can be useful in cases where the structure buckles into a
stable configuration, such as "snap-through" buckling of a shallow dome).
7.2.2. Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Eigenvalue buckling analysis predicts the theoretical buckling strength (the bifurcation point) of an ideal linear
elastic structure. (See Figure 7.1: Buckling Curves (b).) This method corresponds to the textbook approach to
elastic buckling analysis: for instance, an eigenvalue buckling analysis of a column will match the classical Euler
solution. However, imperfections and nonlinearities prevent most real-world structures from achieving their
theoretical elastic buckling strength. Thus, eigenvalue buckling analysis often yields unconservative results, and
should generally not be used in actual day-to-day engineering analyses.
Figure 7.1 Buckling Curves
(a) Nonlinear load-deflection curve, (b) Linear (Eigenvalue) buckling curve

7.3. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis

You use the same set of commands to build a model and perform a buckling analysis that you use to do any
other type of finite element analysis. Likewise, you choose similar options from the graphical user interface (GUI)
to build and solve models no matter what type of analysis you are doing.
Section 7.6: Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) and Section 7.7: Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or
Batch Method) show you how to perform an example eigenvalue buckling analysis via the GUI or via commands,
respectively. For detailed, alphabetized descriptions of the ANSYS commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
7.4. Procedure for Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

A nonlinear buckling analysis is a static analysis with large deflections turned on [NLGEOM,ON], extended to a
point where the structure reaches its limit load or maximum load. Other nonlinearities such as plasticity may be
included in the analysis. The procedure for a static analysis is described in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis,
and nonlinearities are described in Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis.
7.4.1. Applying Load Increments

The basic approach in a nonlinear buckling analysis is to constantly increment the applied loads until the solution
begins to diverge. Be sure to use a sufficiently fine load increment as your loads approach the expected critical
buckling load. If the load increment is too coarse, the buckling load predicted may not be accurate. Turn on bisection and automatic time stepping [AUTOTS,ON] to help avoid this problem.
7.4.2. Automatic Time Stepping

With automatic time stepping on, the program automatically seeks out the buckling load. If automatic time
stepping is ON in a static analysis having ramped loading and the solution does not converge at a given load,
the program bisects the load step increment and attempts a new solution at a smaller load. In a buckling analysis,
each such convergence failure is typically accompanied by a "negative pivot" message indicating that the attempted load equals or exceeds the buckling load. You can usually ignore these messages if the program successfully
obtains a converged solution at the next, reduced load. If stress stiffness is active [SSTIF,ON], you should run
without adaptive descent active [NROPT,FULL,,OFF] to ensure that a lower bound to the buckling load is attained.
The program normally converges to the limiting load as the process of bisection and resolution continues to the
point at which the minimum time step increment (specified by DELTIM or NSUBST) is achieved. The minimum
time step will directly affect the precision of your results.
7.4.3. Important
Remember that an unconverged solution does not necessarily mean that the structure has reached its maximum
load. It could also be caused by numerical instability, which might be corrected by refining your modeling technique. Track the load-deflection history of your structure's response to decide whether an unconverged load
step represents actual structural buckling, or whether it reflects some other problem. Perform a preliminary
analysis using the arc-length method [ARCLEN] to predict an approximate value of buckling load. Compare this
approximate value to the more precise value calculated using bisection to help determine if the structure has
indeed reached its maximum load. You can also use the arc-length method itself to obtain a precise buckling
load, but this method requires you to adjust the arc-length radius by trial-and-error in a series of manually directed
reanalyses.
72
Section 7.5: Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
If the loading on the structure is perfectly in-plane (that is, membrane or axial stresses only), the out-ofplane deflections necessary to initiate buckling will not develop, and the analysis will fail to predict
buckling behavior. To overcome this problem, apply a small out-of-plane perturbation, such as a modest
temporary force or specified displacement, to begin the buckling response. (A preliminary eigenvalue
buckling analysis of your structure may be useful as a predictor of the buckling mode shape, allowing you
to choose appropriate locations for applying perturbations to stimulate the desired buckling response.)
The imperfection (perturbation) induced should match the location and size of that in the real structure.
The failure load is very sensitive to these parameters.
In a large-deflection analysis, forces (and displacements) will maintain their original orientation, but surface
loads will "follow" the changing geometry of the structure as it deflects. Therefore, be sure to apply the
proper type of loads.
You should carry your stability analysis through to the point of identifying the critical load in order to
calculate the structure's factor of safety with respect to nonlinear buckling. (Merely establishing the fact
that a structure is stable at a given load level is generally insufficient for most design practice; you will
usually be required to provide a specified safety factor, which can only be determined by establishing the
actual limit load.)
You can extend your analysis into the post-buckled range by activating the arc-length method [ARCLEN].
Use this feature to trace the load-deflection curve through regions of "snap-through" and "snap-back"
response.
For those elements that support the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (BEAM4, SHELL63, and SHELL143),
activate the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 1 and NLGEOM,ON) to enhance the convergence behavior of your nonlinear buckling analyses and improve the accuracy of your results. This element
KEYOPT must be defined before the first load step of the solution and cannot be changed once the solution
has started.
Many other elements (such as BEAM188, BEAM189, and SHELL181) will provide consistent tangent stiffness
matrix with NLGEOM,ON.
7.5. Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Again, remember that eigenvalue buckling analysis generally yields unconservative results, and should usually
not be used for design of actual structures. If you decide that eigenvalue buckling analysis is appropriate for your
application, follow this procedure:
1.
Build the model.
2.
Obtain the static solution.
3.
Obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution.
4.
Expand the solution.
5.
Review the results.

and Meshing Guide.
73
Only linear behavior is valid. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as linear. If you include contact elements,
for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their status after the static prestress run and are
never changed.
Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) must be defined. Material properties may be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any, are ignored.
7.5.2. Obtain the Static Solution

The procedure to obtain a static solution is the same as described in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis, with
the following exceptions:
Prestress effects [PSTRES] must be activated. Eigenvalue buckling analysis requires the stress stiffness
matrix to be calculated.
Unit loads are usually sufficient (that is, actual load values need not be specified). The eigenvalues calculated
by the buckling analysis represent buckling load factors. Therefore, if a unit load is specified, the load
factors represent the buckling loads. All loads are scaled. (Also, the maximum permissible eigenvalue is
1,000,000 - you must use larger applied loads if your eigenvalue exceeds this limit.)
Note that eigenvalues represent scaling factors for all loads. If certain loads are constant (for example,
self-weight gravity loads) while other loads are variable (for example, externally applied loads), you need
to ensure that the stress stiffness matrix from the constant loads is not factored by the eigenvalue solution.
One strategy that you can use to achieve this end is to iterate on the eigensolution, adjusting the variable
loads until the eigenvalue becomes 1.0 (or nearly 1.0, within some convergence tolerance). Design optimization could be useful in driving this iterative procedure to a final answer.
Consider, for example, a pole having a self-weight W0, which supports an externally-applied load, A. To
determine the limiting value of A in an eigenvalue buckling solution, you could solve repetitively, using
different values of A, until by iteration you find an eigenvalue acceptably close to 1.0.
Figure 7.2 Adjusting Variable Loads to Find an Eigenvalue of 1.0
You can apply a nonzero constraint in the prestressing pass as the static load. The eigenvalues found in
the buckling solution will be the load factors applied to these nonzero constraint values. However, the
mode shapes will have a zero value at these degrees of freedom (and not the nonzero value specified).
At the end of the solution, leave SOLUTION [FINISH].
74
7.5.3. Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution

This step requires files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis. Also, the database must
contain the model data (issue RESUME if necessary). Follow the steps below to obtain the eigenvalue buckling
solution.
1.

Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Specify the analysis type.

Command(s): ANTYPE,BUCKLE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis
Note Restarts are not valid in an eigenvalue buckling analysis.
Note When you specify an eigenvalue buckling analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate
for buckling analyses appears. The Solution menu will be either "abridged" or "unabridged",
depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu
contains only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for buckling analyses.
If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution options (that
is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged for this
type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from the Solution menu. For details, see
Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
3.
Specify analysis options.

Command(s): BUCOPT, Method, NMODE, SHIFT
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Regardless of whether you use the command or GUI method, you can specify values for these options:
For NMODE, specify the number of eigenvalues to be extracted. This argument defaults to one, which
is usually sufficient for eigenvalue buckling.
4.
For Method, specify the eigenvalue extraction method. You can choose subspace iteration or Block
Lanczos. The Block Lanczos and subspace iteration methods use the full system matrices. See Section 3.5.2.3: Option: Mode-Extraction Method [MODOPT] in this manual for more information about
these solution methods.
For SHIFT, specify the point (load factor) about which eigenvalues are calculated. The shift point is
helpful when numerical problems are encountered (due to negative eigenvalues, for example). Defaults
to 0.0.
Specify load step options.

The only load step options valid for eigenvalue buckling are output controls and expansion pass options.
Command(s): OUTPR,NSOL,ALL
You can make the expansion pass a part of the eigenvalue buckling solution or perform it as a separate
step. In this document, we treat the expansion pass as a separate step. See Section 7.5.4: Expand the
Solution for details.
5.

Command(s): SAVE
75

GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As
6.

Command(s): SOLVE
The output from the solution mainly consists of the eigenvalues, which are printed as part of the printed
output (Jobname.OUT). The eigenvalues represent the buckling load factors; if unit loads were applied
in the static analysis, they are the buckling loads. No buckling mode shapes are written to the database
or the results file, so you cannot postprocess the results yet. To do this, you need to expand the solution
(explained next).
Sometimes you may see both positive and negative eigenvalues calculated. Negative eigenvalues indicate
that buckling occurs when the loads are applied in an opposite sense.
7.
Exit the SOLUTION processor.

Command(s): FINISH
7.5.4. Expand the Solution

If you want to review the buckled mode shape(s), you must expand the solution regardless of which eigenvalue
extraction method is used. In the case of the subspace iteration method, which uses full system matrices, you
may think of "expansion" to simply mean writing buckled mode shapes to the results file.
The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) from the eigenvalue buckling solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
7.5.4.2. Expanding the Solution

The procedure to expand the mode shapes is explained below.
1.
Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Specify that this is an expansion pass.

Command(s): EXPASS,ON
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass
3.
Specify expansion pass options.

Command(s): MXPAND, NMODE, , , Elcalc
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes
Regardless of whether you use the command or GUI method, the following options are required for the
expansion pass:
76
For NMODE, specify the number of modes to expand. This argument defaults to the total number of
modes that were extracted.
4.
For Elcalc, indicate whether you want ANSYS to calculate stresses. "Stresses" in an eigenvalue
analysis do not represent actual stresses, but give you an idea of the relative stress or force distribution
for each mode. By default, no stresses are calculated.
Specify load step options.

The only options valid in a buckling expansion pass are the following output controls:
Printed Output
Command(s): OUTPR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> Solu Printout
Database and Results File Output

Command(s): OUTRES
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> DB/Results File
Note The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE, that is, the data
can be requested for all modes or no modes - you cannot write information for every other
mode, for instance.
5.

The output consists of expanded mode shapes and, if requested, relative stress distributions for each
mode.
Command(s): SOLVE
6.
Leave the SOLUTION processor. You can now review results in the postprocessor.
Command(s): FINISH
Note The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step. You can make it part of
the eigenvalue buckling solution by including the MXPAND command (Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes) as one of the analysis options.

Results from a buckling expansion pass are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They consist of
buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes, and relative stress distributions. You can review them in POST1,
the general postprocessor.
Note To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the buckling
solution was calculated (issue RESUME if necessary). Also, the results file (Jobname.RST) from the expansion pass must be available.
1.
List all buckling load factors.

Command(s): SET,LIST
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Results Summary
77

2.
Read in data for the desired mode to display buckling mode shapes. (Each mode is stored on the results
file as a separate substep.)
Command(s): SET,SBSTEP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step
3.
Display the mode shape.

Command(s): PLDISP
4.
Contour the relative stress distributions.

GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solution
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solution
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, PSTRES, D, F, SF, BUCOPT, EXPASS, MXPAND,
OUTRES, SET, PLDISP, and PLNSOL commands.
7.6. Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will analyze the buckling of a bar with hinged ends.

Determine the critical buckling load of an axially loaded long slender bar of length with hinged ends. The bar
has a cross-sectional height h, and area A. Only the upper half of the bar is modeled because of symmetry. The
boundary conditions become free-fixed for the half-symmetry model. The moment of inertia of the bar is calculated
as I = Ah2/12 = 0.0052083 in4.

E = 30 x 106 psi
= 200 in
A = 0.25 in2
h = 0.5 in
F = 1 lb.
78
Section 7.6: Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

Figure 7.3 Bar with Hinged Ends

After you enter the ANSYS program, follow these steps to set the title.
1.
2.
Enter the text "Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends" and click on OK.
7.6.3.2. Define the Element Type

In this step, you define BEAM3 as the element type.
1.
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it.
4.
In the scroll box on the right, click on "2D elastic 3" to select it.
5.
Click on OK, and then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
79
7.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants and Material Properties

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete. The Real Constants
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on OK. The Real Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears.
4.
Enter .25 for area, 52083e-7 for IZZ, and .5 for height.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Click on Close in the Real Constants dialog box.
7.
8.
9.
Enter 30e6 for EX (Young's modulus), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material
10. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
7.6.3.4. Define Nodes and Elements

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS. The Create
Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on Apply. Node location defaults to 0,0,0.
4.
5.
Enter 0,100,0 for the X, Y, Z coordinates.
6.
Click on OK. The two nodes appear in the ANSYS Graphics window.
Note The triad, by default, hides the node number for node 1. To turn the triad off, choose
menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options and select the "Not
Shown" option for Location of triad. Then click OK to close the dialog box.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds. The
Fill between Nds picking menu appears.
8.
Click on node 1, then 11, and click on OK. The Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
9.
Click on OK to accept the settings (fill between nodes 1 and 11, and number of nodes to fill 9).
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
11. Click on nodes 1 and 2, then click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Copy> Elements> Auto Numbered. The
Copy Elems Auto-Num picking menu appears.
13. Click on Pick All. The Copy Elements (Automatically-Numbered) dialog box appears.
14. Enter 10 for total number of copies and enter 1 for node number increment.
15. Click on OK. The remaining elements appear in the ANSYS Graphics window.
710
Section 7.6: Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
7.6.3.5. Define the Boundary Conditions

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> New Analysis. The
New Analysis dialog box appears.
2.
Click OK to accept the default of "Static."
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Static or SteadyState Analysis dialog box appears.
4.
In the scroll box for stress stiffness or prestress, scroll to "Prestress ON" to select it.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
7.
Click on node 1 in the ANSYS Graphics window, then click on OK in the picking menu. The Apply U,ROT
on Nodes dialog box appears.
8.
Click on "All DOF" to select it, and click on OK.
9.
10. Click on node 11, then click OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
11. In the scroll box for Direction of force/mom, scroll to "FY" to select it.
12. Enter -1 for the force/moment value, and click on OK. The force symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics
window.
7.6.3.6. Solve the Static Analysis

1.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
3.
Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
Click on Close in the Information window when the solution is finished.
7.6.3.7. Solve the Buckling Analysis

1.
Note Click on Close in the Warning window if the following warning appears: Changing the
analysis type is only valid within the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter
SOLUTION. This will reset the load step count to 1.
2.
In the New Analysis dialog box, click the "Eigen Buckling" option on, then click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Eigenvalue Buckling
Options dialog box appears.
4.
Click on the "Block Lanczos" option, and enter 1 for number of modes to extract.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes.
7.
Enter 1 for number of modes to expand, and click on OK.
8.

711

9.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
10. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
11. Click on Close in the Information window when the solution is finished.
7.6.3.8. Review the Results

1.
2.
3.
Click the "Def + undeformed" option on. Click on OK. The deformed and undeformed shapes appear in
the ANSYS graphics window.
7.6.3.9. Exit ANSYS

1.
2.
7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example buckling analysis of a bar with hinged ends using the ANSYS commands shown
below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7
/TITLE, BUCKLING OF A BAR WITH HINGED SOLVES
ET,1,BEAM3
! Beam element
R,1,.25,52083E-7,.5
! Area,IZZ, height
MP,EX,1,30E6
! Define material properties
N,1
N,11,,100
FILL
E,1,2
EGEN,10,1,1
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
PSTRES,ON
D,1,ALL
F,11,FY,-1
SOLVE
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,BUCKLE
BUCOPT,LANB,1
MXPAND,1
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,FIRST
PLDISP,1
FINISH
!
!
!
!
Static analysis
Calculate prestress effects
Fix symmetry ends
Unit load at free end
! Buckling analysis
! Use Block Lanczos solution method, extract 1 mode
! Expand 1 mode shape

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional buckling analyses.
712

The ANSYS Verification Manual contains a variety of buckling analysis test cases:
VM17 - Snap-Through Buckling of a Hinged Shell
VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Line Elements)
VM128 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Area Elements)
713
714
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis

8.1. What is Structural Nonlinearity?
You encounter structural nonlinearities on a routine basis. For instance, whenever you staple two pieces of paper
together, the metal staples are permanently bent into a different shape. (See Figure 8.1: Common Examples of
Nonlinear Structural Behavior (a).) If you heavily load a wooden shelf, it will sag more and more as time passes.
(See Figure (b).) As weight is added to a car or truck, the contact surfaces between its pneumatic tires and the
underlying pavement change in response to the added load. (See Figure (c).) If you were to plot the load-deflection
curve for each of these examples, you would discover that they all exhibit the fundamental characteristic of
nonlinear structural behavior - a changing structural stiffness.
Figure 8.1 Common Examples of Nonlinear Structural Behavior
8.1.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior

Nonlinear structural behavior arises from a number of causes, which can be grouped into these principal categories:
Changing status
Geometric nonlinearities
Material nonlinearities
8.1.1.1. Changing Status (Including Contact)

Many common structural features exhibit nonlinear behavior that is status-dependent. For example, a tensiononly cable is either slack or taut; a roller support is either in contact or not in contact. Status changes might be
directly related to load (as in the case of the cable), or they might be determined by some external cause.
Situations in which contact occurs are common to many different nonlinear applications. Contact forms a distinctive and important subset to the category of changing-status nonlinearities.
See the ANSYS Contact Technology Guide for detailed information on performing contact analyses using ANSYS.
8.1.1.2. Geometric Nonlinearities

If a structure experiences large deformations, its changing geometric configuration can cause the structure to
respond nonlinearly. An example would be the fishing rod shown in Figure 8.2: A Fishing Rod Demonstrates
Geometric Nonlinearity. Geometric nonlinearity is characterized by "large" displacements and/or rotations.
Figure 8.2 A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric Nonlinearity
8.1.1.3. Material Nonlinearities

Nonlinear stress-strain relationships are a common cause of nonlinear structural behavior. Many factors can influence a material's stress-strain properties, including load history (as in elastoplastic response), environmental
conditions (such as temperature), and the amount of time that a load is applied (as in creep response).
8.1.2. Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses

ANSYS employs the "Newton-Raphson" approach to solve nonlinear problems. In this approach, the load is
subdivided into a series of load increments. The load increments can be applied over several load steps. Figure 8.3: Newton-Raphson Approach illustrates the use of Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations in a single
DOF nonlinear analysis.
82
Section 8.1: What is Structural Nonlinearity?
Figure 8.3 Newton-Raphson Approach
Before each solution, the Newton-Raphson method evaluates the out-of-balance load vector, which is the difference between the restoring forces (the loads corresponding to the element stresses) and the applied loads. The
program then performs a linear solution, using the out-of-balance loads, and checks for convergence. If convergence criteria are not satisfied, the out-of-balance load vector is reevaluated, the stiffness matrix is updated, and
a new solution is obtained. This iterative procedure continues until the problem converges.
A number of convergence-enhancement and recovery features, such as line search, automatic load stepping,
and bisection, can be activated to help the problem to converge. If convergence cannot be achieved, then the
program attempts to solve with a smaller load increment.
In some nonlinear static analyses, if you use the Newton-Raphson method alone, the tangent stiffness matrix
may become singular (or non-unique), causing severe convergence difficulties. Such occurrences include nonlinear buckling analyses in which the structure either collapses completely or "snaps through" to another stable
configuration. For such situations, you can activate an alternative iteration scheme, the arc-length method, to
help avoid bifurcation points and track unloading.
The arc-length method causes the Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations to converge along an arc, thereby
often preventing divergence, even when the slope of the load vs. deflection curve becomes zero or negative.
This iteration method is represented schematically in Figure 8.4: Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. ArcLength Method.
83
Figure 8.4 Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method
To summarize, a nonlinear analysis is organized into three levels of operation:
The "top" level consists of the load steps that you define explicitly over a "time" span (see the discussion
of "time" in Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). Loads are assumed to vary linearly
within load steps (for static analyses).
Within each load step, you can direct the program to perform several solutions (substeps or time steps) to
apply the load gradually.
At each substep, the program will perform a number of equilibrium iterations to obtain a converged
solution.
Figure 8.5: Load Steps, Substeps, and Time illustrates a typical load history for a nonlinear analysis. Also see the
discussion of load steps, substeps, and equilibrium iterations in Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide.
Figure 8.5 Load Steps, Substeps, and Time
84
Section 8.1: What is Structural Nonlinearity?

The ANSYS program gives you a number of choices when you designate convergence criteria: you can base
convergence checking on forces, moments, displacements, or rotations, or on any combination of these items.
Additionally, each item can have a different convergence tolerance value. For multiple-degree-of-freedom
problems, you also have a choice of convergence norms.
You should almost always employ a force-based (and, when applicable, moment-based) convergence tolerance.
Displacement-based (and, when applicable, rotation-based) convergence checking can be added, if desired, but
should usually not be used alone.
8.1.2.1. Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency

If all energy put into a system by external loads is recovered when the loads are removed, the system is said to
be conservative. If energy is dissipated by the system (such as by plastic deformation or sliding friction), the system
is said to be nonconservative. An example of a nonconservative system is shown in Figure 8.6: Nonconservative
(Path-Dependent) Behavior.
An analysis of a conservative system is path independent: loads can usually be applied in any order and in any
number of increments without affecting the end results. Conversely, an analysis of a nonconservative system is
path dependent: the actual load-response history of the system must be followed closely to obtain accurate
results. An analysis can also be path dependent if more than one solution could be valid for a given load level
(as in a snap-through analysis). Path dependent problems usually require that loads be applied slowly (that is,
using many substeps) to the final load value.
Figure 8.6 Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior
8.1.2.2. Substeps
When using multiple substeps, you need to achieve a balance between accuracy and economy: more substeps
(that is, small time step sizes) usually result in better accuracy, but at a cost of increased run times. ANSYS provides
automatic time stepping that is designed for this purpose.
Automatic time stepping adjusts the time step size as needed, gaining a better balance between accuracy and
economy. Automatic time stepping activates the ANSYS program's bisection feature.
Bisection provides a means of automatically recovering from a convergence failure. This feature will cut a time
step size in half whenever equilibrium iterations fail to converge and automatically restart from the last converged
85

substep. If the halved time step again fails to converge, bisection will again cut the time step size and restart,
continuing the process until convergence is achieved or until the minimum time step size (specified by you) is
reached.
8.1.2.3. Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis

Consider what happens to loads when your structure experiences large deflections. In many instances, the loads
applied to your system maintain constant direction no matter how the structure deflects. In other cases, forces
will change direction, "following" the elements as they undergo large rotations.
The ANSYS program can model both situations, depending on the type of load applied. Accelerations and concentrated forces maintain their original orientation, regardless of the element orientation. Pressure loads always
act normal to the deflected element surface, and can be used to model "following" forces. Figure 8.7: Load Directions Before and After Deflection illustrates constant-direction and following forces.
Note Nodal coordinate system orientations are not updated in a large deflection analysis. Calculated
displacements are therefore output in the original directions.
Figure 8.7 Load Directions Before and After Deflection
8.1.2.4. Nonlinear Transient Analyses

The procedure for analyzing nonlinear transient behavior is similar to that used for nonlinear static behavior:
you apply the load in incremental steps, and the program performs equilibrium iterations at each step. The main
difference between the static and transient procedures is that time-integration effects can be activated in the
transient analysis. Thus, "time" always represents actual chronology in a transient analysis. The automatic time
stepping and bisection feature is also applicable for transient analyses.
8.2. Using Geometric Nonlinearities

Small deflection and small strain analyses assume that displacements are small enough that the resulting stiffness
changes are insignificant.
86
Section 8.2: Using Geometric Nonlinearities

In contrast, large strain analyses account for the stiffness changes that result from changes in an element's shape
and orientation. By issuing NLGEOM,ON (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( :
Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options), you activate
large strain effects in those element types that support this feature. The large strain feature is available in most
of the solid elements (including all of the large strain and hyperelastic elements), as well as in most of the shell
and beam elements. Large strain effects are not available in the ANSYS Professional program. However, large
deflection effects (NLGEOM command) are supported for shell and beam elements in ANSYS Professional, if indicated as such in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
The large strain procedure places no theoretical limit on the total rotation or strain experienced by an element.
(Certain ANSYS element types will be subject to practical limitations on total strain - see below.) However, the
procedure requires that strain increments must be restricted to maintain accuracy. Thus, the total load should
be broken into smaller steps.
8.2.1. Stress-Strain
In large strain solutions, all stress-strain input and results will be in terms of true stress and true (or logarithmic)
strain. (In one dimension, true strain would be expressed as = ln ( / 0). For small-strain regions of response,
true strain and engineering strain are essentially identical.) To convert strain from small (engineering) strain to
logarithmic strain, use ln = ln (1 + eng). To convert from engineering stress to true stress, use true = eng (1 +
eng). (This stress conversion is valid only for incompressible plasticity stress-strain data.)
8.2.1.1. Large Deflections with Small Strain

This feature is available in all beam and most shell elements, as well as in a number of the nonlinear elements.
Issue NLGEOM,ON (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options) to activate large deflection effects for those
elements that are designed for small strain analysis types that support this feature.
8.2.2. Stress Stiffening

The out-of-plane stiffness of a structure can be significantly affected by the state of in-plane stress in that structure.
This coupling between in-plane stress and transverse stiffness, known as stress stiffening, is most pronounced in
thin, highly stressed structures, such as cables or membranes. A drumhead, which gains lateral stiffness as it is
tightened, would be a common example of a stress-stiffened structure.
Even though stress stiffening theory assumes that an element's rotations and strains are small, in some structural
systems (such as in Figure 8.8: Stress-Stiffened Beams (a)), the stiffening stress is only obtainable by performing
a large deflection analysis. In other systems (such as in Figure 8.8: Stress-Stiffened Beams (b)), the stiffening
stress is obtainable using small deflection, or linear, theory.
87
Figure 8.8 Stress-Stiffened Beams
To use stress stiffening in the second category of systems, you must issue PSTRES,ON (GUI path Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options) in your first load step.
Large strain and large deflection procedures include initial stress effects as a subset of their theory. For most
elements, initial stiffness effects are automatically included when large deformation effects are activated
[NLGEOM,ON] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options).
8.2.3. Spin Softening

Spin softening adjusts (softens) the stiffness matrix of a rotating body for dynamic mass effects. The adjustment
approximates the effects of geometry changes due to large deflection circumferential motion in a small deflection
analysis. It is usually used in conjunction with prestressing [PSTRES] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options), which is caused by centrifugal force in the rotating body.
It should not be used with the other deformation nonlinearities, large deflection, or large strain. Spin softening
is activated by the KSPIN field on the OMEGA and CMOMEGA commands (GUI path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Inertiav Angular Velocity).
8.3. Modeling Material Nonlinearities

A number of material-related factors can cause your structure's stiffness to change during the course of an analysis. Nonlinear stress-strain relationships of plastic, multilinear elastic, and hyperelastic materials will cause a
structure's stiffness to change at different load levels (and, typically, at different temperatures). Creep, viscoplasticity, and viscoelasticity will give rise to nonlinearities that can be time-, rate-, temperature-, and stress-related.
Swelling will induce strains that can be a function of temperature, time, neutron flux level (or some analogous
quantity), and stress. Any of these kinds of material properties can be incorporated into an ANSYS analysis if you
use appropriate element types. Nonlinear constitutive models (TB command, except for TB,FAIL) are not applicable
for the ANSYS Professional program.
8.3.1. Nonlinear Materials

If a material displays nonlinear or rate-dependent stress-strain behavior, then you must use the TB family of
commands [TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBPT, TBCOPY, TBLIST, TBPLOT, TBDELE] (GUI path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Nonlinear) to define the nonlinear material property
88
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities

relationships in terms of a data table. The exact form of these commands varies depending on the type of nonlinear material behavior being defined. The different material behavior options are described briefly below. See
Data Tables - Implicit Analysis in the ANSYS Elements Reference for specific details for each material behavior type.
8.3.1.1. Plasticity
Most common engineering materials exhibit a linear stress-strain relationship up to a stress level known as the
proportional limit. Beyond this limit, the stress-strain relationship will become nonlinear, but will not necessarily
become inelastic. Plastic behavior, characterized by nonrecoverable strain, begins when stresses exceed the
material's yield point. Because there is usually little difference between the yield point and the proportional limit,
the ANSYS program assumes that these two points are coincident in plasticity analyses (see Figure 8.9: Elastoplastic
Stress-Strain Curve).
Plasticity is a nonconservative, path-dependent phenomenon. In other words, the sequence in which loads are
applied and in which plastic responses occur affects the final solution results. If you anticipate plastic response
in your analysis, you should apply loads as a series of small incremental load steps or time steps, so that your
model will follow the load-response path as closely as possible. The maximum plastic strain is printed with the
substep summary information in your output (Jobname.OUT).
Figure 8.9 Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve
The automatic time stepping feature [AUTOTS] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control
( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time and
Substps) will respond to plasticity after the fact, by reducing the load step size after a load step in which a large
number of equilibrium iterations was performed or in which a plastic strain increment greater than 15% was
encountered. If too large a step was taken, the program will bisect and resolve using a smaller step size.
Other kinds of nonlinear behavior might also occur along with plasticity. In particular, large deflection and large
strain geometric nonlinearities will often be associated with plastic material response. If you expect large deformations in your structure, you must activate these effects in your analysis with the NLGEOM command (GUI path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged
Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options). For large strain analyses, material stress-strain properties must be
input in terms of true stress and logarithmic strain.
89
8.3.1.1.1. Plastic Material Options

Several options are available for describing plasticity behavior. You may incorporate other options into the
program by using User Programmable Features (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
The Bilinear Kinematic Hardening (BKIN) option assumes the total stress range is equal to twice the yield stress,
so that the Bauschinger effect is included (see Figure 8.11: Bauschinger Effect). This option is recommended
for general small-strain use for materials that obey von Mises yield criteria (which includes most metals). It is not
recommended for large-strain applications. You can combine the BKIN option with creep and Hill anisotropy
options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements
Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter
for sample input listings of material combinations. Stress-strain-temperature data are demonstrated in the following example. Figure 8.10: Kinematic Hardening(a) illustrates a typical display [TBPLOT] of bilinear kinematic
hardening properties.
MPTEMP,1,0,500
MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3
TB,BKIN,1,2
TBTEMP,0.0
TBDATA,1,44E3,1.2E6
TBTEMP,500
TBDATA,1,29.33E3,0.8E6
TBLIST,BKIN,1
/XRANGE,0,0.01
TBPLOT,BKIN,1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Define temperatures for Young's modulus

C0 and C1 terms for Young's modulus
Activate a data table
Temperature = 0.0
Yield = 44,000; Tangent modulus = 1.2E6
Temperature = 500
Yield = 29,330; Tangent modulus = 0.8E6
List the data table
X-axis of TBPLOT to extend from varepsilon=0 to 0.01
Display the data table
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more
information.
Figure 8.10 Kinematic Hardening
(a) Bilinear kinematic hardening, (b) Multilinear kinematic hardening
810
Figure 8.11 Bauschinger Effect
The Multilinear Kinematic Hardening (KINH and MKIN) options use the Besseling model, also called the sublayer
or overlay model, so that the Bauschinger effect is included. KINH is preferred for use over MKIN because it uses
Rice's model where the total plastic strains remain constant by scaling the sublayers. KINH allows you to define
more stress-strain curves (40 vs. 5), and more points per curve (20 vs. 5). Also, when KINH is used with LINK180,
SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208,
and SHELL209, you can use TBOPT = 4 (or PLASTIC) to define the stress vs. plastic strain curve. For either option,
if you define more than one stress-strain curve for temperature dependent properties, then each curve should
contain the same number of points. The assumption is that the corresponding points on the different stressstrain curves represent the temperature dependent yield behavior of a particular sublayer. These options are
not recommended for large-strain analyses. You can combine either of these options with the Hill anisotropy
option to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements
Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter
for sample input listings of material combinations. Figure 8.10: Kinematic Hardening(b) illustrates typical stressstrain curves for the MKIN option.
A typical stress-strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.001,1.0
TBPT,,0.1012,1.2
TBPT,,0.2013,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.008,0.9
TBPT,,0.09088,1.0
TBPT,,0.12926,1.05
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activate a data table

Temperature = 20.0
Strain = 0.001, Stress = 1.0
Temperature = 40.0
Strain = 0.12926, Stress = 1.05
In this example, the third point in the two stress-strain curves defines the temperature-dependent yield behavior
of the third sublayer.
A typical stress- plastic strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3,PLASTIC
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.000,1.0
TBPT,,0.1012,1.2
TBPT,,0.2013,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.008,0.9
TBPT,,0.09088,1.0
TBPT,,0.12926,1.05
! Activate a data table

! Temperature = 20.0
! Plastic Strain = 0.0000,
! Temperature = 40.0
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.2
Stress = 1.3
Stress = 0.9
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.05
In this example, the stress - strain behavior is the same as the previous sample, except now the strain value is
the plastic strain. The plastic strain can be converted from total strain as follows:
811

Plastic Stain = (total strain - stress)/Young's Modulus.
A typical stress-strain temperature data input using MKIN is demonstrated by this example.
MPTEMP,1,0,500
! Define temperature-dependent EX,
MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3
! as in BKIN example
TB,MKIN,1,2
TBTEMP,,STRAIN
! Next TBDATA values are strains
TBDATA,1,3.67E-3,5E-3,7E-3,10E-3,15E-3
! Strains for all temps
TBTEMP,0.0
! Temperature = 0.0
TBDATA,1,44E3,50E3,55E3,60E3,65E3
! Stresses at temperature = 0.0
TBTEMP,500
! Temperature = 500
TBDATA,1,29.33E3,37E3,40.3E3,43.7E3,47E3 ! Stresses at temperature = 500
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,MKIN,1
Please see the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBPT, TBTEMP, TBDATA, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for
more information.
The Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening (CHABOCHE) option uses the Chaboche model, which is a multi-component
nonlinear kinematic hardening model that allows you to superpose several kinematic models. See the ANSYS,
Inc. Theory Reference for details. Like the BKIN and MKIN options, you can use the CHABOCHE option to simulate
monotonic hardening and the Bauschinger effect. This option also allows you to simulate the ratcheting and
shakedown effect of materials. By combining the CHABOCHE option with isotropic hardening model options
BISO, MISO, and NLISO, you have the further capability of simulating cyclic hardening or softening. You can also
combine this option with the Hill anisotropy option to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material
Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2:
Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The model has
1 + 2 x n constants, where n is the number of kinematic models, and is defined by NPTS in the TB command. See
the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. You define the material constants using the TBTEMP and TBDATA
commands. This model is suitable for large strain analysis.
The following example is a typical data table with no temperature dependency and one kinematic model:
TB,CHABOCHE,1
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
! Activate CHABOCHE data table

! Values for constants C1, C2, and C3
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants with two kinematic models
at two temperature points:
TB,CHABOCHE,1,2,2
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24,C25
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activate CHABOCHE data table

Define first temperature
Values for constants C11, C12, C13,
C14, and C15 at first temperature
Define second temperature
C24, and C25 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
The Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (BISO) option uses the von Mises yield criteria coupled with an isotropic work
hardening assumption. This option is often preferred for large strain analyses. You can combine BISO with
Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See
Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.
The Multilinear Isotropic Hardening (MISO) option is like the bilinear isotropic hardening option, except that
a multilinear curve is used instead of a bilinear curve. This option is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories in small-strain analyses. It is, however, recommended for large strain analyses. The
MISO option can contain up to 20 different temperature curves, with up to 100 different stress-strain points allowed
812

per curve. Strain points can differ from curve to curve. You can combine this option with nonlinear kinematic
hardening (CHABOCHE) for simulating cyclic hardening or softening. You can also combine the MISO option
with creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material
Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2:
Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The stress-straintemperature curves from the MKIN example would be input for a multilinear isotropic hardening material as
follows:
/prep7
MPTEMP,1,0,500
! Define temperature-dependent EX,
MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3
TB,MISO,1,2,5
TBTEMP,0.0
TBPT,DEFI,2E-3,29.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,50E3
TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,55E3
TBPT,DEFI,10E-3,60E3
TBTEMP,500
TBPT,DEFI,2.2E-3,27.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,37E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,MISO,1

! Temperature = 0.0
! Strain, stress at temperature = 0
! Temperature = 500
! Strain, stress at temperature = 500
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBPT, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more information.
The Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (NLISO) option is based on the Voce hardening law (see the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference for details). The NLISO option is a variation of BISO where an exponential saturation hardening
term is appended to the linear term (see Figure 8.12: NLISO Stress-Strain Curve).
813
Figure 8.12 NLISO Stress-Strain Curve
The advantage of this model is that the material behavior is defined as a specified function which has four material constants that you define through the TBDATA command. You can obtain the material constants by fitting
material tension stress-strain curves. Unlike MISO, there is no need to be concerned about how to appropriately
define the pairs of the material stress-strain points. However, this model is only applicable to the tensile curve
like the one shown in Figure 8.12: NLISO Stress-Strain Curve. This option is suitable for large strain analyses.
You can combine NLISO with Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex
material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants at two temperature points:
TB,NLISO,1
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14
TBTEMP,200
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activate NLISO data table

Define first temperature
C14 at first temperature
Define second temperature
C24 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
The Anisotropic (ANISO) option allows for different bilinear stress-strain behavior in the material x, y, and z directions as well as different behavior in tension, compression, and shear. This option is applicable to metals that
have undergone some previous deformation (such as rolling). It is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories since work hardening is assumed. The yield stresses and slopes are not totally independent
(see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details).
814

To define anisotropic material plasticity, use MP commands (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other>
Change Mat Props) to define the elastic moduli (EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, and NUXZ). Then, issue the TB command
[TB,ANISO] followed by TBDATA commands to define the yield points and tangent moduli. (See Nonlinear StressStrain Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference for more information.)
The Hill Anisotropy (HILL) option, when combined with other material options simulates plasticity, viscoplasticity,
and creep - all using the Hill potential. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the
combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input
listings of material combinations. The Hill potential may only be used with the following elements: PLANE42,
SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
The Drucker-Prager (DP) option is applicable to granular (frictional) material such as soils, rock, and concrete,
and uses the outer cone approximation to the Mohr-Coulomb law.
MP,EX,1,5000
MP,NUXY,1,0.27
TB,DP,1
TBDATA,1,2.9,32,0
! Cohesion = 2.9 (use consistent units),

! Angle of internal friction = 32 degrees,
! Dilatancy angle = 0 degrees
See the MP, TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
The Cast Iron (CAST, UNIAXIAL) option assumes a modified von Mises yield surface, which consists of the von
Mises cylinder in compression and a Rankine cube in tension. It has different yield strengths, flows, and hardenings
in tension and compression. Elastic behavior is isotropic, and is the same in tension and compression. The TB,CAST
command is used to input the plastic Poisson's ration in tension, which can be temperature dependent. Use the
TB,UNIAXIAL command to enter the yield and hardening in tension and compression.
Note Cast Iron is intended for monotonic loading only and cannot be used with any other material
model.
TB,CAST,1,,,ISOTROPIC
TBDATA,1,0.04
TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,TENSION
TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.550E-03,0.813E+04
TBPT,,0.100E-02,0.131E+05
TBPT,,0.250E-02,0.241E+05
TBPT,,0.350E-02,0.288E+05
TBPT,,0.450E-02,0.322E+05
TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,COMPRESSION
TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.203E-02,0.300E+05
TBPT,,0.500E-02,0.500E+05
TBPT,,0.800E-02,0.581E+05
TBPT,,0.110E-01,0.656E+05
TBPT,,0.140E-01,0.700E+05
Figure 8.13: Cast Iron Plasticity illustrates the idealized response of gray cast iron in tension and compression.
815
Figure 8.13 Cast Iron Plasticity

Compression
Tension
See the TB and TBPT command descriptions for more information.
8.3.1.2. Multilinear Elasticity

The Multilinear Elastic (MELAS) material behavior option describes a conservative (path-independent) response
in which unloading follows the same stress-strain path as loading. Thus, relatively large load steps might be appropriate for models that incorporate this type of material nonlinearity. Input format is similar to that required
for the multilinear isotropic hardening option, except that the TB command now uses the label MELAS.
8.3.1.3. User Defined Material

The User Defined (USER) material option describes input parameters for defining a material model based on
either of two subroutines, which are ANSYS user-programmable features (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features). The choice of which subroutine to use is based on which element you are using.
The USER option works with the USERMAT subroutine in defining any material model (except incompressible
materials), when you use any of the following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
The USER option works with the USERPL subroutine in defining plasticity or viscoplasticity material models, when
you use any of the following elements: LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43,
SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SHELL91, SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95.
To access the user material option, issue the TB,USER command to define the material number, the number of
temperatures, and the number of data points. Then define the temperatures and material constants using the
TBTEMP and TBDATA commands.
The following example illustrates defining a material with two temperatures and four data points:
TB,USER,1,2,4
TBTEMP,1.0
TBDATA,1,19e5,0.3,1e3,100,
TBTEMP,2.0
816
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Define material 1 as user

material with 2
temperatures and 4 data
points at each
temperature point.
First temperature.
4 material constants for
first temperature.
Second temperature.

TBDATA,1,21e5,0.3,2e3,100,
! 4 material constants for

! second temperature.
If you use state variables in the USERMAT subroutine, you must first define the number of state variables using
the TB,STATE command. You then use the TBDATA command to initialize the value of the state variables, as
shown in the following example:
TB,STATE,1,,4,
! Define material 1, which

! has 4 state variables.
! Initialize the 4 state variables.
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4,
You cannot use TB,STATE in the USERPL subroutine.

See the TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
8.3.1.4. Hyperelasticity
A material is said to be hyperelastic if there exists an elastic potential function (or strain energy density function),
which is a scalar function of one of the strain or deformation tensors, whose derivative with respect to a strain
component determines the corresponding stress component.
Hyperelasticity can be used to analyze rubber-like materials (elastomers) that undergo large strains and displacements with small volume changes (nearly incompressible materials). Large strain theory is required [NLGEOM,ON].
A representative hyperelastic structure (a balloon seal) is shown in Figure 8.14: Hyperelastic Structure.
Figure 8.14 Hyperelastic Structure
There are two types of elements suitable for simulating hyperelastic materials: the hyperelastic elements (HYPER56,
HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158), and all of the 18x family of elements except the link and beam elements (SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). For further details
on the use of hyperelastic elements, and on mixed formulation of the 18x solid elements, see Mixed u-P Formulation Elements in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
The material response in ANSYS hyperelastic models is always assumed to be isotropic and isothermal. Because
of this assumption, the strain energy potentials are expressed in terms of strain invariants. Unless indicated
otherwise, the hyperelastic materials are also assumed to be nearly or purely incompressible. Material thermal
expansion is also assumed to be isotropic.
ANSYS supports several options of strain energy potentials for the simulation of incompressible or nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials. All options are applicable to elements SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
817

SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Access these options through the TBOPT argument
of TB,HYPER.
One of the options, the Mooney-Rivlin option, is also applicable to elements HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158, and explicit dynamics elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168. To access the MooneyRivlin option for these elements, use TB,MOONEY.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the hyperelastic options defined by
TB,HYPER. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves
and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either
batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more information.
Each of the hyperelastic options is presented in the following sections.
8.3.1.4.1. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER)

Note that this section applies to using the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
If you want to use the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158, PLANE162,
SHELL163, SOLID164, or SOLID168, see Section 8.3.1.4.11: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY).
The Mooney-Rivlin option (TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY), which is the default, allows you to define 2, 3, 5, or 9 parameters
through the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a 5 parameter model you would issue
TB,HYPER,1,,5,MOONEY.
The 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option has an applicable strain of about 100% in tension and 30% in compression.
Compared to the other options, higher orders of the Mooney-Rivlin option may provide better approximation
to a solution at higher strain.
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Mooney-Rivlin option with 3 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,3,MOONEY
TBDATA,1,0.163498
TBDATA,2,0.125076
TBDATA,3,0.014719
TBDATA,4,6.93063E-5
!Activate 3 parameter Mooney-Rivlin data table

!Define c10
!Define c01
!Define c11
!Define incompressibility parameter
!(as 2/K, K is the bulk modulus)
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material (TB,HYPER) in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the
material constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.2. Ogden Hyperelastic Option

The Ogden option (TB,HYPER,,,,OGDEN) allows you to define an unlimited number of parameters through the
NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a 3 parameter model, use TB,HYPER,1,,3,OGDEN.
Compared to the other options, the Ogden option usually provides the best approximation to a solution at larger
strain levels. The applicable strain level can be up to 700%. A higher parameter value can provide a better fit to
the exact solution. It may however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the material constants, and it requires
enough data to cover the whole range of deformation for which you may be interested. For these reasons, a
high parameter value is not recommended.
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Ogden option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,OGDEN
TBDATA,1,0.326996
818
!Activate 2 parameter Ogden data table

!Define 1

TBDATA,2,2
TBDATA,3,-0.250152
TBDATA,4,-2
TBDATA,5,6.93063E-5
!Define
1
!Define 2
!Define
2
!(Second incompressibility parameter d2 is zero)
Refer to Ogden Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material
constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.3. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option

The Neo-Hookean option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO) represents the simplest form of strain energy potential, and has an
applicable strain range of 20-30%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Neo-Hookean option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,NEO
TBDATA,1,0.577148
TBDATA,2,7.0e-5
!Activate Neo-Hookean data table

!Define mu shear modulus
Refer to Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material
8.3.1.4.4. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option

The polynomial form option (TB,HYPER,,,,POLY) allows you to define an unlimited number of parameters through
the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a 3 parameter model you would issue TB,HYPER,1,,3,POLY.
Similar to the higher order Mooney-Rivlin options, the polynomial form option may provide a better approximation to a solution at higher strain.
For NPTS = 1 and constant c01 = 0, the polynomial form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option (see
Section 8.3.1.4.3: Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option for a sample input listing). Also, for NPTS = 1, it is equivalent
to the 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option. For NPTS = 2, it is equivalent to the 5 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option,
and for NPTS = 3, it is equivalent to the 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option (see Section 8.3.1.4.1: Mooney-Rivlin
Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER) for a sample input listing).
Refer to Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of
the material constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.5. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option

The Arruda-Boyce option (TB,HYPER,,,,BOYCE) has an applicable strain level of up to 300%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Arruda-Boyce option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,BOYCE
TBDATA,1,200.0
TBDATA,2,5.0
TBDATA,3,0.001
!Activate Arruda-Boyce data table

!Define initial shear modulus
!Define limiting network stretch
Refer to Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the
819
8.3.1.4.6. Gent Hyperelastic Option

The Gent option (TB,HYPER,,,,GENT) has an applicable strain level of up to 300%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Gent option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,GENT
TBDATA,1,3.0
TBDATA,2,42.0
TBDATA,3,0.001
!Activate Gent data table

!Define limiting I1 - 3
Refer to Gent Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material
8.3.1.4.7. Yeoh Hyperelastic Option

The Yeoh option (TB,HYPER,,,,YEOH) is a reduced polynomial form of the hyperelasticity option TB,HYPER,,,,POLY.
An example of a 2 term Yeoh model is TB,HYPER,1,,2,YEOH.
Similar to the polynomial form option, the higher order terms may provide a better approximation to a solution
at higher strain.
For NPTS = 1, the Yeoh form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option (see Section 8.3.1.4.3: Neo-Hookean
Hyperelastic Option for a sample input listing).
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Yeoh option with 2 terms and 1 incompressibility
term:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,YEOH
TBDATA,1,0.163498
TBDATA,2,0.125076
TBDATA,3,6.93063E-5
!Activate 2 term Yeoh data table

!Define C1
!Define C2
!Define first incompressibility parameter
Refer to Yeoh Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material
8.3.1.4.8. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option

The Blatz-Ko option (TB,HYPER,,,,BLATZ) is the simplest option for simulating the compressible foam type of
elastomer. This option is analogous to the Neo-Hookean option of incompressible hyperelastic materials.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Blatz-Ko option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,BLATZ
TBDATA,1,5.0
!Activate Blatz-Ko data table

Refer to Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the
8.3.1.4.9. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option

The Ogden compressible foam option (TB,HYPER,,,,FOAM) simulates highly compressible foam material. An example of a 3 parameter model is TB,HYPER,1,,3,FOAM. Compared to the Blatz-Ko option, the Ogden foam option
usually provides the best approximation to a solution at larger strain levels. The higher the number of parameters,
the better the fit to the experimental data. It may however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the material
constants, and it requires sufficient data to cover the whole range of deformation for which you may be interested.
For these reasons, a high parameter value is not recommended.
820

The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Ogden foam option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,FOAM
TBDATA,1,1.85
TBDATA,2,4.5
TBDATA,3,-9.20
TBDATA,4,-4.5
TBDATA,5,0.92
TBDATA,6,0.92
!Activate 2 parameter Ogden foam data table

!Define 1
!Define
1
!Define 2
!Define
2
!Define first compressibility parameter
!Define second compressibility parameter
Refer to Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.10. User-Defined Hyperelastic Option

The User option (TB,HYPER,,,,USER) allows you to use the subroutine USERHYPER to define the derivatives of the
strain energy potential with respect to the strain invariants. Refer to the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features
for a detailed description on writing a user hyperelasticity subroutine.
8.3.1.4.11. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY)

Note that this section applies to using the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74,
HYPER158, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, or SOLID168.
If you want to use the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, see Section 8.3.1.4.1: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option
(TB,HYPER).
ANSYS element types HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, and HYPER158 use up to a nine-term Mooney-Rivlin elastic
potential function. If you already know the values for two-term, three-term, five-term, or nine-term MooneyRivlin constants, you can enter them directly with the TB family of commands. (See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for information on the Mooney-Rivlin function.) For these element types, you can also specify the material
function as a User Programmable Feature (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Mooney-Rivlin for these elements is presented below :
MP,NUXY,1,0.49999
! NUXY should be almost equal to, but less than 0.5
TB,MOONEY,1,1
TBDATA,1,0.163498
TBDATA,2,0.125076
TBDATA,3,-0.0047583
TBDATA,4,0.014719
TBDATA,6,0.0003882
! (Constants 5, 7, 8, and 9 default to 0.0 in this example)
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material Constants (TB,MOONEY) in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the constants required as input for this option.
The Mooney-Rivlin constants for any given hyperelastic material are not generally available in the open literature.
Consequently, you can use the *MOONEY command to automatically determine a set of Mooney-Rivlin constants
from a set of known experimental test data. Sometimes the manufacturer of the material will be able to supply
some or all of the needed test data, but you might find that you need to obtain more data from a testing laboratory.
Hyperelastic material behavior is much more complicated than typical metallic material behavior. Hyperelastic
stress-strain relationships usually differ significantly for tension, compression, and shear modes of deformation.
Therefore, using *MOONEY to generate a generally applicable hyperelastic material model will require test data
821

that encompasses all possible modes of deformation: tension, compression, and shear. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference for a discussion of hyperelastic test methods and equivalent deformation modes.
If an incomplete set of data is provided (for instance, if only uniaxial tension data are available), the program can
still determine usable hyperelastic material properties. However, in such cases the deformations experienced in
the model should be limited to be of the same nature as those experienced in the tests. In other words, the test
data should represent all modes of deformation and ranges of response (strain) that will be experienced in the
model.
This advice is simply common sense - if you do not know how the material behaves in a certain mode of deformation or range of strain, you cannot accurately predict the behavior of a part that experiences such deformations
or strains. For example, if all you have is uniaxial tension data, do not model a part that experiences significant
shear deformations. If your test data extend only from 0% to 100% strain, do not model a part that experiences
150% strain. If, after reviewing your analysis, you discover that the available test data do not adequately characterize the model's response, get more test data!
You can use the *MOONEY command to automatically determine a set of Mooney-Rivlin constants from experimental test data. ANSYS determines the constants and stores them in the database, and in an array parameter.
Additionally, it writes an ASCII file (Jobname.TB) that records the Mooney-Rivlin constants in the form of a series
of TB and TBDATA commands. Once such a file exists, you can use it in future analyses to define that same material's Mooney-Rivlin constants - you do not need to use the *MOONEY command every time to regenerate
these constants.
Determining and Applying Mooney-Rivlin Constants
The procedure for determining and applying Mooney-Rivlin constants consists of five main steps:
1.
Dimension all arrays that will be used for data input, Mooney-Rivlin constant storage, and calculated
stress-strain evaluation.
2.
Fill the input-data arrays with engineering stress and strain test data.
3.
Determine the Mooney-Rivlin constants automatically.
4.
Evaluate the quality of the automatically determined Mooney-Rivlin constants.
5.
Apply the Mooney-Rivlin constants in your analysis.
Step 1: Dimension the Arrays

Command(s): *DIM
GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Array Parameters> Define/Edit
You must dimension arrays before using the *MOONEY command. In most cases, you will need to dimension
at least six different arrays. (You can give these arrays any valid parameter names, but for convenience, we will
use specific array names, such as STRAIN, STRESS, and so on, in our discussion. You can substitute any other
valid parameter names that you like.) The arrays are STRAIN, STRESS, CONST, CALC, SORTSN, and SORTSS.
STRAIN Array: An array of engineering strain data from mechanical material tests, arranged in three columns:
Column 1: uniaxial tension and/or compression data
Column 2: equibiaxial tension and/or compression data
Column 3: shear data (planar tension and/or compression)
This array has the dimensions N x 3, where N equals the maximum number of data points in any one of the three
columns. For example, if you have 20 data points from uniaxial tension/compression tests and 10 data points
from shear tests, N = 20. This array must always be N x 3, even if fewer than three types of test data are available.
822

Although it might be preferable to input the data points in order of ascending strain values, it is not necessary
to do so.
STRESS Array: An array of engineering stress data from mechanical material tests input stress-data array, also
of dimension N x 3. You must input stress data points in the same order as the corresponding strain-data input.
CONST Array: A Mooney-Rivlin constant array of dimension M x 1, where M equals the desired number of
Mooney-Rivlin constants. (M must be either 2, 5, or 9; any other value will produce an error message when
*MOONEY is invoked.) You actually tell the program in this dimensioning operation how many Mooney-Rivlin
constants you want. The *MOONEY command later reads the dimensions of this array to determine how many
Mooney-Rivlin constants to generate, and then writes the values of those constants to this array.
How many Mooney-Rivlin constants should you use?
As a rule of thumb, you should have at least twice as many data points (N, as defined above) as the desired
number of Mooney-Rivlin constants. Using more terms will usually improve the statistical quality of your curve
fit (that is, it will probably be more tightly fitted through the data points), but the overall shape of the curve
might be worse than that obtained with fewer terms. As a practical matter, you should probably try two-term,
five-term, and nine-term functions in sequence, and examine the resulting stress-strain curves to decide which
function gives you the best combination of tight fit and satisfactory curve shape.
Table 8.1 Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Constants

Number of Points in the Stress-strain Curve
Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Function
No inflection points (that is, single curvature)
Two-term
One inflection point (that is, double curvature)
Five-term
Two inflection points
Nine-term
Figure 8.15 Typical Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curves
CALC Array: An output stress-data array of dimension N x 3 (where N is as described above), in which sorted
calculated stress values are stored. These stress values will be sorted into the same order as their corresponding
sorted strain values (which will be sorted into ascending order).
SORTSN Array: An array of dimension N x 3 in which sorted input strain data are stored.
SORTSS Array: An array of dimension N x 3 in which sorted input stress data are stored.
For example, if your test data contained up to 20 data points for any one test type, and if you wanted to generate
a five-term set of Mooney-Rivlin constants, you might issue the following commands to dimension the necessary
arrays (remember that you can substitute any valid parameter names for the ones shown here):
*DIM,STRAIN,,20,3
*DIM,STRESS,,20,3
*DIM,CONST,,5,1
*DIM,CALC,,20,3
!
!
!
!
Dim.
Dim.
Dim.
Dim.
array
array
array
array
(STRAIN) for 20 input strain-data points

(STRESS) for input stress data (20 pts.)
(CONST) for 5-term M-R constants
(CALC) for sorted calculated stresses
823

*DIM,SORTSN,,20,3
*DIM,SORTSS,,20,3
! Dim. array (SORTSN) for sorted input strain data

! Dim. array (SORTSS) for sorted input stress data
See the *DIM command description for more information.

Step 2: Fill the Input-Data Arrays
Once you have dimensioned your arrays, you can then fill the STRAIN and STRESS arrays with test data using the
*SET command (GUI path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters). (Again, remember that you can
give these arrays any valid parameter names; particular array names are used here only for the convenience of
this discussion.)
Note The *MOONEY command interprets all input stress and strain data as engineering stress and
engineering strain.
These arrays are of dimension N x 3, with each column of the arrays containing data from one type of test, in this
order:
First column: Uniaxial tension and/or uniaxial compression
Second column: Equibiaxial tension and/or equibiaxial compression
Third column: Shear (planar tension or compression)
Note that these do not have a 1:1 relationship with the modes of deformation and their equivalencies. The first
mode of deformation, uniaxial tension, has equibiaxial compression as its equivalency, but the first column of
the array contains data from uniaxial tension and/or uniaxial compression. Likewise, the second mode of deformation, equibiaxial tension, has uniaxial compression as its equivalency, but the second column of the array contains
data from equibiaxial tension and/or equibiaxial compression.
Table 8.2 Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays

Mode of Deformation
Equivalent Test Types
Array Location for Test Data
Uniaxial tension
Uniaxial tension
Equibiaxial compression
Column one
Column two
Equibiaxial tension
Equibiaxial tension
Uniaxial compression
Column two
Column one
Shear
Planar tension
Planar compression
Column three
Column three
If fewer than three types of tests are used, you must leave the missing columns blank. Schematically, data input
might be represented as shown in Figure 8.16: Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays.
824
Figure 8.16 Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays
Consider a case in which data from uniaxial tension and shear tests are available. The commands to store the
strain and stress data in the input-data arrays could look something like this (of course, the arrays can have any
valid array names, and the number of data points represented by N1 and N2 in this example can be any integral
numbers):
! Uniaxial Tension Data
*SET,STRAIN(1,1), ... !
*SET,STRAIN(11,1),... !
*SET,STRESS(1,1), ... !
*SET,STRESS(11,1),... !
! Shear Data
*SET,STRAIN(1,3), ... !
*SET,STRESS(1,3), ... !
First 10 strain data points

Strain data points 11 through N1 (if N1<21)
First 10 stress data points
Stress data points 11 through N1
Strain data points 1 through N2 (if N2<11)
Stress data points 1 through N2
See the *SET command description for more information.

Step 3: Determine the Mooney-Rivlin Constants
To generate Mooney-Rivlin constants automatically, first use the TB command, with Lab = MOONEY and TBOPT
= 1. Next, issue the *MOONEY command, inserting the appropriate names of arrays that you have already dimensioned (particular names have been used in this example for convenience of discussion only; you can use any
valid parameter names):
TB,MOONEY,MAT,NTEMP,,1
*MOONEY,STRAIN(1,1),STRESS(1,1),,CONST(1),CALC(1),SORTSN(1),
SORTSS(1),Fname,Ext
The program automatically determines the Mooney-Rivlin constants, stores them in the database and in the
CONST array (which can have any valid parameter name), and writes a series of TB and TBDATA commands in
the ASCII file Fname.Ext (default file name = Jobname.TB).
Uniaxial equations will be used for the data in column 1, equibiaxial equations for the data in column 2, and
planar (pure shear) equations for the data in column 3.
Note All the laboratory test data entered in the STRAIN and STRESS arrays will be used to determine
the Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic material constants.
Step 4: Evaluate the Quality of the Mooney-Rivlin Constants
825

In your printout (file Jobname.OUT), examine the "ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE ERROR (PERCENTAGE)" and the
"COEFFICIENT OF DETERMINATION." These two values give you a statistical measure of how well your calculated
stress-strain curve fits the experimental data points. The root-mean-square error, which is expressed as a percentage (that is, a value of 2.5 means 2.5 %), should be "close" to zero. The coefficient of determination will be less
than 1.0, but should be "close" to 1.0 (that is, typically 0.99 or better).
In addition, you should use the *EVAL and *VPLOT commands (GUI paths Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Mooney-Rivlin> Evaluate Const and Utility Menu> Plot> Array Parameters) to graph the input
and calculated stress-strain curves, in order to obtain a visual check on how well the calculated curve matches
the experimental data. In comparing these curves, you should compare calculated values against test data that
represent the same mode of deformation. That is, you should compare the shape of the calculated uniaxial tension
curve (EVPARM = 1 in the *EVAL command) against uniaxial tension data only (column 1 of the sorted STRAIN
and STRESS arrays). Similarly, you should compare the calculated uniaxial compression curve against the uniaxial
compression data only, and the calculated shear curve against the shear data only.
When you graph your calculated stress-strain curves, you can extend the displayed curve into regions that were
not defined by the experimental data. Graphing your curves over such an extended range can help you qualitatively
understand your model's behavior if its response ever happens to exceed the range of experimental strain.
However, realize that if you extend a displayed curve into a region that represents a different mode of deformation,
then that portion of the display will be meaningless. For instance, you should graph a uniaxial tension curve only
in regions of positive strain, and a uniaxial compression curve only in regions of compressive strain. Remember
that good practice usually requires that the test data should represent all modes of deformation and ranges of
response (strain) experienced by your model.
The *MOONEY command automatically writes the Mooney-Rivlin constants to the CONST array. Because *EVAL
reads these same constants from this CONST array, you can readily do a *EVAL following a *MOONEY operation
in the same ANSYS session. If you already have the Mooney-Rivlin constants (and thus will not be doing a
*MOONEY calculation), you must first dimension [*DIM]and fill the CONST array with the Mooney-Rivlin constants
before you can evaluate the curves [*EVAL]. You can fill this array fairly easily, given that the CONST array is
either 1 x 2, 1 x 5, or 1 x 9 at most. You could also add the *DIM and array-filling commands to your archived
Jobname.TB file to make this operation more convenient.
To check your curve's shape, you must dimension [*DIM] two more table array vectors (identified as XVAL and
ECALC in the *EVAL command description; any valid parameter names may be used). Each of these table array
vectors should have dimension P, where P is the number of points you want to use to plot your curve. (Typically,
you will want to make P fairly large in order to generate a very smooth curve.) Next, specify the mode of deformation, define an extended range of strain, and fill the arrays with engineering strain and calculated engineering
stress data, using the *EVAL command. Finally, graph [*VPLOT] the calculated stress-strain curve. The following
example demonstrates how to graph a calculated curve for the uniaxial compression deformation mode:
! Dimension strain and stress arrays for the calculated curve:
! (Any valid parameter names can be used)
*DIM,XVAL,TABLE,1000
*DIM,ECALC,TABLE,1000
! Specify the mode of deformation (EVPARM), define the strain range
! (XMIN,XMAX), and use the M-R constants (CONST) to fill the strain (XVAL)
! and stress (ECALC) arrays with calculated data:
*EVAL,1,2,CONST(1),XMIN,XMAX,XVAL(1),ECALC(1)
! Label the graph axes:
/AXLAB,X,Engineering Strain
/AXLAB,Y,Engineering Stress
! Plot the calculated uniaxial compression curve:
*VPLOT,XVAL(1),ECALC(1)
See the *DIM, *EVAL, /AXLAB, and *VPLOT command descriptions for more information.
826
Figure 8.17 Typical Evaluated Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curve
Step 5: Using the Mooney-Rivlin Constants

If the curve-fit statistics and the overall curve shape are satisfactory, then you can proceed to use the generated
Mooney-Rivlin material properties in your analysis. (The *MOONEY command will have stored these constants
in the database.) In future analyses using the same material model, you can simply read in [/INPUT] the file
Jobname.TB to load the constants into your new database. However, do not forget to define a value for Poisson's
ratio [MP,NUXY,...]. Always remember to examine your analysis results carefully to determine whether or not
your model's modes of deformation and values of maximum strain were properly represented by the original
test data.
Analyses involving hyperelastic elements are sometimes very sensitive to material property specification and
load application. Some values of Mooney-Rivlin constants result in very stable stiffness matrices whereas others
do not. Therefore, choose constants with caution and experiment with slightly different values.
ANSYS provides internal stability checks for hyperelastic materials based on the Mooney-Rivlin constants that
you enter. These checks occur at two levels:
The first stability check occurs before the analysis. The check is for six typical stress paths (uniaxial tension
and compression, equibiaxial tension and compression, and planar tension and compression), and covers
a stretch ratio ranging from 0.1 to 10. If the material is not stable over the range, a message appears that
states the critical values of the nominal strains where the material first becomes unstable, and lists the
Mooney-Rivlin constants that you entered. If the material is stable over the range, you will not see any
message or indication. The sample warning message below lists the nominal strains where Material 1
loses stability, then lists the constants that were entered for this example:
827

*** WARNING ***
CP=
1.110
TIME= 16:59:52
Material 1 can become unstable under certain loading.
The strain (nominal) limits where the material becomes unstable are:
UNIAXIAL TENSION
UNIAXIAL COMPRESSION
EQUIBIAXIAL TENSION
EQUIBIAXIAL COMPRESSION
PLANAR TENSION
PLANAR COMPRESSION
0.645E+00
-0.565E+00
0.516E+00
-0.220E+00
0.585E+00
-0.369E+00
Mooney-Rivlin constants of the hyperelastic material are:

0.170E+02,
0.000E+00,
0.000E+00,
0.000E+00,
0.000E+00,
0.000E+00,
0.150E+03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
For the hyperelastic elements with mixed u-P formulation (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, and HYPER158),
you can also have ANSYS perform a stability check during an analysis by setting KEYOPT(8) = 1. For each
equilibrium iteration, the program checks every Gauss point in the problem for stability violations. If the
problem fails the stability check, you will see a message in the solution history section of the ANSYS Output
window reporting the total number of Gauss points that were unstable for that iteration. You will not see
any messages if the problem passes the check. The sample message below shows that, during an analysis,
ANSYS detected 3 Gauss points that exceeded the material stability limit:
DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE
= 22.81
CRITERION= 0.5000
EQUIL ITER
1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC=
10.00
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.5018E+07 CRITERION= 0.1917E+05
>>>
3 Gauss points have exceeded the material stability limit
For elements that contain at least one unstable Gauss point, the instability indicator is set to 1 and stored
in the result file as an item in the SMISC record. You can plot the region of instability in POST1 by plotting
this SMISC record identified as STFLAG for the element. The SMISC number for STFLAG differs for some
of the elements. See the appropriate table for the SMISC item that corresponds to instability indicator
STFLAG, for the particular element of interest: HYPER56 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL
Commands, HYPER58 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER74 Item and
Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER158 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE
and ESOL Commands.
You should be aware that even though a material failing a stability check is often an indication of convergence
difficulty, it does not necessarily mean that your solution is invalid once the material enters the unstable region.
The material stability check is simply a tool to help you diagnose the problem when the solution fails to converge.
For nearly incompressible materials with Poisson's ratio greater than 0.49, we recommend that you use the hyperelastic elements with mixed u-P formulation (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, and HYPER158).
Note The element types HYPER84 and HYPER86 are intended primarily for modeling compressible,
foam-like elastomers, using a Blatz-Ko function to describe the material properties. Select the Blatz-Ko
option by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for these elements, then use MP commands to enter appropriate values
for EX and NUXY to define the initial material shear modulus. An incompressible hyperelastic material
option is also available for HYPER84 and HYPER86, but it is limited to two-term Mooney-Rivlin only. In
general, it is recommended that you use HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, or HYPER158 (not HYPER84 or
HYPER86) for all incompressible hyperelastic materials.
Problems using hyperelastic elements can be sensitive to the rate of load application. In most instances, load
application should be slow so as not to over-distort elements in the converging sequence. Each problem may
be unique and require special consideration. Bifurcation of the solution, indicating that two or more different
geometric configurations have the same minimum potential energy, may occur at various times during the
828

loading history. Automatic time stepping with bisection [AUTOTS,ON] is often effective in overcoming these
difficulties.
8.3.1.5. Creep
Creep is a rate dependent material nonlinearity in which the material continues to deform under a constant load.
Conversely, if a displacement is imposed, the reaction force (and stresses) will diminish over time (stress relaxation;
see Figure 8.18: Stress Relaxation and Creep(a)). The three stages of creep are shown in Figure 8.18: Stress
Relaxation and Creep(b). The ANSYS program has the capability of modeling the first two stages (primary and
secondary). The tertiary stage is usually not analyzed since it implies impending failure.
Figure 8.18 Stress Relaxation and Creep
Creep is important in high temperature stress analyses, such as for nuclear reactors. For example, suppose you
apply a preload to some part in a nuclear reactor to keep adjacent parts from moving. Over a period of time at
high temperature, the preload would decrease (stress relaxation) and potentially let the adjacent parts move.
Creep can also be significant for some materials such as prestressed concrete. Typically, the creep deformation
is permanent.
ANSYS analyzes creep using two time integration methods. Both are applicable to static or transient analyses.The
implicit creep method is robust, fast, accurate, and recommended for general use. It can handle temperature
dependent creep constants, as well as simultaneous coupling with isotropic hardening plasticity models. The
explicit creep method is useful for cases where very small time steps are required. Creep constants cannot be
dependent on temperature. Coupling with other plastic models is available by superposition only.
Note The terms implicit and explicit as applied to creep, have no relationship to explicit dynamics,
or any elements referred to as explicit elements.
The implicit creep method supports the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95,
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, and SHELL209.
The explicit creep method supports the following elements: LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24,
PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, and SOLID95.
The creep strain rate may be a function of stress, strain, temperature, and neutron flux level. Libraries of creep
strain rate equations are built into the ANSYS program for primary, secondary, and irradiation induced creep.
(See Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for discussions of, and input procedures for, these various
creep equations.) Some equations require specific units. In particular, for the explicit creep option, temperatures
used in the creep equations should be based on an absolute scale.
829
8.3.1.5.1. Implicit Creep Procedure

The basic procedure for using the implicit creep method involves issuing the TB command with Lab = CREEP,
and choosing a creep equation by specifying a value for TBOPT. The following example input shows the use of
the implicit creep method. TBOPT = 2 specifies that the primary creep equation for model 2 will be used. Temperature dependency is specified using the TBTEMP command, and the four constants associated with this
equation are specified as arguments with the TBDATA command.
TB,CREEP,1,1,4,2
TBTEMP,100
You can input other creep expressions using the user programmable feature and setting TBOPT = 100. You can
define the number of state variables using the TB command with Lab = STATE. The following example shows
how five state variables are defined.
TB,STATE,1,,5
You can simultaneously model creep [TB,CREEP] and isotropic, bilinear kinematic, and Hill anisotropy options
to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference
for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample
input listings of material combinations.
To perform an implicit creep analysis, you must also issue the solution RATE command, with Option = ON (or
1). The following example shows a procedure for a time hardening creep analysis (See Figure 8.19: Time
Hardening Creep Analysis).
Figure 8.19 Time Hardening Creep Analysis
The user applied mechanical loading in the first load step, and turned the RATE command OFF to bypass the
creep strain effect. Since the time period in this load step will affect the total time thereafter, the time period for
this load step should be small. For this example, the user specified a value of 1.0E-8 seconds. The second load
step is a creep analysis. The RATE command must be turned ON. Here the mechanical loading was kept constant,
and the material creeps as time increases.
/SOLU
RATE,OFF
TIME,1.0E-8
830
!First load step, apply mechanical loading

!Creep analysis turned off
!Time period set to a very small value

...
SOLV
RATE,ON
TIME,100
...
SOLV
!Solve this load step

!Second load step, no further mechanical load
!Creep analysis turned on
!Time period set to desired value
!Solve this load step
The RATE command works only when modeling implicit creep with either von Mises or Hill potentials.
When modeling implicit creep with von Mises potential, you can use the RATE command with the following
elements: LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
When modeling anisotropic creep (TB,CREEP with TB,HILL), you can use the RATE command with the following
elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
For most materials, the creep strain rate changes significantly at an early stage. Because of this, a general recommendation is to use a small initial incremental time step, then specify a large maximum incremental time step
by using solution command DELTIM or NSUBST. For implicit creep, you may need to examine the effect of the
time increment on the results carefully because ANSYS does not enforce any creep ratio control by default. You
can always enforce a creep limit ratio using the creep ratio control option in commands CRPLIM or CUTCONTROL,CRPLIMIT. A recommended value for a creep limit ratio ranges from 1 to 10. The ratio may vary with materials so your decision on the best value to use should be based on your own experimentation to gain the required
performance and accuracy. For larger analyses, a suggestion is to first perform a time increment convergence
analysis on a simple small size test.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the implicit creep options defined in
TB,CREEP. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves
and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either
8.3.1.5.2. Explicit Creep Procedure

The basic procedure for using the explicit creep method involves issuing the TB command with Lab = CREEP
and choosing a creep equation by adding the appropriate constant as an argument with the TBDATA command.
TBOPT is either left blank or = 0. The following example input uses the explicit creep method. Note that all constants
are included as arguments with the TBDATA command, and that there is no temperature dependency.
TB,CREEP,1
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4, ,C6
For the explicit creep method, you can incorporate other creep expressions into the program by using User
Programmable Features (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
For highly nonlinear creep strain vs. time curves, a small time step must be used with the explicit creep method.
Creep strains are not computed if the time step is less than 1.0e-6. A creep time step optimization procedure is
available [AUTOTS and CRPLIM] for automatically adjusting the time step as appropriate.
8.3.1.6. Shape Memory Alloy

The Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) material behavior option describes the super-elastic behavior of nitinol alloy.
Nitinol is a flexible metal alloy that can undergo very large deformations in loading-unloading cycles without
permanent deformation. As illustrated in Figure 8.20: Shape Memory Alloy Phases, the material behavior has
831

three distinct phases: an austenite phase (linear elastic), a martensite phase (also linear elastic), and the transition
phase between these two.
Figure 8.20 Shape Memory Alloy Phases
Use the MP command to input the linear elastic behavior of the austenite phase, and the TB,SMA command to
input the behavior of the transition and martensite phases. Use the TBDATA command to enter the specifics
(data sets) of the alloy material. You can enter up to six sets of data.
SMAs can be specified for the following elements: PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, and
SOLSH190.
A typical ANSYS input listing (fragment) will look similar to this:
MP,EX,1,60.0E3
MP,NUXY,1.0.3
! Define austenite elastic properties

!
TB,SMA,1,2
TBTEMP,10
TBDATA,1,520.0,600.0,300.0,200.0,0.07,0.12
TBDATA,7,5.0E4
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,420.0,540.0,300.0,200.0,0.10,0.15
TBDATA,7,4.0E3
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Define material 1 as SMA,

with two temperatures
Define first starting temp
Define SMA parameters
Define second starting temp

Define SMA parameters
See TB, and TBDATA for more information.
832
8.3.1.7. Viscoplasticity
Viscoplasticity is a time-dependent plasticity phenomenon, where the development of the plastic strains are
dependent on the rate of loading. The primary applications are high-temperature metal forming processes such
as rolling and deep drawing, which involve large plastic strains and displacements with small elastic strains (see
Figure 8.21: Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation). The plastic strains are typically very large (for example,
50% or greater), requiring large strain theory [NLGEOM,ON].
Viscoplasticity is modeled with element types VISCO106, VISCO107, and VISCO108, using Anand's model for
material properties as described in Nonlinear Stress-Strain Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Figure 8.21 Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation
Viscoplasticity is defined by unifying plasticity and creep via a set of flow and evolutionary equations. A constraint
equation is used to preserve volume in the plastic region.
The Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity) or TB,RATE option allows you to introduce the strain rate effect
in material models to simulate the time-dependent response of materials. Two material options are available,
the Perzyna model and the Peirce model (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details). In contrast to other
rate-dependent material options in ANSYS such as Creep or Anand's model, the Perzyna and Peirce models also
include a yield surface. The plasticity and thus the strain rate hardening effect are active only after plastic yielding.
You must use the models in combination with the BISO, MISO, or NLISO material options to simulate viscoplasticity.
Further, you can simulate anisotropic viscoplasticity by also combining the HILL option. See Material Model
Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material
Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. For isotropic hardening,
the intent is for simulating the strain rate hardening of materials rather than softening. This option is also suitable
for large strain analysis, and is applicable to the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92,
SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Some typical applications of these material options are metal forming and
micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS).
8.3.1.8. Viscoelasticity
Viscoelasticity is similar to creep, but part of the deformation is removed when the loading is taken off. A common
viscoelastic material is glass. Some plastics are also considered to be viscoelastic. One type of viscoelastic response
is illustrated in Figure 8.22: Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model).
833
Figure 8.22 Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model)
Viscoelasticity is modeled with element types VISCO88 and VISCO89 for small deformation viscoelasticity and
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, and SHELL209 for small and large deformation viscoelasticity. You must input material properties
using the TB family of commands. For SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190,
SHELL208, and SHELL209, the underlying elasticity is specified by either the MP command (hypoelasticity) or by
the TB,HYPER command (hyperelasticity). For LINK180, BEAM188, and BEAM189, the underlying elasticity is
specified using the MP command (hypoelasticity) only. The elasticity constants correspond to those of the fast
load limit. Use the TB,PRONY and TB,SHIFT commands to input the relaxation property (see the TB command
description for more information).
!Small Strain Viscoelasticity
mp,ex,1,20.0E5 !elastic properties
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
tb,prony,1,,2,shear !define viscosity parameters (shear)
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
tb,prony,1,,2,bulk !define viscosity parameters (bulk)
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
!Large Strain Viscoelasticity
tb,hyper,1,,,moon !elastic properties
tbdata,1,38.462E4,,1.2E-6
tb,prony,1,,1,shear !define viscosity parameters
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
tb,prony,1,,1,bulk !define viscosity parameters
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
See Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference and the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details
about how to input viscoelastic material properties using the TB family of commands.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the viscoelastic options defined by TB,PRONY.
The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves and
visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either
8.3.1.9. Swelling
Certain materials respond to neutron flux by enlarging volumetrically, or swelling. In order to include swelling
effects, you must write your own swelling subroutine, USERSW. (See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable
Features for a discussion of User-Programmable Features.) Swelling Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference
discusses how to use the TB family of commands to input constants for the swelling equations. Swelling can
also be related to other phenomena, such as moisture content. The ANSYS commands for nuclear swelling can
be used analogously to define swelling due to other causes.
834
8.3.2. Material Model Combinations

You can combine several material model options discussed in this chapter to simulate complex material behaviors.
Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference presents the model options you can combine
along with the associated TB command labels and links to sample input listings. These sample input listings are
presented below in sections identified by the TB command labels.
8.3.2.1. BISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with Chaboche
nonlinear kinematic hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,185.0E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8.3.2.2. MISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with Chaboche
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! THIS EXAMPLE ISOTHERMAL
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,9.7E-4,180
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
8.3.2.3. NLISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity with Chaboche
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1,3,5
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TBTEMP,20,1
! THIS EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT
TBDATA,1,500,20000,100,40000,200,10000
TBDATA,7,1000,200,100,100,0
TBTEMP,40,2
835

TBDATA,1,880,204000,200,43800,500,10200
TBDATA,7,1000,2600,2000,500,0
TBTEMP,60,3
TBDATA,1,1080,244000,400,45800,700,12200
TBDATA,7,1400,3000,2800,900,0
TB,NLISO,1,2
TBTEMP,40,1
TBDATA,1,880,0.0,80.0,3
TBTEMP,60,2
TBDATA,1,1080,0.0,120.0,7
! NLISO TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
8.3.2.4. BISO and RATE Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with the TB,RATE
command to model viscoplasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference,
and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
8.3.2.5. MISO and RATE Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with the TB,RATE
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
836
8.3.2.6. NLISO and RATE Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity with the TB,RATE
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
8.3.2.7. BISO and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with implicit creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
8.3.2.8. MISO and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with implicit
creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
837

8.3.2.9. NLISO and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity with implicit creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.3.2.10. BKIN and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear kinematic hardening plasticity with implicit creep.
MP,EX,1,1e7
MP,NUXY,1,0.32
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1,
TBDATA,1,42000,1000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0
! CREEP TABLE
For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8.3.2.11. HILL and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with bilinear isotropic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,HILL,1,2
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,1,1.0402,1.24897,1.07895,1,1
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,0.9,0.94,1.124,0.97,0.9,0.9
TB,BISO,1,2
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,461.0,374.586
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,400.0,325.0
! BISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
838

8.3.2.12. HILL and MISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear isotropic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.3.2.13. HILL and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with nonlinear isotropic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.3.2.14. HILL and BKIN Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with bilinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
839

8.3.2.15. HILL and MKIN Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear kinematic hardening.
MPTEMP,1,20,400,650,800,950
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,MKIN,1,5,5
! MKIN TABLE
TBTEMP,,strain
TBDATA,1,0.0015,0.006,0.04,0.08,0.1
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,45000,60000,90000,115000,120000
TBTEMP,400
TBDATA,1,41040,54720,82080,104880,109440
TBTEMP,650
TBDATA,1,37800,50400,75600,96600,100800
TBTEMP,800
TBDATA,1,34665,46220,69330,88588,92440
TBTEMP,950
TBDATA,1,31140,41520,62280,79580,83040
TB,HILL,1,5
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,20.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,400.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,650.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
For information on the MKIN option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
8.3.2.16. HILL and KINH Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20E6
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,KINH,1,,3
TBPT,,5E-5,1E3
TBPT,,0.01,2E3
TBPT,,0.60,6E4
! KINH TABLE
840

TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.90,0.95
! HILL TABLE
For information on the KINH option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
8.3.2.17. HILL and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with Chaboche nonlinear kinematic
hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,400,3,0
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.3.2.18. HILL and BISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with bilinear isotropic hardening and
Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
8.3.2.19. HILL and MISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear isotropic hardening
and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
841

MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,185,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.001,185
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
8.3.2.20. HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining anisotropic plasticity with nonlinear isotropic hardening
and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GXY,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
!
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
!
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,0.0,100.0,5
! NLISO TABLE
!
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
842
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
8.3.2.21. HILL and RATE and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity with bilinear isotropic hardening
plasticity.
MPTEMP,1,20,400,650,800,950
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
!
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
!
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
!
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,BISO,1,
TBDATA,1,45000,760000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,2,,PERZYNA
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,0.1,0.3
TBTEMP,950
TBDATA,1,0.3,0.5
! RATE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
843

TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
8.3.2.22. HILL and RATE and MISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity with multilinear isotropic
hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8.3.2.23. HILL and RATE and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity with nonlinear isotropic hardening
plasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
844
! RATE TABLE

8.3.2.24. HILL and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep.
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
!
!
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
845
8.3.2.25. HILL and CREEP and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with bilinear isotropic hardening
plasticity.
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
!
!
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
846
8.3.2.26. HILL and CREEP and MISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with multilinear isotropic
hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.3.2.27. HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with nonlinear isotropic hardening
plasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.3.2.28. HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with bilinear kinematic hardening
plasticity.
847

MP,EX,1,1e7
MP,NUXY,1,0.32
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1
TBDATA,1,42000,1000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0
! CREEP TABLES
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.15,1.05,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0
8.3.2.29. Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity (Implicit) Example

This input listing illustrates the combination of implicit hyperelasticity and viscoelasticity.
c10=293
c01=177
TB,HYPER,1,,,MOON
TBDATA,1,c10,c01
a1=0.1
a2=0.2
a3=0.3
t1=10
t2=100
t3=1000
tb,prony,1,,3,shear
tbdata,1,a1,t1,a2,t2,a3,t3
!!!! type 1 is Mooney-Rivlin
! define Prony constants
For information on hyperelasticity, see Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
Section 8.3.1.4: Hyperelasticity in this chapter.
For information on the viscoelasticity, see Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and
Section 8.3.1.8: Viscoelasticity in this chapter.
8.4. Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS

ANSYS employs an automatic solution control method that, based on the physics of your problem, sets various
nonlinear analysis controls to the appropriate values. If you are not satisfied with the results obtained with these
values, you can manually override the settings. The following commands are set to optimal defaults:
AUTOTS
PRED
MONITOR
DELTIM
NROPT
NEQIT
NSUBST
TINTP
SSTIF
CNVTOL
CUTCONTROL
KBC
LNSRCH
OPNCONTROL
EQSLV
ARCLEN
CDWRITE
LSWRITE
These commands and the settings they control are discussed in later sections. You can also refer to the individual
command descriptions in the ANSYS Commands Reference.
848
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis

If you do choose to override the ANSYS-specified settings, or if you wish to use an input list from a previous release
of ANSYS, issue SOLCONTROL,OFF in the /SOLU phase. See the SOLCONTROL command description for more
details.
ANSYS' automatic solution control is active for the following analyses:
Single-field nonlinear or transient structural and solid mechanics analysis where the solution DOFs are
combinations of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ.
Single-field nonlinear or transient thermal analysis where the solution DOF is TEMP.
Note The Solution Controls dialog box, which is described later in this chapter, cannot be used to
set solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead, you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution
commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
8.5. Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis

The procedure for performing a nonlinear static analysis consists of these tasks:
Section 8.5.5: Solve the Analysis
Section 8.5.6: Review the Results

This step is essentially the same for both linear and nonlinear analyses, although a nonlinear analysis might include
special elements or nonlinear material properties. See Section 8.9: Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements,
and Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities, for more details. If your analysis includes large-strain effects,
your stress-strain data must be expressed in terms of true stress and true (or logarithmic) strain. For more information on building models in ANSYS, see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
After you have created a model in ANSYS, you set solution controls (analysis type, analysis options, load step
options, and so on), apply loads, and solve. A nonlinear solution will differ from a linear solution in that it often
requires multiple load increments, and always requires equilibrium iterations. The general procedure for performing
these tasks follows. See Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) for a sample problem that walks
you through a specific nonlinear analysis.

Setting solution controls for a nonlinear analysis involves the same options and method of access (the Solution
Controls dialog box) as those used for a linear structural static analysis. For a nonlinear analysis, the default settings
in the Solution Controls dialog box are essentially the same settings employed by the automatic solution control
method described in Section 8.4: Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS. See the following sections in Chapter 2,
Structural Static Analysis, with exceptions noted:
Section 2.3.2.1: Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box
Section 2.3.2.2: Using the Basic Tab

849
Section 2.3.2.3: The Transient Tab
Section 2.3.2.4: Using the Sol'n Options Tab
Section 2.3.2.5: Using the Nonlinear Tab
Section 2.3.2.6: Using the Advanced NL Tab
8.5.2.1. Using the Basic Tab: Special Considerations

Special considerations for setting these options in a nonlinear structural static analysis include:
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Large Displacement Static if you are performing a new
analysis. (But, keep in mind that not all nonlinear analyses will produce large deformations. See Section 8.2:
Using Geometric Nonlinearities for further discussion of large deformations.) Choose Restart Current
Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis. You cannot change this setting after the first
load step (that is, after you issue your first SOLVE command). You will usually choose to do a new analysis,
rather than a restart. Restarts are discussed in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
When working with time settings, remember that these options can be changed at any load step. See
Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options. Advanced
time/frequency options, in addition to those available on the Solution Controls dialog box, are discussed
in Section 8.5.2.3: Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box.
A nonlinear analysis requires multiple substeps (or time steps; the two terms are equivalent) within each
load step so that ANSYS can apply the specified loads gradually and obtain an accurate solution. The
NSUBST and DELTIM commands both achieve the same effect (establishing a load step's starting, minimum, and maximum step size), but by reciprocal means. NSUBST defines the number of substeps to be
taken within a load step, whereas DELTIM defines the time step size explicitly. If automatic time stepping
is off [AUTOTS], then the starting substep size is used throughout the load step.
OUTRES controls the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). By default, only the last substep is written
to the results file in a nonlinear analysis.
Only 1000 results sets (substeps) can be written to the results file, but you can use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
8.5.2.2. Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced analysis options that you can set on the
Solution Controls dialog box.
8.5.2.2.1. Equation Solver

ANSYS' automatic solution control activates the sparse direct solver (EQSLV,SPARSE) for most cases. The sparse
direct solver is the default, except for the generation pass of a substructure analysis (which uses the frontal direct
solver). Other choices include the frontal direct and PCG solvers. For applications using solid elements (for example,
SOLID92 or SOLID45), the PCG solver may be faster, especially when doing 3-D modeling.
If you are using the PCG solver, you may be able to considerably reduce your memory usage with the MSAVE
command. The MSAVE command triggers an element-by-element approach for the parts of the model that use
SOLID45, SOLID92, SOLID95, SOLID185, SOLID186, and/or SOLID187 elements with linear material properties.
To use this command, you must be doing a static analysis or a modal analysis with the PowerDynamics method.
When using SOLID186 and/or SOLID187, only small strain (NLGEOM,OFF) analyses are allowed. Other parts of
the model that do not meet the above criteria will be solved using global assembly for the stiffness matrix.
850

MSAVE,ON can result in a memory savings of up to 70% for the part of the model that meets the criteria, although
the solution time may increase depending on the manufacturer of your computer and the speed of your processor,
as well as the chosen element options (for example, 2 x 2 x 2 integration for SOLID95).
The sparse direct solver, in sharp contrast to the iterative solvers included in ANSYS, is a robust solver. Although
the PCG solver can solve indefinite matrix equations, when the PCG solver encounters an ill-conditioned matrix,
the solver will iterate to the specified number of iterations and stop if it fails to converge. When this happens, it
triggers bisection. After completing the bisection, the solver continues the solution if the resulting matrix is wellconditioned. Eventually, the entire nonlinear load step can be solved.
Use the following guidelines for selecting either the sparse or the PCG solver for nonlinear structural analysis:
If it is a beam/shell or beam/shell and solid structure, choose the sparse direct solver.
If it is a 3-D solid structure and the number of DOF is relatively large (that is, 200,000 or more DOF), choose
the PCG solver.
If the problem is ill-conditioned (triggered by poor element shapes), or has a big difference in material
properties in different regions of the model, or has insufficient displacement boundary constraints, choose
the sparse direct solver.
8.5.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced load step options that you can set on
the Solution Controls dialog box.
8.5.2.3.1. Automatic Time Stepping

ANSYS' automatic solution control turns automatic time stepping on [AUTOTS,ON]. An internal auto-time step
scheme ensures that the time step variation is neither too aggressive (resulting in many bisection/cutbacks) nor
too conservative (time step size is too small). At the end of a time step, the size of the next time step is predicted
based on four factors:
Number of equilibrium iterations used in the last time step (more iterations cause the time step size to
be reduced)
Predictions for nonlinear element status change (time step sizes are decreased when a status change is
imminent)
Size of the plastic strain increment
Size of the creep strain increment
8.5.2.3.2. Convergence Criteria

The program will continue to do equilibrium iterations until the convergence criteria [CNVTOL] are satisfied (or
until the maximum number of equilibrium equations is reached [NEQIT]). You can define custom criteria if the
default settings are not suitable.
ANSYS' automatic solution control uses L2-norm of force (and moment) tolerance (TOLER) equal to 0.5%, a setting
that is appropriate for most cases. In most cases, an L2-norm check on displacement with TOLER equal to 5% is
also used in addition to the force norm check. The check that the displacements are loosely set serves as a doublecheck on convergence.
851

By default, the program will check for force (and, when rotational degrees of freedom are active, moment) convergence by comparing the square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of the force imbalances against the product
of VALUE*TOLER. The default value of VALUE is the SRSS of the applied loads (or, for applied displacements, of
the Newton-Raphson restoring forces), or MINREF (which defaults to 0.01), whichever is greater. The default
value of TOLER is 0.005. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, TOLER defaults to 0.001 and MINREF defaults to 1.0 for force convergence.
You should almost always use force convergence checking. You can also add displacement (and, when applicable,
rotation) convergence checking. For displacements, the program bases convergence checking on the change
in deflections (u) between the current (i) and the previous (i-1) iterations: u=ui-ui-1.
Note If you explicitly define any custom convergence criteria [CNVTOL], the entire default criteria will
be overwritten. Thus, if you define displacement convergence checking, you will have to redefine force
convergence checking. (Use multiple CNVTOL commands to define multiple convergence criteria.)
Using tighter convergence criteria will improve the accuracy of your results, but at the cost of more equilibrium
iterations. If you want to tighten (or loosen, which is not recommended) your criteria, you should change TOLER
by one or two orders of magnitude. In general, you should continue to use the default value of VALUE; that is,
change the convergence criteria by adjusting TOLER, not VALUE. You should make certain that the default value
of MINREF = 0.001 makes sense in the context of your analysis. If your analysis uses certain sets of units or has
very low load levels, you might want to specify a smaller value for MINREF.
Also, we do not recommend putting two or more disjointed structures into one model for a nonlinear analysis
because the convergence check tries to relate these disjointed structures, often producing some unwanted residual force.
Checking Convergence in a Single and Multi-DOF System
To check convergence in a single degree of freedom (DOF) system, you compute the force (and moment) imbalance for the one DOF, and compare this value against the established convergence criteria (VALUE*TOLER). (You
can also perform a similar check for displacement (and rotation) convergence for your single DOF.) However, in
a multi-DOF system, you might want to use a different method of comparison.
The ANSYS program provides three different vector norms to use for convergence checking:
The infinite norm repeats the single-DOF check at each DOF in your model.
The L1 norm compares the convergence criterion against the sum of the absolute values of force (and
moment) imbalance for all DOFs.
The L2 norm performs the convergence check using the square root sum of the squares of the force (and
moment) imbalances for all DOFs. (Of course, additional L1 or L2 checking can be performed for a displacement convergence check.)
Example
For the following example, the substep will be considered to be converged if the out-of-balance force (checked
at each DOF separately) is less than or equal to 5000*0.0005 (that is, 2.5), and if the change in displacements
(checked as the square root sum of the squares) is less than or equal to 10*0.001 (that is, 0.01).
CNVTOL,F,5000,0.0005,0
CNVTOL,U,10,0.001,2
852
8.5.2.3.3. Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations

ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the value of NEQIT to between 15 and 26 iterations, depending upon
the physics of the problem. The idea is to employ a small time step with fewer quadratically converging iterations.
This option limits the maximum number of equilibrium iterations to be performed at each substep (default = 25
if solution control is off). If the convergence criteria have not been satisfied within this number of equilibrium
iterations, and if auto time stepping is on [AUTOTS], the analysis will attempt to bisect. If bisection is not possible,
then the analysis will either terminate or move on to the next load step, according to the instructions you issue
in the NCNV command.
8.5.2.3.4. Predictor-Corrector Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will set PRED,ON if there are no beam or shell elements present. If the time
step size is reduced greatly in the current substep, PRED is turned off. For transient analysis, the predictor is also
turned off.
You can activate a predictor on the DOF solution for the first equilibrium iteration of each substep. This feature
accelerates convergence and is particularly useful if nonlinear response is relatively smooth. It is not so helpful
in analyses that incorporate large rotations or viscoelasticity. Using the predictor for large rotations can cause
divergence and thus is not recommended for problems with large rotations.
8.5.2.3.5. Line Search Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will toggle line search on and off as needed. For most contact problems,
LNSRCH is toggled on. For most non-contact problems, LNSRCH is toggled off.
This convergence-enhancement tool multiplies the calculated displacement increment by a program-calculated
scale factor (having a value between 0 and 1), whenever a stiffening response is detected. Because the line search
algorithm is intended to be an alternative to the adaptive descent option [NROPT], adaptive descent is not
automatically activated if the line search option is on. We do not recommend activating both line search and
adaptive descent simultaneously.
When an imposed displacement exists, a run cannot converge until at least one of the iterations has a line search
value of 1. ANSYS scales the entire U vector, including the imposed displacement value; otherwise, a "small"
displacement would occur everywhere except at the imposed DOF. Until one of the iterations has a line search
value of 1, ANSYS does not impose the full value of the displacement.
8.5.2.3.6. Cutback Criteria

For finer control over bisections and cutback in time step size, use [CUTCONTROL, Lab, VALUE, Option]. By default,
for Lab = PLSLIMIT (maximum plastic strain increment limit), VALUE is set to 15%. This field is set to such a large
value for avoiding unnecessary bisections caused by high plastic strain due to a local singularity which is not
normally of interest to the user. For explicit creep (Option = 0), Lab = CRPLIM (creep increment limit) and VALUE
is set to 10%. This is a reasonable limit for creep analysis. For implicit creep (Option = 1), there is no maximum
creep criteria by default. You can however, specify any creep ratio control. The number of points per cycle for
second order dynamic equations (Lab = NPOINT) is set to VALUE = 13 by default to gain efficiency at little cost
to accuracy.

This section discusses additional options that you can set for the solution. These options do not appear on the
Solution Controls dialog box because they are used infrequently, and their default settings rarely need to be
853

changed. ANSYS menu paths are provided in this section to help you access these options for those cases in
which you choose to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults.
8.5.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box
The following sections describe some advanced analysis options that you can set for your analysis. As noted
above in Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set
the options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands
8.5.3.1.1. Stress Stiffness

To account for buckling, bifurcation behavior, ANSYS includes stress stiffness in all geometrically nonlinear
analyses. If you are confident of ignoring such effects, you can turn stress stiffening off (SSTIF,OFF). This command
has no effect when used with several ANSYS elements; see the ANSYS Elements Reference for the description of
the specific elements you are using.
Command(s): SSTIF
8.5.3.1.2. Newton-Raphson Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will use the FULL Newton-Raphson option with adaptive descent off if there
is a nonlinearity present. However, when node-to-node, node-to-surface contact elements are used for contact
analysis with friction, then adaptive descent is automatically turned on (for example, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24,
and PIPE60). The underlying contact elements require adaptive descent for convergence.
Command(s): NROPT
Use this option only in a nonlinear analysis. This option specifies how often the tangent matrix is updated during
solution. If you choose to override the default, you can specify one of these values:
Program-chosen (NROPT,AUTO): The program chooses which of the options to use, based on the kinds
of nonlinearities present in your model. Adaptive descent will be automatically activated, when appropriate.
Full (NROPT,FULL): The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the stiffness matrix
is updated at every equilibrium iteration.
If adaptive descent is on (optional), the program will use the tangent stiffness matrix only as long as the
iterations remain stable (that is, as long as the residual decreases, and no negative main diagonal pivot
occurs). If divergent trends are detected on an iteration, the program discards the divergent iteration and
restarts the solution, using a weighted combination of the secant and tangent stiffness matrices. When
the iterations return to a convergent pattern, the program will resume using the tangent stiffness matrix.
Activating adaptive descent will usually enhance the program's ability to obtain converged solutions for
complicated nonlinear problems but is supported only for elements indicated under "Special Features"
in the Input Summary table (Table 4.n.1 for an element, where n is the element number) in the ANSYS
Elements Reference.
Modified (NROPT,MODI): The program uses the modified Newton-Raphson technique, in which the tangent
stiffness matrix is updated at each substep. The matrix is not changed during equilibrium iterations at a
substep. This option is not applicable to large deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is not available.
Initial Stiffness (NROPT,INIT): The program uses the initial stiffness matrix in every equilibrium iteration.
This option can be less likely to diverge than the full option, but it often requires more iterations to achieve
convergence. It is not applicable to large deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is not available.
854
Full with unsymmetric matrix (NROPT,UNSYM): The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure,
in which the stiffness matrix is updated at every equilibrium iteration. In addition, it generates and uses
unsymmetric matrices that you can use for any of the following:
If you are running a pressure-driven collapse analysis, an unsymmetric pressure load stiffness might
be helpful in obtaining convergence. You can include pressure load stiffness using SOLCONTROL,INCP.
If you are defining an unsymmetric material model using TB,USER, you would need NROPT,UNSYM
to fully use the property you defined.
If you are running a contact analysis, an unsymmetric contact stiffness matrix would fully couple the
sliding and the normal stiffnesses. See Section 3.8.4: Determining Contact Stiffness and Allowable
Penetration in the ANSYS Contact Technology Guide for details.
You should first try NROPT,FULL; then try NROPT,UNSYM if you experience convergence difficulties. Note
that using an unsymmetric solver requires more computer time to obtain a solution, than if you use a
symmetric solver.
If a multistatus element is in the model, however, it would be updated at the iteration in which it changes
status, irrespective of the Newton-Raphson option.
8.5.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls
Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced load step options that you can set for your analysis. As noted
above in Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set
the options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands
8.5.3.2.1. Creep Criteria

If your structure exhibits creep behavior, you can specify a creep criterion for automatic time step adjustment
[CRPLIM,CRCR, Option]. (If automatic time stepping [AUTOTS] is off, this creep criterion will have no effect.)
The program will compute the ratio of creep strain increment (cr, the change in creep strain in the last time
step) to the elastic strain (el), for all elements. If the maximum ratio is greater than the criterion CRCR, the program
will then decrease the next time step size; if it is less, the program might increase the next time step size. (The
program will also base automatic time stepping on the number of equilibrium iterations, impending element
status change, and plastic strain increment. The time step size will be adjusted to the minimum size calculated
for any of these items.) For explicit creep (Option = 0), if the ratio cr / el is above the stability limit of 0.25, and
if the time increment cannot be decreased, a divergent solution is possible and the analysis will be terminated
with an error message. This problem can be avoided by making the minimum time step size sufficiently small
[DELTIM and NSUBST]. For implicit creep (Option = 1), there is no maximum creep limit by default. You can
however, specify any creep ratio control.
Command(s): CRPLIM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Creep Criterion
Note If you do not want to include the effects of creep in your analysis, use the RATE command with
Option = OFF, or set the time steps to be longer than the previous time step, but not more than 1.0e-6
longer.
8.5.3.2.2. Time Step Open Control

This option is available for thermal analysis. (Remember that you cannot perform a thermal analysis using the
Solution Controls dialog box; you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution commands or the standard
855

corresponding menu paths instead.) This option's primary use is in unsteady state thermal analysis where the
final temperature stage reaches a steady state. In such cases, the time step can be opened quickly. The default
is that if the TEMP increment is smaller than 0.1 in three (NUMSTEP = 3) contiguous substeps, the time step size
can be "opened-up" (value = 0.1 by default). The time step size can then be opened continuously for greater
solution efficiency.
Command(s): OPNCONTROL
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Open Control
8.5.3.2.3. Solution Monitoring

This option provides a facility to monitor a solution value at a specified node in a specified DOF. The command
also provides the user with a means to quickly review the solution convergence efficiency, rather than attempting
to gather this information from a lengthy output file. For instance, if an excessive number of attempts were made
for a substep, the information contained in the file provides hints to either reduce the initial time step size or
increase the minimum number of substeps allowed through the NSUBST command to avoid an excessive
number of bisections.
Command(s): MONITOR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor
8.5.3.2.4. Birth and Death

Specify birth and death options as necessary. You can deactivate [EKILL] and reactivate [EALIVE] selected elements
to model the removal or addition of material in your structure. As an alternative to the standard birth and death
method, you can change the material properties for selected elements [MPCHG] between load steps.
Command(s): EKILL, EALIVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Birth & Death> Kill Elements
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Birth & Death> Activate Elem
The program deactivates an element by multiplying its stiffness by a very small number (which is set by the
ESTIF command), and by removing its mass from the overall mass matrix. Element loads (pressure, heat flux,
thermal strains, and so on) for inactive elements are also set to zero. You need to define all possible elements
during preprocessing; you cannot create new elements in SOLUTION.
Those elements to be born in later stages of your analysis should be deactivated before the first load step, and
then reactivated at the beginning of the appropriate load step. When elements are reactivated, they have a zero
strain state, and (if NLGEOM,ON) their geometric configuration (length, area, and so on) is updated to match
the current displaced positions of their nodes. See the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for more information on birth and death.
Another way to affect element behavior during solution is to change the material property reference number
for selected elements:
Command(s): MPCHG
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Change Mat Num
Note Use MPCHG with caution. Changing material properties in a nonlinear analysis may produce
unintended results, particularly if you change nonlinear [TB] material properties.
8.5.3.2.5. Output Control

In addition to OUTRES, which you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box, there are several other output
control options that you can set for an analysis:
Command(s): OUTPR, ERESX
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
856

Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
Printed output [OUTPR] includes any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT).
Extrapolation of results [ERESX] copies an element's integration point stress and elastic strain results to the nodes
instead of extrapolating them, if nonlinear strains (plasticity, creep, swelling) are present in the element. The integration point nonlinear strains are always copied to the nodes.
See Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options.

Apply loads on the model. See Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis in this guide and Chapter 2, Loading in
the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for load information. Remember that inertia and point loads will maintain constant
direction, but surface loads will "follow" the structure in a large-deformation analysis. You can apply complex
boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional table (TABLE type array parameter). See Section 2.3.4.2.1:
Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in this guide for more information.
8.5.5. Solve the Analysis

You solve a nonlinear analysis using the same commands and procedure as you do in solving a linear static
analysis. See Section 2.3.5: Solve the Analysis in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis. If you need to define
multiple load steps, you must respecify time settings, load step options, and so on, and then save and solve for
each of the additional load steps. Other methods for multiple load steps - the load step file method and the array
parameter method - are described in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.

Results from a nonlinear static analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses, strains, and reaction forces.
You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, or in POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Remember that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from that substep should
have been written to Jobname.RST. (The load step option command OUTRES controls which substep results
are stored on Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described below.
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
8.5.6.2. Reviewing Results in POST1

1.
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all load steps.
2.
If not, you probably will not want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why convergence
failed.
If your solution converged, then continue postprocessing.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
857

3.
Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep
numbers or by time. (Note, however, that arc-length results should not be identified by time.)
Command(s): SET
You can also use the SUBSET or APPEND commands to read in or merge results data for selected portions
of the model only. The LIST argument on any of these commands lists the available solutions on the
results file. You can also limit the amount of data written from the results file to the database through
the INRES command. Additionally, you can use the ETABLE command to store result items for selected
elements. See the individual command descriptions in the ANSYS Commands Reference for more information.
Caution: If you specify a TIME value for which no results are available, the ANSYS program will
perform a linear interpolation to calculate the results at that value of TIME. Realize that this interpolation will usually cause some loss of accuracy in a nonlinear analysis (see Figure 8.23: Linear
Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error). Thus, for a nonlinear analysis, you
should usually postprocess at a TIME that corresponds exactly to the desired substep.
Figure 8.23 Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error
4.
Display the results using any of the following options:

Command(s): PLDISP
In a large deformation analysis, you might prefer to use a true scale display [/DSCALE,,1].
Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. If you have adjacent
elements with different material behavior (such as can occur with plastic or multilinear elastic material
properties, with different material types, or with adjacent deactivated and activated elements), you
858

should take care to avoid nodal stress averaging errors in your results. Selecting logic (described in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) provides a means of avoiding such errors.
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on
the display.
You can also contour element table data and line element data:
Command(s): PLETAB, PLLS
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res
Use PLETAB to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element data.
Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction
data) PRETAB PRITER (substep summary data), and so on. NSORT ESORT
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, report quality listings, and so on are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear analyses.
8.5.6.3. Reviewing Results in POST26

You can also review the load-history response of a nonlinear structure using POST26, the time-history postprocessor. Use POST26 to compare one ANSYS variable against another. For instance, you might graph the displacement at a node versus the corresponding level of applied load, or you might list the plastic strain at a node and
the corresponding TIME value. A typical POST26 postprocessing sequence might follow these steps:
1.
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all desired load
steps. You should not base design decisions on unconverged results.
2.
If your solution converged, enter POST26. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST26
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro
3.
Define the variables to be used in your postprocessing session. The SOLU command will cause various
iteration and convergence parameters to be read into the database, where you can incorporate them
into your postprocessing.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE
4.
Graph or list the variables.

Command(s): PLVAR (graph variables) PRVAR EXTREM (list variables)
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables
859
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST26. See Chapter 6, The Time-History Postprocessor
(POST26) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, NSUBST, AUTOTS, KBC, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, and
SOLU command descriptions for more information.
8.5.7. Terminating a Running Job; Restarting

You can stop a nonlinear analysis by creating an "abort" file (Jobname.ABT). See Chapter 3, Solution in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. The program will also stop upon successful completion of the solution, or
if a convergence failure occurs.
You can often restart an analysis if it successfully completed one or more iterations before it terminated. Restart
procedures are covered in Section 3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
8.6. Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

Many of the tasks that you need to perform in a nonlinear transient analysis are the same as (or similar to) those
that you perform in nonlinear static analyses (described in Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis)
and linear full transient dynamic analyses (described in Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis). However, this
section describes some additional considerations for performing a nonlinear transient analysis.
Remember that the Solution Controls dialog box, which is the method described in Section 8.5: Performing a
Nonlinear Static Analysis, cannot be used to set solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead, you must use
the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.

This step is the same as for a nonlinear static analysis. However, if your analysis includes time-integration effects,
be sure to include a value for mass density [MP,DENS]. If you want to, you can also define material-dependent
structural damping [MP,DAMP].

1.
Specify transient analysis type and define analysis options as you would for a nonlinear static analysis:
Analysis Type: Transient [ANTYPE]
Large Deformation Effects [NLGEOM]
2.
New Analysis or Restart [ANTYPE]
Large Displacement Transient (if using the Solution Controls dialog box to set analysis type)
Apply loads and specify load step options in the same manner as you would for a linear full transient
dynamic analysis. A transient load history usually requires multiple load steps, with the first load step
typically used to establish initial conditions (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). The general, nonlinear,
birth and death, and output control options available for a nonlinear static analysis are also available for
a nonlinear transient analysis.
In a nonlinear transient analysis, time must be greater than zero. See Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic
Analysis for procedures for defining nonzero initial conditions.
860
Section 8.6: Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

For a nonlinear transient analysis, you must specify whether you want stepped or ramped loads [KBC].
See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for further discussion about ramped vs. stepped loads.
You can also specify dynamics options: alpha and beta damping, time integration effects, and transient
integration parameters.
Command(s): ALPHAD, BETAD, TIMINT, TINTP
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Transient Tab)
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time Integration
An explanation of the dynamics options follows.
Damping
Rayleigh damping constants are defined using the constant mass [ALPHAD] and stiffness [BETAD]
matrix multipliers. In a nonlinear analysis the stiffness may change drastically - do not use BETAD,
except with care. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for details about damping.
Time Integration Effects [TIMINT]

Time integration effects are ON by default in a transient analysis. For creep, viscoelasticity, viscoplasticity, or swelling, you should turn the time integration effects off (that is, use a static analysis). These
time-dependent effects are usually not included in dynamic analyses because the transient dynamic
time step sizes are often too short for any significant amount of long-term deformation to occur.
Except in kinematic (rigid-body motion) analyses, you will rarely need to adjust the transient integration
parameters [TINTP], which provide numerical damping to the Newmark and HHT methods. (See your
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information about these parameters.)
ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the defaults to a new time integration scheme for use by first
order transient equations. This is typically used for unsteady state thermal problems where = 1.0
(set by SOLCONTROL, ON); this is the backward Euler scheme. It is unconditionally stable and more
robust for highly nonlinear thermal problems such as phase changes. The oscillation limit tolerance
defaults to 0.0, so that the response first order eigenvalues can be used to more precisely determine
a new time step value.
Note If you are using the Solution Controls dialog box to set solution controls, you can access
all of these options [ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIMINT, TINTP, TRNOPT] on the Transient tab.
3.
Write load data for each load step to a load step file.
Command(s): LSWRITE
4.

Command(s): SAVE
5.
Start solution calculations. Other methods for multiple load steps are described in Chapter 1, Getting
Started with ANSYS in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Command(s): LSSOLVE
6.
After you have solved all load steps, leave SOLUTION.

Command(s): FINISH
861


As in a nonlinear static analysis, you can use POST1 to postprocess results at a specific moment in time. Procedures
are much the same as described previously for nonlinear static analyses. Again, you should verify that your
solution has converged before you attempt to postprocess the results.
Time-history postprocessing using POST26 is essentially the same for nonlinear as for linear transient analyses.
See the postprocessing procedures outlined in Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis.
More details of postprocessing procedures can be found in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
8.7. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

A sample input listing for a nonlinear transient analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model:
/PREP7
--! Similar to a linear full transient model, with
--! these possible additions: nonlinear material
--! properties, nonlinear elements
--FINISH
!
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution:
/SOLU
ANTYPE,TRANS
! TRNOPT,FULL by default
--! Establish initial conditions as in linear full
--! transient analysis
LSWRITE
! Initial-condition load step
NLGEOM,ON
! Nonlinear geometric effects (large deformations)
SSTIF,ON
! Stress stiffening effects
! NROPT=AUTO by default: Program will choose appropriate Newton-Raphson and
! Adaptive Descent options, depending on
! nonlinearities encountered
! Loads:
F,...
D,...
! Load Step Options:
TIME,...
! TIME at end of load step
DELTIM,...
! Time step controls (starting, min, max)
AUTOTS,ON
! Automatic time stepping, including bisection
! KBC=0 by default (ramped loading)
! Dynamic Options:
ALPHAD,...
! Mass damping
TIMINT,ON
! TIMINT,ON by default, unless you turned it OFF for
! initial-condition load step
! Nonlinear Options:
CNVTOL,...
! Convergence criteria
! NEQIT=25 by default
NCNV,,,...
! Nonconvergence termination controls
PRED,ON
! Predictor ON
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
! Results for every substep written to database
LSWRITE
! First "real" transient load step
--! Additional load steps, as needed
--LSSOLVE,1,3
! Initiate multiple l.s. solution
SAVE
FINISH
!
! Review the Results:
/POST26
! Time-History Postprocessor
SOLU,2,CNVG
! Check convergence
SOLU,3,FOCV
PRVAR,2,3
862
Section 8.9: Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements

NSOL,...
PLVAR,...
FINISH
!
/POST1
SET,...
PLDISP,...
PLNSOL,...
NSORT,...
PRNSOL,...
FINISH
!
!
!
!
Store results (displacements, stresses, etc.) as

variables
Graph results vs. TIME to evaluate general quality
of analysis, determine critical time step, etc.
! General Postprocessor
! Read results from desired time step
! Postprocess as desired
See the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, LSWRITE, NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, DELTIM, AUTOTS, KBC, ALPHAD, TIMINT,
CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, and SOLU command descriptions for more information.
8.8. Restarts
Restart procedures for a transient analysis are essentially the same as for a static analysis; see Section 3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
8.9. Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements

Nonlinear elements display an abrupt change in stiffness when they experience a change in status. For example,
when a cable goes slack, its stiffness suddenly drops to zero. When two separate bodies come into contact, their
overall stiffness changes drastically. These and other status-dependent stiffness changes can be modeled by
using nonlinear elements (described below), by applying birth and death options to applicable elements (see
the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide), or by changing material properties [MPCHG]. Some of the nonlinear element features described below are available only in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and
ANSYS Structural products only. See the ANSYS Elements Reference for details.
COMBIN7
COMBIN14
COMBIN37
COMBIN39
COMBIN40
CONTAC12 and CONTAC52
TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, and CONTA175
LINK10
SHELL41
SOLID65
8.9.1. Element Birth and Death

Sometimes, an element's status changes between "existent" and "nonexistent." The birth and death options
[EKILL, EALIVE, ESTIF] (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other) can be used to deactivate or reactivate
selected elements in such cases. The birth and death feature is discussed in detail in Chapter 12, Element Birth
and Death in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
863
8.10. Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis

This section describes tips and guidelines that can help you to perform a nonlinear analysis.
8.10.1. Starting Out with Nonlinear Analysis

By taking your time and proceeding with reasonable caution, you can avoid many difficulties commonly associated
with nonlinear analyses. The following suggestions should be useful.
8.10.1.1. Be Aware of How the Program and Your Structure Behave

If you have not used a particular nonlinear feature before, construct a very simple model (that is, containing only
a few elements), and make sure you understand how to handle this feature before you use it in a large, complicated
model.
Gain preliminary insight into your structure's behavior by analyzing a preliminary simplified model first.
For nonlinear static models, a preliminary linear static analysis can reveal which regions of your model
will first experience nonlinear response, and at what load levels these nonlinearities will come into play.
For nonlinear transient dynamic analyses, a preliminary model of beams, masses, and springs can provide
insight into the structure's dynamics at minimal cost. Preliminary nonlinear static, linear transient dynamic,
and/or modal analyses can also help you to understand various aspects of your structure's nonlinear dynamic response before you undertake the final nonlinear transient dynamic analysis.
Read and understand the program's output messages and warnings. At a minimum, before you try to
postprocess your results, make sure your problem converged. For path-dependent problems, the printout's
equilibrium iteration record can be especially important in helping you to determine if your results are
valid or not.
8.10.1.2. Keep It Simple
Keep your final model as simple as possible. If you can represent your 3-D structure as a 2-D plane stress,
plane strain, or axisymmetric model, do so. If you can reduce your model size through the use of symmetry
or antisymmetry surfaces, do so. (However, if your model is loaded antisymmetrically, you can generally
not take advantage of antisymmetry to reduce a nonlinear model's size. Antisymmetry can also be rendered
inapplicable by large deflections.) If you can omit a nonlinear detail without affecting results in critical
regions of your model, do so.
Model transient dynamic loading in terms of static-equivalent loads whenever possible.
Consider substructuring the linear portions of your model to reduce the computational effort required
for intermediate load or time increments and equilibrium iterations.
8.10.1.3. Use an Adequate Mesh Density
Recognize that regions undergoing plastic deformation require a reasonable integration point density
(mesh density is particularly important in plastic-hinge regions). Higher-order elements use only the corner
integration points for nonlinear analyses, thus lower-order elements provide the same accuracy as higherorder elements. However, the 18x elements are recommended for nonlinear analyses.
Provide an adequate mesh density on contact surfaces to allow contact stresses to be distributed in a
smooth fashion.
Provide a mesh density adequate for resolving stresses. Areas where stresses or strains are of interest require
a relatively fine mesh compared to that needed for displacement or nonlinearity resolution.
864
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis
Use a mesh density adequate to characterize the highest mode shape of interest. The number of elements
needed depends on the elements' assumed displacement shape functions, as well as on the mode shape
itself.
Use a mesh density adequate to resolve any transient dynamic wave propagation through your structure.
If wave propagation is important, then provide at least 20 elements to resolve one wavelength.
8.10.1.4. Apply the Load Gradually
For nonconservative, path-dependent systems, you need to apply the load in small enough increments
to ensure that your analysis will closely follow the structure's load-response curve.
You can sometimes improve the convergence behavior of conservative systems by applying the load
gradually, so as to minimize the number of Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations required.
8.10.2. Overcoming Convergence Problems

When performing a nonlinear analysis you may encounter convergence difficulties due to a number of reasons.
Some examples may be initially open contact surfaces causing rigid body motion, large load increments causing
nonconvergence, material instabilities, or large deformations causing mesh distortion that result in element
shape errors. Solution control (SOLCONTROL) automatically adjusts solution parameters and attempts to obtain
a robust, accurate solution. In addition, several tools are available in ANSYS that can help you identify potential
problems before, during, and after a solution.
CHECK, MCHECK, and CNCHECK commands help you verify if there are any obvious problems with the model
before you start the solution. The CHECK command does an overall verification of the model, including missing
elastic properties, unconstrained model, and element shape checks. The MCHECK command can help you
identify defects in the mesh such as holes or cracks, especially when the mesh is imported from a third party
software. The CNCHECK command provides the initial contact status of contact pairs, identifying whether the
contacts are initially open or closed. If, for example, a part in your model is constrained only through contact
with other parts and if the contact surfaces are open, the CNCHECK command can help you identify this potential
error condition.
When you analyze models with large deformations, some portions of the initial mesh can become highly distorted.
Highly distorted elements can take on unacceptable shapes, providing inaccurate results. This can cause your
nonlinear solution to stop. When this happens, use the ESCHECK command to perform shape checking of deformed elements in the postprocessor (based on the current set of results in database). This deformed-shape
checker will help you to identify the portions of your model that require different meshing, thereby allowing
them to retain acceptable shapes. Using ESCHECK at different time points will help you to identify the load
conditions that cause mesh deterioration.
A convergence failure can also indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result of
some numerical problem in the finite element model.
The following sections detail some of the techniques that you can use to attempt to improve the convergence
performance of your analysis.
8.10.2.1. Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics

The nonlinear diagnostics tool NLDIAG can help you find problems in your model when an analysis will not
converge.
865

Identify Regions of High Residual Forces Issue the NLDIAG,NRRE command to write the Newton-Raphson
residuals from equilibrium iterations to a file (Jobname.nrxxx). You can then contour plot the residual forces
via the PLNSOL,NRRE command, which will help to identify regions of high residual forces.
Such a capability can be useful when you experience convergence difficulties in the middle of a load step, where
the model has a large number of contact surfaces and other nonlinearities. You can restart the analysis and issue
an NLDIAG,NRRE command to write out the residuals. By tracking the way the residuals change over several
equilibrium iterations you can identify a portion of your model where large residuals persist. You can then focus
on the nonlinearities in that area (for example, a contact pair's properties) instead of having to deal with the
entire model.
Identify Problem Elements
Typically, nonlinear analyses fail to converge for the following reasons:
Too large a distortion
Elements contain nodes that have near zero pivots (nonlinear analyses)
Too large a plastic or creep strain increment
Elements where mixed u-P constraints are not satisfied (mixed U-P option of 18x solid elements only)
ANSYS has default limits which, when exceeded, determine when convergence criteria have been violated. Some
limits are user-controlled; for example, the CUTCONTROL command sets the maximum plastic/creep strain increments allowed in an iteration. Other limits are fixed.
The NLDIAG,EFLG command identifies elements that violate the above criteria and records them in a file (Jobname.ndxxx).
Note Convergence problems may occur when material algorithms fail (e.g. local element level NewtonRaphson convergence failure, or extreme element distortion). The Ansys error message identifies the
corresponding element number and/or the material ID for these cases. Be sure to read any error messages
generated during solution.
Process the Tracked Results Issue the NLDPOST command to process the .ndxxx nonlinear diagnostics files.
The command creates components of elements that violate a certain criterion for a particular equilibrium iteration
(or iterations).
Identify contact pairs causing convergence difficulties Issue the NLDIAG,CONT command to write various
contact information for all defined contact pairs to a single Jobname.cnd text file. The file is written during
solution at a user-specified frequency (each iteration, substep, or load step).
Information stored in this file will help identify when and how contact occurs, determine the regions where
contact is unstable, and identify the corresponding contact parameters. You can then focus on the specific settings
for those particular contact pairs that need attention.
Monitor the Diagnostics Results in Real Time The NLHIST command allows you to monitor results of interest
in real time during solution. Before starting the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or
reaction forces at specific nodes. You can also request element nodal data such as stresses and strains at specific
elements to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also available. The result data are written to a file named
Jobname.nlh.
For example, a reaction force-deflection curve could indicate when possible buckling behavior occurs. Nodal
results and contact results are monitored at every converged substep while element nodal data are written as
specified via the OUTRES setting.
866

You can also track results during batch runs. Either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File Tracking from
the Tools menu, or type nlhist81 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utilty. You can use this utilty to read the file at any time, even
after the solution is complete (the data in the file must be formatted correctly).
8.10.2.2. Tracking Convergence Graphically

As a nonlinear structural analysis proceeds, ANSYS computes convergence norms with corresponding convergence
criteria each equilibrium iteration. Available in both batch and interactive sessions, the Graphical Solution
Tracking (GST) feature displays the computed convergence norms and criteria while the solution is in process.
By default, GST is ON for interactive sessions and OFF for batch runs. To turn GST on or off, use either of the following:
Command(s): /GST
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Grph Solu Track
Figure 8.24: Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) Feature shows a typical
GST display:
Figure 8.24 Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST)
Feature
8.10.2.3. Using Automatic Time Stepping
Be sure to place an upper limit on the time step size using DELTIM or NSUBST, especially for complicated
models. This ensures that all of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included. This can
be important in the following situations:
867
Problems with short ramp times on some of their loads. If the time step size is allowed to become too
large, ramped portions of the load history may be inaccurately characterized.
Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies)
in which the low-frequency energy content of the system could dominate the high-frequency areas.
Problems that include structures that are continuously excited over a range of frequencies (for example,
seismic problems).
Take care when modeling kinematic structures (systems with rigid-body motions). These guidelines can
usually help you obtain a good solution:
Incorporate significant numerical damping (0.05 < < 0.1 on the TINTP command) into the solution
to filter out the high frequency noise, especially if a coarse time step is used. Do not use -damping
(mass matrix multiplier, ALPHAD command) in a dynamic kinematic analysis, as it will dampen the
rigid body motion (zero frequency mode) of the system.
Avoid imposed displacement history specifications, because imposed displacement input has (theoretically) infinite jumps in acceleration, which causes stability problems for the Newmark time-integration
algorithm.
8.10.2.4. Using Line Search

Line search [LNSRCH] can be useful for enhancing convergence, but it can be expensive (especially with plasticity).
You might consider setting line search on in the following cases:
When your structure is force-loaded (as opposed to displacement-controlled).
If you are analyzing a "flimsy" structure which exhibits increasing stiffness (such as a fishing pole).
If you notice (from the program output messages) oscillatory convergence patterns.
8.10.2.5. Using the Arc-Length Method

You can use the arc-length method [ARCLEN and ARCTRM] to obtain numerically stable solutions for many
physically unstable structures. When using the arc-length method, please keep in mind the following considerations:
The arc-length method is restricted to static analyses with proportional (ramped) loads only.
The program calculates the reference arc-length radius from the load (or displacement) increment of the
first iteration of the first substep, using the following formula:
Reference Arc -Length Radius =
(Total Load or Displacement)

B
NSBSTP
where NSBSTP is the number of substeps specified in the NSUBST command.

When choosing the number of substeps, consider that more substeps will result in a longer solution time. Ideally,
you want to choose the minimum number of substeps required to produce an optimally efficient solution. You
might have to take an "educated guess" of the desired number of substeps, and adjust and re-analyze as needed.
868
Do not use line search [LNSRCH], the predictor [PRED], adaptive descent [NROPT,,,ON], automatic time
stepping [AUTOTS, TIME, DELTIM], or time-integration effects [TIMINT] when the arc-length method is
active.
Do not attempt to base convergence on displacement [CNVTOL,U]. Use the force criteria [CNVTOL,F] instead.
To help minimize solution time with the arc-length method, the maximum number of equilibrium iterations
in a single substep [NEQIT] should be less than or equal to 15.
If an arc-length solution fails to converge within the prescribed maximum number of iterations [NEQIT],
the program will automatically bisect and continue the analysis. Bisection will continue either until a
converged solution is obtained, or until the minimum arc-length radius is used (the minimum radius is
defined by NSBSTP [NSUBST] and MINARC [ARCLEN]).
In general, you cannot use this method to obtain a solution at a specified load or displacement value because the value changes (along the spherical arc) as equilibrium is achieved. Note in Figure 8.4: Traditional
Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method how the specified load
point. The actual load at convergence is somewhat less.
a
F1
is only used as a starting
Similarly, it can be difficult to determine a value of limiting load or deflection within some known tolerance
when using the arc-length method in a nonlinear buckling analysis. You generally have to adjust the reference arc-length radius (using NSUBST) by trial-and-error to obtain a solution at the limit point. It might
be more convenient to use standard Newton-Raphson iterations with bisection [AUTOTS] to determine
values of nonlinear buckling loads.
You should usually avoid using the JCG solver [EQSLV] in conjunction with the arc-length method, because
the arc-length procedure might result in a negative definite stiffness matrix (negative pivot), which can
cause a solution failure with this solver.
You can freely switch from the Newton-Raphson iteration method to the arc-length method at the start
of any load step. However, to switch from arc-length to Newton-Raphson iterations, you must terminate
the analysis and restart, deactivating the arc-length method in the first load step of the restart
[ARCLEN,OFF].
An arc-length solution terminates under these conditions:
When limits defined by the ARCTRM or NCNV commands are reached
When the solution converges at the applied load
When you use an abort file (Jobname.ABT)
See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for a discussion of termination and restart procedures.
Use the load-deflection curve as a guide for evaluating and adjusting your analysis to help you achieve
the desired results. It is usually good practice to graph your load-deflection curve (using POST26 commands)
with every analysis.
Often, an unsuccessful arc-length analysis can be traced to an arc-length radius that is either too large or
too small. "Drifting back," in which the analysis retraces its steps back along the load-deflection curve, is
one typical difficulty that is caused by using too large or too small an arc-length radius. Study the loaddeflection curve to understand this problem. You can then use the NSUBST and ARCLEN commands to
adjust the arc-length radius size and range, as appropriate.
The total arc-length load factor (item ALLF on the SOLU command) can be either positive or negative.
Similarly, TIME, which in an arc-length analysis is related to the total arc-length load factor, can also be
either positive or negative. Negative values of ALLF or TIME indicate that the arc-length feature is applying
load in the reverse direction, in order to maintain stability in the structure. Negative ALLF or TIME values
can be commonly encountered in various snap-through analyses.
When reading arc-length results into the database for POST1 postprocessing [SET], you should always
reference the desired results data set by its load step and substep number (LSTEP and SBSTEP) or by its
869

data set number (NSET). Do not reference results by a TIME value, because TIME in an arc-length analysis
is not always monotonically increasing. (A single value of TIME might reference more than one solution.)
Additionally, the program cannot correctly interpret negative TIME values (which might be encountered
in a snap-through analysis).
If TIME becomes negative, remember to define an appropriate variable range [/XRANGE or /YRANGE]
before creating any POST26 graphs.
8.10.2.6. Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your Model's Response

If you do not want to use the arc-length method to analyze a force-loaded structure that starts at, or passes
through, a singular (zero stiffness) configuration, you can sometimes use other techniques to artificially inhibit
divergence in your model's response:
In some cases, you can use imposed displacements instead of applied forces. This approach can be used
to start a static analysis closer to the equilibrium position, or to control displacements through periods
of unstable response (for example, snap-through or postbuckling).
Another technique that can be effective in circumventing problems due to initial instability is running a
static problem as a "slow dynamic" analysis (that is, using time-integration effects in an attempt to prevent
the solution from diverging in any one load step).
You can also apply temporary artificial stiffness to unstable DOFs, using control elements (such as COMBIN37), or using the birth and death option on other elements. The idea here is to artificially restrain the
system during intermediate load steps in order to prevent unrealistically large displacements from being
calculated. As the system displaces into a stable configuration, the artificial stiffness is removed.
8.10.2.7. Turn Off Extra Element Shapes

ANSYS provides "incompatible" modes" formulation (also referred to as "extra shapes") for modeling bending
applications. If your problem is predominantly bulk deformation, then you may choose to turn extra shapes off
to reduce CPU/storage requirements and enhance convergence. However, doing so precludes the ability to
model any bending.
8.10.2.8. Using Birth and Death Wisely

Realize that any sudden change in your structure's stiffness matrix is likely to cause convergence problems. When
activating or deactivating elements, try to spread the changes out over a number of substeps. (Use a small time
step size if necessary to accomplish this.) Also be aware of possible singularities (such as sharp reentrant corners)
that might be created as you activate or deactivate elements. Such singularities can cause convergence problems.
8.10.2.9. Read Your Output

Remember that the ANSYS program performs a nonlinear analysis as a series of linear approximations with corrections. The program printout gives you continuous feedback on the progress of these approximations and
corrections. (Printout either appears directly on your screen, is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is written to some
other file [/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same information in POST1, using the PRITER command,
or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR commands. You should make sure that you understand the iteration
history of your analysis before you accept the results. In particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning
statements without fully understanding their meaning. A typical nonlinear output listing is shown in Figure 8.25: Typical Nonlinear Output Listing.
870
Figure 8.25 Typical Nonlinear Output Listing

SOLVE command echo
*****
Checking
Logic
*** NOTE ***

CP=
13.891
TIME= 11:09:22
Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to 1 (full Newton-Raphson solution
procedure) for all DOFs.
Load step
summary
table
ANSYS SOLVE
COMMAND
L O A D
*****
S T E P
O P T I O N S
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . .

TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS.
STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . .
TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . .
CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . .
DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS
ITEM
FREQUENCY
COMPONENT
BASI
-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
. 200.00
.
ON
.
100
. 10000
.
10
.
15
.
NO
.YES (EXIT)
.USE DEFAULTS
.NO PRINTOUT
Load step 2
substep 1
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.2006E+06 CRITERION= 1125.

EQUIL ITER
1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1272E-01
LINE SEARCH PARAMETER =
1.000
SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1272E-01
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 4267.
CRITERION= 480.2
EQUIL ITER
2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.9019E-03
1.000
SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.9019E-03
CRITERION= 488.2
EQUIL ITER
1.000
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 778.5
CRITERION= 497.7
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 507.7
<<< CONVERGED
>>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION
4
*** LOAD STEP
2
SUBSTEP
1 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
7
*** TIME =
101.000
TIME INC =
1.00000
Load step 2
substep 2
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.6674E+05 CRITERION= 594.3

EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 502.9
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 512.9
<<< CONVERGED
2
*** LOAD STEP
2
SUBSTEP
2 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
9
*** TIME =
102.000
TIME INC =
1.00000
Load step 2
substep 3
Equilbrium
iteration
summaries
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1333E+05 CRITERION= 575.4

EQUIL ITER
1.000
SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.5329E-02
CRITERION= 534.2
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 532.9
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 540.3
EQUIL ITER
LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 0.9578
CRITERION= 551.4
<<< CONVERGED
4
871

Substep
summary
*** LOAD STEP

2
*** TIME =
103.500
SUBSTEP
3 COMPLETED.
TIME INC =
1.50000
CUM ITER =
13
8.10.2.10. Graph the Load and Response History

This verification technique may be considered to be a graphical combination of two other techniques: checking
for reasonableness, and reviewing the iteration history. POST26 graphs of load and response histories should
agree with your informed expectations about your structure's behavior. The results of interest (displacements,
reaction forces, stresses, and so on) should show relatively smooth response histories. Any non-smoothness may
indicate that too coarse of a time step was used.
8.11. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample analysis, you will run a nonlinear analysis of an elastic-plastic circular plate under the action of a
dead load and a cyclic point load. You will define a kinematic hardening plasticity curve, as well as load step
options, the maximum and minimum number of substeps for a load step, and the various load steps that describe
externally applied loads. You will also learn how to interpret the monitor file that ANSYS writes for a nonlinear
analysis.
ANSYS uses an incremental solution procedure to obtain a solution to a nonlinear analysis. In this example, the
total external load within a load step is applied in increments over a certain number of substeps. As described
earlier in this chapter, ANSYS uses a Newton-Raphson iterative procedure to solve each substep. You must specify
the number of substeps for each load step, since this number controls the size of the initial load increment applied
in the first substep of the each load step. ANSYS automatically determines the size of the load increment for each
subsequent substep in a load step. You can control the size of the load increment for these subsequent substeps
by specifying the maximum and minimum number of substeps. If you define the number of substeps, the maximum and minimum number of substeps all to be the same, then ANSYS uses a constant load increment for all
substeps within the load step.

In this example, you will use an axisymmetric model for the plate, using four-node PLANE42 elements with the
axisymmetric option to mesh the model. You will perform a geometrically nonlinear analysis. Specify the kinematic
constraints as follows: The nodes located at the center of the plate are constrained to have zero radial displacement.
The nodes located at the outer edge are constrained to have zero radial and axial displacement. You will apply
the dead load in load step 1 and the cyclic point load in six subsequent load steps. See Section 8.11.3: Problem
Sketch.
You will specify 10 substeps for the first load to ensure that the increment of the dead load applied over the first
substep is 1/10 of the total load of 0.125 N/m2. You will also specify a maximum of 50 and a minimum of 5 substeps
to ensure that if the plate exhibits a severe nonlinear behavior during the solution, then the load increment can
be cut back to 1/50 the total load. If the plate exhibits mild nonlinear behavior, then the load increment can be
increased up to 1/5 the size of the total load.
For the subsequent six load steps that apply the cyclic point load, you will specify 4 substeps, with a maximum
of 25 and a minimum of 2 substeps.
For this example, you will monitor the history over the entire solution of the vertical displacement of the node
at the location where the point cyclic load is applied and the reaction force at the node located at the bottom
of the clamped edge.
872
Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)

The circular plate has a radius of 1.0 m and a thickness of 0.1 m. The following material properties are used for
this problem:
EX = 16911.23 Pa
PRXY = 0.3
The kinematic hardening plasticity curve for the material is:
Log Strain
True Stress (Pa)
0.001123514
19.00
0.001865643
22.80
0.002562402
25.08
0.004471788
29.07
0.006422389
31.73
The plate has a dead load acting as a uniform pressure of 0.125N/m2. The history of the cyclic point load is shown
here:
Figure 8.26 Cyclic Point Load History

$%# "
!
0
'
&

I F F H G
9F 9FEDE8 @ 97 53 32
C B 4 A 5 8 6 4

a Y I X V G
7` "WH FUD R R Q"P
Q T S S
C R %`b 4B
6
8.11.3.1. Set the Analysis Title and Jobname

1.

873

2.
Type the text "Cyclic loading of a fixed circular plate."
3.
Click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname. The Change Jobname dialog box appears.
5.
Type the text axplate in the entry box and click OK.

1.
2.
3.
In the list on the left, click once on "Structural Solid."
4.
In the list on the right, click once on "Quad 4node 42."
5.
6.
Click on Options. The PLANE42 element type options dialog box appears.
7.
In the scroll box for element behavior, scroll to "Axisymmetric" and select it.
8.
Click on OK.
9.

1.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
Enter 16911.23 for EX (Young's modulus).
4.
Enter .3 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio).
5.
Click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
8.11.3.4. Specify the Kinematic Hardening material model (KINH)

1.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Nonlinear, Inelastic,
Rate Independent, Kinematic Hardening Plasticity, von Mises Plasticity, Multilinear (General). A dialog
box appears.
2.
Enter the following Strain/Stress value pair in the table: 0.00112, 19.0.
3.
Click on the Add Point button, and enter the next Strain/Stress value pair: 0.00187, 22.8.
4.
Repeat the previous step to enter the following Strain/Stress value pairs: 0.00256, 25.1; 0.00447, 29.1;
0.00642, 31.7.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
8.11.3.5. Label Graph Axes and Plot Data Tables

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes. The Axes Modifications for
Graph Plots dialog box appears.
2.
Enter Total Strain for the X-axis label.
874

3.
Enter True Stress for the Y-axis label and click OK.
4.
5.
In the Material Models Defined window, double-click in Material Model Number 1, and Multilinear Kinematic (General). The dialog box appears that includes the Strain/Stress data pairs that you entered.
6.
Click on the Graph button. A graph of the data table values appears in the Graphics window. If necessary,
revise the stress/strain values and click on the Graph button again. Repeat revisions and graphing as
needed until you are satisfied with the graphed results. Click on OK.
7.
8.
8.11.3.6. Create Rectangle

1.
appears.
2.
Type "radius=1.0" in the Selection field and click Accept. This value is the radius of the plate.
3.
Type "thick=0.1" in the Selection field and click Accept. This value is the thickness of the plate. Click Close.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Rectangle> By Dimensions. The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
5.
Enter "0, radius" for X-coordinates.
6.
Enter "0, thick" for Y-coordinates and click on OK. A rectangle appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
7.
8.11.3.7. Set Element Size

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. The MeshTool dialog box appears.
2.
Click Size Controls> Lines> Set. The Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears. Click on the
two vertical lines (2 and 4). Click OK on the picking menu. The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box
appears.
3.
Enter 8 for number of element divisions and click on OK.
4.
Repeat these steps (1-3), but choose horizontal lines 1 and 3, and specify 40 element divisions.
8.11.3.8. Mesh the Rectangle

1.
On the MeshTool, pick Quad and Map, then click MESH. The Mesh Areas picking menu appears.
2.
Click on Pick All.
3.
4.
Click on Close on the MeshTool.
8.11.3.9. Assign Analysis and Load Step Options

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.
The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
2.
Turn large deformation effects ON and click OK.
875

3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File. The
Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
4.
Verify that All items are selected, and choose Every substep for the File write frequency. Click OK.
8.11.3.10. Monitor the Displacement

In this step, you monitor the displacement of the node located at the axes of symmetry, as well as the reaction
force at the fixed end of the plate.
1.
appears.
2.
Type "ntop = node(0,thick,0.0)" in the Selection field and click Accept.
3.
Type "nright = node(radius,0.0,0.0)" in the Selection field and click Accept, then Close.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor. The Monitor picking
menu appears.
5.
Type "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu. The Monitor dialog box appears.
6.
In the scroll box for Quantity to be monitored, scroll to "UY" and select it. Click OK.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor. The Monitor picking
menu appears.
8.
Type "nright" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu. The Monitor dialog box appears.
9.
In the scroll box for Variable to redefine, scroll to "Variable 2" and select it. In the scroll box for Quantity
to be monitored, scroll to "FY" and select it. Click OK.
8.11.3.11. Apply Constraints

1.
2.
Select Nodes and By Location in the first two selection boxes. Verify that X coordinates are selected, and
enter "radius" in the Min, Max field. Click OK.
3.
4.
Click Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
Click on "All DOF" for DOFs to be constrained. Click OK.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Verify that
Nodes, By Location, and X coordinates are selected. Enter "0" in the Min, Max field and click OK. This will
select the nodes at the X=0 position.
7.
8.
Click Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
9.
Click on "UX" for DOFs to be constrained. Click on All DOF to deselect it.
10. Enter "0.0" as the Displacement value. Click OK.

11. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Verify that
Nodes and By Location are selected.
12. Click on Y coordinates and enter "thick" in the Min, Max field. Click OK.
876

14. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on nodes dialog box appears.
15. Enter "0.125" in the Load PRES value field and click OK.
8.11.3.12. Solve the First Load Step

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps.
The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
2.
Enter 10 as the number of substeps, enter 50 as the maximum number of substeps, and enter 5 as the
minimum number of substeps. Click OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the /STAT
window, and click on Close.
4.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box.
5.
Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done.
6.
Choose Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
8.11.3.13. Solve the Next Six Load Steps

1.
Choose Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box appears.
2.
Enter "f = 0.010" in the Selection field and click on Accept. Click on Close.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps.
The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
4.
Enter "4" for the number of substeps, "25" for the maximum number of substeps, and "2" for the minimum
number of substeps. Click OK.
5.
6.
Enter "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu. The
Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
7.
Select "FY" in the Direction of force/mom selection box. Enter "-f" in the Force/moment value field. Click
OK.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the /STAT
window, and click on Close.
9.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box.
10. Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done.
11. Repeat Steps 5-10, entering "f" in the Force/moment value field at Step 7.
12. Repeat Steps 5-11 two more times, for a total of three cycles (six substeps).
877
8.11.3.14. Review the Monitor File

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> List> Files> Other. The List File dialog box appears. Select the axplate.mntr file and click on OK.
2.
Review the time step size, vertical displacement, and reaction force evolution over the entire solution.
3.
Click Close.
8.11.3.15. Use the General Postprocessor to Plot Results.

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Last Set.
2.
3.
Click on Def + undef edge for items to be plotted. Click OK. The deformed mesh appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu. The
Contour Element Solution Data dialog box appears.
5.
In the selection box on the left, choose Strain-plastic. In the selection box on the right, choose Eqv plastic
EPEQ. Click OK. The contour plot appears in the Graphics window.
6.
Choose Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
8.11.3.16. Define Variables for Time-History Postprocessing

1.
2.
Verify that Nodes and By Num/Pick are selected in the first two boxes. Click OK. The Select nodes picking
menu appears.
3.
Type "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Choose Elements in the first drop-down selection box. Choose Attached to in the second drop-down selection box.
Verify that Nodes is selected. Click OK.
5.
Choose Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
6.
Choose Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog
box appears. Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
7.
Click on Element results. Click OK. The Define Elemental Data picking menu appears.
8.
Click on the top left element in the ANSYS Graphics window. Click OK on the picking menu. The Define
Nodal Data picking menu appears.
9.
Click on the top left node of the top left element. Click OK on the picking menu. The Define Element
Results Variable dialog box appears.
10. Verify that the reference number of the variable is 2.

11. Choose Stress in the selection list on the left. Choose Y-direction SY in the selection list on the right. Click
OK. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog box reappears, with a second variable listed (ESOL). The
dialog box should show element number 281, node number 50, item S, component Y, and name SY.
12. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 3.
13. In the Define Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-elastic in the selection list on the left.
Choose Y-dir'n EPEL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
878
Section 8.12: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

14. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 4.
15. In the Define Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-plastic in the selection list on the left.
Choose Y-dir'n EPPL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
16. Click on Close on the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
17. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Add. The Add Time-History
18. Enter 5 for the reference number for result, enter 3 as the 1st variable, and enter 4 as the 2nd variable.
Click OK. This adds the elastic and plastic strains that you stored as variables 3 and 4. Their sum is the
total strain, and it is stored as variable 5.
8.11.3.17. Plot Time-History Results

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph. The Graph Settings dialog box
appears.
2.
Click on Single variable for the X-axis variable and enter 5 as the single variable number. Click OK.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes. The Axes Modifications for
Graph Plots dialog box appears.
4.
Enter Total Y-Strain as the X-axis label.
5.
Enter Y-Stress as the Y-axis label. Click OK.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph Time-History Variables
dialog box appears.
7.
Enter 2 as the first variable to graph. Click OK.

1.
2.
Click on the save option you want, and click on OK.
8.12. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example nonlinear static analysis of a copper cylinder impacting a rigid wall using the ANSYS
commands shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/BATCH,LIST
/title, Cyclic loading of a fixed circular plate
/filnam,axplate
/prep7
radius=1.0
! Radius of the plate (m)
thick=0.1
! Thickness of plate (m)
YM=16911.23
et,1,PLANE42,,,1
! PLANE42 axisymmetric element
mp,ex,1,YM
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
! Define a Kinematic Hardening Plasticity curve using the KINH material model
tb,KINH,1,1,5
! Define the true stress vs. total log strain curve for this material model
! using 5 points. First point defines the elastic limit
tbpt,,0.001123514,19.00
tbpt,,0.001865643,22.80
tbpt,,0.002562402,25.08
879

tbpt,,0.004471788,29.07
tbpt,,0.006422389,31.73
! Set the axles labels for the stress-strain curve plot
/axlab,X,Log Strain (N/m^2)
/axlab,Y,True Stress (N/m^2)
tbpl,KINH,1
! Plot and verify the material stress-strain curve
! Define a rectangle which is the axisymmetric cross section of the plate.

! The rectangle has a length equal to the radius of the plate and a height equal
! to the thickness of the plate
rect,,radius,,thick
! Select the left and right bounding lines of the created rectangle and set
! the line division to 8 (8 elements through the thickness of the plate)
FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2
FITEM,5,2
FITEM,5,4
CM,_Y,LINE
LSEL, , , ,P51X
!*
CM,_Y1,LINE
CMSEL,,_Y
LESIZE,_Y1, , ,8,1,
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
!*
! Select the top and bottom bounding lines of the created rectangle and set
! the line division to 40 (40 elements through the radius of the plate)
FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2
FITEM,5,1
FITEM,5,3
CM,_Y,LINE
LSEL, , , ,P51X
!*
CM,_Y1,LINE
CMSEL,,_Y
LESIZE,_Y1, , ,40,1,
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
!*
CM,_Y,AREA
ASEL, , , ,
1
CM,_Y1,AREA
CHKMSH,'AREA'
CMSEL,S,_Y
amesh,all
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
CMDEL,_Y2
fini
/solve
nlgeom,on! Turn on geometric nonlinearity
! Get the node numbers for the nodes located at the top
! of the axis of symmetry and at bottom right of the model
ntop = node(0,thick,0)
nright = node(radius,0,0)
! Activate the monitoring of the displacement and reaction force histories
! during the analysis. This will be written out to the monitor file ratch.mntr
monitor,1,ntop,uy
880
Section 8.12: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

monitor,2,nright,fy
outres,all,all
! Output all the results for all substeps to the

! results file for later postprocessing
! Select the nodes located at right end and constrain their radial (x) and
! axial (y) direction displacement to be zero.
nsel,s,loc,x,radius
d,all,all
! Select the nodes located at left end and constrain their radial (x) direction
! displacement to be zero.
nsel,s,loc,x,0.0
d,all,ux,0.0
! Define the load for Load Step 1.
! Select the nodes located at top surface of plate and apply a uniform pressure
! of 0.125 N/m^2 as dead load on the plate.
nsel,s,loc,y,thick
sf,all,pres,0.125
alls! Select all nodes
! Define the number of substeps (10). Also define maximum number of
! substeps (50), and the minimum number of substeps (5) for the automatic
! time stepping algorithm.
nsub,10,50,5
solve
f = 0.01
! Solve load step 1

! Define the parameter, f, used to apply
! the cyclic point load.
! Over six load steps apply a cyclic point load of magnitude f = 0.01 units
! applied at the center of the plate over three cycles
! Start Cycle 1
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
! Define load for load step 2

! Set the number of substeps, max and min number
! of substeps
! Solve load step 2

! of substeps
! Solve load step 3
! Start Cycle 2
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve

! of substeps
! Solve load step 4

! of substeps
! Solve load step 5
881

! Start Cycle 3
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
save
fini
/post1
set,last
! (final state)
pldi,2
ples,nl,epeq

! of substeps
! Solve load step 6
! of substeps.
! Solve load step 7
! Read in the results from the last substep of

! the last step.
!
!
!
!
Plot the deformed mesh with the undeformed

edge only
Plot the total accumulated equivalent
plastic strains
!
!
!
!
!
Plot the mesh

Select the node where the point load is attached
Select the element attached to this node
Get the number of this element
Select back everything in the model
fini
/post26
eplo
nsel,s,node,,ntop
esln
elem=elnext(0)
alls
! Define variable 2 to be Y component of stress at the node where the point

! load is applied
ESOL,2,elem,ntop,S,Y,
! Define variable 3 to be Y component of elastic strain at the node where the

! point load is applied
ESOL,3,elem,ntop,EPEL,Y,
! Define variable 4 to be Y component of plastic strain at the node where the
! point load is applied
ESOL,4,elem,ntop,EPPL,Y,
! Add the elastic and plastic strains in variables 3 and 4 and store the total
! strain in variable 5.
ADD,5,3,4, , , , ,1,1,0,
xvar,5
! Set the axes for subsequent x-y plot to be variable 5
! Define the x and y axes labels for subsequent x-y plot

/axlab,x,Total Y-Strain
/axlab,y,Y-Stress
plvar,2
fini
/eof
/exit,nosav
! Plot the Y-stress stored in variable 2

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional nonlinear analyses.
882

The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of nonlinear analysis test cases:
VM7 - Plastic Compression of a Pipe Assembly
VM11 - Residual Stress Problem
VM24 - Plastic Hinge in a Rectangular Beam
VM38 - Plastic Loading of a Thick-Walled Cylinder Under Pressure
VM56 - Hyperelastic Thick Cylinder Under Internal Pressure
VM78 - Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam
VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant Force
VM104 - Liquid-Solid Phase Change
VM124 - Discharge of Water from a Reservoir
VM126 - Heat Transferred to a Flowing Fluid
VM132 - Stress Relaxation of a Bolt Due to Creep
VM133 - Motion of a Rod Due to Irradiation Induced Creep
VM134 - Plastic Bending of a Clamped I-Beam
VM146 - Bending of a Reinforced Concrete Beam
VM185 - Current Carrying Ferromagnetic Conductor
VM198 - Large Strain In-Plane Torsion Test
VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear Deformation
VM200 - Viscoelastic Sandwich Seal Analysis
VM218 - Hyperelastic Circular Plate
VM220 - Eddy Current Loss in Thick Steel Plate
883
884
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting

You use material curve fitting to derive coefficients from experimental data that you supply for your material.
Curve fitting involves comparing your experimental data to certain nonlinear material models built into ANSYS.
With this feature, you compare experimental data versus ANSYS-calculated data for different nonlinear models.
Based on these comparisons, you decide which material model to use during solution.
Curve fitting is based on the data table configurations outlined in the TB command. The data manipulations and
constructions are performed by the TBFT command.
9.1. Applicable Material Behavior Types

ANSYS supports curve fitting for hyperelastic, creep and viscoelastic material behavior. Temperature dependency
is supported for all three behaviors.
Section 9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

For hyperelastic material models, your stress-strain curves can be converted to any of the available ANSYSsupported hyperelastic models, including Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Neo-Hookean, Polynomial, Arruda-Boyce,
Gent, and Yeoh. Compressible hyperelastic Ogden hyper-foam and Blatz-Ko models are also supported.
Section 9.3: Creep Material Curve Fitting

For creep material models, your creep strain rate or creep strain as a function of time, stress or temperature
can be converted to any of the thirteen ANSYS-supported implicit creep models.
Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

For viscoelastic material models, your shear modulus vs. time and/or bulk modulus vs. time data is converted to ANSYS-supported Prony series format.
9.2. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

Hyperelastic curve fitting is a tool for estimating your material constants by inputting your experimental data
and comparing it to the ANSYS-supported hyperelastic material models. You perform curve fitting either interactively (GUI) or via batch commands. You input your experimental data, choose a model from one of nine supplied
hyperelastic models, perform a regression analysis, graphically view the curve fitting results, compare the fits to
the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands
for the subsequent finite element analyses.
ANSYS hyperelastic models can define three types of behavior: purely incompressible, nearly incompressible,
and compressible. Hyperelastic curve fitting is based on the HYPER option of the TB command.
9.2.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic Material Behavior

The steps for hyperelastic curve fitting are defined as follows:
1 Section 9.2.1.1: Prepare Experimental
Data
The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by a space

or a comma.
2 Section 9.2.1.2: Input the Data into AN- The experimental data can be read into ANSYS by browsing to the file
SYS
location (GUI) or by specifying the filename and path (batch) on the
command line.

3 Section 9.2.1.3: Select a Material Model The material options for the applicable curve fitting regimen are
Option
defined in the TB command. ANSYS supports nine hyperelastic models.
Once you pick a model, you can still change to another model if an
ideal fit is not realized.
4 Section 9.2.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients Depending on the model, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a linear or
nonlinear regression process. The hyperelastic material models, along
with the associated process for each are listed in Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types.
5 Section 9.2.1.5: Specify Control Paramet- You will specify the type of error norm to be used to generate the
ers and Solve
curve fit.
6 Section 9.2.1.6: Plot Your Experimental You review and verify the results by comparing the experimental data
Data and Analyze
and the regression errors. If the results you obtain are not acceptable,
repeat steps 3 to 5 to perform a new curve fitting solution.
7 Section 9.2.1.7: Write Data to TB Com- Write your curve fitting results to the database in the TB command
mand
table format.
9.2.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. Your hyperelastic curve fitting data needs to be a comma or space
delimited file, referencing your stress vs. strain values.
Hyperelastic curve fitting supports three main behaviors:
Case 1 - Totally Incompressible Models (see Table 9.1: Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and
Blatz-Ko)
Case 2 - Nearly Incompressible Models (see Table 9.1: Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and
Blatz-Ko)
Case 3 - Compressible Models (see Table 9.2: Experimental Details for Case 3 Models)
The types of data required for each of these cases is defined in the tables below.
Table 9.1 Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
Experimental Type
Column 1
Column 2
Uniaxial Test
Engineering Strain
Engineering Stress
Biaxial Test
Engineering Strain
Engineering Stress
Shear Test
Engineering Strain
Engineering Stress
Volumetric Test
Volumetric Strain(J)
True Stress
Table 9.2 Experimental Details for Case 3 Models

Experiment Type
Column 1
Column 2
Uniaxial Test
Longitudinal Engineering
Strain
Lateral Direction Engineering Strain Engineering Stress
Biaxial Test
Biaxial Engineering Strain
Thickness Direction Engineering

Strain
Engineering Stress
Shear Test
Shear Engineering Strain
Thickness Direction Engineering

Strain
Engineering Stress
Volumetric Test
Volumetric Strain(J)
True Stress
92
Column 3

Note J is the ratio of current volume to the original volume.
All stresses output by ANSYS in POST1/POST26 are true stresses and logarithmic strains.
9.2.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS

Use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. First, designate whether they are uniaxial,
biaxial, shear, or volumetric, and then designate the location in the Option2, Option3, and Option4 fields. All
of the stress values will be engineering stress, except for the volumetric option (true stress). The file should be
a simple, delimited set of stress and strain values similar to the following:
0.9703
0.9412
0.9127
0.8847
60.00
118.2
175.2
231.1
For temperature dependent curve fitting, specify your temperature values at the top of the experimental data
using the
/temp,value
line. This header format specifies the attribute (temp) and its value (100). An example of a typical data input using
these attributes follows:
/temp,100
0.9703 60.00
0.9412 118.2
0.9127 175.2
0.8847 231.1
Adding this header introduces a temperature attribute of 100 degrees. You can add additional data sets at other
temperatures, in additional files. One file can have data at only one temperature.
9.2.1.2.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, or VOLU

Option2 = name of file containing experimental data
Option3 = file name extension
Option4 = file directory
9.2.1.2.2. GUI
The Material Properties GUI provides an input field where you can type in the filename of your data file, and also
include the appropriate path. You can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed
for each Option1 value (UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, etc.).
9.2.1.3. Select a Material Model Option

Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types below lists the models that are available for hyperelastic
curve fitting. When volumetric data is supplied, a compressible or nearly incompressible model is implied, and
only the designated options will be available. When no volumetric data is supplied, the model is understood to
be incompressible, and those model options will be available. Supplying zero coefficients for the volumetric data
field will also denote an incompressible model.
93
Table 9.3 Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types

Model Name
Abbreviation
Order/Options
No. of Coefficients [1] Linear/Nonlinear Fitting
Mooney-Rivlin
moon
2, 3, 5, 9
2/3/5/9+1
Linear
Polynomial
poly
1 to N
see below [2]
Linear
Yeoh
yeoh
1 to N
N+N
Linear
Neo-Hookean
neoh
1+1
Linear
Ogden
ogde
1 to N
2*N+N
Nonlinear
Arruda-Boyce
boyc
2+1
Nonlinear
Gent
gent
2+1
Nonlinear
Blatz-Ko
blat
Nonlinear
1 to N
2*N+N
Nonlinear
Ogden Hyper-foam foam
1.
The number of coefficients is usually the sum of the number of deviatoric coefficients and the number
of volumetric coefficients.
2.
The number of coefficients for a polynomial will be dependent on the polynomial order N.
N
Number of Coefficients = (1 + i) + N
i =1
Blatz-Ko and Ogden hyper-foam are compressible models. For Ogden hyper-foam, the experimental data you
supply will require additional fields.
More information on the hyperelastic models ANSYS supplies for curve fitting can be found in Section 2.5.2:
Hyperelastic Material Constants.
9.2.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name, as specified in Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above)
Option3 = order or number of coefficients, where applicable. Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types (above) specifies the number and type of coefficient(s) necessary for each hyperelastic model type.
9.2.1.3.2. GUI
A pull-down selection menu in the material GUI allows you to pick the applicable material model option. The
options displayed will be dependent on the format of your experimental data file.
9.2.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients

Depending on the model you choose, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a linear or a nonlinear regression process.
In both cases, the initial coefficients you supply will determine how accurate and efficient your curve fit will be.
The initial values of the coefficients generally come from experience, and also from studying the function that
defines the model you are attempting to compare/fit your data to. For most hyperelastic models, 1 or -1 is a
good starting point. However, coefficient values can vary greatly depending on the model chosen. The Gent
model, for instance, provides good fit with initial coefficient values as high as 1000.
You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged,
while allowing the other coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the coefficient you fixed and operate
on it after the others are optimized. By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary.
94

For temperature dependent experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a reference
temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values specified
using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data.
You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT, SOLVE entry will initiate
three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.
With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a TBFT, SOLVE command
solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each desired discrete temperature value and solve again.
You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the initial coefficients
for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when temperature
dependency is turned on and another set of initial values are specified at discrete temperature values. The curve
fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified at a discrete
temperature, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was turned on are used.
9.2.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name (see Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models)
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = value of the coefficient
To set Option4 for a reference temperature, or for temperature dependency:

TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models.
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option4 = tdep, Option5 = 1 turns on temperature dependency, and Option5 = 0 turns it off.
If Option4 = tref, Option5 will be either all, or the reference temperature.
TBFT,FIX,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models.
Option3 = not applicable
Option5 = 1 for fixed and 0 to vary
9.2.1.4.2. GUI
The GUI automatically updates your coefficient tables depending on the model you pick. You can modify individual coefficients to initialize them at values you believe are more appropriate.
95
9.2.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Depending on the model, your hyperelastic curve fitting will be either a linear or nonlinear regression process
(see Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for details). Your error norms can be either normalized or unnormalized. Normalized error norms (the default regression option) generally give better results
than the unnormalized error norms, since normalized error gives equal weight to all of your data points.
The solution control parameters of a nonlinear regression include:
1.
number of iterations
2.
residual tolerance
3.
coefficient change tolerance
The solution stops when both the residual tolerance and the coefficient change tolerance of your error norm
are met, or if the number of iterations criteria is met. When you use nonlinear regression, you must initialize your
coefficients.
9.2.1.5.1. Batch
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types
(above) for possible values.

Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares
Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solution parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.2.1.5.2. GUI
The GUI lets you specify all of your control parameters (error norm, solution control parameters, and the solver
options) interactively. You select the appropriate options from the provided menus, and solve to generate the
coefficients. You can change the parameters and repeat the solution as necessary to ensure an accurate result.
The unused options are disabled whenever necessary.
9.2.1.6. Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted coefficients and also the residual errors. You
can then plot your data and visually interpret the results. The first column is always your X- axis, with each additional column plotted separately as a function of column one.
You should try to reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For example, if
your data contains time, temperature, stress, and creep strain, and you wish to see the creep strain vary as a
function of time at different temperatures and stresses in the plot, you add your experimental data using multiple
TBFT,EADD commands (or the corresponding GUI operations) by splitting the file into multiple experimental
files as prescribed earlier, one for each combination of temperature and stress.
9.2.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,HYPER,Option3,Option4
96

Option1 = UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, or VOLU
available.
You use the /WINDOW command to configure the graphs for each of the resultant curves for the individual
stress types.
9.2.1.6.2. GUI
Use the GRAPH button to plot the data. Your plots will show columns 2 and above as separate curves, plotted
as a function of column 1. The data in column 1 is always the X-axis. By default, all the experiments are plotted
in the GUI window. To view specific data and its corresponding fitting result, you can click the right mouse button
(RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option to view the results. Other RMB plotting utilities can be
found for different data fields in the curve fitting GUI window.
Use RMB functions to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted
functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9
Uniaxial plots directly on top of each other, provided you have already solved for both of these functions. RMB
also allows you to set the number of points used to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value
and the maximum X value in a plot. You can also hide a particular curve within a graph, turn the legend and/or
axis displays on and off, and switch the scales between log scale and regular scale. Use the middle-mouse button
to eliminate a specific curve and clarify or refine the remaining curve.
9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify
The two factors you consider in determining results acceptability are visual fit and the error norm/residual values.
When you plot the curve, the error norm/residual values are printed in the curve fitting GUI window. Error norm
values help you determine the quality of curve fitting and whether to accept the results, but are not always the
best indicator of a valid curve fit. Plotting the curves and visually assessing the result is usually the best indication.
If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step 3 and solve again, either by picking a different
model, increasing the order, or redefining your initial values of the coefficients or other control parameters. You
can continue to use your original experimental data, repeating step 3 through step 7 until you get an acceptable
solution.
9.2.1.7. Write Data to TB Command

After you are satisfied with your curve fitting results, you can write the curve fitting data to the ANSYS database
using TBFT, FSET. Both the GUI and the command line convert the coefficients to the appropriate form before
writing to ANSYS TB tables. ANSYS stores the data as part of the material property set for use in subsequent
analyses.
9.2.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
available.
97
9.2.1.7.2. GUI
Once you complete the process and update your material data properties with the representative curve data,
you are returned to the material properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of
material behavior.
9.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting

ANSYS provides thirteen creep models, along with the tools to generate and fit derived coefficients to your experimental data. Interactive (GUI) or command line (batch) input is available. You input your experimental data,
choose a model from one of the supplied creep models, and then perform a regression analysis. You then
graphically view the curve fitting result, and compare it for fit with your experimental data. If the curve is acceptable, you write the fitted coefficients to the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands (ANSYS TB
command format) for the subsequent finite element analyses.
9.3.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep Material Behavior

The steps for creep curve fitting are defined as follows:
1 Section 9.3.1.1: Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain text file with headers to
describe the data types and attributes. The test data must be delimited by a space or a comma.
2 Section 9.3.1.2: Input the Data into ANSYS The experimental data can be read into ANSYS by browsing to the
file location in the GUI or by specifying the location on the command line.
3 Section 9.3.1.3: Select a Material Model
Option
The material options for the applicable curve fitting regimen are
defined in the TB command. ANSYS supports thirteen implicit
creep models. Once you pick a model, you can still switch to another model if an ideal fit is not realized.
4 Section 9.3.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients
Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial values of

the coefficients to be determined can be very important for a successful solution.
5 Section 9.3.1.5: Specify Control Parameters You choose the error norm to be used for an acceptable curve fit.
and Solve
6 Section 9.3.1.6: Plot the Experimental Data You review and verify the results by comparing them with the exand Analyze
perimental data and the regression errors. If they are not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 5 to obtain a new curve fitting solution.
7 Section 9.3.1.7: Write Data to TB Command Write curve fitting results in the TB command format to the ANSYS
database.

You need to provide accurate experimental test data in order to achieve valid curve fitting results. For creep
analyses, you use either the creep strain value or creep strain rate, derived as a function of time, temperature,
stress, and/or creep strain. The type of data you need to provide will depend on the creep model you choose.
The experimental data is named creep to distinguish it from other types of data, such as uniaxial, tension, biaxial, etc. The creep data must be a plain text file that contains the headers and the test data in table form, delimited by a space or a comma.
The header is used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of the data.
There are five different creep data types; see Table 9.4: Creep Data Types and Abbreviations.
98
Table 9.4 Creep Data Types and Abbreviations

Time
time
Equivalent Creep Strain
creq
Equivalent Creep Strain Rate
dcreq
Equivalent Stress
seqv
Temperature
temp
The header format to define each column's data-type is /n, abbr, where n is the index of the data column in the
file, and abbr is the abbreviation for the type of data in the column, as described in Table 9.4: Creep Data Types
and Abbreviations.
A typical data input is shown below:
/1,seqv ! indicates first column is stress
/2,creq ! indicates second column is creep strain
/3,temp ! indicates third column is temperature
/4,dcreq ! indicates fourth column is creep strain rate
4000
0.00215869 100
0.000203055
4000
0.00406109 100
0.000181314
4000
0.00664691 100
0.000165303
4000
0.0102068 100
0.000152217
4000
0.0151416 100
0.000140946
When a particular column is unchanged over the loading history, you can define it as an attribute. For instance,
in the above example, the stress and temperature are constant throughout the range. You define this data as
an attribute.
The header format to define a data attribute is /attr, value, where attr is the data-type abbreviation, and value is
the value of the attribute. The constant stress and temperature values above can be written into the file header,
as follows:
/seqv,4000 ! indicate this creep has a constant stress of 4000
/temp,100 ! indicate this creep data is at a constant temperature of 100
/1,creq ! indicate first column is creep strain
/2,dcreq ! indicate second column is creep strain rate
0.00215869 0.000203055
0.00406109 0.000181314
0.00664691 0.000165303
0.0102068 0.000152217
0.0151416 0.000140946
0.0220102 0.000130945
ANSYS provides thirteen model types for creep curve fitting. The model you choose will determine the experimental data required for the curve fitting process. The following table describes the creep data required to perform
curve fitting for each model type. Note that for strain hardening and modified strain hardening, you need to input
both creep strain and creep strain rate in the experimental data.
Table 9.5 Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute

Creep Model
creq
dcreq
Strain Hardening
time
seqv
temp
Time Hardening
Generalized Exponential
Generalized Graham
Generalized Blackburn
99

Creep Model
creq
Modified Time Hardening
Modified Strain Hardening
dcreq
time
seqv
temp
Generalized Garofalo
Exponential Form
Norton
Prim+Sec Time Hardening
Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial
Generalized Time Hardening

The experimental data must be read into ANSYS from a plain text file. You prepare this file according to the
previous section, including both header information and formatted test data. The header portion is required for
creep analyses. Each file is viewed as a data set in ANSYS, and can be a complete set of experimental test data
or a part of a series of files of experimental test data. You can include several data sets, such as tests performed
at different stress levels and/or temperatures, when you perform creep curve fitting. There are two ways to input
the experimental data.
9.3.1.2.1. Batch
The EADD argument of the TBFT command is used to identify and specify the location of your data files. The
command syntax is:
Option1 = creep
9.3.1.2.2. GUI
In interactive mode, you can input experimental data by typing the filename (with the appropriate path if the
file is not in the default directory) into the appropriate area. You can also browse to a file in a particular location.
Use the Add Data Set button to add additional data sets for creep curve fitting. There is no restriction on the
number of data sets you can add.

The thirteen models available for creep curve fitting are defined in Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations.
Pick the one that best satisfies your requirements, and use the creep model abbreviation from the table in subsequent fitting operations. You'll find it helpful to view the formula before you solve. It will help you determine
the initial coefficients you might use and also help you determine the format of your experimental data. Also
see Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations to determine a starting point for the initial creep model coefficients.
9.3.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
Option2 = creep model abbreviation. See Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations.
910

Option3 = not used for creep curve fitting.
The following table describes the creep models available and their abbreviated names for Option2 (above).
Table 9.6 Creep Models and Abbreviations

Model Number
Name
Fitting Name/Option2
Strain Hardening
shar
Time Hardening
thar
Generalized Exponential
gexp
Generalized Graham
ggra
Generalized Blackburn
gbla
Modified Time Hardening
mtha
Modified Strain Hardening
msha
Generalized Garofalo
ggar
Exponential Form
expo
10
Norton
nort
11
Prim+Sec Time Hardening
psth
12
Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial
psrp
13
Generalized Time Hardening
gtha
Note The experimental data must be consistent with the creep model you choose. See Table 9.5: Creep
Model and Data/Type Attribute for the data types required for each creep model.
9.3.1.3.2. GUI
You can pick the appropriate model option from a menu in the data entry area. All of the options and constraints
listed for batch input apply.

Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. A successful curve fit depends greatly on the initial coefficient
values; certain variances will prevent your curve fit from converging. When a solution doesn't converge, you can
adjust the initial value of specific coefficients and rerun the problem (you do not need to input the data again).
In general, the more parameters a model has, the more difficult it is to get the solution to converge.
Models with many parameters will sometimes converge more easily if you fix (hold constant) your coefficients.
You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other coefficients to be operated
on. You can then release the fixed coefficients to obtain a solution. By default, all of the coefficients are free to
vary.
Although some creep models implicitly address temperature dependency, other models lack this capability. For
both types of models, you can account for temperature dependency by generating coefficients at discrete
temperature values.
You solve for separate coefficients at each of your desired discrete temperatures. If the equation implicitly supports
temperature dependency already, that portion is eliminated by appropriately fixing the coefficient to a specific
value. For example, if you have e(-C*T), then C is set to 0 to eliminate this term. To do this, you turn on temperature
dependency by setting the tdep parameter to 1.
911

For temperature dependent experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a reference
temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values specified
using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data.
three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.
solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values and solve again.
dependency is turned on and another set of initial values is specified at discrete temperatures. The curve fitting
tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified at discrete temperatures, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was turned on are used.
9.3.1.4.1. Batch
You define your coefficient values and temperature dependency using the SET option of the TBFT command,
as follows:
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name

Option5 = value of coefficient
Then you can modify the coefficients with the FIX option of the TBFT command.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

Option5 = 0 variable, 1 fixed
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5

Option5 = For Option4 = tdep, 1 to turn on, 0 to turn off. For Option4 = tdep, a specific temp value, or all.
9.3.1.4.2. GUI
The models listed in Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations are available directly from the GUI. When you
pick a model from the choices, ANSYS automatically configures the coefficients for the model. You can then
make modifications, including initializing and/or fixing certain coefficients.

Your error norm, your maximum number iterations allowed, and your error tolerance will affect the accuracy of
your results. There are two available error norms available for the regression. The default error norm calculation
912

option is normalized curve fitting. It usually yields better results than unnormalized curve fitting, since normalized
fitting gives equal weight to all data points when minimizing the error norms.
Other available solve criteria are number of iterations, residual tolerance, and coefficient change tolerance. The
solution stops when both residual tolerance and coefficient change tolerance is met or if the number of iterations
criteria is met. The coefficients are updated after every iteration during the solve process.
9.3.1.5.1. Batch
The batch command is:
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = creep function name (See Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations)
Option3 = not applicable for creep models
Option4 = error norm: 0 = unnormalized, 1 = normalized (default)
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.3.1.5.2. GUI
After you fill in the last set of coefficient values, the analysis moves automatically to the solution phase. Each of
the options specified in the command line description is presented as a pull down menu or fill in box, and each
option must be specified before Solve will begin. The coefficients are updated in the GUI after the solution is
complete.
9.3.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted coefficients and also the residual errors. You
can then plot your data and visually interpret the results. Column one is your X- axis, with each additional column
plotted separately as a function of column one.
You should reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For example, if your
data contains time, temperature, stress and creep strain, you may wish to see the creep strain vary as a function
of time, at different temperatures and stresses in the plot. Add your experimental data using multiple TBFT,EADD
commands (or the corresponding GUI method). Split the file into multiple experimental fields as prescribed
earlier, one for each combination of temperature and stress.
Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and View/Hide
Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2
Uniaxial and Mooney9 Uniaxial plots right on top of each other, provided both of these function are already
solved for. RMB also allows you to see the number of points used to generate the plot, and also change the
Minimum X Value and the Maximum X Value in a plot. You can use the middle-mouse button (context sensitive)
to hide a particular curve within a graph.
9.3.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = CREEP
Option4 = not used
913
9.3.1.6.2. GUI
You can simultaneously display many data sets for each function plotted. Each window of your display can be
used to display each one of the data sets you are plotting against column one.
9.3.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

You use the GUI to graphically review the curve fitting result and ensure a good fit throughout the range of data.
Use the plotted curve fitting results both to determine the degree of fit at various locations and to verify the error
norm/residual value. You can then determine the quality of a curve fitting and decide whether to accept the
results. If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step 3, and then solve again with a new
model, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and also modifying some of the other control parameters.
You can continue to use your experimental data, repeating step 3 through step 6 until you obtain a satisfactory
solution.

After you are satisfied with your curve fitting results, you can write the curve fitting data to the ANSYS database
using TBFT, FSET. The GUI or the command line converts the coefficients to the appropriate form before writing
to ANSYS TB tables. ANSYS stores the data as part of the material property set for use in subsequent analyses.
9.3.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
Option2 = creep model abbreviation

9.3.1.7.2. GUI
When you complete the process, click the Write to Database button to write the fitted coefficients of your creep
model as a creep data table in ANSYS material database. You are then returned to the material properties dialog.
The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
9.3.2. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models

The following tips will help to ensure successful curve fitting. They are only suggestions, and do not represent
a singular method or strategy. Also, following them does not guarantee a solution. Refer to Section 2.5.11: Creep
Equations for additional details on each implicit creep model.
Name
Notes
1 Strain Hardening
Strain hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to zero. If you
have difficulty solving temperature dependent data, use experimental data for
only one temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve, and then add data for your
other temperatures. Then release C4 and solve for all coefficients. You can also
solve for just C4 by fixing the C1, C2 and C3 values.
2 Time Hardening
Time hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to zero. If you
have difficulty solving temperature dependent data, use experimental data for
only one temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve, and then add data for your
other temperatures. Then release C4 and solve for all coefficients. You can also
solve for just C4 by fixing the C1, C2 and C3 values.
914

3 Generalized Exponential
Generalized exponential has 5 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature

dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to zero.
Use a low value for C5 (e.g., 1e-3) to avoid floating-point overflows in the exponential term. If you have difficulty solving for temperature dependent data,
use experimental data for only one temperature, fix C4 to zero, then solve. Then
add data for your other temperatures, release C4 and solve for all coefficients.
You can also solve for just C4 by fixing C1, C2 and C3.
4 Generalized Graham
Generalized Graham has 8 coefficients. You use C8 for temperature dependency.

If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C8 to zero. If you have
difficulty solving temperature dependent data, use experimental data for only
one temperature, fix C8 to zero, and solve. Then add data for other temperatures, release C8 and solve for the remaining coefficients individually.
5 Generalized Blackburn
Generalized Blackburn has 7 coefficients. It is advisable to look at the exponential terms and try to keep them from floating-point overflows. To keep eC2
within floating-point range, make sure the initial value of C2 is such that C2
is close to 1. Similarly try to keep /C4 and C7 close to 1.
6 Modified Time Hardening
Modified time hardening has 4 coefficients. C4 is for temperature dependency.

If you do not have temperature dependent data, fix C4 to zero.
7 Modified Strain Hardening
Modified Strain Hardening has 3 coefficients. This model can be complex for
C2
C3
curve fitting. To keep the C1 [(C3 + 1)]

term from going negative, C1
2
is replaced with C1 but converted to the proper form before beings written
to the ANSYS database.
8 Generalized Garofalo
Generalized Garofalo has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to zero. To
keep the Sinh term within floating-point range, keep c2 close to one when
you initialize the coefficients.
9 Exponential Form
Exponential form has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C3 to zero. To keep
eC2 within floating-point range, keep /C2 close to one.
10 Norton
Norton model has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature dependency.

If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C3 to zero.
11 Prim+Sec Time Hardening
Time hardening has 7 coefficients. This is a complex model. Here it is advisable

to solve for temperature independent data first and then introduce temperature
related data.
12 Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial Rational polynomial is a very complex model for curve fitting, with 10 coefficients. If you find it hard to fit this data, it is advisable that you split the experimental data into primary creep data and secondary creep data. Primary creep
data is the initial part of the curve that covers the nonlinearity in the strain rate.
Fit only the secondary data by fixing C1 to 1 and then set all other coefficients
except C2, C3 and C4 to zero. Use a low value of C3 to keep 10C3 within floatingpoint range. Coefficients C5 to C10 in curve fitting refers to coefficients C7 to
C12 in the implicit creep equation. Then add the primary creep data, release
all coefficients, and solve.
13 Generalized Time Hardening
Generalized time hardening has 6 coefficients. Set C6 to zero if you have temperature independent data. When initializing coefficients set C5 close to 1 to
avoid floating-point overflows.
9.4. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

Viscoelastic material curve fitting determines your material constants by relating your experimental data to the
Prony series expansion for both the shear and bulk modulus of the ANSYS hypoviscoelastic material option.
915

Curve fitting is performed either interactively or via batch commands. You input the experimental data, define
the order of Prony series expansion, perform nonlinear regression, view the curve fitting results graphically,
compare the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table
commands for the subsequent finite elements analyses. Current tools allow you to fit shear modulus and/or bulk
modulus and/or shift functions, along with discrete temperature dependencies for multiple data sets.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
The steps for Viscoelastic Curve Fitting are defined as follows:
1 Section 9.4.1.1: Prepare Experimental
Data
The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by a space

or a comma.
2 Section 9.4.1.2: Input the Data into AN- The experimental data can be read into ANSYS from the GUI or via
SYS
batch commands, as a plain text file.
3 Section 9.4.1.3: Select a Material Model This includes Prony series expansion of shear and/or bulk moduli as
Option
well as shift function. The supported shift functions include WLF and
TN.
4 Section 9.4.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial value of
your coefficients is very important for a successful solution.
5 Section 9.4.1.5: Specify Control Paramet- Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control parameters,
ers and Solve
and perform the nonlinear regression.
6 Section 9.4.1.6: Plot the Experimental
Data and Analyze
Graphically view the curve fitting results. Review and verify the results
by comparing them with the experimental data and the regression
errors. If any factor is not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 7 to obtain a
new curve fitting solution.
7 Section 9.4.1.7: Write Data to TB Com- Write your curve fitting results in TB command format to the ANSYS
mand
database.

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. For curve fitting viscoelastic materials, the experimental data must
be shear modulus and/or bulk modulus as a function of time and temperature. The experimental data is named
sdec or bdec to distinguish it from other data types, such as hyperelastic or creep. This also makes documenting
your analyses more convenient.
Your viscoelastic test data must be a plain text file with headers to define the test data. The data file should be
in table form, delimited by a space or a comma. The header defines the test data type and the temperature for
your test data. For viscoelastic curve fitting with multiple temperatures, you can evaluate coefficients at each
discrete temperature point and write it as a temperature-dependent Prony data table, or you can use the WLF
or TN shift functions to account for the temperature dependency. A separate data file must be provided for each
discrete temperature. The viscoelastic test data can be any of 4 data types, see Table 9.7: Viscoelastic Data Types
and Abbreviations.
Table 9.7 Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations

Time
time
Shear modulus
smod
Bulk modulus
bmod
Temperature
temp
916

The headers are used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of the data.
The following listing contains the appropriate headers, followed by the delimited data:
/temp,100 ! define temperature attribute
0.01 2992.53
1 2978.514207
2 2965.45541
4 2942.293214
6 2922.530649
8 2905.612202
10 2891.073456
20 2842.506984
40 2798.142793
60 2772.383729
80 2750.631843
100 2730.398114
200 2643.125432
400 2517.475394
600 2431.262053
800 2366.580897
1000
2313.955396
2000
2117.922594
4000
1833.734397
6000
1627.199197
8000
1470.6806
10000 1347.264527
20000 964.0141125
40000 586.1405449
60000 392.186777
80000 277.2706253
100000 202.0025278
200000 46.87056342
400000 2.669209118
600000 0.156653269
800000 0.0137224
1000000 0.005591539

You use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. The experimental data must be read
into ANSYS from a plain text file. The experimental data must be prepared as discussed in the previous section,
and include both the header information and the formatted test data. Each file is viewed as a data set in ANSYS,
and can be the complete set of experimental test data or a part of an experimental test data.
You can include several data sets, including tests performed at different temperatures. Although different data
sets can have the same/or different temperature, each file can have only one temperature. Multiple temperature
data sets must be input with multiple files.
Two types of data may be required for viscoelastic curve fitting, either shear modulus vs. time and/or bulk
modulus vs. time. The data can also be a function of temperature, which can then be accounted for by either
WLF or TN shift function. You can use the GUI or batch command to input your experimental data.
9.4.1.2.1. Batch
ID = index corresponding to the ANSYS material number

Option1 = experimental data type, either sdec or bdec
917

Note sdec refers to the shear modulus as a function of time and bdec refers to the bulk modulus
as a function of time.
9.4.1.2.2. GUI
Click on the Add Dataset button and type the filename into the area provided. You can also browse to a file in
a specified location. Separate input is performed for each data type (Option1 = sdec, or bdec)

The TBFT command provides the curve fitting tools for viscoelastic material modeling. You represent your viscoelastic material behavior by a set of Prony-series expansions of shear and/or bulk moduli to characterize the
shear and the bulk deformation of the material. You can also use the shift functions to characterize the material's
temperature dependency.
First you define a case casename to associate the set of coefficients for the Prony expansions with the shift
functions that characterize the material behavior. You can use the casename to define several different options
that characterize the same test data, and then to compare the curve fitting results. To define the material model,
you must first define a casename, and then specify the order of shear and bulk moduli and the type of the shift
function(s), if required. You need to create an additional case to define different shear order, bulk order or shift
options. Once you create a case, the number of shear terms, bulk terms, or shift options cannot be changed.
9.4.1.3.1. Batch
You define a viscoelastic material with the Prony series expansion by creating a case and setting the order of
shear modulus, bulk modulus, and shift options. You create the case with the TBFT, FCASE command. The first
line will include FCASE, ID, NEW. Then you specify the number of shear terms, bulk terms, and the shift function.
The case is actually created only after the option is issued. The following syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate the relationship of these activities.
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3
Option2 = PVHE (refers to Prony Viscohypoelastic)

Option3 = user specified casename
TBFT,FADD,ID,CATEGORY,Option2,Option3
CATEGORY = VISCO
Option2 = pshear or pbulk or shift
Option3 = dependent on Option2 as follows:
Option2 = pshear or bulk, Option3 = NONE, or 1 to N
Option2 = shift, Option3 = NONE or TN or WLF

TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINI
9.4.1.3.2. GUI
You can use the GUI to interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve fitting window. Each of the shear,
bulk and shift options can be selected, and you can fill in the appropriate casename in a text box field. As you
choose the options, the coefficient table is automatically created.
918

The initial values you choose for your coefficients will determine the success of your viscoelastic curve fitting
operations. A complete model has (2*NG+1)+(2* Nk +1)+ NS number of the coefficients. NG is the order of the
Prony series expansion of the shear modulus. Nk is the order of the Prony series expansion of the bulk modulus.
NS is the number of coefficients of the shift function (NS = 2 for the TN option and NS =3 for the WLF option). The
coefficients are ordered as shear terms first, then the bulk terms, and then the shift function. The coefficients are
ordered as 0G, 1G, 1G, 2G, 2G, nG, and nG for shear modulus, and 0K, 1K, 1K, 2K, 2K, nK, and nK for
bulk modulus. A shift function must be used together with your shear and/or bulk modulus for temperature
dependent experimental data. The default coefficient is set to one, but you should redefine the initial values
before solving. When initializing your coefficients, you should set nKs to 1 and nKs to time values that are equally
distributed in the log scale, spanning the data range from minimum to maximum time. For example, in the shear
decay versus time data file, if the time values vary from 1 to 10000, and if you use 3rd order Prony, logical guesses
for 1G , 2G and 3G that span this range could be 1G = 1, 2G = 100, and 3G = 10,000 (also (1), (10) and (10,000)
or (1), (1,000) and (10,000), respectively). You should also note that nG used in curve fitting is the square root of
the nG used in ANSYS TB tables. This was done to keep all nG used in the TB tables positive.
A good guess for the WLF or TN parameter is the reference temperature you used during your partial solve for
shear and bulk. The index of the reference/base temperatures is the sum of NumShear + NumBulk + 1.
You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged,
while allowing the other coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed coefficient later if desired.
By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary.
You estimate coefficients for temperature dependent data either by using the shift function, as described in the
next section, or by turning the temperature dependency flag on and setting a reference temperature before you
solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value
header line in the experimental data.
three separate solve operations at those three discrete temperature values, and generate data at three corresponding discrete temperatures.
solves for coefficients only at that discrete temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set
the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values and solve again.
dependency is turned on and another set of values is specified at a discrete temperature value. The curve fitting
tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified at discrete temperature values, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was turned on are used.
9.4.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename
919

Option5 = value of coefficient
For example:
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,1,1.2
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,2,1.5
! Initialize the first coefficient to 1.2

! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5
Use the TBFT,FIX command to fix a coefficient to a value set by the TBFT, SET command or to release a previously
fixed coefficient. By default, coefficients are not fixed.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename
Option5 = 1 to fix, 0 to vary
For example:
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,1,1.
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,2,1
! Fix the first coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET

! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
Temperature dependency uses Option4, and references data files you entered with the appropriate temp
header.
TBFT,SET,ID,VISCO,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.7: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (above) for the models
available.
Option5 = If Option 4 = tdep, then 1 turns temperature dependency on and 0 turns it off. IfOption 4 =
tref, this value will be a specific temperature, or all.
9.4.1.4.2. GUI
The coefficients table is automatically updated in the viscoelastic curve fitting GUI window when the order of
shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift function are defined. Specify values for your coefficients in the
coefficients table in the curve fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes to fix them or allow them to
vary.

Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. You can use either normalized or unnormalized error
norm for the regression. The normalized error norm is the default regression option for calculating the error.
This error norm generally gives better results than the unnormalized error norm, since the normalized error gives
equal weight to all data points.
The solution control parameters for nonlinear regression include number of iterations, residual tolerance, and
coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance of error norm and coefficient
change tolerance is met or if the number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are updated when the
solution is completed. In general it is very difficult to directly solve a complete case including coefficients of the
shear modulus, the bulk modulus and the shift function. Three solver options including shear modulus only, bulk
modulus, and shift function (or all) are provided to allow you to solve only Prony coefficients of the shear modulus,
Prony coefficients of the bulk modulus, and coefficients of the shift function. In many cases, however, the coefficients of shift function can't be solved until the shear or bulk modulus are solved. It is normal for a solution to
not converge at first, but to stop when the maximum iterations criteria is reached. At that point, you should ex920

amine the curve fitting results and the solution history before proceeding any further. You can then adjust
parameters and resolve the problem whenever it is necessary.
9.4.1.5.1. Temperature Dependent Solves Using the Shift Function

For viscoelastic curve fitting using the shift function, follow these three steps to perform the regression:
1.
Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR.
Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT, SET,,,,,TREF,
TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
Solve
2.
Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK.
TX. The reference temperature should be the same for both shear and bulk. Only data at temperature
TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
TBFT,SOLVE
3.
Solve the shift function (or all) coefficients:

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE.
TREF is not used when you solve for all parameters. All temperature data is used to estimate the coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE
Note For GUI operations, when only the shear and bulk buttons are checked, only your shear coefficients
are solved. To solve for both shear and bulk, you must check all three buttons.
9.4.1.5.2. Temperature Dependent Solves Without the Shift Function

If you do not use the shift function, discrete data must be supplied to account for temperature dependency.
Follow these steps to perform the regression:
1.
Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2.
Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR.
TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
Initialize the coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE
Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.
921

3.
Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any):

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK.
TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate the shear coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE
Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.
Alternatively, you can solve for both shear and bulk data at the same time.
1.
Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2.
Solve for ALL coefficients.

Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE.
TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear and bulk coefficients
TBFT,SOLVE
Repeat the above steps for all of the desired temperatures.
9.4.1.5.3. Batch
Solution option command is:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename
Option4 = comp
Option5 = pshea (for Shear only) or pbulk (for bulk only)
The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and number of iterations.
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = visco function name (See Table 9.7: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations.)
Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares (default)
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
922
9.4.1.5.4. GUI
The GUI provides access for you to choose your error norm, solution control parameters, and solver options.
Once you complete these specifications and SOLVE, you can go back and modify your parameters as necessary
to obtain a good curve fit.
9.4.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

The best way to verify a good fit between your experimental data and the provided curves is to plot your curves
and visually inspect them.
9.4.1.6.1. Batch
You enter the plotting parameters from the command line as follows:
TBFT,PLOT,ID,ExpIndex,CASE,Option3
Option3 = casename
9.4.1.6.2. GUI
The Graph button provides direct means to plot the data.
9.4.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

All of your data is plotted as a function of column 1 for the X-axis. Columns 2 and above are each plotted in a
separate graph, in a separate window, with the corresponding fitted data as a function of column 1. By default,
all the shear data sets and/or the bulk data sets as well as the corresponding fitting results are plotted in two
separated graphs in a GUI window. To view a specific data and its corresponding fitting result, you click the right
mouse button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option. You can also use the right mouse button
to turn the legend and/or axis on and off. The scales can be also switched between log scale and regular scale.
With the middle button, you can eliminate certain curves from each window's display in order to see the remaining
data more clearly.
Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend, and View/Hide
Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. RMB also allows you to see the number
of points used to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value and the maximum X value in a plot.
You can use the middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a particular curve within a graph.
Reviewing your curve fitting result graphically is the only way to ensure a good fit. After plotting the curve fitting
results, you can then review multiple plots and also verify the error norm/residual value that is printed in the
curve fitting GUI window. This information helps you determine the quality of a curve fit and decide whether to
accept the results. If not, you may want to go back to step 3, solve again by changing the order of the Prony
series, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and possibly other control parameters. You can continue
to use your original data, repeating step 3 through step 6 until you are satisfied with the solution.

After a successful curve fitting, the last step is to write the curve fitting data as ANSYS Prony data table (the
TB,Prony command) to the ANSYS database. The GUI or the command line converts the coefficients to the appropriate form before writing TB commands.
9.4.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,Option2,Option3
923

Option2 = case
Option3 = casename
9.4.1.7.2. GUI
Click the Write to Database button and the fitted coefficients are automatically written to the ANSYS material
database according Prony data table. Please note that the coefficients you see in the curve fitting module are
different from those in the TB tables. The values remain the same, but the values are different. The values
shown in ANSYS are the square of the values derived during curve fitting. They are also normalized to make
at time 0 = 1.
924
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation

10.1. Overview of Gasket Joints
Gasket joints are essential components in most structural assemblies. Gaskets as sealing components between
structural components are usually very thin and made of many materials, such as steel, rubber and composites.
From a mechanics point of view, gaskets act to transfer force between components. The primary deformation
of a gasket is usually confined to one direction, namely, through thickness. The stiffness contributions from
membrane (in plane) and transverse shear are much smaller in general compared to the through thickness. The
stiffness contribution therefore is assumed to be negligible, although the TB command provides options to account
for transverse shear.
A typical example of a gasket joint is in engine assemblies. A thorough understanding of the gasket joint is critical in engine design and operation. This includes an understanding of the behavior of gasket joint components
themselves in an engine operation, and the interaction of the gasket joint with other components.
Elements within the ANSYS family of interface element are used to model gaskets. By default, these elements
are designed to account for gasket through-thickness behavior. However, you can account for transverse shear
behavior by using an element Keyopt setting and transverse shear option of the gasket material data table. See
the TB command documentation and the specific element documentation for more information.
10.2. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis

A gasket joint analysis involves the same overall steps that are involved in any ANSYS nonlinear analysis procedure.
Most of these steps however warrant special considerations for a gasket joint analysis. Presented below are the
overall steps with the special considerations noted, along with links to applicable sections where more detailed
information is included on that topic.
1.
Build or import the model. There are no special considerations for building or importing the model for
a gasket joint analysis. You perform this step as you would in any typical ANSYS analysis. See Section 1.2:
Building a Model in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. For further details on building the model, see the
ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
2.
Define element type. To properly simulate gasket joints, you must define structural element types and
corresponding interface element types. See Section 10.4: ANSYS Family of Interface Elements in this
chapter for more details on this topic, and in particular, see Section 10.4.1: Element Selection for a table
of corresponding structural and interface elements.
3.
Define material. Use TB,GASKET to define the gasket joint material. You can use TB,GASKET to define
four types of data input: general parameters, transverse shear stiffness, compression (loading), and tension
(unloading). You specify the type using TBOPT. You then input the sets of data using the TBDATA and
TBPT commands, as applicable. You can also plot most of the gasket data types using the TBPLOT
command. See Section 10.5: Material Definition in this chapter for more details on this topic.
4.
Mesh the model. Use the AMESH or VMESH commands to mesh the structural element types, and use
the IMESH command to mesh the gasket layer. Special restrictions apply to the IMESH command in
terms of matching the source and target. Also, the order in which you execute these commands is critical.
You can also mesh interface layers using the VDRAG command, and can generate interface elements
directly using the EGEN command. Each of these commands involve special considerations for interface
elements. See Section 10.6: Meshing Interface Elements in this chapter for more details on this topic.
5.
Solve. There are special solving considerations when you perform a gasket joint analysis. These are
primarily concerned with the gasket element stiffness loss, and the gasket element's use with contact

elements. See Section 10.7: Solution Procedure and Result Output in this chapter for more details on this
topic.
6.
Review Results. You can print or plot any of four gasket output items: stresses (also pressure), total
closure, total inelastic closure, and thermal closure, using the PRESOL, PRNSOL, PLESOL, PLNSOL, or
ESOL commands. You can also use these items with the *GET command in POST1. See Section 10.8:
Reviewing the Results in this chapter for more details on this topic.
10.3. Finite Element Formulation

The primary deformation behavior of gasket joints is through-thickness deformation. It is therefore difficult to
use solid continuum elements to effectively model gasket joints. The interface elements, which are based on the
relative deformation of the top and bottom surfaces, offer a direct means to quantify through-thickness deformation of the gasket joints. Thus the pressure versus closure behavior can be directly applied to characterize the
gasket material.
The element formulation is based on a corotational procedure. Refer to Gasket Material in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference for further details.
10.3.1. Element Topologies

An interface element is composed of bottom and top surfaces. ANSYS provides several types of interface elements
for the analysis of the gasket joints. Figure 10.1: Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element shows
the geometry of a 3-D 8-node interface element available in ANSYS. An element midplane is created by averaging
the coordinates of node pairs from the bottom and top surfaces of the elements. The numerical integration of
interface elements is performed in the element midplane. The Gauss integration scheme is used for the numerical integration.
Figure 10.1 Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element

& %$# " !

10.3.2. Thickness Direction

The thickness direction is defined as the normal direction of the mid plane of the element at the integration
point, and computed inside of ANSYS. The positive direction is defined by the right-hand rule going around the
nodes in the midplane. The through thickness deformation is quantified by the relative deformation of bottom
and top surfaces along the thickness direction. The thickness direction is then noted as the X-direction according
to the ANSYS notation convention. No ESYS coordinate system is allowed for the elements.
102
Section 10.4: ANSYS Family of Interface Elements
10.4. ANSYS Family of Interface Elements

ANSYS offers 4 types of elements to simulate gaskets. They are referred to as interface elements and are summarized as follows:
INTER192 - 2-D, 4-node, linear element.
INTER193 - 2-D, 6-node, quadratic element.
INTER194 - 3-D, 16-node, quadratic element.
INTER195 - 3-D, 8-node, linear element
The 2-D elements, INTER192 and INTER193, use a KEYOPT to define various stress state options.
10.4.1. Element Selection

The simulation of an entire gasket joint assembly, consisting of the gasket and the structural elements on either
side of the gasket, involves choosing interface elements and structural elements that have the same characteristics. Use the following table as a guideline for choosing interface and structural elements that have the same
characteristics:
For elements with these ... use this interface
characteristics:
element:
... with one of these structural elements:
2-D, linear
INTER192
PLANE42, HYPER56, VISCO106, PLANE182
2-D, quadratic
INTER193
PLANE2, PLANE82, HYPER84, VISCO88, PLANE183
3-D, quadratic
INTER194
VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95, SOLID96, SOLID186, SOLID187
3-D, linear
INTER195
SOLID45, SOLID46, HYPER58, SOLID62, SOLID64, SOLID65, HYPER86, SOLID185, SOLSH190
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and structural element types used.
Element selection is done by the element type command, ET, for example,
ET,1,195
defines element type 1 as element INTER195.
10.4.2. Applications
In general, linear and quadratic elements are chosen for the following reasons:
Fewer nodes produce a smaller model that runs faster with less computer resources.
Quadratic elements are necessary if stress gradients are present in surrounding bodies.
If elements are to follow a curved boundary closely, quadratic elements are ideal because their edges are
arcs.
With a free mesh (tetrahedral elements) the mid-node (quadratic) is required for an accurate solution.
When a surrounding structure can be considered as a 2-D structure, for example, plane stress / strain / axisymmetric, 2-D elements are the ideal choice. A good example of the use of 2-D element INTER192 or INTER193 is
the gasket between the "flanged" ends of pipe line. In this case the gasket properties do not vary significantly
with geometric location.
103

For a 3-D structure such as an internal combustion engine, 3-D element INTER194 or INTER195 is a good choice
for simulating the gasket between the cylinder head and block. In this case there is no "nice" geometry because
the gasket must fill in between two complicated surfaces, in between cylinders, and around other holes and
passages. Also the gasket properties can vary in different zones. For example in a cylinder head, there is usually
a much stiffer zone immediately around the cylinder to contain combustion pressure (called the "fire ring"). The
remainder of the gasket is much softer.
10.5. Material Definition

10.5.1. Material Characteristics
The TB command option GASKET allows gasket joints to be simulated with the ANSYS interface elements, in
which there is only one element through the thickness, and the through thickness deformation is decoupled
from the in plane deformation. The gasket material is usually under compression. The material under compression
is highly nonlinear. The gasket material also exhibits quite complicated unloading behavior when compression
is released. The GASKET option allows you to directly input data for the experimentally measured complex
pressure closure curve for the material model (compression curve), and also for several unloading pressure
closure curves. When no unloading curves are defined, the material behavior follows the compression curve
while it is unloaded.
As it is a joint component, there often exists an initial gap or void. On the other hand, from a modeling point of
view, it is a lot easier to fill the spaces or volumes between the adjacent components with the interface meshes,
and then set an initial gap for the gasket material to account for it. As long as the closure is less than the initial
gap, no pressure is acted on the gaskets. Also, when it is under tension loading, there will be an open gap.
Therefore, gasket joints generally do not have tension pressure. A stress cap is used to restrict tension pressure
in the gasket joint elements.
The GASKET material option must be used with interface elements INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, and INTER195.
Figure 10.2: Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket Material shows the experimental pressure vs. closure
(relative displacement of top and bottom gasket surfaces) data for a graphite composite gasket material. The
sample was unloaded and reloaded 5 times along the loading path and then unloaded at the end of the test to
determine the materials unloading stiffness.
104
Section 10.5: Material Definition
Figure 10.2 Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket Material
10.5.2. Input Format

You input gasket material data using TB,GASKET. The material data consists of 2 main parts: general parameters
and pressure closure behaviors. The general parameters define initial gasket gap, stable stiffness for numerical
stabilization, and stress cap for a gasket in tension. The pressure closure behavior includes gasket compression
(loading) and tension data (unloading).
The TB command specification for defining a gasket material is:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,TBOPT
where TBOPT = one of the following types of gasket material data:
PARA: gasket material general parameters.
COMP: gasket compression data.
LUNL: gasket linear unloading data.
NUNL: gasket nonlinear unloading data.
TSS: gasket transverse shear stiffness data.
You input the general parameters using the TBDATA command, then input the compression and unloading
data using the TBPT command.
Presented in the following sections are examples of inputs for the various types of gasket data.
105
10.5.2.1. Define General Parameters

(TBOPT = PARA)
The gasket material general parameters include the initial gap, stable stiffness and the maximum tension stress
cap. These parameters are defined as C1, C2, and C3 in the following example:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,PARA
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
Refer to Gasket Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference for further details on these parameters.
10.5.2.2. Define Compression Load Closure Curve

(TBOPT = COMP)
The compression pressure closure curve gasket material definition option is defined as follows:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,COMP
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBPT,,xi,yi
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values.

The following input listing is an example defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a gasket joint
material with 10 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, ,10,COMP
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
! define compression data
10.5.2.3. Define Linear Unloading Data

(TBOPT = LUNL)
The linear unloading gasket material definition option is a simple way to define the gasket unloading behavior.
Several unloading slopes can be defined to accommodate the comprehensive unloading behavior as follows:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,LUNL
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBPT,,xi,yi
where: NPTS is the number of unloading points; xi is the closure where unloading started, and yi is unloading
slope.
The following input listing is an example showing the linear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with
3 unloading points
TB,GASKET,1, ,3,LUNL
! define linear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.25100E+12
106

TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.25500E+12
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.10600E+13
A sample plot representing linear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.3: Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves.
Figure 10.3 Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves
10.5.2.4. Define Nonlinear Unloading Data

(TBOPT = NUNL)
The nonlinear unloading gasket material definition option provides a more comprehensive way of defining
gasket material unloading behavior. The input listing format is:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,NUNL
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBPT,,xi,yi
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. Several unloading curves can be defined.
An example showing the nonlinear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with 3 unloading points is as
follows:
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL
! define first nonlinear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
! define second nonlinear unloading data
107

TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
0.28600E-03,
0.26400E-03,
0.26100E-03,
0.25600E-03,
0.00000E+00,
0.58500E+09
0.22350E+08
0.90000E+07
0.15000E+07
0.00000E+00
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
! define third nonlinear unloading data
A sample plot representing nonlinear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.4: Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear
Unloading Curves.
Figure 10.4 Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves
10.5.3. Temperature Dependencies

Inputting temperature dependent gasket material properties follows the standard ANSYS procedure for inputting
temperature dependent data for other materials. The following format shows this procedure.
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,LUNL
TBTEMP,T1
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBTEMP,T2
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
ANSYS will automatically interpolate the temperature data to the material points using linear interpolation.
When the temperature is out of the specified range, the closest temperature point is used.
108

The following is an example input listing defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a gasket joint
material with 5 temperature points and up to 10 data points for each temperature point, and 3 nonlinear unloading
curves with each curve having 5 temperatures and 5 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, 5,10,COMP
! define compression data with 5 temperatures
TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+08
0.50500E+08
0.83000E+08
0.10000E+09
0.12400E+09
0.15800E+09
0.19500E+09
0.22450E+09
0.26000E+09
0.29850E+09
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.90000E+07
0.25250E+08
0.41500E+08
0.50000E+08
0.62000E+08
0.79000E+08
0.97500E+08
0.11225E+09
0.13000E+09
0.14925E+09
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.36000E+07
0.10100E+08
0.16600E+08
0.20000E+08
0.24800E+08
0.31600E+08
0.39000E+08
0.44900E+08
0.52000E+08
0.59700E+08
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+07
0.50500E+07
0.83000E+07
0.10000E+08
0.12400E+08
0.15800E+08
0.19500E+08
0.22450E+08
0.26000E+08
0.29850E+08
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL
! define first nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures
TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
109

TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.10000E+09
0.82500E+07
0.27500E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.50000E+08
0.41250E+07
0.13750E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.20000E+08
0.16500E+07
0.55000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.10000E+08
0.82500E+06
0.27500E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
! define second nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures
TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, 0.22350E+08
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, 0.90000E+07
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+09
0.74500E+07
0.30000E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.97500E+08
0.37250E+07
0.15000E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.39000E+08
0.14900E+07
0.60000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+08
0.74500E+06
0.30000E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
! define third nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures
TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
1010

TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+09
0.11300E+08
0.45000E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.14925E+09
0.56500E+07
0.22500E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.59700E+08
0.22600E+07
0.90000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+08
0.11300E+07
0.45000E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
Sample plots of compression and unloading curves for gasket data to two temperatures is shown in Figure 10.5: Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures.
Figure 10.5 Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures
$ "
'%&#!
%
'52$"#! '!4

" 3 1 0 )
'%&$ !2 (
'526' 102 )2 (
% $ " 3
10.5.4. Plotting Gasket Data

You can plot gasket compression, linear unloading and nonlinear unloading data using the TBPLOT command.
The use of this command to plot gasket data is as follows:
1011

TBPLOT,GASKET,MAT,TBOPT,TEMP,SEGN
where TBOPT specifies the gasket material option to be plotted, TEMP specifies plotting either all of the temperature dependent data curves, or a curve at a specified temperature, and SEGN specifies whether or not to add
the segment numbers to the curves.
10.6. Meshing Interface Elements

Three options are available for meshing interface elements:
For meshing gasket layers as an area or volume, use the IMESH command.
For meshing gasket layers by dragging an area mesh along a path, use the VDRAG command.
For generating interface elements directly from a pattern, use the EGEN command.
There are special requirements for meshing interface elements. See Section 7.5.6: Generating an Interface Mesh
for Gasket Simulations in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for further details on this type of meshing.
The following example input listing shows the use of the IMESH command.
/batch,list
/title, Test to demonstrate the use of IMESH command
/com, ************************************************************
/com, *
*
/com, * This is a simple test to demonstrate the use of IMESH
*
/com, * command to generate gasket elements. The model consists *
/com, * of two blocks with gasket elements (INTER194) defined
*
/com, * between them.
*
/com, *
*
/com, ************************************************************
/prep7
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Types
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,187
! Solid tetrahedral element
et,2,194
! Interface layer element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Parameters
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
EH=1.0
IH=0.1
DX=0
DY=0
DZ=IH
Z1=EH
Z2=Z1+IH
Z3=Z2+EH
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Keypoints
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
k,1,0,0
k,2,1,0
k,3,1,1
k,4,0,1
k,5,0,0,z1
k,6,1,0,z1
k,7,1,1,z1
k,8,0,1,z1
k,9,0,0,z2
k,10,1,0,z2
k,11,1,1,z2
k,12,0,1,z2
1012
Section 10.6: Meshing Interface Elements

k,13,0,0,z3
k,14,1,0,z3
k,15,1,1,z3
k,16,0,1,z3
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate First Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Second Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Middle Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Size
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
esize,,4
!
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Mesh First Volume with Element Type 1
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,1
mat,1
vmesh,1
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Interface Layer with IMESH command
!* using Element Type 2 (INTER194)
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,2
mat,2
imesh,area,6,7,0,DX,DY,DZ,TOL
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Mesh Second Volume with Element Type 1
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,1
mat,1
vmesh,2
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Plot Elements
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
/view,1 ,1,1,1
eplot
finish
Figure 10.6: Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry shows the geometry of the finite element model, a thin
interface layer between two block volumes. Figure 10.7: Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element shows the mesh
with solid brick element, SOLID185, in top and bottom of block volumes, and Figure 10.8: Interface Layer Mesh
shows the mesh of interface element, INTER195, in the interface layer between the two blocks. Figure 10.9: Whole
Model Tetrahedral Mesh shows the mesh with solid tetrahedral element, SOLID187, in top and bottom of block
volumes, and Figure 10.10: Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements shows the mesh of interface
element (degenerated wedge), INTER194, in the interface layer between the two blocks.
1013
Figure 10.6 Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry
Figure 10.7 Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element
1014
Section 10.6: Meshing Interface Elements
Figure 10.8 Interface Layer Mesh
Figure 10.9 Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh
1015
Figure 10.10 Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements
10.7. Solution Procedure and Result Output

Gasket material behavior is highly nonlinear. The full Newton-Raphson solution procedure (the standard ANSYS
nonlinear method), is the default method for performing this type of analysis. Other solution procedures for
gasket solutions are not recommended. Like most nonlinear problems, convergence behavior of a gasket joint
analysis depends strongly on the particular problem to be solved. ANSYS has provided a comprehensive solution
hierarchy, therefore it is always recommended that you use the ANSYS default solution options, unless you are
sure about the benefits of the changes.
Some special considerations for solving a gasket problem are as follows:
By default a zero stress cap has been enforced on the gasket. When the element goes into tension, it will
lose its stiffness and may cause numerical instability.
It is always a good practice to place the lower and upper limit on the time step size using the DELTIM or
NSUBST commands, and to start with a small time step, then subsequently ramp it up . This ensures that
all of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included and that the problem is solved effectively.
Gasket elements must be configured to support transverse shear. Even if you do so, errors can result, especially for contact and other nonlinear applications. You should not use gasket elements with contact
elements unless you configure the elements accordingly, and ascertain the mesh compatibility of the
gasket layer and its mating components.
Like any other type of nonlinear analysis, the ANSYS program performs a series of linear approximations with
corrections. A convergence failure can indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result
of some numerical problem in the finite element model. The program printout gives you continuous feedback
on the progress of these approximations and corrections. (The printout either appears directly on your screen,
is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is written to some other file [/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same
information in POST1, using the PRITER command, or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR commands. You
should make sure that you understand the iteration history of your analysis before you accept the results. In
1016
Section 10.7: Solution Procedure and Result Output

particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning statements without fully understanding their meaning.
A typical output listing with gasket nonlinearity only is shown in Section 10.7.1: Typical Gasket Solution Output
Listing. When other types of nonlinearity such as contact or materials are included, additional information will
be printed out.
10.7.1. Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing

S O L U T I O N
PROBLEM DIMENSIONALITY. . .
DEGREES OF FREEDOM. . . . .
ANALYSIS TYPE . . . . . . .
PLASTIC MATERIAL PROPERTIES
NEWTON-RAPHSON OPTION . . .
. . . . .
. UX
UY
. . . . .
INCLUDED.
. . . . .
O P T I O N S
. . .
UZ
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .3-D
. .STATIC (STEADY-STATE)
. .YES
. .PROGRAM CHOSEN
*** NOTE ***

CP=
0.000
TIME= 00:00:00
Present time 0 is less than or equal to the previous time.
Time will default to 1.
*** NOTE ***
CP=
0.000
TIME= 00:00:00
Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to the FULL Newton-Raphson

solution procedure for ALL DOFs.
*** NOTE ***
CP=
0.000
The conditions for direct assembly have been met.

files will be produced.
L O A D
S T E P
TIME= 00:00:00
No .emat or .erot
O P T I O N S
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . .

TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS.
STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . .
TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . .
CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . .
COPY INTEGRATION POINT VALUES TO NODE . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
. 1.0000
.
ON
.
200
. 20000
.
20
.
15
.
NO
.YES (EXIT)
.USE DEFAULTS
.YES, FOR ELEMENTS WITH
ACTIVE MAT. NONLINEARITIES
PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .NO PRINTOUT
DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS
ITEM
FREQUENCY
COMPONENT
ALL
ALL
SVAR
ALL
Range of element maximum matrix coefficients in global coordinates

Maximum= 4.326388889E+11 at element 0.
Minimum= 388758681 at element 0.
*** ELEMENT MATRIX FORMULATION TIMES
TYPE NUMBER
ENAME
TOTAL CP AVE CP
1
2 SOLID185
0.000
0.000000
2
1 INTER195
0.000
0.000000
Time at end of element matrix formulation CP= 0.
ALL CURRENT ANSYS DATA WRITTEN TO FILE NAME=
FOR POSSIBLE RESUME FROM THIS POINT
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4200E+07 CRITERION= 0.2143E+05
SPARSE MATRIX DIRECT SOLVER.
Number of equations =
24,
Memory available (MB) =
0.0
EQUIL ITER
1 COMPLETED.
Maximum wavefront =
, Memory required (MB)
0
=
0.0
= 0.1130E-04 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06

NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.4000E-05
1017
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1367E-08 CRITERION= 51.35

<<< CONVERGED
= 0.3257E-20 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 <<< CONVERGED
EQUIL ITER
2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC = -0.2234E-20
2
*** ELEMENT RESULT CALCULATION TIMES
TYPE
NUMBER
1
2
ENAME
2
1
TOTAL CP
SOLID185
INTER195
0.000
0.000
*** NODAL LOAD CALCULATION TIMES

TYPE NUMBER
ENAME
TOTAL CP
1
2
2
1
SOLID185
INTER195
0.000
0.000
AVE CP
0.000000
0.000000
AVE CP
0.000000
0.000000
*** LOAD STEP

1
SUBSTEP
1 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
*** TIME = 0.500000E-02
TIME INC = 0.500000E-02
*** AUTO STEP TIME: NEXT TIME INC = 0.50000E-02 UNCHANGED

EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
2 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
3
*** TIME = 0.100000E-01
TIME INC = 0.500000E-02
*** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.75000E-02 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000)
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
3 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
4
*** TIME = 0.175000E-01
TIME INC = 0.750000E-02
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
4 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
5
*** TIME = 0.287500E-01
TIME INC = 0.112500E-01
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
5 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
6
*** TIME = 0.456250E-01
TIME INC = 0.168750E-01
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
6 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
7
*** TIME = 0.709375E-01
TIME INC = 0.253125E-01
1018
Section 10.8: Reviewing the Results
10.8. Reviewing the Results

Results from a gasket joint analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses, strains and reaction forces of the
structural components and the gasket joint layer information (gasket pressure, closure, etc.). You can review
these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, or in POST26, the time-history postprocessor. See the Output
Data sections of the element descriptions for any of the interface elements (for example INTER192) for a description
of the available output components.
Note that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from that substep should have
been written to Jobname.RST. (The load step option command OUTRES controls which substep results are
stored on Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described below.
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
10.8.2. Reviewing Results in POST1

1.
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all load steps.
If not, you probably won't want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why convergence
failed.
If your solution converged, then continue postprocessing.
2.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1
3.
Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep
numbers or by time.
Command(s): SET
4.
Display the results using any of the following options. Note that gasket results, such as pressure and
closure, are always displayed and listed in the local coordinate system.
Command(s): PLDISP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or
Element Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When displaying
the gasket pressure distribution, if other structural mating components are not included, ANSYS will plot
the geometry of those components in gray. To have a better visualization of a gasket pressure plot, it is
better for you to select gasket elements only.

1019

Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data)
PRITER (substep summary data), etc.
Option: Animation
You can also animate gasket results over time:
Command(s): ANTIME
GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Over Time
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear analyses.
10.8.3. Reviewing Results in POST26

You can also review the load-history response of a nonlinear structure using POST26, the time-history postprocessor. Use POST26 to compare one ANSYS variable against another. For instance, you might graph the gasket
closure vs. gasket pressure, which should correspond to the material behavior defined by TB,GASKET. You might
also graph the displacement at a node versus the corresponding level of applied load, or you might list the gasket
pressure at a node and the corresponding TIME value. A typical POST26 postprocessing sequence for a gasket
analysis is the same as the sequence for a typical nonlinear analysis. See steps 1 through 4 in Section 8.5.6.3:
Reviewing Results in POST26 included in Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis.
10.9. Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch

Method)
This is a simple finite element model created to demonstrate the gasket material simulation. Two block elements
with element type SOLID185 were generated as supporters and a gasket element INTER195 was created. The
whole system is fixed along one side of each axes to prevent rigid body motion. A prescribed displacement is
placed on top of the supporter element. The gasket material is assumed to have a nonlinear compression behavior with 5 different linear unloading slopes. A pressure stress cap of 1.0e-5 is imposed so that no tension stress
is generated. Two load steps were used.
The ANSYS commands are shown below.
/batch,list
/title, Test to Verify Gasket Material and Element
/com, **************************************************************
/com, *
*
/com, * This is a simple test case to verify gasket material and
*
/com, * element.
*
/com, *
*
/com, * The test case is set up with two solid SOLID185 elements
*
/com, * with gasket element (INTER195) defined between them.
*
/com, * Displacement is applied to one SOLID185 element while the *
/com, * other SOLID185 element is fixed.
*
/com, * The problem is solved in two load steps. In the first
*
/com, * load step negative z-displacement is applied to one
*
/com, * SOLID195 element causing compression of gasket elements.
*
/com, * Then, in the second load step, a reverse displacement is
*
/com, * applied causing the unloading (tension) of gasket element. *
/com, * A Stress Cap of 1.0E-05 is enforced so that there is no
*
/com, * tension pressure in gasket material.
*
/com, *
*
1020
Section 10.9: Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
/com, **************************************************************
/prep7
!*+++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Types
!*+++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,185
et,2,195
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Linear Elastic Material Type 1
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
mp,ex,1,2.1E12
mp,nuxy,1,0.0
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Initial Gap, Stable Stiffness, Stress Cap
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
delta0 = 0.00e-3
stiff0 = 0.0e7
scap
= 1.0e-5
tb,gasket,2,,,para
tbdata, 1,delta0,stiff0,scap
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Gasket Compression Curve
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tb,gask,2,1,13,comp
tbpt,,0.460800E-03, 0.161226E+07
tbpt,,0.511600E-03, 0.520884E+07
tbpt,,0.562400E-03, 0.113134E+08
tbpt,,0.613200E-03, 0.200499E+08
tbpt,,0.664000E-03, 0.259960E+08
tbpt,,0.714800E-03, 0.290345E+08
tbpt,,0.765600E-03, 0.357453E+08
tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 0.440064E+08
tbpt,,0.867200E-03, 0.563189E+08
tbpt,,0.918000E-03, 0.748254E+08
tbpt,,0.968800E-03, 0.967287E+08
tbpt,,0.101960E-02, 0.129001E+09
tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 0.157147E+09
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Gasket Linear Unloading Curve
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tb,gask,2,1,5,lunl
tbpt,,0.460800E-03, 2.430000E+11
tbpt,,0.714800E-03, 3.565000E+11
tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 5.92300E+11
tbpt,,0.968800E-03, 1.088000e+12
tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 1.490000E+12
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* List Gasket Material Model
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tblist,gask,all
!*++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Parameters
!*++++++++++++++++++
n1
= 20
n2
= n1*100
n3
= n1
dis1 = -0.0008
dis2 = -0.000001
pres = 1.0e7
pres2 = 10
pres3 = 1.4E8
dp
= -2.0e7
elb
= 1.0
elg
= 0.1
1021

!*+++++++++++++++
!* Generate Nodes
!*+++++++++++++++
n,1,
n,2,1.0
n,3,1.0,1.0
n,4,0.0,1.0
ngen,2,4,1,4,,0.0,0.0,elb
ngen,2,8,1,4,,0.0,0.0,elb+elg
ngen,2,12,1,4,,0.0,0.0,2*elb+elg
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Front and Back SOLID185 Element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,185,,1
mat,1
e,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Middle INTER195 Element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,2,195,,
type,2
mat,2
e,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Boundary Condition
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsel,s,loc,z
d,all,uz
nsel,all
nsel,s,loc,x
d,all,ux
nsel,all
nsel,s,loc,y
d,all,uy
nsel,all
finish
/solu
!*+++++++++++++++++++
!* Apply Displacement
!*+++++++++++++++++++
nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg
d,all,uz,dis1
nsel,all
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Solve First Load Step, Compress the Elements
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all
outres,svar,all
solve
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Solve Second Load Step, Open the Elements
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all
outres,svar,all
nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg
d,all,uz,dis2
nall
solve
finish
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Postprocess the Results
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++
1022
Section 10.9: Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
/post1
set,last
pres,s
pres,epto
pres,epel
prns,epel
finish
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Post26, Print and Plot Gasket Element Results
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
/post26
esol,2,3, ,s,x,press
esol,3,3, ,epel,x,delta
add,4,2, , ,press,,,-1,
! change sign for plotting
add,5,3,,,delta,,,-1,
! change sign for plotting
prvar,2,3,4,5
xvar,5
plvar,4
finish
/exit,nosave
Presented below is the POST26 output resulting from this analysis.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------***** ANSYS POST26 VARIABLE LISTING *****
TIME
0.50000E-01
0.10000
0.15000
0.20000
0.25000
0.30000
0.35000
0.40000
0.45000
0.50000
0.55000
0.60000
0.65000
0.70000
0.75000
0.80000
0.85000
0.90000
0.95000
1.0000
1.0500
1.1000
1.1500
1.2000
1.2500
1.3000
1.3500
1.4000
1.4500
1.5000
1.5500
1.6000
1.6500
1.7000
1.7500
1.8000
1.8500
1.9000
1.9500
2.0000
3 S
X
press
-139488.
-278977.
-418465.
-557953.
-697442.
-836930.
-976418.
-0.111591E+07
-0.125539E+07
-0.139488E+07
-0.153437E+07
-0.278389E+07
-0.557968E+07
-0.989280E+07
-0.152775E+08
-0.208613E+08
-0.250737E+08
-0.277640E+08
-0.310936E+08
-0.357955E+08
-0.227277E+08
-0.965988E+07
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
3 EPELX
delta
-0.398672E-04
-0.797343E-04
-0.119601E-03
-0.159469E-03
-0.199336E-03
-0.239203E-03
-0.279070E-03
-0.318937E-03
-0.358804E-03
-0.398672E-03
-0.438539E-03
-0.477349E-03
-0.514686E-03
-0.550578E-03
-0.585450E-03
-0.620132E-03
-0.656120E-03
-0.693558E-03
-0.730387E-03
-0.765909E-03
-0.738405E-03
-0.710900E-03
-0.680150E-03
-0.640200E-03
-0.600250E-03
-0.560300E-03
-0.520350E-03
-0.480400E-03
-0.440450E-03
-0.400500E-03
-0.360550E-03
-0.320600E-03
-0.280650E-03
-0.240700E-03
-0.200750E-03
-0.160800E-03
-0.120850E-03
-0.809000E-04
-0.409500E-04
-0.100000E-05
4 ADD
press
139488.
278977.
418465.
557953.
697442.
836930.
976418.
0.111591E+07
0.125539E+07
0.139488E+07
0.153437E+07
0.278389E+07
0.557968E+07
0.989280E+07
0.152775E+08
0.208613E+08
0.250737E+08
0.277640E+08
0.310936E+08
0.357955E+08
0.227277E+08
0.965988E+07
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
5 ADD
delta
0.398672E-04
0.797343E-04
0.119601E-03
0.159469E-03
0.199336E-03
0.239203E-03
0.279070E-03
0.318937E-03
0.358804E-03
0.398672E-03
0.438539E-03
0.477349E-03
0.514686E-03
0.550578E-03
0.585450E-03
0.620132E-03
0.656120E-03
0.693558E-03
0.730387E-03
0.765909E-03
0.738405E-03
0.710900E-03
0.680150E-03
0.640200E-03
0.600250E-03
0.560300E-03
0.520350E-03
0.480400E-03
0.440450E-03
0.400500E-03
0.360550E-03
0.320600E-03
0.280650E-03
0.240700E-03
0.200750E-03
0.160800E-03
0.120850E-03
0.809000E-04
0.409500E-04
0.100000E-05
1023
1024
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics

11.1. Definition of Fracture Mechanics
Cracks and flaws occur in many structures and components, sometimes leading to disastrous results. The engineering field of fracture mechanics was established to develop a basic understanding of such crack propagation
problems.
Fracture mechanics deals with the study of how a crack or flaw in a structure propagates under applied loads. It
involves correlating analytical predictions of crack propagation and failure with experimental results. The analytical predictions are made by calculating fracture parameters such as stress intensity factors in the crack region,
which you can use to estimate crack growth rate. Typically, the crack length increases with each application of
some cyclic load, such as cabin pressurization-depressurization in an airplane. Further, environmental conditions
such as temperature or extensive exposure to irradiation can affect the fracture propensity of a given material.
Some typical fracture parameters of interest are:
Stress intensity factors (KI, KII, KIII) associated with the three basic modes of fracture (see Figure 19.13: The
Three Basic Modes of Fracture in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference).
J-integral, which may be defined as a path-independent line integral that measures the strength of the
singular stresses and strains near a crack tip
Energy release rate (G), which represents the amount of work associated with a crack opening or closure
11.2. Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems

Solving a fracture mechanics problem involves performing a linear elastic or elastic-plastic static analysis and
then using specialized postprocessing commands or macros to calculate desired fracture parameters. In this
section, we will concentrate on two main aspects of this procedure:
Modeling the Crack Region
Calculating Fracture Parameters
See Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis for details about the general static analysis procedure. Also see Chapter 8,
Nonlinear Structural Analysis for a discussion of structural nonlinearities.
11.2.1. Modeling the Crack Region

The most important region in a fracture model is the region around the edge of the crack. We will refer to the
edge of the crack as a crack tip in a 2-D model and crack front in a 3-D model. This is illustrated in Figure 11.1: Crack
Tip and Crack Front.
Figure 11.1 Crack Tip and Crack Front
In linear elastic problems, it has been shown that the displacements near the crack tip (or crack front) vary as
r
, where r is the distance from the crack tip. The stresses and strains are singular at the crack tip, varying as
r
1/
. To pick up the singularity in the strain, the crack faces should be coincident, and the elements around the
crack tip (or crack front) should be quadratic, with the midside nodes placed at the quarter points. Such elements
are called singular elements. Figure 11.2: Examples of Singular Elements shows examples of singular elements
for 2-D and 3-D models.
112
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems
Figure 11.2 Examples of Singular Elements
(a) 2-D models and (b) 3-D models
11.2.1.1. 2-D Fracture Models

The recommended element type for a 2-D fracture model is PLANE2, the 6-node triangular solid. The first row
of elements around the crack tip should be singular, as illustrated in Figure 11.2: Examples of Singular Elements
(a). The PREP7 KSCON command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Concentrat KPs> Create),
which assigns element division sizes around a keypoint, is particularly useful in a fracture model. It automatically
generates singular elements around the specified keypoint. Other fields on the command allow you to control
113

the radius of the first row of elements, number of elements in the circumferential direction, etc. Figure 11.3: A
Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model shows a fracture model generated with the help of KSCON.
Figure 11.3 A Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model
Other modeling guidelines for 2-D models are as follows:
Take advantage of symmetry where possible. In many cases, you need to model only one half of the crack
region, with symmetry or antisymmetry boundary conditions, as shown below.
Figure 11.4 Taking Advantage of Symmetry
For reasonable results, the first row of elements around the crack tip should have a radius of approximately
a/8 or smaller, where a is the crack length. In the circumferential direction, roughly one element every
30 or 40 is recommended.
The crack tip elements should not be distorted, and should take the shape of isosceles triangles.
11.2.1.2. 3-D Fracture Models

The recommended element type for 3-D models is SOLID95, the 20-node brick element. As shown in Figure 11.2: Examples of Singular Elements (b), the first row of elements around the crack front should be singular
elements. Notice that the element is wedge-shaped, with the KLPO face collapsed into the line KO.
114

Generating a 3-D fracture model is considerably more involved than a 2-D model. The KSCON command is not
available, and you need to make sure that the crack front is along edge KO of the elements.
Other meshing guidelines for 3-D models are as follows:
Element size recommendations are the same as for 2-D models. In addition, aspect ratios should not exceed
approximately 4 to 1 in all directions.
For curved crack fronts, the element size along the crack front will depend on the amount of local curvature.
As a rough guide, you should have at least one element every 15 to 30 along a circular crack front.
All element edges should be straight, including the edge on the crack front.
11.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters

Once the static analysis is completed, you can use POST1, the general postprocessor, to calculate fracture parameters. As mentioned earlier, typical fracture parameters of interest are stress intensity factors, the J-integral,
and the energy release rate.
11.2.2.1. Stress Intensity Factors

The POST1 KCALC command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Stress Int Factr) calculates the
mixed-mode stress intensity factors KI, KII, and KIII. This command is limited to linear elastic problems with a homogeneous, isotropic material near the crack region. To use KCALC properly, follow these steps in POST1:
1.
Define a local crack-tip or crack-front coordinate system, with X parallel to the crack face (perpendicular
to the crack front in 3-D models) and Y perpendicular to the crack face, as shown in the following figure.
Note This coordinate system must be the active model coordinate system [CSYS] and results
coordinate system [RSYS] when KCALC is issued.
Command(s): LOCAL (or CLOCAL, CS, CSKP, etc.)
GUI: Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Local Coordinate Systems> Create Local CS> At Specified
Loc
Figure 11.5 Crack Coordinate Systems
(a) 2-D Models and (b) 3-D Models

2.
Define a path along the crack face. The first node on the path should be the crack-tip node. For a halfcrack model, two additional nodes are required, both along the crack face. For a full-crack model, where
115

both crack faces are included, four additional nodes are required: two along one crack face and two
along the other. The following figure illustrates the two cases for a 2-D model.
Command(s): PATH, PPATH
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
Figure 11.6 Typical Path Definitions
(a) a half-crack model and (b) a full-crack model

3.
Calculate KI, KII, and KIII. The KPLAN field on the KCALC command specifies whether the model is planestrain or plane stress. Except for the analysis of thin plates, the asymptotic or near-crack-tip behavior of
stress is usually thought to be that of plane strain. The KCSYM field specifies whether the model is a halfcrack model with symmetry boundary conditions, a half-crack model with antisymmetry boundary
conditions, or a full-crack model.
Command(s): KCALC
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Stress Int Factr
11.2.2.2. J-Integral
In its simplest form, the J-integral can be defined as a path-independent line integral that measures the strength
of the singular stresses and strains near a crack tip. The following equation shows an expression for J in its 2-D
form is shown below. It assumes that the crack lies in the global Cartesian X-Y plane, with X parallel to the crack
(see Figure 11.7: J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a Crack-Tip).
uy
u
J = r Wdy r t x x + t y
ds
x
x
where:
= any path surrounding the crack tip
W = strain energy density (that is, strain energy per unit volume)
tx = traction vector along x axis = xnx + xy ny
ty = traction vector along y axis = yny + xy nx
= component stress
n = unit outer normal vector to path
u = displacement vector
s = distance along the path
116
Figure 11.7 J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a Crack-Tip
Follow these steps to calculate J for a 2-D model:

1.
Read in the desired set of results.

Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set
2.
Store the volume and strain energy per element.

Command(s): ETABLE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table
3.
Calculate the strain energy density per element.

Command(s): SEXP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Exponentiate
4.
Define a path for the line integral. Figure 11.8: Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation shows examples of such paths.
Command(s): PATH, PPATH
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
Figure 11.8 Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation
5.
Map the strain energy density, which was stored in the element table in step 1, onto the path.
117

Command(s): PDEF
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Map Onto Path
6.
Integrate it with respect to global Y.

Command(s): PCALC
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Integrate
7.
Assign the final value of the integral to a parameter. This gives us the first term of equation 10.1.
Command(s): *GET,Name,PATH,,LAST
GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data
8.
Map the component stresses SX, SY, and SXY onto the path.
Command(s): PDEF
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Map Onto Path
9.
Define the path unit normal vector.

Command(s): PVECT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Unit Vector
10. Calculate TX and TY using the expressions shown with equation 10.1.
Command(s): PCALC
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> operation
11. Shift the path a small distance in the positive and negative X directions to calculate the derivatives of
the displacement vector (ux/x and uy/y). The following steps are involved (see Figure 19.13: The
Three Basic Modes of Fracture in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference):
Calculate the distance by which the path is to be shifted, say DX. A rule of thumb is to use one percent
of the total length of the path. You can obtain the total path length as a parameter using
*GET,Name,PATH,,LAST,S.
Shift the path a distance of DX/2 in the negative X direction [PCALC,ADD,XG,XG,,,,-DX/2] and map
the displacements UX and UY onto the path [PDEF], giving them labels UX1 and UY1, for example.
Shift the path a distance of DX in the positive X direction (that is, +DX/2 from its original position)
and map UX and UY onto the path, giving them labels UX2 and UY2, for example.
Shift the path back to its original location (a distance of -DX/2) and calculate the quantities (UX2UX1)/DX and (UY2-UY1)/DX using PCALC. These quantities represent ux/x and uy/y, respectively.
See the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for a discussion of the *GET, PCALC and PDEF commands.
12. Using the quantities calculated in steps 10 and 11, calculate the integrand in the second term of J [PCALC]
and integrate it with respect to the path distance S [PCALC]. This gives the second term of equation 10.1.
13. Calculate J according to equation 10.1, using the quantities calculated in steps 5-7 and 12.
You can simplify the J-integral calculations by writing a macro that performs the above operations. (Macros are
described in the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.)
11.2.2.3. Energy Release Rate

Energy release rate is a concept used to determine the amount of work (change of energy) associated with a
crack opening or closure. One method to calculate the energy release rate is the virtual crack extension method,
outlined below.
In the virtual crack extension method, you perform two analyses, one with crack length a and the other with crack
length a +a. If the potential energy U (strain energy) for both cases is stored, the energy release rate can be
calculated from
118

U
Ua
G = a +a
Ba
where B is the thickness of the fracture model.
Extend the crack length by a for the second analysis by selecting all nodes in the vicinity of the crack and
scaling them in the X direction [NSCALE] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Scale) by the
factor a.
Note If you used solid modeling, you will first need to detach the solid model from the finite element
model [MODMSH,DETACH] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Checking Ctrls) before scaling the nodes.
The "vicinity of the crack" is usually taken to mean all nodes within a radius of a/2 from the crack tip. Also,
the factor a for node scaling is usually in the range of 1/2 to 2 percent of the crack length.
119
1110
Chapter 12: Composites

12.1. Definition of Composites
Composite materials have been used in structures for a long time. In recent times composite parts have been
used extensively in aircraft structures, automobiles, sporting goods, and many consumer products.
Composite materials are those containing more than one bonded material, each with different structural properties. The main advantage of composite materials is the potential for a high ratio of stiffness to weight. Composites
used for typical engineering applications are advanced fiber or laminated composites, such as fiberglass, glass
epoxy, graphite epoxy, and boron epoxy.
ANSYS allows you to model composite materials with specialized elements called layered elements. Once you
build your model using these elements, you can do any structural analysis (including nonlinearities such as large
deflection and stress stiffening).
12.2. Modeling Composites

Composites are somewhat more difficult to model than an isotropic material such as iron or steel. You need to
take special care in defining the properties and orientations of the various layers since each layer may have different orthotropic material properties. In this section, we will concentrate on the following aspects of building
a composite model:
Choosing the proper element type
Defining the layered configuration
Specifying failure criteria
Following modeling and postprocessing guidelines
12.2.1. Choosing the Proper Element Type

The following element types are available to model layered composite materials: SHELL99, SHELL91, SHELL181,
SOLID46, and SOLID191. Which element you choose depends on the application, the type of results that need
to be calculated, and so on. Check the individual element descriptions to determine if a specific element can be
used in your ANSYS product. All layered elements allow failure criterion calculations.
SHELL99 - Linear Layered Structural Shell Element
SHELL99 is an 8-node, 3-D shell element with six degrees of freedom at each node. It is designed to model thin
to moderately thick plate and shell structures with a side-to-thickness ratio of roughly 10 or greater. For structures
with smaller ratios, you may consider using SOLID46. The SHELL99 element allows a total of 250 uniform-thickness
layers. Alternately, the element allows 125 layers with thicknesses that may vary bilinearly over the area of the
layer. If more than 250 layers are required, you can input your own material matrix. It also has an option to offset
the nodes to the top or bottom surface.
SHELL91 - Nonlinear Layered Structural Shell Element
SHELL91 is similar to SHELL99 except that it allows only up to 100 layers and does not allow you to input a material property matrix. However, SHELL91 supports plasticity, large-strain behavior and a special sandwich option,
whereas SHELL99 does not. SHELL91 is also more robust for large deflection behavior.
SHELL181 - Finite Strain Shell

SHELL181 is a 4-node 3-D shell element with 6 degrees of freedom at each node. The element has full nonlinear
capabilities including large strain and allows 255 layers. The layer information is input using the section commands
rather than real constants. Failure criteria is available using the FC commands.
SOLID46 - 3-D Layered Structural Solid Element
SOLID46 is a layered version of the 8-node, 3-D solid element, SOLID45, with three degrees of freedom per node
(UX, UY, UZ). It is designed to model thick layered shells or layered solids and allows up to 250 uniform-thickness
layers per element. Alternately, the element allows 125 layers with thicknesses that may vary bilinearly over the
area of the layer. An advantage with this element type is that you can stack several elements to model more than
250 layers to allow through-the-thickness deformation slope discontinuities. The user-input constitutive matrix
option is also available. SOLID46 adjusts the material properties in the transverse direction permitting constant
stresses in the transverse direction. In comparison to the 8-node shells, SOLID46 is a lower order element and
finer meshes may be required for shell applications to provide the same accuracy as SHELL91 or SHELL99 .
SOLID191 - Layered Structural Solid Element
SOLID191 is a layered version of the 20-node 3-D solid element SOLID95, with three degrees of freedom per
node (UX, UY, UZ). It is designed to model thick layered shells or layered solids and allows up to 100 layers per
element. As with SOLID46, SOLID191 can be stacked to model through-the-thickness discontinuities. SOLID191
has an option to adjust the material properties in the transverse direction permitting constant stresses in the
transverse direction. In spite of its name, the element does not support nonlinear materials or large deflections.
In addition to the layered elements mentioned above, other composite element capabilities exist in ANSYS, but
will not be considered further in the chapter:
SOLID95, the 20-node structural solid element, with KEYOPT(1) = 1 functions similarly to a single layered
SOLID191 including the use of an orientation angle and failure criterion. It allows nonlinear materials and
large deflections.
SHELL63, the 4-node shell element, can be used for rough, approximate studies of sandwich shell models.
A typical application would be a polymer between two metal plates, where the bending stiffness of the
polymer would be small relative to the bending stiffness of the metal plates. The bending stiffness can
be adjusted by the real constant RMI to represent the bending stiffness due to the metal plates, and distances from the middle surface to extreme fibers (real constants CTOP, CBOT) can be used to obtain output
stress estimates on the outer surfaces of the sandwich shell. It is not used as frequently as SHELL91,
SHELL99, or SHELL181, and will not be considered for anything other than sandwich structures in this
section.
SOLID65, the 3D Reinforced Concrete Solid Element, models an isotropic medium with optional reinforcing
in 3 different user-defined orientations.
BEAM188 and BEAM189, the 3D finite strain beam elements, can have their sections built up with multiple
materials.
12.2.2. Defining the Layered Configuration

The most important characteristic of a composite material is its layered configuration. Each layer may be made
of a different orthotropic material and may have its principal directions oriented differently. For laminated
composites, the fiber directions determine layer orientation.
Two methods are available to define the layered configuration:
122
By specifying individual layer properties
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites
By defining constitutive matrices that relate generalized forces and moments to generalized strains and
curvatures (available only for SOLID46 and SHELL99 )
12.2.2.1. Specifying Individual Layer Properties

With this method, the layer configuration is defined layer-by-layer from bottom to top. The bottom layer is designated as layer 1, and additional layers are stacked from bottom to top in the positive Z (normal) direction of
the element coordinate system. You need to define only half of the layers if stacking symmetry exists.
At times, a physical layer will extend over only part of the model. In order to model continuous layers, these
dropped layers may be modeled with zero thickness. Figure 12.1: Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer
shows a model with four layers, the second of which is dropped over part of the model.
Figure 12.1 Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer
For each layer, the following properties are specified in the element real constant table [R, RMORE, RMODIF]
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants) (accessed with REAL attributes).
Material properties (via a material reference number MAT)
Layer orientation angle commands (THETA)
Layer thickness (TK)
Layered sections may also be defined through the Section Tool (Prep>Sections>Shell Add/edit). For each
layer, the following are specified in the section definition through the section commands; or through the Section
Tool (SECTYPE, SECDATA) (accessed with the SECNUM attributes).
Material properties (via a material reference number MAT)
Layer orientation angle commands (THETA)
Layer thickness (TK)
Number of integration points per layer (NUMPT)
Material Properties - As with any other element, the MP command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props>
Material Models> Structural> Linear> Elastic> Isotropic or Orthotropic) is used to define the linear material
properties, and the TB command is used to define the nonlinear material data tables (plasticity is only available
for elements SOLID191 and SHELL91). The only difference is that the material attribute number for each layer of
an element is specified in the element's real constant table. For the layered elements, the MAT command (Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Default Attribs) attribute is only used for the DAMP and
REFT arguments of the MP command. The linear material properties for each layer may be either isotropic or
orthotropic (see Linear Material Properties in the ANSYS Elements Reference). Typical fiber-reinforced composites
contain orthotropic materials and these properties are most often supplied in the major Poisson's ratio form (see
the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference). Material property directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system, which
is defined by the element coordinate system and the layer orientation angle (described below).
Layer Orientation Angle- This defines the orientation of the layer coordinate system with respect to the element
coordinate system. It is the angle (in degrees) between X-axes of the two systems. By default, the layer coordinate
system is parallel to the element coordinate system. All elements have a default coordinate system which you
123

can change using the ESYS element attribute [ESYS] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes>
Default Attribs). You may also write your own subroutines to define the element and layer coordinate systems
(USERAN and USANLY); see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for details.
Layer Thickness- If the layer thickness is constant, you only need to specify TK(I), the thickness at node I. Otherwise,
the thicknesses at the four corner nodes must be input. Dropped layers may be represented with zero thickness.
Number of integration points per layer- This allows you to determine in how much detail the program should
compute the results. For very thin layers, when used with many other layers, one point would be appropriate.
But for laminates with few layers, more would be needed. The default is 3 points. This feature applies only to
sections defined through the section commands.
Note Currently, the GUI only allows layer real constant input of up to 100 layers. If more layers are
needed for SHELL99 or SOLID46, the R and RMORE commands must be used.
12.2.2.2. Defining the Constitutive Matrices

This is an alternative to specifying the individual layer properties and is available as an option [KEYOPT(2)] for
SOLID46 and SHELL99. The matrices, which represent the force-moment and strain-curvature relationships for
the element, must be calculated outside the ANSYS program as outlined in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. They
can be included as part of the solution printout with KEYOPT(10). The main advantages of the matrix approach
are:
It allows you to incorporate an aggregate composite material behavior.
A thermal load vector may be supplied.
The matrices may represent an unlimited number of layers.
The terms of the matrices are defined as real constants. Mass effects are incorporated by specifying an average
density (real constants AVDENS) for the element. If the matrix approach is used, detailed results in each layer
cannot be obtained since individual layer information is not input.
12.2.2.3. Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures

Sandwich structures have two thin faceplates and a thick, but relatively weak, core. Figure 12.2: Sandwich
Construction illustrates sandwich construction.
Figure 12.2 Sandwich Construction
You can model sandwich structures with SHELL63, SHELL91, or SHELL181. SHELL63 has one layer but permits
sandwich modeling through the use of real constants. You can modify the effective bending moment of inertia
and the distance from the middle surface to the extreme fibers to account for the weak core. KEYOPT(9) = 1 of
SHELL91 specifies the sandwich option. The core is assumed to carry all of the transverse shear; the faceplates
carry none. Conversely, the faceplates are assumed to carry all (or almost all) of the bending load. Only SHELL91
has this sandwich option.
124

SHELL181 models the transverse shear deflection using as energy equivalence method that makes the need for
a sandwich option unnecessary
12.2.2.4. Node Offset

For SHELL181 using sections defined through the section commands, nodes can be offset during the definition
of the section, using the SECOFFSET command. For SHELL91, and SHELL99 the node offset option (KEYOPT(11))
locates the element nodes at the bottom, middle or top surface of the shell. The figures below illustrate how you
can conveniently model ply drop off in shell elements that are adjacent to each other. In Figure 12.3: Layered
Shell With Nodes at Midplane, the nodes are located at the middle surfaces (KEYOPT(11) = 0) and these surfaces
are aligned. In Figure 12.4: Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface, the nodes are located at the bottom
surfaces (KEYOPT(11) = 1) and these surfaces are aligned.
Figure 12.3 Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane
Figure 12.4 Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface
12.2.3. Specifying Failure Criteria

Failure criteria are used to learn if a layer has failed due to the applied loads. You can choose from three predefined
failure criteria or specify up to six failure criteria of your own (user-written criteria). The three predefined criteria
are:
Maximum Strain Failure Criterion, which allows nine failure strains.
Maximum Stress Failure Criterion, which allows nine failure stresses.
Tsai-Wu Failure Criterion, which allows nine failure stresses and three additional coupling coefficients. You
have a choice of two methods of calculating this criterion. The methods are defined in the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference.
The failure strains, stresses, and coupling coefficients may be temperature-dependent. See the ANSYS Elements
Reference for details about the data required for each criterion. To specify a failure criterion, use either the family
of TB commands or the family of FC commands.
The TB commands areTB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Failure Criteria). A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion using these commands is shown below.
125

TB,FAIL,1,2
! Data table for failure criterion, material 1,
! no. of temperatures = 2
TBTEMP,,CRIT
! Failure criterion key
TBDATA,2,1
! Maximum Stress Failure Criterion (Const. 2 = 1)
TBTEMP,100
! Temperature for subsequent failure properties
TBDATA,10,1500,,400,,10000
! X, Y, and Z failure tensile stresses (Z value
!
set to a large number)
TBDATA,16,200,10000,10000
! XY, YZ, and XZ failure shear stresses
TBLIST
TBTEMP,200
! Second temperature
TBDATA,...
The FC commands are FC, FCDELE, and FCLIST commands (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props>
Material Models> Structural> Nonlinear> Inelastic> Non-Metal Plasticity> Failure Criteria) and (Main
Menu> General Postproc> Failure Criteria). A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion using
these commands is shown below.
FC,1,TEMP,,
100,
FC,1,S,XTEN, 1500,
FC,1,S,YTEN, 400,
FC,1,S,ZTEN,10000,
FC,1,S,XY , 200,
FC,1,S,YZ ,10000,
FC,1,S,XZ ,10000,
FCLIST,
,100
FCLIST,
,150
FCLIST,
,200
PRNSOL,S,FAIL
200
1200
500
8000
200
8000
8000
! Temperatures
! Maximum stress components
!
!
!
!
List status
List status
List status
Use Failure
of Failure Criteria at 100.0 degrees

Criteria
Note The TB commands (TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA) can be used only for SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID46,
or SOLID191, but the FC and FCLIST commands can be used for any 2-D or 3-D structural solid element
or any 3-D structural shell element.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, FC, FCDELE, and
FCLIST commands.
Some notes about specifying failure criteria:
The criteria are orthotropic, so you must input the failure stress or failure strain values for all directions.
(The exception is that compressive values default to tensile values.)
If you don't want the failure stress or strain to be checked in a particular direction, specify a large number
in that direction (as shown in the previous example).
User-written failure criteria may be specified via user subroutines USRFC1 through USRFC6. These subroutines
should be linked with the ANSYS program beforehand; see the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for a
brief description of user-programmable features.
12.2.4. Additional Modeling and Postprocessing Guidelines

Some additional guidelines for modeling and postprocessing of composite elements are presented below.
1.
Composites exhibit several types of coupling effects, such as coupling between bending and twisting,
coupling between extension and bending, etc. This is due to stacking of layers of differing material
properties. As a result, if the layer stacking sequence is not symmetric, you may not be able to use
model symmetry even if the geometry and loading are symmetric, because the displacements and
stresses may not be symmetric.
2.
Interlaminar shear stresses are usually important at the free edges of a model. For relatively accurate interlaminar shear stresses at these locations, the element size at the boundaries of the model should be
approximately equal to the total laminate thickness. For shells, increasing the number of layers per actual
126

material layer does not necessarily improve the accuracy of interlaminar shear stresses. With elements
SOLID46, SOLID95, and SOLID191, however, stacking elements in the thickness direction should result
in more accurate interlaminar stresses through the thickness. Interlaminar transverse shear stresses in
shell elements are based on the assumption that no shear is carried at the top and bottom surfaces of
the element. These interlaminar shear stresses are only computed in the interior and are not valid along
the shell element boundaries. Use of shell-to-solid submodeling is recommended to accurately compute
all of the free edge interlaminar stresses.
3.
Because a large amount of input data is required for composites, you should verify the data before proceeding with the solution. Several commands are available for this purpose:
ELIST (Utility Menu> List> Elements) lists the nodes and attributes of all selected elements.
EPLOT (Utility Menu> Plot> Elements) displays all selected elements. Using the /ESHAPE,1 command
(Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape) before EPLOT causes shell elements to be displayed as solids with the layer thicknesses obtained from real constants or section definition (see
Figure 12.5: Example of an Element Display. This example uses element SHELL99 with /ESHAPE
turned on). It also causes SOLID46 elements to be displayed with layers.
/PSYMB,LAYR,n (Utility Menu> PlotCrls> Symbols) followed by EPLOT displays layer number n for
all selected layered elements. This can be used to display and verify each individual layer across the
entire model.
/PSYMB,ESYS,1 followed by EPLOT displays the element coordinate system triad for those elements
whose default coordinate system has been changed.
Figure 12.5 Example of an Element Display
LAYLIST (Utility Menu> List> Elements> Layered Elements) lists the layer stacking sequence from
real constants and any two material properties for SHELL99, SHELL91, SOLID46, and SOLID191 elements. You can specify a range of layer numbers for the listing.
LIST LAYERS
1 TO
4 IN REAL SET
TOTAL LAYERS =
4 LSYM =
1 LP1 =
1 FOR ELEMENT TYPE

1
0 LP2 =
0 EFS = .000E+00
NO. ANGLE THICKNESS MAT

--- ----- ---------- --1 45.0 0.250
1
2 -45.0 0.250
2
3 -45.0 0.250
2
4 45.0 0.250
1
-----------------------SUM OF THK
1.00
LAYPLOT (Utility Menu> Plot> Layered Elements) displays the layer stacking sequence from real
constants in the form of a sheared deck of cards (see Figure 12.6: Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
127

45/ - 45/45] Sequence). The layers are crosshatched and color coded for clarity. The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (real constant THETA) and the color indicates layer material number (MAT).
You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
4.
SECPLOT (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Plot Section) displays the section stacking
sequence from sections in the form of a sheared deck of cards (see Figure 12.6: Sample LAYPLOT
Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence). The sections are crosshatched and color coded for clarity.
The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (THETA) and the color indicates layer material number (MAT)
defined by the SECDATA command. You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
By default, only data for the bottom of the first (bottom) layer, top of the last (top) layer, and the layer
with the maximum failure criterion value are written to the results file. If you are interested in data for
all layers, set KEYOPT(8) = 1. Be aware, though, that this may result in a large results file.
Figure 12.6 Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence
5.
Use the ESEL,S,LAYER command to select elements that have a certain layer number. If an element has
a zero thickness for the requested layer, the element is not selected.
Note For energy output, the results are applicable only to the entire element; you cannot get
output results for individual layers.
6.
128
Use the LAYER command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) in POST1 (or LAYERP26
(Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables) in POST26) to specify the layer number for which
results are to be processed. The SHELL command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp
or Main Menu> TimeHist Prostpro> Define Variables) specifies a TOP, MID, or BOT location within the
layer. The default in POST1 is to store results for the bottom of the bottom layer, and the top of the top
layer, and the layer with the maximum failure criterion value. In POST26, the default is layer 1. If KEYOPT(8)
= 1 (that is, data stored for all layers), the LAYER and LAYERP26 commands store the TOP and BOT results
for the specified layer number. MID values are then calculated by average TOP and BOT values. If KEYOPT
(8) = 2 is set for SHELL181 during SOLUTION, then LAYER and LAYERP26 commands store the TOP,

BOTTOM, and MID results for the specified layer number. In this case, MID values are directly retrieved
from the results file. For transverse shear stresses with KEYOPT(8) = 0, therefore, POST1 can only show a
linear variation, whereas the element solution printout or KEYOPT(8) = 2 can show a parabolic variation.
7.
By default, POST1 displays all results in the global Cartesian coordinate system. Use the RSYS command
(Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) to transform the results to a different coordinate
system. In particular, RSYS,SOLU allows you to display results in the layer coordinate system if LAYER is
issued with a nonzero layer number.
129
1210
Chapter 13: Fatigue

13.1. Definition of Fatigue
Fatigue is the phenomenon in which a repetitively loaded structure fractures at a load level less than its ultimate
static strength. For instance, a steel bar might successfully resist a single static application of a 300 kN tensile
load, but might fail after 1,000,000 repetitions of a 200 kN load.
The main factors that contribute to fatigue failures include:
Number of load cycles experienced
Range of stress experienced in each load cycle
Mean stress experienced in each load cycle
Presence of local stress concentrations
A formal fatigue evaluation accounts for each of these factors as it calculates how "used up" a certain component
will become during its anticipated life cycle.
13.1.1. What the ANSYS Program Does

The ANSYS fatigue calculations rely on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III (and Section VIII,
Division 2) for guidelines on range counting, simplified elastic-plastic adaptations, and cumulative fatigue summation by Miner's rule.
For fatigue evaluations based on criteria other than those of the ASME Code, you can either write your own
macro, or else interface your ANSYS results with an appropriate third-party program (see the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide for more information on these two features).
The ANSYS program features the following fatigue-calculation capabilities:
You can postprocess existing stress results to determine the fatigue usage factors for any solid-element
or shell-element model. (You can also manually input stresses for fatigue evaluation of line-element
models.)
You can store stresses at a preselected number of locations for a preselected number of events and
loadings within the event.
You can define stress concentration factors for each location and scale factors for each event.
13.1.2. Basic Terminology

A location is a node in your model for which fatigue stresses are to be stored. You would typically choose locations
that represent points on the structure that would be susceptible to fatigue damage.
An event is a set of stress conditions that occur at different times during a unique stress cycle. See Section 13.2.3.4:
Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors later in this chapter for more information.
A loading is one of the stress conditions that is part of an event.
The alternating stress intensity is a measure of the difference in stress state between any two loadings. The program
does not adjust the alternating stress intensity for mean-stress effects.
Chapter 13: Fatigue
13.2. Doing a Fatigue Evaluation

You do a fatigue evaluation in POST1, the general postprocessor, after you have completed a stress solution.
The procedure normally consists of five main steps:
1.
Enter POST1 and resume your database.
2.
Establish the size (the number of locations, events, and loadings), define the fatigue material properties,
identify stress locations, and define stress concentration factors.
3.
Store stresses at locations of interest for various events and loadings; assign event repetitions and scale
factors.
4.
Activate the fatigue calculations.
5.
Review the results.
13.2.1. Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database

In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, you need to follow these steps:
1.
Enter POST1.
Command(s): /POST1
2.
Read your database file (Jobname.DB) into active memory. (If your intended fatigue evaluation is a
continuation of an ongoing ANSYS session, then Jobname.DB will already be in memory.) A results file
(Jobname.RST) with nodal stress results should also be available; you will read results data into memory
later.
Command(s): RESUME
13.2.2. Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations

Define the following data:
Maximum number of locations, events, and loadings
Fatigue material properties
Stress locations and stress concentration factors (SCFs)
1.
Define the maximum number of stress locations, events, and loadings.

By default, your fatigue evaluation can consider up to five nodal locations, ten events, and three loadings
within an event. You can use the following option to establish larger dimensions (that is, allow more
locations, events, or loadings), if necessary.
Command(s): FTSIZE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Size Settings
2.
Define material fatigue properties.

In order to calculate usage factors, and to include the effect of simplified elastic-plastic computations,
you must define material fatigue properties. The material properties of interest in a fatigue evaluation
are:
132
The S-N curve, a curve of alternating stress intensity ((Smax - Smin)/2) versus allowable number of cycles.
The ASME S-N curves already account for maximum mean stress effects. You should adjust your S-N
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation

curve to account for mean-stress effects, if necessary. If you do not input an S-N curve, alternating
stress intensities will be listed in decreasing order for all possible combinations of stress conditions,
but no usage factors will be calculated.
Command(s): FP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> S-N Table
The Sm-T curve, a curve of design stress-intensity value versus temperature. This curve is needed if
you want the program to detect whether or not the nominal stress range has gone plastic.
Command(s): FP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Sm_T Table
Elastic-plastic material parameters M and N (strain hardening exponents). These parameters are required only if you desire simplified elastic-plastic code calculations. These parameters' values can be
obtained from the ASME Code.
Command(s): FP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Elas-plas Par
The following example illustrates the use of the FP command to input material fatigue properties:
! Define the S-N table:
FP,1,10,30,100,300,1000,10000
FP,7,100000,1000000
FP,21,650,390,240,161,109,59
FP,27,37,26
! Define the Sm-T table:
FP,41,100,200,300,400,500,600
FP,47,650,700,750,800
FP,51,20,20,20,18.7,17.4,16.4
FP,57,16.1,15.9.15.5,15.1
! Allowable Cycles, N
!
"
! Alternating Stress! Intensity Range, S, ksi
! Temperature,F
!
"
! "Design Stress-Intensity
! Value", Sm (=2/3*Sy or
! 1/3 *Su), ksi
! Define the elastic-plastic material parameters:
FP,61,1.7,.3
!
M and N
3.
Define stress locations and stress concentration factors.

The following option allows you to explicitly define a nodal location of interest to your fatigue evaluation,
define stress concentration factors (SCFs) for that location, and assign a short (20 character) title to that
location.
Command(s): FL
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress Locations
Note Not all fatigue analyses will require the FL command. Locations are automatically defined for
nodes when FS, FSNODE, or FSSECT are issued (see below). If your model contains sufficient grid detail,
your stresses could be accurate enough that you would not need to apply calculated SCFs. (Supplemental
SCFs for surface, size, or corrosion effects might still be required, however.) Where only one location is
being examined, you could omit a title. If explicit definition of locations, SCFs, or titles are not required,
you could forgo the FL command entirely.
Here is an example of some FL commands for a cylinder with a global Y axis, having two wall thicknesses of interest,
where SCFs are to be applied (to the axial linearized stresses) at the outside wall.
FL,1,281,,,,Line 1 at inside
FL,2,285,,1.85,,Line 1 at outside
FL,3,311,,,,Line 2 at inside
FL,4,315,,2.11,,Line 2 at outside
133
Chapter 13: Fatigue
Figure 13.1 Cylinder Wall with Stress Concentration Factors (SCFs)
13.2.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
13.2.3.1. Storing Stresses
In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, the program must know the stresses at different events and loadings
for each location, as well as the number of repetitions of each event. You can store stresses for each combination
of location, event, and loading, using the following options:
Manually stored stresses
Nodal stresses from Jobname.RST
Stresses at a cross-section
Caution: The program never assumes that a "zero" stress condition exists. If zero stress is one of the conditions
to be considered, it must be explicitly input for each event in which it may occur.
The following command sequences schematically illustrate how to store stresses. In some situations, you might
prefer to use LCASE instead of SET.
Manually stored stresses:
FS
Nodal stresses retrieved from Jobname.RST:
SET, FSNODE
Stresses at a cross-section:
PATH, PPATH, SET, FSSECT
(Cross-section calculations also require data from Jobname.RST.)
You can use more than one method of storing stresses in an event. Each of these methods is explained in detail
below.
13.2.3.1.1. Manually Stored Stresses

You can use this option to store stresses and the temperature "manually" (without direct access to the results
file Jobname.RST). In such cases, you are not using the fatigue module in POST1 as a postprocessor, but simply
as a fatigue calculator. Line elements, such as beams, must be handled in this way since the fatigue module is
not able to access data from a results file other than for solid elements or shell elements.
Command(s): FS
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Specified Val
Command input for this option is demonstrated by the following example:
FS,201,1,2,1,-2.0,21.6,15.2,4.5,0.0,0.0
FS,201,1,2,7,450.3
134

In this example, only the total stresses (items 1-6) and the temperature (item 7) are input. If the linearized stresses
were also to be input, they would follow the temperatures as items 8 through 13.
Note In the special case of a beam element having only axial stress, you would input only one stress
component (SX), leaving the rest of the stress fields blank.
13.2.3.1.2. Nodal Stresses from Jobname.RST

When you use this option, you cause a nodal stress vector containing six stress components to be stored directly
from the results database. Stress components stored with this option can be modified with a subsequent FS
command.
Note You must issue a SET command, and possibly a SHELL command, before executing FSNODE.
SET will read results for a particular load substep from the results file (Jobname.RST) into the database.
SHELL allows you to select results from the top, middle, or bottom surfaces for shell elements (default
is the top surface).
Command(s): FSNODE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> From rst File
Input by means of FSNODE is demonstrated by the following example for an event at one nodal location:
SET,1
FSNODE,123,1,1
SET,2
FSNODE,123,1,2
SET,3
FSNODE,123,1,3
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Define data set for load step 1

Stress vector at node 123 assigned to event 1,
loading 1.
Define data set for load step 2
...event 1, loading 2
...load step 3
...event 1, loading 3
Figure 13.2 Three Loadings in One Event
13.2.3.1.3. Stresses at a Cross-Section

This option calculates and stores total linearized stresses at the ends of a section path (as defined by a preceding
PATH and PPATH command). Because you will normally want the linearization to take place over a thickness
representing the shortest distance between the two surfaces, use only the two surface nodes to describe the
path in the PPATH command. This option retrieves stress information from the results database; therefore
135
Chapter 13: Fatigue

FSSECT must also be preceded by a SET command. Stress components stored with an FSSECT command can
be modified with a subsequent FS command.
Command(s): FSSECT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> At Cross Sect
Input by means of FSSECT is demonstrated in the following example. If node locations are not assigned with an
FL command, the FSSECT commands in this example will automatically assign location numbers to the two path
nodes, 391 and 395. (See Figure 13.3: Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT.)
PATH,Name,2
PPATH,1,391
PPATH,2,395
SET,1
FSSECT,,1,1
! Define the path using the two surface nodes
! Store stresses at nodes 391 and 395
Figure 13.3 Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT
13.2.3.2. Listing, Plotting, or Deleting Stored Stresses

Use the following options to list, plot, or delete stored stresses.
List the stored stresses per location, per event, per loading, or per stress condition:
Command(s): FSLIST
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> List Stresses
Display a stress item as a function of loading number for a particular location and event:
Command(s): FSPLOT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Plot Stresses
Delete a stress condition stored for a particular location, event, and loading:
Command(s): FSDELE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Dele Stresses
Delete all stresses at a particular location:

Command(s): FL
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress Locations
Delete all stresses for all loadings in a particular event:

Command(s): FE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Erase Event Data
13.2.3.3. Assigning Event Repetitions and Scale Factors

This option assigns the number of occurrences to the event numbers (for all loadings at all locations of the event).
It can also be used to apply scale factors to all of the stresses that make up its loadings.
Command(s): FE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Assign Events
136

An example of this command usage is given below:
FE,1,-1
FE,2,100,1.2
*REPEAT,3,1
FE,5,500
! Erase all parameters and fatigue stresses formerly

! used for event 1.
! Assign 100 occurrences to events 2, 3 and 4,
! and scale by 1.2.
! Assign 500 occurrences to event 5.
13.2.3.4. Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors

Structures are usually subjected to a variety of maximum and minimum stresses, which occur in unknown (or
even random) order. Therefore, you must take care to achieve an accurate count of the number of repetitions
of all possible stress ranges, in order to obtain a valid fatigue usage factor.
The ANSYS program automatically calculates all possible stress ranges and keeps track of their number of occurrences, using a technique commonly known as the "rain flow" range-counting method. At a selected nodal location, a search is made throughout all of the events for the pair of loadings (stress vectors) that produces the
most severe stress-intensity range. The number of repetitions possible for this range is recorded, and the remaining
number of repetitions for the events containing these loadings is decreased accordingly. At least one of the
source events will be "used up" at this point; remaining occurrences of stress conditions belonging to that event
will subsequently be ignored. This process continues until all ranges and numbers of occurrences have been
considered.
Caution: It can be surprisingly easy to misuse the range-counting feature of the fatigue module. You must
take pains to assemble events carefully if you want your fatigue evaluation to yield accurate usage factors.
Consider the following guidelines when assembling events:
Understand the internal logic of the ANSYS range-counting algorithm. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for more details on how the ANSYS program performs range counting.
Because it can be difficult to predict the exact load step at which a maximum (or minimum) 3-D stress
state occurs, good practice often requires that you include several clustered loadings in each event, in
order to successfully capture the extreme stress state. (See Figure 13.2: Three Loadings in One Event.)
You will obtain consistently conservative results if you include only one extreme stress condition (either
a local maximum or a local minimum) in any given event. If you group more than one extreme condition
in a single event, you will sometimes generate unconservative results, as illustrated by the following example:
Consider a load history made up of two slightly different cycles:

Load Cycle 1: 500 repetitions of Sx = +50.0 to -50.1 ksi
Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx = +50.1 to -50.0 ksi
These load cycles will obviously sum to 1500 repetitions having an alternating stress intensity of about 50 ksi.
However, carelessly grouping these loadings into only two events will result in an inaccurate range count. Let's
see how this would happen:
Event 1,
loading 1: Sx = 50.0
loading 2: Sx = -50.1
500 repetitions
Event 2,
loading 1: Sx = 50.1
loading 2: Sx = -50.0
1000 repetitions
The possible alternating stress intensities are:

a.
From E1,L1 to E1,L2:
50.05 ksi
137
Chapter 13: Fatigue

b.
0.05 ksi
c.
50.00 ksi
d.
50.10 ksi
e.
0.05 ksi
f.
50.05 ksi
Sorting these combinations by decreasing alternating stress intensity gives:

d.
50.10 ksi
a.
50.05 ksi
f.
50.05 ksi
c.
50.00 ksi
b.
0.05 ksi
e.
0.05 ksi
The range counting then proceeds as follows:

d.
500 cycles of E1,L2 to E2,L1
- this uses up 500 cycles of E1 and E2
a.
- E1 is all used up
f.
- this uses up 500 more cycles of E2
c.
- both events are all used up
b.
Thus, only 1000 repetitions of about 50 ksi range would be counted, instead of the known 1500 cycles. This error
results solely from improper assembly of events.
If the loadings had each been described as separate events (such that E1,L1 E1; E1,L2 E2; E2,L1 E3; and
E2,L2 E4), then the following range counts would be obtained:
d.
500 cycles of E2 to E3
- this uses up 500 cycles of E2 and E3
a.
- E2 is all used up
f.
- uses up 500 more cycles of E3, and 500 of E4
c.
- uses up 500 more cycles of E4
b.
- E3 is all used up
e.
- E2 and E4 are both all used up
Cumulative fatigue damage in this case would properly be calculated for 1500 repetitions of about 50 ksi range.
Conversely, using separate events for each maximum and each minimum stress condition could sometimes
become too conservative. In such cases, carefully choose those loadings that should be counted together,
and group them into the same events. The following example illustrates how some events can appropriately
contain multiple extreme stress conditions:
Consider a load history made up of these two load cycles:
Load Cycle 1: 500 repetitions of Sx = +100.1 to +100.0 ksi
Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx = +50.1 to +50.0 ksi
138

It is readily apparent that the worst possible combination of these cycles would yield 500 repetitions having alternating stress intensity of about 25 ksi range.
Proceeding as in the above example, grouping these loadings into two events would produce an accurate count
of 500 repetitions of about 25 ksi range. Treating each loading as a separate event would yield an over-conservative count of 1000 repetitions of about 25 ksi range.
13.2.4. Activate the Fatigue Calculations

Now that you have locations, stresses, events, and material parameters all specified, you can execute the fatigue
calculations at a specified location. The location is specified by either the location number or the node itself.
Command(s): FTCALC
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Calculate Fatig

Fatigue calculation results are printed in the output. If you have routed your output [/OUTPUT] to a file (for example Jobname.OUT), then you can review the results by listing that file.
Command(s): *LIST
GUI: Utility Menu> List> Files> Other> Jobname.OUT
If you have input an S-N curve, output is in the form of a table of alternating stress intensities (listed in decreasing
order) with corresponding pairs of event/loadings, as well as cycles used, cycles allowed, temperature, and partial
usage factor. Following that, the cumulative usage factor is shown for that particular location. This information
is repeated for all locations.
As has been just mentioned, FTCALC output shows the contributing pairs of events and loadings for any given
alternating stress-intensity range. This information can help you isolate the transients (events/loadings) causing
the most fatigue damage.
A convenient way to modify your events would be to write all stored fatigue data on Jobname.FATG. (This option
could be executed either before or after FTCALC.) Data are written to Jobname.FATG in terms of equivalent
fatigue module commands. You can modify your events by editing Jobname.FATG; then use the /INPUT command to reread the modified fatigue commands.
Command(s): FTWRITE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Write Fatig Data
13.2.6. Other Approaches to Range Counting

Earlier, we discussed the "rain flow" range-counting method. This technique is useful whenever the exact timehistory of various loadings is not known. However, if in your fatigue analysis the time-history is known, you can
avoid the undue conservatism of this procedure simply by running a separate fatigue analysis [FTCALC] for each
sequential event and then adding the usage factors manually.
13.2.7. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a fatigue evaluation is shown below:
! Enter POST1 and Resume the Database:
/POST1
RESUME,...
! Number of Locations, Events, and Loadings
FTSIZE,...
! Material Fatigue Properties:
FP,1,....
! N values
139
Chapter 13: Fatigue

FP,21,...
! S values
FP,41,...
! T values
FP,51,...
! Sm values
FP,61,...
! Elastic-plastic material parameters
! Locations, Stress Concentration Factors, and Location Titles
FL,...
! Store Stresses (3 Different Methods)
! Store Stresses Manually:
FS,...
! Retrieve Stresses from the Results File:
SET,...
FSNODE,...
! Store Stresses at a Cross-Section:
PPATH,...
SET,...
FSSECT,...
! Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
FE,...
! Activate the Fatigue Calculations
FTCALC,...
! Review the Results (List the output file)
FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the FTSIZE, FP, FL, FS, FSNODE, PPATH, FSSECT, FE, and
FTCALC commands.
1310
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis

14.1. Definition of p-Method Analysis
The p-method obtains results such as displacements, stresses, or strains to a user-specified degree of accuracy.
To calculate these results, the p-method manipulates the polynomial level (p-level) of the finite element shape
functions which are used to approximate the real solution.
This feature works by taking a finite element mesh, solving it at a given p-level, increasing the p-level selectively,
and then solving the mesh again. After each iteration the results are compared for convergence against a set of
convergence criteria. You can specify the convergence criteria to include displacement, rotation, stress or strain
at a point (or points) in the model, and global strain energy. The higher the p-level, the better the finite element
approximation to the real solution.
In order to capitalize on the p-method functionality, you don't have to work only within the confines of p-generated
meshes. The p-method is most efficient when meshes are generated considering that p-elements will be used,
but this is not a requirement. Of course, you might want to create and mesh your model using p-elements, but
you can also perform a p-method solution using meshes that have been generated with h-elements (generated
by ANSYS or your CAD package), if the elements are at least mid-noded. This provides you with the flexibility of
taking advantage of the p-method solution option independently of how the mesh was created. The p-method
can improve the results for any mesh automatically.
14.2. Benefits of Using the p-Method

The p-method solution option offers many benefits for linear structural static analyses that are not available with
the more traditional h-method, discussed in the preceding chapters. The most convenient benefit is the ability
to obtain good results to a desired level of accuracy without rigorous user-defined meshing controls. If you are
new to finite element analysis or do not have a solid background in mesh design, you might prefer this method
since it relieves you of the task of manually designing an accurate mesh.
In addition, the p-method adaptive refinement procedure offers error estimates that are more precise than those
of the h-method, and can be calculated locally as well as globally (for example, stress at a point rather than strain
energy). For example, if you need to obtain highly accurate solutions at a point, such as for fracture or fatigue
assessments, the p-method offers an excellent means of obtaining these results to the required accuracy.
14.3. Using the p-Method

The procedure for a p-method static analysis consists of four main steps:
1.
Select the p-method procedure.
2.
Build the model.
3.
4.
Review the results.
Each step is discussed in detail in the following sections.
14.3.1. Select the p-Method Procedure

You can activate the p-method solution procedure in two ways: through the GUI or by defining a p-element [ET].
Activating p-method through the GUI:

Command(s): /PMETH
GUI: Main Menu> Preferences> p-method
Defining a p-element: The p-method solution procedure can also be activated by defining a p-element. If
you are working outside of the GUI, the definition of a p-element lets the program know that a p-method
solution is to be done; no other commands are necessary to initiate p-method. From within the GUI, you
can also issue the ET command in the "Input Window" to activate the p-method procedure. (Remember,
the ET command must be entered in the "Input Window," since, by default, only h-elements are displayed
in the GUI unless p-method is active.)
Command(s): ET
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete

In order to build a model with p-elements, you must follow the procedure listed below.
1.
Define the element types.
2.
Specify material properties and/or real constants.
3.
Define the model geometry.
4.
Mesh the model into solid or shell elements.
The above steps are common to most analyses. The ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide explains those steps in
detail. In this section we will explain the techniques that are unique to a p-analysis.

You can use the following five p-elements to build your model:
2-D Quadrilateral (PLANE145)
2-D Triangle (PLANE146)
3-D Brick (SOLID147)
3-D Tetrahedron (SOLID148)
3-D Shell (SHELL150)

Note H-elements and p-elements cannot be active at the same time in your model.
14.3.2.1.1. Specifying a p-Level Range

Various options are available for use with p-elements. One important option is the ability to specify, either locally
or globally, a range in which the p-level may vary.
The range within which the p-level may vary can be controlled locally through the p-element KEYOPT settings
(KEYOPT(1) and KEYOPT(2)), or globally across the entire model with PPRANGE. By default, the p-level range is
2 to 8.
When both KEYOPT values and PPRANGE have been used to specify p-level ranges, the local p-level range [ET]
will take precedence over the global p-level range [PPRANGE].
142
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method

For example, if you set a global p-level range between 3 and 8 with PPRANGE, then define a local p-level range
of 4 to 6 for PLANE145 elements (ET,1,145,4,6), the p-level for the PLANE145 elements may only vary between
4 and 6, while the rest of the model may vary between 3 and 8.
At the (default) starting p-level of 2, convergence checking is performed to determine those elements which are
converged and may have their p-level fixed at 2. That is, these elements will remain at a p-level of 2, and will be
eliminated from any further convergence checking. Additional checking is performed at each iteration to fix the
p-levels of the elements which are converged.
Note Convergence checking for SHELL150 begins at a p-level of 3 instead of a p-level of 2.
Use local p-range control to eliminate regions of little importance from high p-escalation. Use global p-range
control for overall control of the p-level. These range controls are not necessary, but p-escalations to high plevels increase CPU time. Therefore, it is advantageous to have such controls available.
Defining a local p-level range:

Command(s): ET
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete
Defining a global p-level range:

Command(s): PPRANGE
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Set p-range
See the ANSYS Elements Reference for complete descriptions of each of the above element types.
14.3.2.2. Specify Material Properties and/or Real Constants

14.3.2.2.1. Material Properties
Material properties for p-elements may be either constant or temperature-dependent, and isotropic or orthotropic. As with other structural analyses, if you plan to apply inertia loads (such as gravity or rotational velocity),
you must also specify the density (DENS) that is required for mass calculations. Young's modulus (EX) must be
defined, and if thermal loads (temperatures) are to be applied, a coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX) must
be specified.
Command(s): MP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Density
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Linear> Elastic> Isotropic
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Thermal Expansion
Coef> Isotropic
Caution: Element coordinate systems [ESYS] used for orthotropic material directions are not supported
by p-elements. All element coordinate systems are parallel to the global Cartesian coordinate system.
14.3.2.2.2. Real Constants

You may define optional thicknesses for 2-D elements and thicknesses for SHELL150 as real constants. Thicknesses
must be defined for SHELL150.
Command(s): R
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants
143
14.3.2.3. Define the Model Geometry

You can create your model using any of the various techniques outlined in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide, or you can import it from a CAD system using ANSYS Connection product. If you are generating your
model from within ANSYS, you can use either solid modeling or direct generation techniques.
Note Using direct generation is not recommended when you plan to create a p-mesh since all p-elements require that midside nodes be included in their geometric definition. In cases where surface
curvature is important, it would not only be tedious, but possibly imprecise to manually define each
midside node. In addition, the EMID command does not place nodes on a curved line. It is much more
convenient to let the program generate the midside nodes using solid modeling.
You may not drop any midside nodes from p-elements.
If you use direct generation or import your mesh from an outside source, keep the following guidelines in mind:
A curved element edge should not cover more than a 30 arc.
The angles between adjacent edges should be between 10 and 170. Element shape checking will warn
that adjacent edges should be between 30 and 150, but it is usually acceptable to have angles in the
range of 10 to 170 for p-elements.
A good rule of thumb is to keep the aspect ratio (ratio of element length to width) less than 20:1.
14.3.2.4. Mesh the Model into Solid or Shell Elements

14.3.2.4.1. Using Program Defaults
After you have generated your solid model, you are ready to mesh it with p-elements. The general procedure
for meshing your solid model is outlined in Chapter 7, Generating the Mesh in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing
Guide. Compared to h-elements, the program will generate a coarser mesh under default settings for p-elements.
Normally, you will not need to specify any meshing size controls because the program defaults will give you an
adequate mesh. In addition, each element's p-level will be manipulated during solution to obtain accurate and
efficient results. For engineering design studies, the accuracy obtained with a relatively coarse, ungraded mesh
is usually sufficient. (A graded mesh is one where there are more elements near an area of interest. These elements
are smaller relative to the other areas of the model, and a transition region occurs from the large to the smaller
elements.)
Note Adaptive meshing is not valid with a p-method analysis.
14.3.2.4.2. Specifying Mesh Controls

By default, the DESIZE command controls automatic element sizing. For free meshing, you have the option of
using the SmartSize feature [SMRTSIZE] to control element sizing. SmartSizing generally produces a better
quality mesh and is recommended for meshing a p-element model. (SmartSizing is not available for mapped
meshing.)
Command(s): SMRTSIZE
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> SmartSize> Basic
or
Command(s): DESIZE
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Manual Size> Global> Other
144

Note Since p-method prefers a coarser mesh, the default element size values for a p-method analysis
are different than those used for h-elements. See the SMRTSIZE and DESIZE commands for details.
For fracture or fatigue assessments, you may still need to specify meshing controls because the mesh must be
fine enough to obtain the desired accuracy near the areas of interest. In certain cases, such as when there are
severe geometric transition regions, you may also need to specify mesh controls to avoid a meshing failure.
You may also want to specify meshing controls for curved geometries, where successful meshes are more difficult
to achieve with the default size settings. Under default conditions, badly shaped elements may be produced
because of the difficulty of filling a curved domain with as few elements as possible. User-defined meshing
controls can make the task less difficult.
14.3.2.4.3. Guidelines for Creating a Good Mesh
Subdivide complex geometries, or build them as separate geometries. As a general rule, if you were to
stand inside a volume, you should be able to see all of its vertices. If this is not possible, you might wish
to consider subdividing the volume into more manageable pieces.
The number of divisions on lines "parallel" and near to each other should be fairly equivalent. The SmartSizing method of meshing [SMRTSIZE] handles this situation well. However, if the DESIZE method of
element sizing is used, you should set local mesh controls to achieve a good mesh in these areas.
For beam-like or shell-like models, use one element through the thickness in the meshed model. SmartSizing will do this automatically. However, if you are using DESIZE for meshing, set the default element
size [MINH] to 1 [DESIZE,,1].
Figure 14.1 Fan Model Showing p-Element vs. h-Element Meshes
14.3.3. Additional Information for Building Your Model

14.3.3.1. Viewing your element model
A subgrid approach is used for plotting the model in which the amount of displayed element curvature can be
controlled. You may display varying degrees of curvature in your model by specifying the number of facets to
be used for element display. Facets are piecewise linear approximations of the actual curve represented by the
element face or edge. A greater number of facets will result in a smoother representation of the element surface
145

for p-element plots. PowerGraphics is the default graphics display method used for p-method plots. This method
will display the plot at a much faster speed than the Full Model method. See Chapter 10, PowerGraphics in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on PowerGraphics. For more information on /EFACET, see the
discussion on the p-Element Subgrid later in this section.
Command(s): /EFACET
GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape
14.3.3.2. Coupling
You may couple degrees of freedom (DOFs) between nodes on p-elements to control nodal solution behavior.
All coupled nodes are forced to assume the same displacement values in the specified nodal coordinate direction.
The amount of this displacement is unknown until the analysis has been completed.
Command(s): CP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Couple DOFs
The first degree of freedom defined on the coupled set is the "prime" degree of freedom. All other degrees of
freedom in the coupled set are eliminated from the solution matrices as a result of their relationship to the prime
degree of freedom.
Note For p-elements, only the corner nodes may be defined as prime degrees of freedom if midside
nodes are also part of the same coupled set.
For a p-method analysis, only the nodal combinations described below are permitted when coupling, and any
deviation from these combinations will most likely result in singularities.
14.3.3.2.1. Coupling of Corner Nodes

1.
Two nodes are coupled within the same element.
Figure 14.2 Coupled Nodes on One Element
2.
Two nodes are coupled between adjacent element edges/faces.
Figure 14.3 Nodes Coupled Between Adjacent Elements
146
14.3.3.2.2. Midside Node Coupling

1.
Both corner nodes on the element's edge or face are part of the same coupled set. Only the corner nodes
may be defined as prime degrees of freedom.
Figure 14.4 Both Corner Nodes are Coupled
2.
All nodes in the coupled set are midside nodes. In this case, a midside node must be defined as the prime
degree of freedom, but this is only valid as long as there are no corner nodes defined as part of the same
coupled set.
Figure 14.5 All Coupled Nodes are Midside Nodes
Note If you have coupled faces or edges on a p-element (that is, all edges of the element's face or all
nodes of the element's edge are coupled), the p-level of that edge or face will be held to 2. In addition,
constraint equations (used to represent relatively rigid parts) are not available in a p-method analysis.

In this section you will take the following steps to obtain a solution for your model:
1.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
2.
Define the analysis options. Choose any of three options to solve the simultaneous equations generated
by a p-method analysis. These solvers are discussed at length in Chapter 3, Solution in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.
Frontal equation solver
Jacobian Conjugate Gradient equation solver (JCG)
Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient equation solver (PCG) (recommended)

Command(s): EQSLV
147

GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Sol'n Options Tab)
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
We generally recommend that you use the PCG solver for a p-element analysis. For most 3-D solid
models and for very large 2-D models (usually greater than 40,000 DOF), the PCG solver is usually faster
than the JCG and frontal solvers:
The PCG solver is about 5 to 10 times faster than the frontal solver for p-elements.
The PCG solver is significantly faster than JCG for p-elements.
Computer-time savings will be greater with the PCG solver when p-levels of 4 and higher are active.
In certain cases, such as when your model contains elements with high aspect ratios or material type
discontinuities, a greater number of iterations may be required to achieve convergence for the PCG
solver. You may increase the maximum number of iterations by using the MULT option on the EQSLV
command. This option is only valid when solving with the PCG solver. See the EQSLV command description
in the ANSYS Commands Reference for more information on this capability.
The PCG solver is not available for p-element shells.
For more information on the general use of the PCG solver, refer to Chapter 3, Solution in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide.
3.
Apply the loads to the solid model (keypoints, lines, areas, etc.) or to the finite element model (nodes
and elements), except for inertia loads (gravity, rotational velocity, etc.), which are independent of the
model. For a general discussion of solid model loads versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2, Loading
in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Internal Degrees of Freedom and Nodal Coordinate Systems
In order to correctly apply boundary conditions, you need to understand nodal coordinate systems, and
how degrees of freedom (DOFs) which are not attached to a node are handled. DOFs are the allowed
motions or deformations of the elements. Those DOFs which are not attached to a node are referred to
as internal degrees of freedom.
Internal DOFs allow the elements to form a better approximation to the real solution. As the p-level
is increased for each loop, more DOFs are added to the elements. Some of these DOFs act on the
element boundary (edges and interior faces) resulting in deformations that vary from a polynomial
order of 2 to 8. In many cases, the higher the p-level, the more complex the deformation, and the
better the approximation to the real solution.
Nodal coordinate systems orient the degree of freedom directions at each node. Each node has its
own nodal coordinate system, which, by default, is parallel to the global Cartesian system (regardless
of the coordinate system in which the node was defined). Nodes may be rotated into a nodal coordinate system [NROTAT] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Rotate Node CS>
To Active CS). The constraints and forces are then applied to the nodes in the nodal coordinate systems. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more details about nodal coordinate systems.
The program aligns the internal DOFs with the nodal coordinate systems as defined by the nodes on the
element face or edge.
Displacement constraints applied to nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems are applied to the
internal DOFs on an element edge or face only if ALL the nodes defining that edge or face are also rotated
into that same coordinate system (see Figure 14.6: Constraints on Rotated Nodes). Therefore any
symmetry/antisymmetry displacement boundary conditions applied to the nodes on adjoining surfaces
148

should reference the same coordinate system. If you apply the symmetry/antisymmetry displacement
boundary conditions to areas or lines, you should verify that the constraints all "point" in the same direction
on each surface. If they do not, apply the boundary conditions to the individual nodes.
Caution: If all of the DOFs of the nodes on an edge (or face) are not fully constrained (are only
partially constrained, e.g. only UX is constrained) and the nodal rotations of these nodes are not
the same, the stress results at these nodes may be inaccurate if the p-level of the attached elements exceeds 3.
Nodal coordinate systems which are not necessarily parallel to the global Cartesian system are formed
when you invoke symmetry or antisymmetry displacement constraints on model surfaces.
Figure 14.6 Constraints on Rotated Nodes
Loads Applicable to a p-Method Analysis

Table 2.5: Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis of this manual describes the loads applicable to a static
analysis. The following is a brief discussion of each type of loading.
Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) are DOF constraints usually specified at model boundaries
to define rigid support points. They are also used to indicate symmetry boundary conditions and points
of known motion. The directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
Displacement boundary conditions that are applied to all nodes on an element edge or face will also
constrain the higher-order deformations along that edge or face.
Conversely, if all of the nodes are not constrained in that direction, then those lower-order deformations
will be constrained but not the higher-order ones. Never apply a displacement only at a midside node
on an edge. (You may, however, apply a single constraint at a corner node.)
Imposed motions may only vary linearly over an element edge or face. The program will ignore an imposed
quadratic variation.
Forces (FX, FY, FZ) are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied
by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
Moments (MX, MY, MZ) are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions
implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
149

Caution: Observe the following cautions:
You should avoid applying single-point loads or constraints, since they cause stress singularities. If these loads or constraints are applied, exclude the elements attached to these nodes
from the convergence computations. See the "Accounting for Stress Singularities" section
later in this chapter.
Do not apply forces and moments to the midside nodes. You may only apply these loads at
the corner nodes. In addition, out-of-plane (element ROTZ) moments may not be applied to
SHELL150.
Pressures (PRES) are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior. Positive values of pressure
act towards the element face (resulting in a compressive effect).
Temperatures (TEMP) are applied to study the effects of thermal expansion or contraction (that is, thermal
stresses). The coefficient of thermal expansion must be defined if thermal strains are to be calculated.
You can read in temperatures from a thermal analysis, or you can specify temperatures directly on the
nodes or the solid model keypoints.
To obtain temperatures from a thermal analysis:
Mesh the p-element model.
Convert the p-element types to the following thermal element types: PLANE145 to PLANE77, PLANE146
to PLANE35, SOLID147 to SOLID90, and SOLID148 to SOLID87. There is no thermal equivalent for
SHELL150.
Run the thermal analysis.
Change the element types back to the p-element types in order to perform the p-method structural
analysis.
For the remainder of the analysis, continue with the same procedure as defined for h-elements (see
the ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide).
Gravity, spinning, etc. are inertia loads that affect the entire structure. Density must be defined if inertia
effects are to be included.
4.
Specify load step options. The following solution options are available to aid in solving a p-Method
analysis:
Convergence criteria specifications
Specifications for controlling p-levels
Accounting for stress singularities
As mentioned earlier in this section, a p-method analysis works with a series of iterations, or loops,
checking for convergence each time. The PPRANGE command is used to specify the overall range where
the p-level may vary (somewhere between 2 and 8). For analyses beginning at p=2, each element will
have its solution checked for convergence against established criteria [PCONV]. If the solution is within
the requested tolerance [PMOPTS], that element will have its p-level held to 2. Those elements that did
not converge within the specified criteria (that is, not fixed at p=2 for the first iteration), will have their
p-level increased, and another solution (iteration) will then be performed. At each iteration the convergence criteria (strain energy, displacement, stress, etc.) is checked, and if converged, the solution stops.
Also, those elements whose individual solutions are considered to be converged will have their p-level
held at the current p-level. This process is continued until all specified convergence criteria are met, or
the maximum p-range has been reached.
1410

Convergence Criteria Specifications
Convergence criteria may be global (for strain energy) or local. If you are specifically interested in the
results at certain points in the model, then you should use local convergence criteria. Use this option to
specify which areas of your model you would like to monitor for analysis convergence, as well as the
type of criteria you would like to use to control convergence. Typically, you should select a few points
of interest (nodes), at which to specify the convergence criteria (deflection, stress, strain, etc.). In most
cases, the default convergence tolerance (5%) is sufficient for generally good results. You may want to
lower this tolerance if you require a more accurate solution, such as for a fatigue evaluation. For a design
study or optimization analysis, a higher tolerance will cut down on run times.
Command(s): PCONV
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Convergence Crit
For SHELL150, you also have the option to choose a layer (TOP, MID, or BOT) for stress or strain convergence criteria. If you are working with intersecting shells, it is recommended that you choose MID as the
layer for convergence checking.
Caution: Do not specify stress or strain criteria at nodes where there are singularities or at nodes
along material interfaces. These locations will not converge due to the singularity.
When choosing locations for specifying convergence criteria, you should concentrate your monitoring
in the areas of high stress or at the point of maximum displacement rather than where stresses, strains,
or displacements are relatively insignificant.
Specifications for Controlling p-levels
You may specify the starting (defaults to 2) and maximum (defaults to 8) p-levels that you wish to allow
for your analysis [PPRANGE]. You may wish to start at a higher p-level if you have already completed an
analysis and you want to perform a re-analysis (for a design change, for instance) and you know the final
p-level where convergence will occur for most elements. You may also want to restrict the maximum plevel to less than 8 if conserving disk space or run time.
Adjust the starting and maximum p-level in portions of your model using element KEYOPT selections.
Accounting for Stress Singularities
If the model contains any re-entrant (internal or concave) corners that are not modeled with a fillet radius,
or contains point loads or any other areas of stress singularities, you should consider excluding these
areas from the convergence computations. All elements that have a node at the singularity should be
excluded. One exception applies to fracture mechanics. In that situation, you should not exclude elements
at or near the crack tip.
Command(s): PEXCLUDE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain Energy> Exclude Elems
You can reassign, or re-include, elements for convergence checking. You may determine which elements
have been included or excluded by listing [PINCLUDE,STAT; PEXCLUDE,STAT; or *GET] or plotting elements [EPLOT]. Excluded elements will appear `whited-out' in the plot. You may also select included or
excluded elements by issuing the ESEL command directly [ESEL,,PEXC or ESEL,,PINC] (no GUI equivalent).
This facilitates using these elements as a component [CM].
Command(s): PINCLUDE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain Energy> Include Elems
5.
Save a backup copy of the database.

Command(s): SAVE
1411

6.
Start the p-level iterations and solution process. The output will provide a summary of each loop, indicating the current p-level, the convergence statistics, and the status of how many elements have converged.
Command(s): SOLVE
14.3.5. Helpful Hints for Common Problems

If the analysis is not successful, try the following steps to identify and correct the cause for failure:
Problem: "Negative Pivot" error encountered.
Possible Cause: Insufficient constraints to prevent rigid-body motion (the component can slide or rotate in one
direction because there are no constraints to prevent it from doing so).
Solution: Add enough displacement constraints to prevent any rigid-body motion.
Problem: Solution does not converge to within the requested tolerance.
Possible Causes: There are several possible causes. You may use the general postprocessor [/POST1] to look at
this solution in order to determine the difficulty.
Possible Causes
The convergence criteria is too tight for the maximum allowable plevel and the mesh.
Solution
Relax the convergence criteria.
The convergence criterion was specified at a singularity (infinite stress Do not monitor a singularity point.
or strain value, such as under a point load) or the elements near the
singularity were not excluded.
The mesh is too coarse, especially in the area where the stress is high. Refine the mesh.
The maximum p-level was restricted lower than that required for
convergence.
Allow the maximum p-level to go

higher.
The convergence criterion is at a location where the angle made by Refine the mesh in that region.
adjacent element edges is greater than 55 on a curved boundary.
Caution: You may not restart a p-method analysis.

The fundamental procedures for general postprocessing of results [/POST1] in the ANSYS program are discussed
in Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Although most of these capabilities are directly applicable to p-method analyses, some techniques for reviewing results are unique to pmethod, such as
The p-Element Subgrid
Querying Subgrid Results
Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results
Specialized p-Method Displays and Listings
The results from a p-method analysis are written to the results file, Jobname.RST. They consist of the following
data:
1412

Primary data
Nodal displacements (UX, UY, ROTX, etc.)
Derived data
Nodal and element stresses, nodal and element strains, element forces
Note You must read the results data from the results file (Jobname.RST) into the database [SET] before
displacements may be reviewed during postprocessing. Thermal strains are not available on the results
file.
The tools used for time-history postprocessing [/POST26] are also applicable to p-method analyses, but have
limited functionality, since p-element technology is restricted to linear static analyses. In this section we will explain
those procedures that deviate from standard postprocessing, such as some plotting and printing operations,
etc. Before reading this section, it would be a good idea to review the chapters on postprocessing in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide for more details on postprocessing, in general.
14.3.6.1. The p-Element Subgrid

As mentioned previously, p-method finite element models generally contain fewer elements than do models
meshed with h-elements. Since fewer elements correspond to a coarser mesh, a subgrid approach has been
devised for viewing results in POST1. In this approach, each element is divided into smaller, "h-like" elements.
Both the display of geometric curvature and the display and printout of field quantities (displacements, stresses,
etc.) are affected by this approach. In most cases, a greater number of facets will result in a smoother representation of the element surface and results contours for p-element plots.
The key command involved in the subgrid approach is /EFACET,NUM where NUM represents the number of facets
per element edge (GUI path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape). The example below illustrates
how /EFACET subdivides a quadrilateral element. If NUM = 2, the element has 2 facets per edge and is divided
into 4 subgrid facets by adding a pseudo node at the "center". If NUM = 4, the element has 4 facets per edge which
means two pseudo nodes per edge and 9 interior pseudo nodes are added for each p-element, dividing the
quadrilateral into 16 subgrid facets.
Figure 14.7 p-Element Subgrids for Quadrilateral Elements
As a general rule, for a model with a very coarse mesh or any model in which the p-levels are high (p>3) you
should consider using NUM = 4 to view your field quantities. Since results are available at each subgrid location,
more information will be available at NUM = 4.
14.3.7. Querying Subgrid Results

You have the ability to directly and interactively query subgrid results. You can obtain all subgrid point results
(or element results).
Command(s): No command equivalent.
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Query Results
1413

You may query stresses, strains, and displacements at all subgrid locations that have previously been activated
by the /EFACET command.
14.3.8. Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results

For elements PLANE145, PLANE146, SOLID147, and SOLID148, displacements, stresses, and strains can be listed
[PRNSOL] at all node locations (both corner and midside nodes). For SHELL150, results can be listed (as controlled
by the SHELL command) and plotted at the top/bottom and middle layer locations. Likewise, these nodal values
can be contoured for display purposes [PLNSOL], with the contour resolutions being controlled by the/EFACET
command.
Note Results values for SHELL150 are displayed for the top and bottom layer simultaneously.
When viewing nodal field values across p-element boundaries ([PRNSOL, PLNSOL], or when using the Query
function), results may be displayed in various ways. The results data may be averaged along element boundaries
with the AVRES command. You can average results at all boundaries (the default), or at all boundaries except
where real constant, and/or material type discontinuities exist. If a geometric discontinuity exists, results will not
be averaged at those locations.
Note AVRES has no effect on the nodal degree of freedom solution values (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY,
ROTZ, etc.).
For all of the p-elements, displacement plots are available with both undisplaced structure and undisplaced
edge options [PLDISP]. When using PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER], displaced shape plots reflect each
calculated element subgrid [/EFACET] displacement.
For PLANE145, PLANE146, SOLID147, and SOLID148, stresses and strains can be listed [PRESOL] at all node locations for each element. Results for SHELL150 are listed for the top, middle, and bottom layers with results for
the bottom layer listed first.
Printout is similar to that for h-elements, with nodal results being unaveraged and sorted by element number.
Unlike higher order h-element printout, results are for all nodal locations (corner and midside nodes). Results
may be printed or plotted for the entire model [/GRAPHICS,FULL] or for the model surface only [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Note Issuing the /PMETH,ON command or defining a p-element [ET] will activate PowerGraphics unless
a prior /GRAPHICS,FULL command has been issued. Similarly, /PMETH,OFF will deactivate PowerGraphics
unless /GRAPHICS,POWER has been issued previously.
14.3.8.1. Specialized p-Method Displays and Listings

There are three commands specifically designed for listing or plotting p-element results data [PRCONV, PLCONV,
PPLOT]. You may print [PRCONV] or plot [PLCONV] the previously-specified convergence values [PCONV] versus
characteristic p-levels. The characteristic p-level refers to the p-level range from the minimum specified [PPRANGE]
to the maximum p-level reached during SOLUTION. Final p-levels that were assigned to individual elements can
be viewed by means of the PPLOT command. A convenient way to visualize local convergence criteria at specified
locations in the model is to display a symbol at the location of interest, [/PSYMB,PCON], then issue an element
or node plot.
14.4. Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method)

Follow the steps below to perform a p-method analysis using the GUI.
1414
Section 14.4: Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will perform a p-method analysis on a steel plate with a hole.

For this problem, you will use symmetry boundary conditions to constrain the left side and bottom of the model.
This problem uses element type PLANE145. The material is 1/4" thick steel.
Loading for this problem is: P = (100) (10) (.25) = 250 lbs (total force applied on the right side).
14.4.3. Problem Diagram

Figure 14.8 Steel Plate With a Hole

After you enter the ANSYS program, follow these steps to set the title.
1.
2.
Type the text "p-Method Plate with Hole" and click on OK.
14.4.3.2. Select p-Method

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences. The Preferences for GUI Filtering dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Structural method on. Click the p-Method Struct. option on.
3.
Click on OK.
14.4.3.3. Define the Element Type and Options

1.
2.
3.
Click on OK to accept the default of "2D Quad 145."
4.
Click on Options. The PLANE145 element type options dialog box appears.
1415

5.
In the scroll box for Analysis type, scroll down to "Plane Stress+TK" to select it.
6.
Click on OK.
7.

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete.
2.
3.
Click on OK. The Real Constants for PLANE145 dialog box appears.
4.
Enter .25 for thickness and click on OK.
5.

1.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
Enter 30e6 for EX (Young's modulus).
4.
Enter 0.29 for PRXY and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined
window on the left.
5.
14.4.3.6. Create Plate with Hole

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Rectangle> By Dimensions. The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 0,20 for the X-coordinates and 0,10 for the Y-coordinates. Use the TAB key to move between fields.
3.
Click on OK. The rectangle appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Circle> By Dimensions.
The Circular Area by Dimensions dialog box appears.
5.
Enter 5 for outer radius.
6.
Click on OK. The circle appears on the ANSYS Graphics window, on the lower left corner of the rectangle.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Subtract> Areas.
The Subtract Areas picking menu appears.
8.
Click once on the rectangle to select it.
9.
Click on OK in the picking menu. Another Subtract Areas picking menu appears.
10. Click once on the circle to select it.

11. Click on OK in the picking menu. A semicircle is removed from the lower left-hand corner of the plate.
14.4.3.7. Mesh the Areas

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. The MeshTool appears.
2.
Click the SmartSize check box on. Set the SmartSize slider to 5.
1416
Section 14.4: Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method)

3.
In the Mesh section of the MeshTool, choose Areas and Free. Then click the MESH button. The Mesh
Areas picking menu appears.
4.
Click on Pick All. A mesh for the plate is created.
5.
Click Close to close the MeshTool.
6.
14.4.3.8. Define Symmetry Boundary Conditions

1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.
2.
In the top two menus, pick "Nodes" and "By Location."
3.
Enter 0 for Min, Max and click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement>
Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
Click on OK to accept the default of symmetric surface normal to X-axis. The displacement symbols appear
down the left edge of the drawing.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.
7.
Click the "Y coordinates" option on. Click OK.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement>
Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
9.
In the drop down menu for Symm surface is normal to, select "Y-axis."
10. Click OK. The displacement symbols appear along the bottom of the drawing.
14.4.3.9. Define Pressure Load along Right Edge.

1.
2.
Click the "X coordinates" option on.
3.
Enter 20 for Min, Max and click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes.
5.
Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears.
6.
Enter 100 for pressure value and click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
14.4.3.10. Define Convergence Criteria

1.
appears.
2.
In the Selection field, enter NCVG = NODE(0,5,0) and click on Accept.
3.
Click on Close.
4.
In the ANSYS Input window, enter PCONV,1,S,X,NCVG and press ENTER.
14.4.3.11. Solve the Problem

1.

1417

2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then close it.
3.
Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
Click on Close when the Solution is done window appears.
14.4.3.12. Review the Results and Exit ANSYS

In this step, you will review results as deformed shape and SX contour plot.
1.
2.
3.
Click the "Def + undeformed" option on. Click on OK. The deformed and undeformed shapes appear in
the ANSYS Graphics window.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The
5.
In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Stress" to select it. In the scroll box on the right, click once on
"X-direction SX" to select it.
6.
Click on OK. Review the graphic using the legend in the graphics window. Expected results are: Max
displacement = .97x10-4 in, and Max stress in X direction = 437 psi.
7.
Click on QUIT on the ANSYS Toolbar.
8.
Choose a save option and click on OK.
14.5. Sample p-Method Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example p-method analysis of a plate with a hole using the ANSYS commands shown below
instead of GUI choices. All items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/TITLE, p-method plate with hole problem
/PREP7
ET,1,PLANE145,,,3
R,1,.25
MP,EX,1,30e6
MP,PRXY,1,0.29
RECTNG,0,20,0,10
PCIRC,5,,0,360
ASBA,1,2
SMRTSIZ,5
AMESH,3
SAVE
FINISH
/SOLU
NSEL,S,LOC,X,0
DSYM,SYMM,X
NSEL,S,LOC,Y,0
DSYM,SYMM,Y
NSEL,S,LOC,X,20
SF,ALL,PRES,-100
ALLSEL
NCVG=NODE(0,5,0)
PCONV,1,S,X,NCVG
SOLVE
/POST1
SET,1
PLNSOL,S,X
PLDISP,1
FINISH
1418
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections

15.1. An Overview of Beams
Beam elements are used to create a mathematical one-dimensional idealization of a 3-D structure. They offer
computationally efficient solutions when compared to solid and shell elements.
The discussion in this chapter applies only to BEAM44, which is a 3-D tapered unsymmetric beam; and BEAM188
and BEAM189, which are 3-D finite strain beams. These beams provide more robust nonlinear analysis capabilities,
and significant improvements in cross section data definition, analysis, and visualization, as compared to other
ANSYS beams. See the descriptions of the BEAM44, BEAM188, and BEAM189 elements in the ANSYS Elements
Reference for more information.
Note If you are using the cross section capabilities described in this chapter with BEAM44 elements,
be aware that you cannot use these capabilities to define tapered sections. In addition, the postprocessing
visualization capabilities described in this chapter are not applicable to BEAM44 elements.
Note Custom cross sections may not be used with the CDWRITE command.
15.2. What Are Cross Sections?

A cross section defines the geometry of the beam in a plane perpendicular to the beam axial direction. ANSYS
supplies a library of eleven commonly-used beam cross section shapes, and permits user-defined cross section
shapes. When a cross section is defined, ANSYS builds a numeric model using a nine node cell for determining
the properties (Iyy, Izz, etc.) of the section and for the solution to the Poisson's equation for torsional behavior.
Figure 15.1: Plot of a Z Cross Section shows the centroid and shear center of the cross section and the calculated
section properties:
Figure 15.1 Plot of a Z Cross Section
Cross sections and user section meshes may be saved and stored in cross section library files. You may assign
beam cross sections as attributes of a line using the LATT command. These section definitions will be incorporated
into the generated beam elements when the line is meshed with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189.
15.3. How to Create Cross Sections

The general procedure for creating cross sections consists of the following steps:
1.
Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section subtype.
2.
Define the geometry data for the section.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing cross
section libraries:
Table 15.1 ANSYS Cross Section Commands

Command
Purpose
PRSSOL
Prints beam section results (not supported for

BEAM44)
SECTYPE
Associates section Subtype with SECID
SECDATA
Defines section geometry data
SECOFFSET
Defines section offset for beam cross sections
SECCONTROLS Overrides program calculated properties.
152
Section 15.3: How to Create Cross Sections

Command
Purpose
SECNUM
Identifies the SECID to be assigned to an element
SECPLOT
Plots geometry of a beam section to scale
SECWRITE
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh or a custom cross section
/SECLIB
Sets default section library path for SECREAD
SECREAD
Reads a user defined section library, mesh, or custom

cross section
SLIST
Summarizes section properties
SDELETE
Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
15.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Use the SECTYPE command to define a section and associate it with a section ID number. For example, the following command assigns a section identification number (2) to a predefined cross section shape (circular solid):
Command(s): SECTYPE, 2, BEAM, CSOLID
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns
To define your own cross sections, use the subtype MESH. To define a cross section with integrated properties
such as Iyy and Izz, use the subtype ASEC.
15.3.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute
Pointer
Use the SECDATA command to define the geometry of a cross section. Continuing with the example SECTYPE
command shown above, note that the CSOLID subtype has two dimensions: the radius and the number of cells
along its circumference. Thus, the SECDATA command shown below specifies 5 as the radius of the circular
solid beam, and 8 as the number of cells along its circumference. The SECNUM command sets the element section
attribute pointer to 2.
Command(s): SECDATA, 5, 8 and SECNUM, 2
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Attributes> Default Attribs
15.3.2.1. Determining the Number of Cells to Define

In general, you do not need to set the number of cells when building a cross section. ANSYS will calculate values
for the cross section such as the area of the section and the moments of inertia about the coordinate axes using
default integration rules and will produce results that are numerically exact.
Since the torsion constant is derived from the mesh, the accuracy of the torsion constant is directly proportional
to the mesh size of the cross section. The default mesh used by ANSYS yields acceptable engineering accuracy.
There are two ways to specify the mesh size for common sections:
invoking SECTYPE,,,,,REFINEKEY to set the level of mesh refinement for thin-walled sections (CTUBE,
CHAN, I, Z, L, T, HATS, and HREC)
specifying the number of divisions using SECDATA for solid sections (RECT, QUAD, and CSOLID)
153

The thin wall sections have a minimum of two integration points through thickness, so results produced using
thin wall sections should be acceptable for materially nonlinear analysis.
However, when doing a plasticity analysis, the cell defaults may need to be changed for the solid sections. Here
are examples of ANSYS-generated solid section cell meshes and the type of analysis you may wish to use them
with.
Figure 15.2 Types of Solid Section Cell Mesh
15.3.3. Meshing a Line Model with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 Elements

Before you mesh a line with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 elements, some of its attributes must be defined.
These attributes include:
The material set attribute pointer to be associated with the generated beam elements.
The beam element type to be used in meshing the line.
The orientation of the cross section with respect to the beam element axis. For detailed information about
orientation nodes and beams, see Section 7.5.2: Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation Nodes in the
ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
The cross section ID to be assigned to the generated beam elements.
Issue the LATT command to associate these attributes with the selected, unmeshed line:
Command(s):
LATT, MAT, , TYPE, , KB, KE, SECNUM
GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines
See the LATT command description for the meaning of MAT and TYPE.
The following arguments are described here in terms of their applicability to beams.
KB
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model. All beam elements generated will have their beam section
oriented such that the beam z-axis will lie in the plane defined by two line end keypoints and this keypoint
number.
154
Section 15.4: Creating Cross Sections

KE
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model (optional). This keypoint determines the beam orientation
at the end of the line as described above. If KE is given, KB determines the beam orientation at the beginning
of the line. This is useful for creating twisted beams.
SECNUM
Corresponds to the beam section defined by the SECTYPE command with the section ID number as given
by the SECNUM.
15.4. Creating Cross Sections

There are two main types of beam cross sections:
common sections
custom sections
Common sections are described by a standard geometry and a single material. Custom sections are defined by
an arbitrary geometry and may consist of several isotropic materials.
In addition, you can use defined sections to create tapered beams (for BEAM188 and BEAM189 only). See Section 15.4.5: Defining a Tapered Beam for more information.
15.4.1. Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections

The SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns) are all associated with the BeamTool in the GUI. The appearance of the BeamTool varies depending
on the cross section subtype you select:
155
Figure 15.3 BeamTool with Subtypes Drop Down List Displayed
The top part of the BeamTool relates a section ID number to a subtype (and, optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE].
The middle of the BeamTool defines the section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. The bottom contains
the fields for section geometry information [SECDATA]. The dimensions defined by the SECDATA command
are determined by the subtype selected. For documentation about a particular variant of the BeamTool, select
the subtype that you want information about, and then click on the Help button on the BeamTool. The subtype
dimensions are also documented in the SECDATA command description.
15.4.2. Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh

If you need to define a cross section that is not common, you must create a user mesh file. To create a user mesh
file, create a 2-D solid model and save it using the SECWRITE command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections>
Beam> Custom Sectns> Write From Areas). This procedure is outlined in greater detail below:
1.
Create all areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas).
2.
Overlap the areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Overlap> Areas) or
glue them (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Glue> Areas) where appropriate.
3.
Save the model.
156
Section 15.4: Creating Cross Sections

4.
Set the number of line divisions for all lines (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls>
ManualSize> Lines> Picked Lines or use the MeshTool).
5.
Select Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Write From Areas. A picker
appears. Pick the area(s) of the cells.
6.
ANSYS creates cells on the areas. ANSYS may display bad shape messages during the mesh - these
messages can be ignored. However, you may see an "Unable to mesh area ...." message. If you do, clear
the elements from all areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas) and repeat steps 4
and 5.
7.
Write the .SECT file out to a unique name in the Write Section Library File dialog box and click on OK.
8.
Read in the user mesh file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect
Mesh) to calculate the section properties. Material properties must be defined to calculate the cross
section shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and the shear centers.
Note Even if you have already set LESIZE, you will see the following message:
Line element sizes may need to be specified for desired cross-section mesh. Please refer to the
LESIZE command.
If you have already set the line element size, click on the Close button to continue. If you have not already
set it, issue LESIZE with the appropriate information.
When creating cells on the area using the GUI, you do not need to define a plane element type. On the
other hand, a plane element type must be defined if the user issues the SECWRITE command explicitly.
MESH200 with KEYOPT(1) = 7 and PLANE82 are the only valid plane element types.
15.4.3. Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple
Materials
When doing a plasticity analysis, you may need to refine the cross section mesh. A cross section consisting of
more than one material may be defined to represent layers, reinforcements or sensors. When defining a multiplematerial cross section, you will need to specify the material that each cross section cell is made of. You may take
a previously-created cross section and modify it.
To create a custom cross section with a refined mesh and/or multiple materials, perform the following tasks:
1.
Either read a common section (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns>
Edit/Built-up> Edit Common) from the ANSYS database or read a custom section from a .SECT file.
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom)
2.
ANSYS displays a MESH200 plot in the Graphics Window.
3.
Refine the section mesh. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Refine Mesh)
4.
Modify the cell materials. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Modify Material) If you want to create a multiple-material section, define the materials. This is necessary to calculate the shear correction factors and material-weighted centroids.
5.
Save the section to a .SECT file using SECWRITE (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom
Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Save).
6.
To calculate the section properties and use a custom section in the analysis, read in the user mesh file
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect Mesh).
157

Note If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the SECTYPE and SECREAD
commands to recompute the cross section.
When a cross section has multiple materials, and /ESHAPE is used to produce contour plots of stresses
(and other quantities), the element averages the stresses across material boundaries. To limit this behavior, use small cross section cells around the material boundaries.
When a cross section has multiple materials, the multiple materials will not be displayed in an element
plot with /ESHAPE,1. The multiple materials can be verified by viewing the cross section in the Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom submenu.
When using the SECWRITE command explicitly, a section with multiple materials can be created by assigning material attributes to the areas. During meshing, the elements inherit the material attribute from
the area and this attribute is written to the .SECT file.
15.4.4. Defining Composite Cross Sections

A composite cross section is a cross section consisting of at least two materials and meshed with a user-defined
mesh. When creating a composite section, define the materials before running the SECREAD command. This is
necessary to calculate the shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and the shear centers.
Note If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the SECREAD command
to recompute the cross section.
You can save composite cross sections as custom cross sections. For information on custom cross sections, see
Section 15.4.1: Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections
15.4.5. Defining a Tapered Beam

For BEAM188 and BEAM189, you can define tapered beams using the TAPER option on the SECTYPE command
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Taper Sections). The tapered section varies linearly between
two specified locations, (x1, y1, z1) and (x2, y2, z2). Thus, two SECDATA commands are required to define the
taper as shown below. At each of these end points, a valid beam section ID must be input (station-1 and station2 in the example below).
SECTYPE,SECID,TAPER
SECDATA,station-1,x1,y1,z1
SECDATA,station-2,x2,y2,z2
The following is a typical command input stream used to create a tapered cross section:
sectype,1,beam,rect
secdata,.0001,0.5
sectype,2,beam,rect
secdata,3,0.5
sectype,3,taper
secdata,1,0.0,0.0
secdata,2,0.0,20.0
! define cross section at first end point

! define cross section at far end
! new Section ID for tapered beam analysis
! section 1 at location (0,0,0)
! section 2 at location (0,20,0)
Continuing with this example, you can then use 3 as the taper section ID when assigning mesh attributes with
the SECNUM or LATT command. The resulting beam cross section is (0.0001*0.5) at end 1, and linearly tapers
to (3*0.5) at end 2.
The following assumptions apply to tapered beams defined with this method:
The end sections must be defined prior to defining the taper.
Sections defined at the end points must be topologically identical.
158
Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections
A section cannot taper to a point (or zero area) at either end.
The arbitrary beam section type (ASEC on the SECTYPE command) is not supported for tapered beams.
The program performs a number of checks (although not completely comprehensive) to ensure topological
equality. The following items are compared:
number of section nodes
number of section elements
section type
If both end stations refer to custom cross sections with multiple materials, you must ensure that material IDs for
the cells are the same for both ends.
At a Gauss point of integration, the BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements will find the closest point on the line
defined by station-1 and station-2. Using this information, a linear interpolation is performed for the cross section
mesh. Therefore, it is very important that the Gauss point be located within the end points. ANSYS will produce
error messages when this is not the case.
The tapered section treatment is significantly more expensive than a constant cross section (since recomputation
is necessary). If this is a concern, use KEYOPT(12) of the beam element to specify the tapered section treatment.
KEYOPT(12) = 0 - Linear tapered section analysis (more accurate, but expensive)
KEYOPT(12) = 1 - Average cross section analysis (an approximation of the order of the mesh size, but faster)
15.5. Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections

The nonlinear general beam section (SECTYPE,,GENB) is an abstract cross section type that allows you to define
axial, flexural, torsional, and transverse shear behavior as a function of axial strain, bending curvature, twist, and
transverse shear strains.
The generalized section form of input does not require cross section geometry data or material data independently.
For purposes of evaluating mass matrices, ANSYS assumes a unit area of cross section. This form of data is useful
for including an experimentally measured nonlinear response of a beam-like structural component, or for including
complex behavior such as cross section distortion (not possible when using normal beam sections).
Nonlinear general beam sections also allow a nonlinear relationship of transverse shear forces to the corresponding
transverse shear strains. Often, the input of generalized beam sections may be a result of a prior detailed slice
analysis (for example, a segment of pipe analyzed using generalized plane strain elements).
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the
form:
A (,T )

E
N
E

0
I1 ( 1,T )

1
M1
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=

JG (,T )

S1
1
G

0
A1 ( 1,T )

S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
159

where:
N = Axial force
M1 = Bending moment in plane XZ
M2 = Bending moment in plane XY
= Torque
S1 = Transverse shear force in plane XZ
S2 = Transverse shear force in plane XY
= Axial strain
1 = Curvature in plane XZ
2 = Curvature in plane XY
= Twist of the cross section
1 = Transverse shear strain in plane XZ
2 = Transverse shear strain in plane XY
AE(,T) = Axial stiffness as a function of axial strain and temperature
E
I1 (1,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane XZ

E
I2 (2,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane XY

JG(,T) = Torsional rigidity, as a function of torsion and temperature
G
A1 (1,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature in plane XZ
G
A2 (2,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature in plane XY
T is the current temperature
Thermal expansion coefficients and mass density for the section as a function of temperature complete the
definition of a generalized cross section.
15.5.1. Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section

Each of the following commands specifies a particular component quantity necessary for defining a nonlinear
general beam section:
Table 15.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data
Command
Quantity Defined and Data Specified
BSAX [1]
Axial force and strain

N, , T
BSM1 [1]
Bending moment and curvature in plane XZ

M1, 1, T
BSM2 [1]
Bending moment and curvature in plane XY

M2, 2, T
BSTQ [1]
Cross section torque and twist

, , T
BSS1 [1]
Transverse shear force and strain in plane XZ

S1, 1, T
BSS2 [1]
Transverse shear force and strain in plane XY

S2, 2, T
BSMD [2]
Mass density of the beam section (assuming a unit thickness)

DENS, T
1510
Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections

BSTE [2]
Thermal expansion coefficient

ALPHA, T
1.
Repeatable for six independent temperatures, and up to 20 strain values.
2.
Repeatable for six different temperatures.
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the generalized section data components as temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If
you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous value.
15.5.1.1. Strain Dependencies

Each component of a nonlinear beam section definition (axial, bending, torque, and transverse shear) can be a
nonlinear function of the corresponding strain. The terms generalized stress and generalized strain describe the
data defined via the BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, and BSS2 commands.
The generalized stress to generalized strain relationship can be nonlinear. The nonlinear response can be either
purely elastic--that is, no permanent deformation, and fully recoverable deformation even though the behavior
is nonlinear--or elasto-plastic. The option of a purely elastic or elasto-plastic response (SECTYPE) applies to all
components of a beam section definition.
The following input illustrates a typical (temperature-independent) nonlinear axial behavior:
sectype,1,genb,plastic
bsax ,0.0008,200
bsax ,0.001 ,240
bsax ,0.0014,300
!
!
!
!
Elasto-plastic response
Axial strain 0.0008, Force of 200
Axial strain 0.001 , Force of 240
Axial Strain 0.0014, Force of 300
ANSYS conventions for defining a uniaxial elasto-plastic response apply. The range of strain values must cover
the anticipated maximum deformation of the structure. For all nonlinear beam section specifications, the stiffness
disappears if the structural response is beyond the maximum strain value of the section data. You can define a
maximum of 20 generalized stress-strain points at each temperature value.
For a plastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,PLASTIC), you must define all section components
with two or more stress-strain points. However, you can define a linear behavior for any section component by
specifying a larger maximum strain value. Following is an example where axial behavior is nonlinear, but bending
response is linear:
sectype,1,genb,plastic
bsax,0.0008,200
bsax,0.001 ,240
bsax,0.0014,300
! bending
bsm1,0.1,10000
bsm1,1,100000
! Elasto-plastic response
For an elastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,ELASTIC), a single stress-strain point is adequate
for defining linear behavior.
15.5.2. Considerations for Employing Nonlinear General Beam Sections

You can define nonlinear general beam sections only when using element BEAM188 or BEAM189. When using
nonlinear beam section data, the following conditions apply:
1511
The section data defined by each command listed in Table 15.2: ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the SECTYPE
command.
Beam stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE quantities.
Initial stress specification (ISTRESS, ISFILE, ISWRITE) is not feasible.
Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not available.
Only the temperature of the beam axis is relevant.
15.6. Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries

Cross section data for common sections such as CHAN and RECT can be stored in cross section libraries. To create
standard cross sections for later use, create one or more cross sections, edit the Jobname.LOG file, and copy
the appropriate SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands into a separate file with a SECT extension.
These predefined cross sections can later be read into a model using the /SECLIB command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Section Library> Import Library).
15.7. Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

You can use BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements to model not only straightforward beam bending and shear response but also to model beam response that involves lateral-torsional buckling. To create this type of model,
you will need to create an adequately fine mesh of beam elements. You typically need to model a single beam
member using a series of short beam elements, as shown in Figure 15.4: Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever
I-Beam.
1512
Section 15.7: Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
Figure 15.4 Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam
Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam, Modeled With 60 BEAM188 Elements (Displayed

Using /ESHAPE)
Chapter 7, Buckling Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide documents buckling analysis in detail. This
sample problem shows what happens when a cantilever beam is subjected to a concentrated end load, which
causes lateral-torsional buckling.

A straight, slender cantilever beam has one fixed end and one free end. A load is applied to the free end. The
model is analyzed using eigenvalue buckling calculations, followed by a nonlinear load versus deflection study.
The objective is to determine the critical value of the end load (indicated by P in Figure 15.5: Diagram of a Beam
With Deformation Indicated) at which the beam undergoes a bifurcation indicated by a large displacement in
the lateral direction.

Young's modulus = 1.0 X 104 psi
Poisson's ratio = 0.0
1513

L = 100 in
H = 5 in
B = .2 in
P = 1 lb.

Figure 15.5 Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated
15.7.4. Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear Collapse

Eigenvalue buckling calculation is a linearized calculation, and is generally valid only for elastic structures. The
yielding of materials occurs usually at loads lesser than that predicted by eigenvalue buckling analysis. This type
of analysis tends to need less computation time than a full nonlinear buckling analysis.
You can also perform a nonlinear load versus deflection study, which employs an arc length solution strategy
to identify critical loads. While the approach is more general, a collapse analysis may be computationally intensive.
The nonlinear collapse analysis must be performed on a structure with imperfections built in to the model, since
a perfect model will not show signs of buckling. You can add imperfections by using eigenvectors that result
from an eigenvalue buckling analysis. The eigenvector determined is the closest estimate of the actual mode of
buckling. The imperfections added should be small when compared to a typical thickness of the beam being
analyzed. The imperfections remove the sharp discontinuity in the load-deflection response. It is customary to
use one to ten percent of the beam/shell thickness as the maximum imperfection introduced. The UPGEOM
command adds displacements from a previous analysis and updates the geometry to the deformed configuration.
1514
15.7.5. Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry

1.
2.
Enter the text "Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis" and click on OK.
3.
Start the model creation preprocessor and define the keypoints for the beam. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS, and enter these keypoint
numbers and the coordinates in the dialog box as indicated:
Keypoint
Number
X Location
Y Location
Z Location
Click This Button to Accept Values
Apply
100.0
Apply
50
OK
4.
Create a straight line through keypoints 1 and 2. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. The Create Straight Line picker appears. Select keypoints 1 and 2 in the Graphics window and click on OK in the Create Straight Line picker.
5.
Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. Enter buckle.db in the Save Database
to box and click on OK.
15.7.6. Define Element Type and Cross Section Information

1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences and select the "Structural" check box. Click on OK to
continue.
2.
dialog box appears.
3.
Click on Add ... The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
4.
In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it.
5.
In the scroll box on the right, click on "3D finite strain, 3 node 189" to select BEAM189.
6.
Click on OK, and then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
7.
Define a rectangular cross section for the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns. The BeamTool is displayed. ANSYS sets the section ID to 1, and the
subtype to RECT (signified by a rectangle on the subtype button) by default. Since you will be creating
a rectangular cross section, there is no need to change the subtype.
8.
In the lower half of the BeamTool, you will see a diagram of the cross section shape with dimension
variables labeled. Enter the width of the cross section, 0.2, in the box labeled B. Enter the height of the
cross section, 5.0, in the box labeled H. Click on Apply to set the cross section dimensions.
9.
Use the BeamTool to display information about the cross section. Click on the Preview button on the
BeamTool. A diagram and data summary of the cross section appear in the Graphics window. You can
also preview the mesh of the cross section by selecting the Meshview button. Click on the Close button
in the BeamTool to continue.
15.7.7. Define the Material Properties and Orientation Node

1.
1515

2.
In the Material Models Available window on the right, double-click on the following: Structural, Linear,
3.
Enter 1E4 for EX (Young's modulus).
4.
Enter 0.0 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material
5.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to close the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
6.
Replot the line by choosing menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines.
7.
Select the line and define the orientation node of the line as an attribute. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines. The Line Attributes picker appears. Select
the line in the Graphics window and click on Apply in the Line Attributes picker.
8.
The Line Attributes dialog box appears. ANSYS includes the material attribute pointer to the material
set 1, the element type attribute pointer to the local element type 1, and the section attribute pointer
to the section ID 1 by default. Click on the radio button beside the Pick Orientation Keypoint(s) label to
change it to Yes and click on OK.
9.
The Line Attributes picker reappears. Type 3 in the picker, press the Enter key, and click on OK.
10. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not already
selected, select it. Select OK, and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the existing file,
click on OK.
15.7.8. Mesh the Line and Verify Beam Orientation

1.
Define the mesh size and number of divisions. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing>
Size Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines> All Lines. Enter 10 in the No. of Element Divisions box and click on
OK.
2.
Mesh the line. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. Click on MESH
on the MeshTool and the Mesh Lines picker appears. Pick the line in the Graphics window, and then click
on OK in the Mesh Lines picker. Click on Close in the MeshTool to close it.
3.
Rotate the meshed line. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan, Zoom, Rotate. The Pan,
Zoom, Rotate tool appears. Select ISO and click on Close. The beam is rotated in the Graphics window.
4.
Verify the beam orientation. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Select
the radio button next to the /ESHAPE label to turn /ESHAPE on and click on OK.
15.7.9. Define the Boundary Conditions

1.
Define a boundary condition to the fixed end. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Keypoints. The Apply U,ROT on KPs picker appears.
2.
Define keypoint 1 as the fixed end. In the picker, type 1, press the Enter key, then click on OK. The Apply
U,ROT on KPs dialog box appears.
3.
Click on "All DOF" to select it, and click on OK. The boundary condition information appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window at keypoint 1.
4.
Apply a force to the free end. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Force/Moment> On Keypoints. The Apply F/M on KPs picker appears.
5.
Identify keypoint 2 as the free end. Type 2 in the picker, press the Enter key, and then click on OK. The
Apply F/M on KPs dialog box appears.
6.
In the drop down list for Direction of force/mom, select FY.
1516

7.
Enter 1 for the Force/moment value in the Apply F/M on KPs dialog box, and click on OK. The force
symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 2.
8.
Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not already
selected, select it. Click on OK and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the existing file,
click on OK again.
15.7.10. Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

1.
Set analysis options. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type>
Analysis Options. The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
2.
Use the sparse solver for the solution. In the Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box, make sure that
Sparse solver is selected in the drop down box beside the Equation solver label.
3.
Include prestress effect, which will be stored for later use in the eigenvalue buckling calculation. In the
drop down list labeled Stress stiffness or prestress, select "Prestress ON." Click on OK to close the Static
or Steady-State Analysis dialog box.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information in
the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load
Step window to begin the solution.
5.
When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
7.
8.
Select the "Eigen Buckling" option, then click on OK.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Eigenvalue Buckling
Options dialog box appears. Select the Block Lanczos option. Enter 4 in the No. of modes to extract box,
then click on OK.
10. Set the element calculation key for the MXPAND command. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes.
11. In the Expand Modes dialog box, enter 4 in the No. of modes to expand box, change the No to Yes beside
the Calculate elem results label, and click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information in
the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load
Step window to begin the solution.
13. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Be sure the radio button beside
the label Display of element shapes ... (/ESHAPE) is set to On and click on OK.
15. Display the results summary. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Results Summary.
After you have reviewed the results, click on Close to close the window.
16. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
17. Plot the first mode shape of the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results>
Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Select Def + undef edge and click on
OK.
18. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
1517
15.7.11. Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

1.
Introduce model imperfections calculated by the previous analysis. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Update Geom. In the Update nodes using results file displacements dialog
box, enter 0.002 in the Scaling factor box, 1 in the Load step box, 1 in the Substep box, and file.rst in the
Selection box. Click on OK.
2.
3.
Select the "Static" option, then click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File and be
sure the drop down lists display All Items and All entities respectively. Choose the Every substep for the
File write frequency radio button and click on OK.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. Select the radio button
beside Large deform effects, then click on OK.
6.
Set the arc-length method, and set parameters for the termination of the solution. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Arc-Length Opts. Select the Arc-length method
on/off radio button and set it to On. Choose the pull down menu next to the Lab label and select Displacement lim. Enter 1.0 in the Max desired U box. Enter 2 in the Node number for VAL box. Choose the
pull down menu next to the Degree of freedom label and select UZ. Click on OK.
7.
Define the number of substeps to be run during this load step. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps. Enter 10000 in the Number of substeps box and
click on OK.
8.
Solve the current model. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the
summary information in the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK
in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution. A Nonlinear Solution window with a Stop
button appears. A convergence graph is built, and can take several minutes to complete.
9.
You may receive a warning message. You should review the information in the message but you do not
need to close it. Continue waiting for the solution to complete. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
15.7.12. Plot and Review the Results

1.
Replot the beam. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.
Define the load point deflection to be read from the results file. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist
PostPro> Define Variables. When the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box appears, select Add.
3.
When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, be sure the Nodal DOF result option is selected.
Click on OK.
4.
The Define Nodal Data picker appears. In the Graphics window, pick node 2 (the end node on the right
side of the beam) and click on OK.
5.
The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable and Node number are
both set to 2. Enter TIPLATDI in the User-specified label box. Select Translation UZ from the menu and
click on OK.
6.
Define the total reaction force to be read from the results file. Choose Add from the Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box.
7.
When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, choose the Reaction forces radio button and
then click on OK.
1518
Section 15.8: Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method

8.
The Define Reaction Force picker appears. Pick the end node on the left side of the beam and click on
OK.
9.
The Define Reaction Force Variable dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable is set to 3 and
Node number is set to 1. Select Struct Force FY from the menu and click on OK. Click on Close to close
the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Multiply. In the Multiply TimeHistory Variables dialog box, enter 4 in the Reference number for result box, -1.0 in the 1st Factor box,
and 3 in the 1st Variable box. Click on OK.
11. Display the X variable. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph. Choose
the single variable button, enter 2 in the Single variable no. box, and click on OK.
12. Plot the load versus deflection curve to confirm the critical load calculated by the eigenvalue method.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Graph Variables. Enter 4 in the 1st variable to
graph box. Click on OK.
13. List the variables versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> List Variables. Enter
2 in the 1st variable to list box and 4 in the 2nd variable box and click on OK.
14. Check the values in the PRVAR Command window to see how they compare against the values generated
by the eigenvalue buckling analysis. Expected results are: Critical buckling load, Pcr = 0.01892. Close the
PRVAR Command window.
16. In the ANSYS Toolbar, click on Quit.
17. Choose a save option and click on OK.
15.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method

Here is the input file for the problem described in the previous section:
/GRAPHICS,POWER
/GST,ON
/SHOW,BUCKLE,GRPH
/PREP7
K,1,0,0,0
K,2,100.0,0,0
K,3,50,5,0
LSTR,1,2
ET,1,BEAM189
SECTYPE,1, BEAM, RECT
SECDATA, 0.2, 5.0
SLIST, 1, 1
MP,EX,1,1E4
MP,NUXY,1,0.0
LSEL,S, , , 1, 1, 1
LATT,1, ,1,0, 3, ,1
LESIZE, all, , ,10
SECNUM,1
LMESH,all
/VIEW,,1,1,1
/ESHAPE,1
EPLOT
DK,1, , , ,0,ALL
FK,2,FY,1.0
FINISH
/SOLU
PSTRES,ON
EQSLV,SPARSE
! EQSLV,SPARSE is the default for static and full transient
SOLVE
FINISH
/SOLU
1519

ANTYPE,BUCKLE
BUCOPT,LANB,4
MXPAND,4,,,YES
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
/ESHAPE,1
/VIEW, 1 ,1,1,1
/ANG, 1
SET,LIST
SET,1,1
PLDISP,2
FINISH
/PREP7
UPGEOM,0.002,1,1,file,rst
/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
NLGEOM,ON
ARCLEN,ON,25,0.0001
ARCTRM,U,1.0,2,UZ
NSUBST,10000
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NSOL,2,2,U,Z,TIPLATDI
RFORCE,3,1,F,Y
PROD,4,3, , , , , ,-1.0,1,1
XVAR,2
PLVAR,4
PRVAR,2,4
FINISH

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe additional beam analyses.
The ANSYS Verification Manual contains one beam test case:
VM222 - Warped Cantilever Beam
1520
Chapter 16: Shell Analysis and Cross Sections

16.1. An Overview of Shells
Shell elements are used to create a mathematical 2-D idealization of a 3-D structure. They offer computationally
efficient solutions for modelling shell structures when compared to solid elements.
The discussion in this chapter applies to SHELL181, which is a 3-D finite strain shell element. This shell element
provides more robust nonlinear analysis capabilities, and significant improvements in cross section data definition,
analysis, and visualization, as compared to other ANSYS shells.
The method for defining shell sections described here can also be used to define the cross-sectional properties
of the layered thermal shell elements, SHELL131 and SHELL132. Discussions in this chapter relating to integration
points (NUMPT on the SECDATA command) and section properties (SECCONTROLS command) do not apply to
SHELL131 and SHELL132.
16.2. What Are Cross Sections?

A cross section defines the geometry of the shell in a plane parallel to the shell x-y plane. Through the section
family of commands, you can describe the z direction of the element by defining consecutive layers. Each layer
may vary in thickness, material type, orientation (from element x-axis), and number of integration points.
Alternatively, you can define homogenous shell section behavior directly via preintegrated shell sections, a
method commonly used in analyses involving laminated composite structures. With preintegrated shell sections,
you can directly specify the membrane, bending, and coupling properties. The preintegrated method also allows
analysis of complex geometry (with repeated patterns such as corrugated sheets) using equivalent shell section
properties. For more information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
16.3. How to Create Cross Sections

The general procedure for creating cross sections consists of the following steps:
1.
Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section.
2.
Define the geometry data for the section.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing cross
section libraries:
Table 16.1 ANSYS Cross Section Commands

Command
Purpose
SECTYPE
Associates section with SECID (section number)
SECDATA
Defines section geometry data
SECCONTROLS Overrides program calculated properties.

SECFUNCTION Specifies shell section thickness as a tabular function.
SECNUM
Identifies the SECID (section number) to be assigned

to an element
SECOFFSET
Defines section offset for shell cross sections
SECPLOT
Plots geometry of a shell section to scale

Command
Purpose
SLIST
Summarizes section properties
SDELETE
Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
Figure 16.1: Plot of a Shell Section shows the layer stacking of a shell section. The layer order, along with material and orientation of each layer, is represented here:
Figure 16.1 Plot of a Shell Section
16.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Use the SECTYPE command to define a section and associate it with a section ID number. For example, the following command assigns a section identification number (2) to a shell section:
Command(s): SECTYPE, 2, SHELL
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
16.3.2. Defining Layer Data

Use the SECDATA command to define the layers of a shell section. Each consecutive SECDATA command defines
the next layer's thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points. (The number of integration
points input on SECDATA is not used by thermal shell elements.) The layer orientation angle is the angle between
the layer coordinate system and the x-axis of the element coordinate system.
You may designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located thru the thickness of each layer.
When only 1, the point is always located midway between the top and bottom surfaces. If 3 or more points, 2
points are located on the top and bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining points are distributed equal
distance between the 2 points. An exception occurs when designating 5 points, where the quarter point locations
162
Section 16.3: How to Create Cross Sections

are moved 5 percent toward their nearest layer surface to agree with the locations selected with real constant
input. The default for each layer is 3.
If a shell section has only one layer, and the number of section integration points is equal to one, then the shell
does not have any bending stiffness. This may result in solver difficulties, and may affect convergence adversely.
Command(s): SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3 SECDATA, 0.5, 2, -45, 3 SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3
16.3.3. Overriding Program Calculated Section Properties

Use the SECCONTROLS command to override the program calculated section properties. By default, the program
calculates shear correction factors and mass for each element based on the input section geometry and material
properties. Any values input on the SECCONTROLS command will replace the defaults. (SECCONTROLS does
not apply to thermal shell elements.)
Command(s): SECCONTROLS, 0.8, 0.0, 0.8, 1.0
16.3.4. Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells)

Use the SECFUNCTION command to associate a tabular thickness variation with the section. A table that describes
thickness with respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system may be associated with a shell section. This
thickness is interpreted as the total thickness of a shell. The total thickness of a layered shell, and all layer thickness
values, will be scaled according to the tabular function.
Command(s): SECFUNCTION, %table_name%
16.3.5. Setting the Section Attribute Pointer

Use the SECNUM command to associate an element with a particular section. Any element created after the
SECNUM command will have this section identification number (2) as its section attribute.
Command(s): SECNUM, 2
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Define> Default Attribs
16.3.6. Associating an Area with a Section

Use the AATT command to associate an area with a shell section type. When the area is meshed, the new elements
are associated with the section specified on the AATT command. The section specified by the SECNUM command
is ignored.
Command(s): AATT, , , , , 2
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> All Areas
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Areas
16.3.7. Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections

The SECTYPE, SECDATA, SECOFFSET, SECFUNCTION, and SECCONTROLS commands (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit) are all associated with the ShellTool in the GUI.
163
Figure 16.2 Shell Tool With Layup Page Displayed
The top part of the Layup page of the ShellTool relates a section ID number to a Shell section type (and, optionally,
a section name) [SECTYPE]. The middle part of the page of the ShellTool defines each layer in the positive Z
direction of the element [SECDATA]. Note that the order of the rows in the spreadsheet ascends up the page,
resembling that stacking of the layers. (Integration point data for each layer is ignored by thermal shell elements.)
The bottom contains the fields for section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. You can define tapered
shells by specifying a section function relating thickness to global coordinates [SECFUNCTION].
Figure 16.3 Shell Tool With Section Controls Page Displayed
The transverse shear stiffness, hourglass coefficients and drill stiffness of the sections are calculated from the
section geometry and material properties. The default added mass per unit area of the section is always zero.
On the Section Controls page, you can override the program calculated quantities [SECCONTROLS]. (The Section
Controls page does not apply to thermal shell elements.)
164
Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections
Figure 16.4 Shell Tool With Summary Page Displayed
On the Summary page, you can review the section properties.
16.3.8. Managing Cross Section Libraries

Cross section data for shell sections can be stored in cross section libraries. To create standard cross sections for
later use, create one or more cross sections, edit the Jobname.LOG file, and copy the appropriate SECCONTROLS,
SECDATA, SECFUNCTION, SECOFFSET, and SECTYPE commands into a separate file with a SECT extension.
16.4. Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections

You can use preintegrated general shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS) when using the SHELL181 element, provided
that linear elastic material behavior is acceptable. Compared to standard shell usage with independent material
and section definitions, preintegration requires fewer system resources because numerical integration through
the thickness of the shell is not required.
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of the form:
N A
= T
M B
T
B
I M
(T - T )
D
BT

[S] = [E]{ }
{
where:
{N} = {N11, N22, N12} are membrane stress resultants per unit length
{M} ={M11, M22, M12} are bending stress resultants per unit length
{} = {11 , 22, 12} are membrane strains
{} = {11,22,12} are curvatures
{S} = {S1, S2} are transverse shear forces per unit length
{}={1,2 } are transverse shear strains
[A], [B], [D], and [E] are the section-stiffness matrices for membrane, coupling, bending, and shear behavior,
respectively
{MT} are stress resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained model
{BT} are bending-related stress resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained model
165

I
T is the stress-free initial temperature

T is the current temperature
(Subscripts 1 and 2 denote shell surface coordinates as employed by the shell element.)
The preintegrated form of input allows you to import homogenous section-stiffness constants evaluated in
other analyses or by third-party, special-purpose software tools. For example, defining preintegrated section
stiffnesses [A], [B], and [D] is common in analyses of layered composites, corrugated shells, or other complex
section construction.
16.4.1. Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section

Each of the following commands specifies a particular component quantity necessary for defining a preintegrated
shell section:
Table 16.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data
Command
Quantity Defined and Data Specified
SSPA
Membrane stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [A]

A11, A21, A31,A22,A32,A33, T
SSPB [1]
Coupling stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [B]

B11, B21, B31,B22,B32,B33, T
SSPD [1]
Bending stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [D]

D11, D21, D31,D22,D32,D33, T
SSPE [1]
Transverse shear stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [E]

E11, E21, E22, T
SSMT
Membrane thermal effects -- {MT}

T
T
T
M 11, M 22, M 12, T
SSBT [1]
Bending thermal effects -- {BT}

T
T
T
B 11, B 22, B 12, T
SSPM
Mass density of the shell section (assuming a unit thickness)

DENS, T
1.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary to issue
the SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, and SSBT commands. In this case, the only relevant quantities are membrane
stiffness (SSPA), membrane thermal effects (SSMT), and density (SSPM).
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the preintegrated shell section data as temperaturedependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue
a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous value.
16.4.2. Considerations for Employing Preintegrated Shell Sections

You can define preintegrated shell sections only when using the SHELL181 element. When using preintegrated
shell section data, the following conditions apply:
The section data defined by each command listed in Table 16.2: ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the SECTYPE command.
You cannot use the shell element with heat-transfer shells.
166
Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections
Shell stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE quantities.
Initial stress specification (ISTRESS, ISFILE, ISWRITE) is not feasible.
The thickness of the shell is assumed to remain constant even in a large-strain analysis.
Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not available.
The preintegrated stiffness components must yield a positive definite section stiffness at analysis time.
If using preintegrated shell sections in a contact analysis, ANSYS recommends the pure Lagrange multiplier
method.
For standard layered-shell sections, you can obtain submatrices [A], [B], [D], and [E] via the SLIST command's
FULL option.
167
168
creep, 831
hyperelasticity, 821
large strain, 86
plasticity, 89
Index
Symbols
2-D fracture models, 113
3-D fracture models, 114
A
adaptive descent, 853
adequate mesh density, 864
alpha (mass) damping, 410, 536, 618
alternating stress intensity, 131
amplitude
of harmonic loads, 45
analysis
modal analysis options, 34
reduced transient dynamic, 519
analysis options
harmonic response analysis, 425
mode superposition method, 425
modal analysis, 32, 44, 420
nonlinear static structural analysis, 850
single-point spectrum analysis, 63
transient dynamic analysis, 514, 520
reduced method, 520
analysis type
buckling, 71
full transient, 57
harmonic response, 41
modal, 31
nonlinear structural, 81
p-method, 141
spectrum, 61
static structural, 21, 22
structural, 11
definition of, 11
transient dynamic, 51
animation
gasket results, 1019
anisotropic, 810
applying loads, 32, 44, 420, 857, 860
increments for buckling analysis, 72
modal analysis, 35
nonlinear analysis, 857
p-method, 147
structural static analysis, 28, 28
transient dynamic analysis, 59
using TABLE array parameters, 28
arc-length method, 25, 72, 73, 82, 868
automatic time stepping, 535, 72, 867
Bauschinger effect, 810

beam tool, 155
beams
cross sections, 151
nonlinear general sections, 159
Besseling model, 810
beta (stiffness) damping, 410, 536, 63, 618
bilinear isotropic hardening, 810
bilinear kinematic hardening, 810
birth and death, 870, 870
element, 863
bisection, 85
Block Lanczos extraction method, 425
Block Lanczos method, 33, 317
bonlinear structural analysis
restarts, 860
buckling analysis, 71, 71
eigenvalue, 73
procedure, 73
expand the solution, 76
expansion pass, 76
methods of solution, 71
nonlinear, 72
procedure, 72
obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution, 75
obtain the static solution, 74
C
calculating
covariance in POST26, 623
fracture parameters, 115
cast iron plasticity, 810
causes of nonlinear behavior, 81
changing status, 82
geometric nonlinearities, 82
material nonlinearities, 82
cells
defining for a section, 153
Chaboche model, 810
changing
status, 82
combinations
material model, 835
composite cross section, 158
composites, 121
element types for, 121
Index
guidelines, 126
how to model, 121
layer properties, 123
concrete, 810, 829, 863
constant damping ratio, 410, 536, 63, 618
constitutive matrices, 124
constraint equations, 147
with QR Damped method, 319
contact, 82
node-to-node, 863
contour displays, 211, 311, 68, 77, 857, 1019
control elements, 870
controlling cutbacks, 24
controlling p-levels, 147
controlling restarts, 24
convergence
checking, 851
enhancements, 865
failure, 865
convergence criteria, 851
default value, 851
disjointed structures, 851
displacement checking, 851
force checking, 851
p-method, 147
vector norms, 851
convergence tolerances, 24
coupling, 126, 146
covariance
calculating, 623
crack faces, 111
crack front, 111
crack region
modeling, 111
crack tip, 111
creating
sections, 152, 155, 161
beam tool, 155
creep, 88, 829
automatic time stepping, 831
explicit, 829, 855
explicit creep procedure, 831
implicit, 829, 855
implicit creep procedure, 830
material curve fitting, 98
ratio, 855
creep criteria, 27, 855
creep strain rate, 829
cross sections (see sections) (see Sections)
composite, 158
custom convergence criteria, 851
cutback criteria, 24
Index2
CUTCONTROL command
changes through SOLCONTROL, 853
cyclic hardening/softening, 810
D
damped method
modal analysis, 33, 318
damping, 59, 536, 860
spectrum analysis, 618
PSD, 618
table of options, 536
transient dynamic analysis, 57, 59, 514, 522
database output, 22, 38, 410, 421, 57, 514,
524, 76, 850
DDAM (see dynamic design analysis method)
deep drawing, 833
deformed shape
display, 211, 68, 77, 857
displaying, 1019
deleting
sections, 152, 161
deterministic analysis, 62
disjointed structures, 851
display deformed shape, 311, 412
displaying
deformed shapes, 857
DOFs
master, 35
Drucker-Prager, 810
dynamic analyses
spectrum, 61
transient, 51
dynamic design analysis method (DDAM), 62, 625
E
eigenvalue analysis, 31
eigenvalue buckling, 71
eigenvalue buckling solution
buckling analysis, 75
eigenvalue calculation
shift point, 75
eigenvalue extraction methods, 75
eigenvalues, 31
number to be extracted, 75
eigenvectors, 31
elastomers, 817
element birth and death, 863
element damping, 536
element loads, 425
element types
Index
structural, 12
elements
associating sec IDs with, 152, 161
energy release rate, 111, 118
engineering strain, 87
engineering stress, 87
epoxy, 121
equation solvers, 24, 44, 850, 147
equilibrium iterations, 82, 853
number of, 24, 853
error estimation, 211
example problems
beam analysis, 1520
modal analysis, 314
reduced transient dynamic analysis, 540
single-point response spectrum analysis, 617
static analysis, 226
excitation direction, 63
expand
single solution, 524
expand the modes
expand the solution
reduced harmonic response analysis, 421
expanded modes
number to use, 63
expanded solution
review results, 525
expanding modes, 38
expansion frequency range, 38
expansion pass, 421
activating, 38, 421, 524
harmonic response analysis, 421, 427
reduced method, 421
transient dynamic analysis, 518, 524
reduced method, 524
expansion pass options
harmonic response analysis (reduced), 421
modal analysis, 38
transient dynamic analysis (reduced), 524
explicit creep, 829
explicit creep procedure, 831
extra element shapes, 870
extracting modes, 31
extrapolation of results, 27, 410, 421, 524, 856
F
failure criteria, 125
maximum strain, 125
maximum stress, 125
Tsai-Wu, 125
failures
convergence, 865
fatigue
alternating stress intensity, 131
design stress-intensity value (Sm), 132
evaluation procedure, 132
event, 131
event repetitions, 136
fatigue data file (Jobname.FATG), 139
guidelines for assembling events, 137
loading, 131
location, 131
manually stored stresses, 134
material properties, 132
overview, 131
S-N curve, 132
sample input, 139
scale factors, 136
Sm-T curve, 132
strain hardening exponents, 132
stress concentration factors, 132
stress locations, 132
stresses at a cross-section, 135
stresses from results file, 135
with p-elements, 144
fatigue assessments, 144
fatigue calculations
activating, 139
fiberglass, 121
files
Jobname.FATG, 139
.SECT, 156
forced vibrations, 41
forcing frequency range, 410
fracture assessments, 144
fracture mechanics, 111, 111
solving problems, 111
fracture models
2-D, 113
3-D, 114
fracture parameters
calculating, 115
free meshing, 144
free-body analysis (see inertia relief)
frequency range for expansion, 38, 421
frequency vector, 623
frequency-dependent damping ratio, 618
Index3
Index
full harmonic response analysis
procedure, 43
full transient dynamic analysis
procedure, 53
G
gap conditions, 514, 520
and QR Damped method, 514
gasket joints simulation, 101
applications, 103
element topologies, 102
elements, 103
formulation, 102
materials, 104
meshing, 1012
output listing, 1017
overview, 101
plotting data, 1011
procedure, 101
results, 1019
sample problem, 1020
solution, 1016
thickness, 102
gasket results
animation, 1019
POST1, 1019
POST26, 1020
reviewing, 1019
tabular listing, 1019
geometric nonlinearities, 82, 86
geometry data for sections, 152, 161
geometry data of a section, 153, 162
glass, 833
guyan reduction, 320
H
harmonic forcing frequency, 45
full method, 43, 43
procedure, 43
mode superposition method, 424, 427
procedure, 424
sample input, 427
prestressed, 428
reduced method, 419, 423
sample input, 423
uses for, 41
harmonic solutions
number of, 49
Hill anisotropy, 810
Index4
hyperelasticity, 88, 817

Arruda-Boyce model, 819
Blatz-Ko foam model, 820
Gent model, 820
large strain, 817
Mooney-Rivlin model, 818, 821
neo-Hookean model, 819
Ogden compressible foam model, 820
Ogden model, 818
polynomial form model, 819
stability checks, 821
u-P formulation, 821
user-defined option, 821
Yeoh model, 820
I
implicit creep, 829
implicit creep procedure, 830
inertia relief, 29
calculating, 29
output, 29
partial, 29
initial accelerations, 54
initial conditions
transient dynamic analysis, 54, 514, 521
full method, 54
reduced method, 521
initial displacement, 54
initial velocity, 54
integration point, 856
integration time step, 51, 57, 514, 522
guidelines for, 533
interface
material model, 12
J
J-integral, 111, 116
K
kinematic analysis, 860, 867
KSPIN [OMEGA], 88
L
large deflection and load direction, 86
large deformation effects, 22, 57, 72, 86, 88,
860
large strain
analyses, 86, 810
Index
logarithmic strain, 87
true stress, 87
viscoplasticity, 833
layer orientation angle, 123
layer thickness, 123
layered elements, 121
libraries
sections, 1512, 165
library paths
for cross sections, 152
line element results, 211, 311
line search option, 24, 853, 868
list master DOF, 311
listing
section properties, 152, 161
section results, 152
load step options, 38, 421, 524
harmonic response analysis, 49, 420, 425
full method, 49
reduced method, 420
modal analysis, 36
mode superposition transient dynamic analysis, 514
Newton-Raphson, 854
p-method, 147
reduced transient dynamic analysis, 521
spectrum analysis, 63, 618
PSD, 618
single-point, 63
time, 514
full method, 510
reduced method, 521
load steps, 82
applying for transient loading, 510
load types, 27, 35
p-method, 147
load vector, 425, 514, 514
load-versus-time curve, 54
loads
applying, 28, 32, 35, 48, 420, 514, 72,
857, 860, 147
p-method, 147
applying for transient loading, 59
direction in a large-deflection analysis, 86
reduced method, 420

modal analysis, 35
structural static analysis, 28, 28
full method, 59
reduced method, 521
Loads
applying, 44
logarithmic strain, 87, 87
M
macros, 210
mass damping, 536
mass matrix formulation, 26, 34, 44, 59
master degrees of freedom
selection of, 320
master DOF (MDOF), 320, 520
master DOFs
definition of, 35
creep, 98
viscoelastic, 915
material model
combinations, 835
material model interface, 12
material models
shape memory alloy, 831
material nonlinearities, 82, 88
material properties, 143
fatigue, 132
nonlinear, 88
material-dependent damping, 536
matrix reduction, 319
theory of, 320
maximum strain failure criterion, 125
maximum stress failure criterion, 125
MDOF, 35
memory saving
when generating stiffness matrix, 850
meshing
a line for a section, 154
p-element, 144
metal forming, 833
midside nodes
p-element, 144
MINREF [CNVTOL], 851
modal analysis, 31
applying loads, 35
mode-extraction methods, 33, 316
Index5
Index
options for, 34
prestressed, 315
prestressed, large deflection, 315
procedure, 31
modal damping, 536, 63
modal solution
obtaining, 513
mode combination methods, 66
mode extraction methods
QR Damped, 63
mode numbers, 27
mode superposition
mode-extraction methods, 425
mode superposition method, 43, 52
mode superposition transient dynamic analysis
obtain the modal solution, 513
obtain the mode superposition transient solution,
514
mode-extraction methods, 33, 316
Block Lanczos, 33, 317, 425
damped, 33, 318
power dynamics, 33, 318
QR Damped, 33, 319, 425, 425, 513, 514
reduced, 33, 318
subspace, 33, 318
unsymmetric, 33, 318
mode-frequency analysis, 31
model geometry
defining, 144
modeling the crack region, 111
modes
expanding, 38
number of, 38
number to expand, 34
number to extract, 34
Mohr-Coulomb, 810
MONITOR command
changes from SOLCONTROL, 856
Mooney-Rivlin constants, 821
MPRS analysis, 625
multi-point response spectrum, 61
multilinear elastic, 88
multilinear elasticity, 816
multilinear isotropic hardening, 810
multilinear kinematic hardening, 810
N
natural frequencies, 310
Newton-Raphson, 82
Index6
Newton-Raphson option, 26
Newton-Raphson options, 854
nodal coordinate systems
p-method, 147
nodal forces and moments, 211
nodal solution listing format, 421
nonlinear analysis
tips and guidelines, 864
nonlinear behavior
causes, 81
nonlinear diagnostics, 865
nonlinear general beam sections, 159
nonlinear isotropic hardening, 810
nonlinear kinematic hardening, 810
nonlinear material properties
nonlinear structural analysis
buckling, 72
conservative vs. nonconservative, 85
creep, 829
geometric nonlinearities, 86
interpolation of results, 857
levels of operation, 82
load directions, 86
material nonlinearities, 88
nonlinear elements, 863
overview, 81
plasticity, 89
sample transient input, 862
swelling, 834
termination, 860
verifying results, 870
viscoelasticity, 833
viscoplasticity, 833
nonlinear transient analysis
procedure, 860
number of eigenvalues to be extracted, 75
number of harmonic solutions, 49
number of integration points per layer, 123
number of solutions to expand, 421
O
offsets
for sections, 152, 161
OPNCONTROL command
changes through SOLCONTROL, 855
output, 870
database and results file, 22, 38, 410, 421,
57, 514, 524, 76, 850
Index
printed, 27, 38, 410, 421, 514, 514, 523,
524, 76, 856
output control, 410, 514, 523, 76
output controls, 37, 38, 524, 75
P
p-elements
meshing, 144
real constants, 143
p-level
error-estimation range, 142
error-estimation techniques, 142
p-method, 141
benefits of, 141
guidelines for meshing, 145
internal DOFs, 147
load step options, 147
loads, 147
meshing the model, 144
p-element subgrid, 1412
printing and plotting results, 1414
querying subgrid results, 1412, 1413
reviewing results, 1412
solving common problems, 1412
specialized displays and listings, 1414
status of elements, 147
use of solvers, 147
using, 141
viewing the element model, 145
participation factor calculations, 37, 618
Peirce model, 833
Perzyna model, 833
phase angle for expansion, 421
phase angle of harmonic loads, 45
plastic, 88
plasticity, 89, 868
anisotropic, 810
bilinear isotropic hardening, 810
bilinear kinematic hardening, 810
cast iron, 810
Drucker-Prager, 810
Hill anisotropic, 810
multilinear isotropic hardening, 810
multilinear kinematic hardening, 810
nonlinear isotropic hardening, 810
nonlinear kinematic hardening, 810
rate-dependent, 833
plastics, 833
PLNSOL command
plotting
sections, 152, 161

POST1, 211, 411, 423, 427, 511, 525, 68, 622,
77, 857, 115, 132
using, 412, 512
POST26, 211, 411, 421, 423, 427, 511, 523, 525,
623, 857
using, 411, 511
postprocessing
fatigue, 131
for different analysis (see reviewing results)
power dynamics method, 33, 318
power spectral density (PSD), 62
predictor, 853
predictor-corrector option, 24, 853
preintegrated general shell sections, 165
PRESOL command
pressure loads
in a large-deflection analysis, 86
prestress effects calculation, 26, 34, 74
prestressed analysis
mode superposition harmonic response, 429
transient, 532
prestressed full transient dynamic analysis
procedure, 532
prestressed harmonic response analysis
procedure, 428
prestressed modal analysis, 315
prestressed modal analysis of a large deflection, 315
prestressed mode superposition harmonic response
analysis
procedure, 429
prestressed mode superposition transient dynamic
analysis
procedure, 533
prestressed reduced transient dynamic analysis
procedure, 533
printed output, 27, 410, 421, 514, 514, 523,
524, 76, 856
printing and plotting node and element results
p-method, 1414
PRNSOL command
probabilistic analysis, 62
program-selected masters, 322
proportional limit, 89
PSD analysis, 618
PSD type, 618
PSD-versus-frequency table, 618
Index7
Index
Q
QR Damped extraction method
harmonic analysis, 425
QR Damped method
gap conditions, 514
harmonic analysis, 425
modal analysis, 33, 319
transient analysis, 513, 514
R
ramped loads, 49, 57, 514, 523, 860
random vibrations, 618
and power spectral density, 62
range counting, 139
ratcheting effect, 810
rate-dependent plasticity , 833
ratio
creep, 855
Rayleigh damping constants, 536
reaction forces and moments, 211
reading
user-defined mesh, 152
real constants
for layered elements, 123
reduced (Householder) method, 33
reduced analysis (see matrix reduction)
reduced harmonic response analysis
expand the solution, 421
reduced method, 318, 42, 53
reduced transient dynamic analysis
expansion pass, 524
load step options, 521
obtain the reduced solution, 519
review results of expanded solution, 525
reference temperature, 27
relative stress distributions
response PSD
calculating, 623
response spectrum
multi-point, 61
single-point, 61
type, 63
restart control, 24
restarts, 863
results
data from a PSD analysis, 622
extrapolation of, 27, 410, 421, 524, 856
results file output, 22, 38, 410, 421, 57, 514,
524, 76, 850
reviewing results
Index8
fatigue, 139
full method, 411
reduced method, 421
modal analysis, 310
nonlinear static structural, 857
nonlinear transient structural, 862
reduced harmonic analysis, 423
spectrum analysis, 68, 622
PSD, 622
single-point, 68
static structural analysis, 210
transient dynamic analysis, 511, 518, 523
full method, 511
reduced method, 523
Rice's model, 810
rock, 810
rolling, 833
rubber, 817
S
sample buckling analysis
command method, 712
GUI method, 78
sample harmonic response analysis
command method, 418
GUI method, 413
sample input
fatigue, 139
full transient dynamic analysis, 512
harmonic response analysis, 423, 427
reduced method, 423
mode superposition transient analysis, 518
nonlinear structural, 862
transient, 862
PSD, 624
sample modal analysis
command method, 313
GUI method, 312
sample nonlinear analysis
command method, 879
GUI method, 872
sample p-method analysis
command method, 1418
GUI method, 1414
Index
sample spectrum analysis
command method, 616
GUI method, 610
sample static analysis
command method, 224
GUI method, 213
sample transient dynamic analysis
command method, 531
GUI method, 526
sandwich structures, 124
scaling the load vector, 425
.SECT file, 156
sections, 151, 161
associating subtypes with IDs, 152, 161
creating, 152, 155, 161
beam tool, 155
defining dimensions, 152, 161
geometry data of, 153, 162
libraries of, 1512, 165
meshing a line for, 154
solid, 153
thin wall, 153
shakedown effect, 810
shape memory alloy, 831
SHELL command
shells, 161
preintegrated general sections, 165
shift point for eigenvalue calculation, 75
significant modes
expanding, 66
single solution to expand, 524
single-point response spectrum, 61
acceleration response, 66
CQC mode combination method, 66
displacement response, 66
DSUM mode combination method, 66
expanding significant modes, 66
GRP mode combination method, 66
mode combination methods, 66
NRLSUM mode combination method, 66
procedure, 62
SRSS mode combination method, 66
velocity response, 66
single-point spectrum analysis
load step option for, 63
singular elements, 111
slave DOF, 320
small deflection, 86
small strain analyses, 86
S-N curve, 132
soil, 810
solid sections, 153

solution
obtain the mode superposition transient solution,
514
solution controls, 848
solution controls dialog box
full transient analysis, 56, 56, 56
defining analysis type and options, 56
static analysis, 22
solution listing format, 44
solution method
solution methods, 42, 52
full, 42, 52
mode superposition, 43, 52
reduced, 42, 53
solution termination, 25
solutions to be expanded, 524
solver, memory saving option, 850
solvers
equation, 24, 850, 147
sparse direct solver, 44
specifying a p-level range, 142
specifying mesh controls, 144
spectral-value-versus-frequency curve, 63
spectrum, 61
spectrum analysis, 536, 61, 61
DDAM, 625
multi-point, 625
PSD, 618, 624
procedure, 618
sample input, 624
random vibration (PSD), 618
obtain the spectrum solution, 618
single-point, 62
procedure, 62
single-point response, 63, 63, 66
expand the modes, 66
obtain the spectrum solution, 63
spectrum data, 618
spectrum solution
random vibration (PSD) analysis, 618
spectrum type
single-point response, 63
spin softening, 88
stability analysis, 71
static solution
static structural analysis, 21
Index9
Index
loading, 28
procedure, 21
stepped loads, 49, 57, 514, 523, 860
stiffness matrix
memory saving option, 850
strain
creep, 829
strain energy, 116
strain rate
creep, 829
strain rate effect, 24
stress calculations, 38, 421
stress concentration factors, 132
stress intensity factors, 111, 115
stress pass (see expansion pass)
stress relaxation, 829
stress singularities
accounting for in p-method, 147
PEXCLUDE command, 147
PINCLUDE command, 147
stress stiffening, 87
stress stiffening effects, 25, 532, 854
structural analyses
buckling, 71
fatigue, 131
modal, 31
nonlinear, 81
spectrum, 61
static, 21
transient dynamic, 51
structural analysis, 11
element types, 12
nonlinear, 81
structural energy error estimation, 211
STURM number, 37
subgrid results, 1413
subspace method, 33, 318
substeps, 82, 85, 850
swelling, 88, 834
swelling subroutine, 834
T
TABLE array parameters, 28
tabular listings, 211, 312, 412, 68, 857
tapered beams, 158
termination
solution, 25
thin wall sections, 153
time, 523, 532
arc-length, 868
time integration effects, 57, 532, 860, 860
Index10
time step optimization

thermal, 855
time steps, 82, 85, 86, 850
automatic, 22, 57, 535, 72, 851
number of, 22, 57, 867, 868
size of, 22, 57, 867
TOLER [CNVTOL], 851
full method, 53
procedure, 53
load step options for, 510
procedure, 513
preparing for, 51
prestressed, 532
reduced method, 519, 519
procedure, 519
reduced solution, 519
transient integration parameters, 57, 514, 522, 860
true strain, 87
true stress, 87, 87
Tsai-Wu failure criterion, 125
U
unsymmetric method, 33, 318
user defined material, 816
user mesh files, 1512
USERSW, 834
V
vector displays, 211, 68
vector norms, 851
vector plots, 412
vibration analysis, 31
virtual crack extension method, 118
viscoelastic
viscoelasticity, 88, 833
element types, 833
viscoplasticity, 88, 833, 833
element types, 833
large strain, 833
Voce hardening law, 810
W
wave propagation effects, 533
writing
user mesh, 152
Y
yield point, 89

Ansys Structural Analysis Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ansys Structural Analysis Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS Structural

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

Copyright and Trademark Information

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses

1.2. Types of Structural Analysis

Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses

1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses

Table 1.1 Structural Element Types

LINK1, LINK8, LINK10, LINK180

BEAM3, BEAM4, BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, BEAM54, BEAM188, BEAM189

PIPE16, PIPE17, PIPE18, PIPE20, PIPE59, PIPE60

PLANE2, PLANE25, PLANE42, HYPER56, HYPER74, PLANE82, PLANE83, HYPER84, VISCO88,

SOLID45, SOLID46, HYPER58, SOLID64, SOLID65, HYPER86, VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95,

SHELL28, SHELL41, SHELL43, SHELL51, SHELL61, SHELL63, SHELL91, SHELL93, SHELL99,

INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195

CONTAC12, CONTAC52, TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173,

SOLID5, PLANE13, FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID38, SOLID62, FLUID79, FLUID80, FLUID81,

COMBIN7, LINK11, COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, COMBIN37, COMBIN39, COMBIN40,

LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167,

1.4. Material Model Interface

1.5. Types of Solution Methods

Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis

Externally applied forces and pressures

Steady-state inertial forces (such as gravity or rotational velocity)

Imposed (nonzero) displacements

Temperatures (for thermal strain)

Fluences (for nuclear swelling)

2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses

2.3. Performing a Static Analysis

Section 2.3.1: Build the Model

Section 2.3.2: Set Solution Controls

Section 2.3.3: Set Additional Solution Options

Section 2.3.4: Apply the Loads

Section 2.3.5: Solve the Analysis

Section 2.3.6: Review the Results

2.3.1. Build the Model

2.3.1.1. Points to Remember

Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis

You can use both linear and nonlinear structural elements.

Note the following information about mesh density:

2.3.2. Set Solution Controls

2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

2.3.2.2. Using the Basic Tab

Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis

Table 2.1 Basic Tab Options

For more information on this option, see:

Section 1.2.6.1: Defining the Analysis Type and Analysis Options